Yard Machines Y60 Operating instructions

TM 10-3930-647-14&P
TECHNICAL MANUAL
OPERATOR’S, ORGANIZATIONAL,
DIRECT SUPPORT AND
GENERAL SUPPORT
MAINTENANCE MANUAL
(INCLUDING REPAIR
PARTS INFORMATION
AND SUPPLEMENTAL
MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTIONS)
FOR
TRUCK, FORKLIFT, GASOLINE
ENGINE DRIVEN, PNEUMATIC
TIRES, 4000-LB CAPACITY,
144-IN LIFT HEIGHT
CLARK MODEL C500Y45, MHE 243
NSN 3930-01-085-3767
HEADQUARTERS, DEPARTMENT OF THE ARMY
OCTOBER 1981
WARNING
It is not recommended that tires with breaks be used again.
WARNING
I n a l l c a s e s , when removing tires with split rims from the machine for
repair or periodic rotation, completely deflate tires.
This is accomplished
by removing the valve core.
WARNING
I n a l l c a s e s , when removing tires equipped with the lock ring type rim from
the machine for repair or periodic rotation, completely deflate tires.
This
is accomplished by removing the valve core.
WARNING
When repairing tires used on machines that employthe lock ring type rim, use
caution when inflating tire.
If lock ring is not located properly, it is
possible for it to pop off rim with great force when tire is inflated and
could result in serious injury.
WARNING
After raising machine and before making any adjustments or adjustment checks,
place adequate (heavy) blocking (sufficient to support the weight of the
machine) under the frame, not under the counterweight, to prevent accidental
lowering or falling of the vehicle, thus preventing personal injury to
mechanic or bystanders.
WARNING
Keep clear of load and carriage when making adjustments to avoid injury if
any malfunction should occur and cause load or carriage to fall.
WARNING
Support carriage by running chain through lower carriage bar and wrapping
chain around the lift cylinder just above the chain anchor bracket. Chain
should contact cylinder barrel, not the push rod.
WARNING
Dry ice is a solid with an extreme low temperature. Contact with the skin
will cause serious freezing.
Use gloves and forceps or bent wire to remove
metal parts.
Never touch metal that has been in dry ice until temperature
has risen above the freezing point.
WARN ING
Upright assembly weighs approximately 750 pounds; use due safety precautions
when removing or installing upright assembly.
WARNING
Counterweight weighs approximately one ton; use due safety precautions when
removing or installing the counterweight.
WARNING
Dry cleaning solvent, used to clean parts is potentially dangerous to personnel
and property.
Do not use near open flame or excessive heat. Flash point of
this solvent is 138°F.
a
WARNING
Do not smoke, weld, or employ any open flame near the battery, as an
explosive gas is produced by the battery during its operation.
WARNING
Never drive the truck in open area of the warehouse or storage yard without
the guard in place over the operator's compartment. There is no periodic
maintenance other than checking for security of mounting.
WARNING
Do not operate machine for prolonged periods in a unventilated area. All
gasoline engines produce poisonous carbon monoxide gas which is extremely
toxic if allowed to accumulate in a closed area.
WARNING
A small amount of fuel spillage will result when the filter housing is
Make certain that no spark or open flame exists in the work
removed.
a
n
d
also that the engine is sufficiently cool to prevent the
area,
possibility of igniting the gasoline fumes resulting from the fuel
spillage.
WARNING
This truck is equipped with a pressurized cooling system. Use extreme care
when removing the radiator cap when the engine has recently been operating.
The sudden release of pressure from the system can cause sudden boiling of
Always loosen the cap slowly and
the coolant and a dangerous steam flash.
allow the pressure to vent off slowly before removing cap.
WARNING
Make certain that pressure bleeder tank is certified for use under pressures
exceeding 30 psi before using.
WARNING
Always relieve pressure from bleeder tank when bleeding operation is
completed.
WARNING
allow sparks or open flame in the area when checking the battery,storage
batteries produce hydrogen, an explosive gas, as a normal by-product of
operation.
Never
WARNING
Disconnect battery ground strap before performing any service on electrical
system.
WARNING
Pull damaged rims or wheels. Deflate tires prior to the removal of rims or
wheels from the vehicle.
b
WARRANTY
Any defects in material or workmanship, under normal use and service for a
period of 15 months from date of acceptance or 1500 vehicle operating hours,
whichever may occur first, should be reported to the local dealer and/or
the Government Contract Administration Section.
c/(d blank)
TM
10-3930-647-14&P
C2
HEADQUARTERS
DEPARTMENT OF THE ARM-Y
Washington D.C., 18 March 1991
CHANGE
NO. 2
OPERATOR’S, ORGANIZATIONAL, DIRECT SUPPORT
AND GENERAL SUPPORT MAINTENANCE MANUAL
(INCLUDING REPAIR PARTS INFORMATION AND SUPPLEMENTAL
MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTIONS)
TRUCK, LIFT, FORK; GASOLINE ENGINE DRIVEN,
PNEUMATIC TIRES; 4,000 LB CAPACITY, 144-INCH LIFT HEIGHT
(CLARK MODEL C500Y45, ARMY MODEL MHE-243)
NSN
3930-01-085-3767
TM 10-3930-647-14&P, 30 October 1981, is changed as follows:
1. Remove old pages and insert new pages as indicated below.
2. New or changed information is indicated by a vertical bar in the margin of the page.
Remove Pages
Insert Pages
4-52J through 4-52Q
4-52J through 4-52Q
File this change sheet in front of the publication for reference purposes.
By Order of the Secretary of the Army:
CARL E. VUONO
General, United States Army
Chief of Staff
Official:
PATRICIA P. HICKERSON
Colonel, United States Army
The Adjutant General
Distribution:
To be distributed in accordance with DA Form 12-25-E (Block 2152) Operator, Unit, Direct Support
and General Support maintenance requirements for TM10-3930-647-14&P.
TM 10-3930-647-14&P
C1
C HANGE
HEADQUARTERS
DEPARTMENT OF THE ARMY
Washington, D.C., 22 December 1989
No. 1
OPERATOR’S, ORGANIZATIONAL, DIRECT SUPPORT
AND GENERAL SUPPORT MAINTENANCE MANUAL
(INCLUDING REPAIR PARTS INFORMATION AND SUPPLEMENTAL
MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTIONS)
TRUCK, LIFT, FORK; GASOLINE ENGINE DRIVEN,
PNEUMATIC TIRES; 4,000 LB CAPACITY, 144-INCH LIFT HEIGHT
(CLARK MODEL C500Y45, ARMY MODEL MHE-243)
NSN 3930-01-085-3767
Current as of 1 April 1989
TM 10-3930-647-14&P, dated 30 October 1981, is changed as follows:
1.
2.
The manual title is changed to read as shown above.
Remove old pages and insert new pages.
3. New or changed material is indicated by a vertical bar in the margin of the page and by a vertical bar adjacent
to the TA number.
4.
Remove Pages
Insert Pages
“i” and ii
4-5 and 4-6
5-81 through 5-86
5-125 through 5-128
7-55 and 7-56
7-59 through 7-64
7-67 through 7-70
INDEX 1 through INDEX 4
7 and 8
B-1 and B-2
C-5 and C-6
i and ii
4-5 and 4-6
5-81 through 5-86
5-125 through 5-128
7-55 and 7-56
7-59 through 7-64
7-67 through 7-70
INDEX 1 through INDEX 4
7 and 8
B-1/(B-2 blank)
C-5 and C-6
File this change sheet in front of the publication for reference purposes.
1
By Order of the Secretary of the Army:
Distribution:
To be distributed in accordance with DA Form 12-25F (Block
Nos, 2152, 2153, 2154), Operator, Unit, and Direct Support and
General Support maintenance requirements for Fork Lift, 4000
LB Capacity, Pneumatic Tire, Gas (Model MHE 243).
2
TM 10-3930-647-14&P
TECHNICAL MANUAL
HEADQUARTERS
DEPARTMENT OF THE ARMY
Washington, D.C., 30 October 1981
NO. 10-3930-647-14&P
OPERATOR’S, ORGANIZATIONAL, DIRECT SUPPORT
AND GENERAL SUPPORT MAINTENANCE MANUAL
(INCLUDING REPAIR PARTS INFORMATION AND SUPPLEMENTAL
MAINTENANCE INSTRUCTIONS)
FOR
TRUCK, LIFT, FORK; GASOLINE ENGINE DRIVEN,
PNEUMATIC TIRES; 4,000 LB CAPACITY, 144-INCH LIFT HEIGHT
(CLARK MODEL C500Y45, ARMY MODEL MHE-243)
NSN 3930-01-085-3767
REPORTING ERRORS AND RECOMMENDING IMPROVEMENTS
You can help improve this manual. If you find any mistakes or if you know of a way to improve the
procedures, please let us know. Mail your letter, DA Form 2028 (Recommended Changes to Publications
and Blank Forms), or DA Form 2028-2, located in the back of this manual, direct to: Commander, U.S.
Army Tank-Automotive Command, ATTN: AMSTA-MB, Warren, MI 48397-5000. A reply will be
furnished to you.
This technical manual is an authentication of the manufacturer’s commercial literature and does not
conform with the format and content specified in AR 310-3, Military Publications. This technical manual
does, however, contain available information that is essential to the operation and maintenance of the
equipment.
Change 1
i
TABLE OF CONTENTS
Section
Page
I INTRODUCTION AND
DESCRIPTION. . . . . . . . . 1-1
1-32. Air Cleaner . . . . . 1-9
1-39. Alternator. . . . . .1-19
1-48. Body and Seat . . . .1-21
1-35. Carburetor. . . . . .1-10
1-30. Component Description.1-9
1-17. Counterweight . . . .1-21
1-11. Detailed Description .1-1
1-19. Drive Axle. . . . . . 1-4
1-23. Electrical System . . 1-4
1-15. Engine and Drive Line.1-1
1-13. Engine Assembly . . . 1-1
1-22. Engine Cooling System.1-4
1-25. Engine Fuel System. . 1-5
Engine Governor . . . 1-9
1-33
1-34
Engine Water Pump . . 1-9
1-27. Exhaust System. . . . 1-5
1-12. Frame . . . . . . . . 1-1
1-31. Fuel Pump . . . . . . 1-9
1-3.
General Description . 1-1
1-29. Hydraulic System. . . 1-9
1-38. Ignition Distributor
and Coil. . . . . .1-18
1-1.
Introduction. . . . . 1-1
1-44. Lift Cylinder . . . .1-20
1-51. Machine Serial Number
and Upright Deck
Number Location . .1-21
1-41. Main Hydraulic Pump .1-19
1-40. Oil Filters . . . . .1-19
1-46. Overhead Guard. . . .1-20
1-50. Parking Brake . . . .1-21
Purpose Of Equipment .1-1
1-3.
1-28. Service Brake and
Inching Control
System . . . . . . .1-6
1-24. Starter Lockout. . . .1-4
1-36. Starter Motor. . . . 1-18
1-37. Starter Solenoid . . 1-18
1-42. Steering Hydraulic
Pump . . . . . . . 1-19
1-26. Steering System . . . 1-5
1-21. System Descriptions . 1-4
1-45. Tilt Cylinder . . . .1-20
1-16. Torque Converter . . 1-1
1-18. Transmission Assembly.1-4
1-20. Upright and Carriage .1-4
1-43. Upright and Lift
Carriage . . . . . 1-19
Wheels and Tires . . 1-21
1-49
ii
Section
Page
II PREPARATION FOR USE. . . . . .2-1
General . . . . . . . .2-1
2-1.
2-10. Lubrication . . . . . .2-2
Operational Check . . .2-2
2-9.
Preliminary Inspection.2-1
2-3.
2-6.
Switches, Gages and
Lights. . . . . . . .2-2
III OPERATION . . . . . . . . . . 3-1
3-37. Battery. . . . . . . . 3-9
Instruments. . . . . 3-3
3-36. Cooling System . . . . 3-9
3-42. Cooling System . . . . 3-9
3-29. Depositing Load on a
Tiered Stack . . . . 3-6
3-30. Depositing the Load In
Storage Area . . . . 3-7
3-20. Drive Axle . . . . . . 3-1
3-27. Driving the Truck. . . 3-5
3-48. Dusty Conditions . . .3-10
3-43. Electrical System. . . 3-9
Engine . . . . . . . . 3-1
3-9.
3-40. Extreme Cold . . . . . 3-9
3-35. Extreme Heat . . . . . 3-9
3-39. Fuel System. . . . . . 3-9
3-45. Fuel System. . . . . . 3-9
General. . . . . . . . 3-1
3-1.
General.
. . . . . . . 3-1
3-4.
3-46. Humid Climates . . . .3-10
3-38. Lubrication. . . . . . 3-9
3-44. Lubrication. . . . . . 3-9
3-24. Operating Instructions.3-3
3-34. Operation Under Unusual
Conditions . . . . . 3-9
3-32. Overhead Guard
Operating. . . . . . 3-8
3-28. Picking Up the Load. . 3-6
Principles of
3-3.
Operation. . . . . . 3-1
3-33. Safety Precautions . . 3-8
3-41. Shelter. . . . . . . . 3-9
3-26. Starting the Engine. . 3-3
3-31. Stopping the Truck . . 3-7
3-13. Torque Converter and
Transmission . . . . 3-1
IV PERIODIC INSPECTION,
MAINTENANCE AND
LUBRICATION . . . . . . . . . 4-1
Air Cleaner. . . . . . 4-1
4-7.
4-34. Batt Light Load Test .4-28
T A B L E
0 F
C 0 N T E N T S (continued)
Page
Battery Maintenance . 4-27
Battery Tests . . . 4-28
Brake Adjustments . . 4-26
Brake Bleeding System.4-22
Brake Manual Bleeding.4-24
Brake Master
Cylinder Checks. . .4-21
4-17.
Brake Pedal Check
and Free Travel
Adjustment . . . .4-20
4-20.
Brake Pressure
Bleeding . . . . . .4-22
4-16.
Brake System
Maintenance. . . . .4-20
4-13.
Cooling System Drain
and Refill . . . . .4-17
4-12.
Cooling Syst Service .4-16
4-47.
Distributor Breaker
Point Alignment. . .4-36
Distributor Breaker
4-46.
Point Inspection . .4-35
4-45.
Distributor Centrifugal
Advance. . . . . . .4-34
Distributor Checks . .4-34
4-44.
Distributor Point
4-48.
Cap Adjustment . . .4-36
Distributor Point Set
4-49.
Replacement. . . . .4-37
Drive Axle Ends, Clean
4-75.
and Repack . . . . .4-55
Electrical System. . .4-27
4-31.
4-63.
Electrical Wiring,
Switches and Fuses .4-50
Engine Compression
4-40.
Check. . . . . . . .4-32
Engine Cylinder Head
4-38.
Fasteners Torque
Check. . . . . . . .4-30
Engine Intake Manifold
4-51.
Vacuum Test. . . . .4-38
Engine Lubricating
4-8.
Oil Change . . . . . 4-8
Engine Performance
4-36.
Check. . . . . . . .4-29
4-41.
Engine Spark Plug
Check. . . . . . . .4-32
Engine Tune-Up . . . .4-30
4-37.
Engine Valve Clearance
4-39.
(lash) Adjustment. .4-31
4-15A. Fan and Alternator
Belt Adjustments . .4-19
Final Idle Mixture and
4-55.
Speed Adjustment . .4-40
Section
IV 4-32.
4-33.
4-25.
4-19.
4-21.
4-18.
Section
IV 4-53.
4-54.
4-52.
4-11.
4-46.
4-66.
4-10.
4-64.
4-65.
4-43.
4-50.
4-68.
4-28.
4-30.
4-29.
4-3.
4-5.
4-42.
4-1.
4-25.
4-74.
4-73.
4-72.
4-60.
4-62.
4-61.
4-58.
4-59.
Page
Fuel Initial Idle
Mixture Adjustment.4-39
Fuel Initial Idle Speed
Adjustment. . . . .4-40
Fuel Mixture and Idle
Speed Adjustment. .4-39
Fuel System Service .4-16
Governor and Linkage
Adjustments . . . .4-41
Hydraulic Circuit Flow
Test. . . . . . . .4-50
Hydraulic System. . .4-11
Hydraulic System
Checks. . . . . . .4-50
Hydraulic System
Pressure Check. . .4-50
Ignition Coil Checks.4-34
Ignition Timing
Adjustment. . . . .4-37
Neutral Start Switch
Adjustment. . . . .4-52H
Parking Brake Check
and Adjustment. . .4-26
Parking Brake Major
Adjustment. . . . .4-26
Parking Brake Minor
Adjustment. . . . .4-26
Periodic Inspection . 4-1
Periodic Service and
Lubrication . . . . 4-1
Spark Plug Wiring
Replacement . . . .4-34
Special Tools . . . . 4-1
Starting Charging
System Tests. . . .4-29
Steer #eel
Adjustment. . . . .4-55
Steer Wheel Bearings,
Clean, Repack and
Adjust. . . . . . .4-53
Steer Wheels and
Wheel Bearings. . .4-53
Steering Gear
Adjustments . . . .4-48
Steering Gear Lash
Adjustments . . . .4-49
Steering Gear Thrust
Adjustment. . . . .4-49
Steering System
Adjustment Check. .4-41
Steering System
Adjustments . . . .4-43
iii
T A B L E
Section
IV 4-57.
4-14.
4-67.
4-70.
4-71.
4-9.
4-69.
4-67.
4-68.
4-15.
0 F
C 0 N T E N T S (continued)
Page
Steering System
Maintenance. . . .4-41
Thermostat Test and
Replacement. . . .4-18
Transmission Checks.4-52
Transmission Fluid
Aeration Check . 4-52G
Transmission Fluid
Leakage Checks . 4-52G
Trans Power Steering
Hydraulic System . 4-9
Transmission Pressure
Tests. . . . . . 4-52B
Transmission Shift
Linkage. . . . . .4-51
Transmission Stall
Test . . . . . . .4-52
Trouble Shooting . .4-67
Viscous Fan. . . . .4-19
Section
v 5-41.
5-44.
5-46.
5-45.
5-27.
5-35.
5-48.
5-43.
5-47.
5-52.
V R E P A I R . . . . . . . . . . . .5-1
Alternator.
.
.
.
.
5-50
5-63.
5-66.
Alternator Bushing
Replacement . . .5-50D
5-68.
Alternator Circuit
Resistance Check.5-S0D
5-66.
Alternator Cleaning,
Inspection and
Test of Parts. . 5-50A
5-66.
Alternator Output
Test . . . . . . 5-50E
Alternator Reassembly
5-67.
and Testing. . . 5-50D
5-66.
Alternator
Regulator. . . . 5-50C
5-62.
Alternator Trouble
Shooting . . . . 5-49A
Auxiliary Valve. . 5-202
5-165.
Brake Removal and
5-99.
Disassembly. . . 5-81
5-98.
Brake Repairs. . . 5-81
Carburetor
.
.
.
.
5-53
5-77.
C
a
r
r
i
a
g
e
A
s
s
e
m
b
l
y
.
5
-99
5-139.
Counterweight. . . 5-194
5-155.
5-88.
Drive Axle Adaptor
and Differential. 5-63
Drive Axle End
5-87.
Reassembly. . . . 5-62
5-86.
Drive Axle End Removal
Disassembly . . . 5-60
Engine. . . . . . . 5-13
5-23.
Eng Balancer Assem. 5-41
5-51.
iv
5-50.
5-49.
5-42.
5-25.
5-34.
5-40.
5-33.
5-31.
5-32.
5-36.
5-170
5-18.
5-16.
5-42A.
5-83.
5-1.
Page
Engine Camshaft and
Timing Gears
Installation. . . . 5-31
Engine Connecting Rod
Bearing Replacement.5-38
Engine Crankshaft End
Play Check. . . . . 5-39
Engine Crankshaft
Installation. . . . 5-38
Engine Cylinder Head. 5-16
Engine Cylinder Head
Reassembly and
Installation. . . . 5-25
Engine Cylinder Sleeve
Installation. . . . 5-41
Engine Fitting New
Piston Rings. . . . 5-37
Engine Flywheel
Runout Check. . . . 5-40
Engine Oil Pan
Installation. . . . 5-44
Engine Oil Pump
Assembly. . . . . . 5-41
Engine Piston and
Connecting Rod
Installation. . . . 5-41
Engine Pistons,
Connecting Rods and
Crankshaft Removal. 5-33
Engine Removal. . . . 5-13
Engine Rocker Arm
Disassembly and
Repair. . . . . . . 5-25
Engine Timing Gears and
Camshaft Removal. . 5-28
Engine Valve Grinding
(Refacing).
.
.
.
.
5-24
Engine Valve Guide
Replacement . . . . 5-21
Engine Valve Seat
Refacing and
Replacement . . . . 5-23
Engine Water Pump
Removal . . . . . . 5-26
Exhaust System. . . .5-205
Filler Metals . . . . .5-6
Fire Protection . . . .5-6
Flywheel Ring Gear
Removal . . . . . .5-34A
Fuel Pump Repair. . . 5-60
General . . . . . . . .5-1
T A B L E
Section
V
5-7.
5-4.
5-3.
5-5.
5-2.
5-6.
5-174.
5-122.
5-129.
5-70.
5-22.
5-21.
5-178.
5-147.
5-102.
5-93.
5-94.
5-14.
5-19.
5-158.
5-8.
5-15.
5-180.
5-161.
5-53.
5-46.
5-59.
5-60.
5-58.
5-57.
5-61.
5-183.
5-110.
5-106.
5-117.
5-113.
5-133.
5-127.
5-84.
5-92.
O F
C O N T E N T S
Page
General Assembly. . . 5-4
General Cleaning. . . 5-1
General Disassembly . 5-1
General Inspection. . 5-2
General Removal
Instructions. . . . 5-1
General Repairs . . . 5-3
Governor. . . . . . 5-205
Hydraulic Pump. . . 5-91D
Hydraulic Valve . . .5-94
Ignition Distributor.5-51
Indemnity . . . . . .5-11
Inspection.
.
.
.
.
.5-11
Instrument Panel
Gauges. . . . . . 5-208
Lift Cyl & Upright. 5-102
Master Cyl Assembly. 5-83
Parking Brake
Disassembly . . . 5-80F
Parking Brake
Reassembly. . . . 5-80F
Preinspection . . . . 5-5
Preparation . . . . . 5-8
Radiator. . . . . . 5-195
Repair Welding. . . . 5-5
Safety. . . . . . . . 5-6
Seat. . . . . . . . 5-205
Side Shift Cylinder.5-198
Starter . . . . . . .5-44
Starter Armature
Tests . . . . . . .5-45
Starter Brush
Replacement . . . .5-48
Starter Checking Brush
Spring Pressure . .5-48
Starter Commutator
Repair. . . . . . .5-47
Starter Field
Coil Test . . . . .5-47
Starter Reassembly
and Installation. .5-48
Steer Axle. . . . . 5-110
Steering Cylinder . .5-87
Steering Gear . . . .5-85
Steering Pump . . . 5-91A
Steering Valve. . . .5-88
Tilt Cylinder . . . .5-96
Tilt Lock Valve . . 5-93A
Transmission and
Drive
Axle.
.
.
.
.5-60
Transmission Clutch
Pack Disassembly. .5-80
( c o n t i n u e d )
Page
Section
v 5-95.
5-96.
5-92.
5-95.
5-154.
5-37.
5-20.
Transmission Clutch
Pack Reassembly. .
Transmission Control
Valve . . . . . .
Trans Disassembly .
Trans Reassembly. .
Upright . . . . . .
Ventilation
.
.
.
.
Welding . . . . . .
VII ILLUSTRATED PARTS
BREAKDOWN INDEX.
.
.
.
.
5-80A
5-80AL
. 5-69
.5-80G
.5-113
.
.5-6
. 5-10
.
.7-1
LIST OF TABLES
Table 1.
Table 2.
Table 3.
Table 4.
Table 5.
Specifications. . . . 1-2
Special Tools for
Inspection and
Maintenance . . . . 4-1
Preventive Maintenance
Inspection.
.
.
.
.
4-2
Troubleshooting
Guide . . . . . . .4-67
Engine Wear Limits
and Service
Specifications. . .5-14
v
SPECIFICATION
ENGINE:
MANUFACTURER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . WAUKESHA
MODEL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
D176G
TYPE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . OVERHEAD VALVE
SERIES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
CLARK
HORSE POWER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..52 @ 2350
CARBURETOR:
MANUFACTURER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . MARVEL-SCHEBLUR
MODEL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
GLE-44
ALTERNATOR :
MANUFACTURER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
DELCO
TYPE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 VOLTS, NEG. GROUND
STARTER :
MANUFACTURER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . DELCO-REMY
TYPE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 12 VOLTS-25 AMPERE
TRANSMISSION:
MANUFACTURER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CLARK
MODEL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . H200D2
HYDRAULIC
TYPE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
SERIES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
HYDRATORK
RATED CAPACITY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 16 QUARTS
AXLE END ASSY. (FRONT)
MANUFACTURER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CLARK
MODEL . . . . . . . . . 120951 R.H. - 120952 L.H.
TYPE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PLANETARY
CLUTCH
......................
NOT APPLICABLE
RADIATOR:
MANUFACTURER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
CLARK
MODEL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2326454
PRESSURE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
7 LBS
RATED CAPACITY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10 QUARTS
MASTER CYLINDER:
MANUFACTURER
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . WAGNER
TYPE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . SINGLE STAGE HORIZ.
WHEEL CYLINDER:
MANUFACTURER
....................
WAGNER
POWER STEERING PUMP:
MANUFACTURER . . . . . . . . . . . . . PARKER-HANNIFIN
SERIES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
H-25
TYPE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
GEAR
1750
PRESSURE RELIEF VALVE SETTING . . . . . .
RATED CAPACITY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 2.5 GPM
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . @ 750 TO 2350 ENGINE R.P.M.
vi
POWER STEERING CYLINDER:
MANUFACTURER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CLARK
MODEL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ... . . . 180040
STEERING GEAR ASSEMBLY:
MANUFACTURER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . SAGINAW
MODEL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 525-D-267
TYPE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . RECIRCULATING BALL
BATTERY:
MANUFACTURER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . DELCO
MODEL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 3EMT70-D
RATED CAPACITY . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 46 AMP HOUR
TIRES, FRONT DRIVE:
MODEL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7:00 x 12-12 PLY
TYPE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PNEUMATIC
TIRES, REAR STEER:
MODEL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6:50 X 10-10 PLY
TYPE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PNEUMATIC
HYDRAULIC PUMP:
MANUFACTURER . . . . . . . . . . . . PARKER-HANNIFIN
MODEL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . M07AB2J
TYPE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
GEAR
PRESSURE .....2000 P.S.I. 11 CPM 1450 RPM
CYLINDER, TILT:
MANUFACTURER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . CLARK
MODEL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1791918
TYPE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . DOUBLE ACTING
PRESSURE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2000 P.S.I.
POWER BRAKE ASSEMBLY . . . . . . . . . NOT APPLICABLE
LIFT CYLINDER:
MANUFACTURER . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
CLARK
MODEL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2355448
TYPE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . TELESCOPIC
PRESSURE . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2000 LB
Figure
1-1.
ForkliftTruck, C500-Y45
vii
Engineering
Standards
DATA SHEET 36
PAGE 1 OF 2
TIGHTENING TORQUE VALUES FOR STEEL THREADED FASTENERS
The following torque values are for use in general applications and where torque values are not otherwise
specified. They are not limited to parts covered by the reference Clark standards, which are examples only,
but apply to all steel screw threaded fasteners having the same strength levels and coated as specified
herein.
COARSE
AND
FINE
TREADED
FASTENERS
CAP
SCREW,
BOLT
AND
NUT
CAP
SCREW,
BOLT
AND
NUT
SOCKET
HEAD
CAP
SCREW
12 POINT
HEAD
CAP
SCREW
CAP
SCREW,
BOLT
AND
NUT
CAP
SCREW,
BOLT
AND
NUT
SOCKET
HEAD
CAP
SCREW
12 POINT
HEAD
CAP
SCREW
REF
CLARK
STDS
TENSILE
(NUT PROOF)
STRENGTHS,
PSI
[MPa],
MINIMUM
1C-2C
120 000
15C-16C
[825]
610-62D
SAE GRADE 5
17C-18C
150 000
23C-24C
63D-640
I
[1030]
SAE GRADE 8
SCREW OR BOLT NOMINAL THREAD SIZE, INCH
0.250
0.3125
0.375
0.4375
0.500
0.5625
0.625
0.750
0.875
TIGHTENING TORQUE, LB,FT, MAXIMUM * LB.IN
[N-m] MINIMUM
[N-ml
90 *
[10]
200 *
[23]
28
[38]
45
[61]
70
[95]
100
[135]
140
[190]
245
[330]
360
[490]
80
[9]
180
[21]
25
[34]
40
[54]
65
[88]
[l70]
125
[170]
220
[300]
330
[450]
120 *
[14]
240 *
[27]
40
65
[ 5 4 ] [ 8 8 ]
100
[135]
140
[190]
190
[260]
330
[450]
525
[710]
110
[13]
215
[24]
60
35
[ 4 8 ] [ 8 2 ]
90
[125]
125
[170]
175
[240]
300
[410]
475
[645]
145 *
[16]
50
300 *
[ 6 8 ]
[34]
75
[102]
120
[160]
165
[225]
230
[310]
400
[540]
650
[880]
130
[15]
270
[31]
45
[61]
70
[95]
110
[150]
150
[205]
210
[285]
360
[490]
600
[815]
1.000
1.125
1.250
1.375
1.500
1.625
1.750
1.875
2.000
525
[710]
720
[975]
1000
[1360]
1350
[1830]
1650
[2240]
2200
[2980]
2750
[3730]
3500
[4750]
4200
[5700]
475
[645]
650
[880]
900
[1220]
1200
[1630]
1500
(2040]
2000
[2720]
2500
[3390]
3150
[4270]
3800
[5150]
800
[1085]
1175
[1600]
1625
[2200]
2200
[2980]
2850
[3870]
3800
[5150]
4800
[6500]
6100
[8300]
7200
[9800]
25C-26C
73G-74G
160 000
[1100]
93G-94G
1C-2C
105 000
15C-16C
[725]
61D-62D
SAE GRADE 5
17C-18C
150 000
23C-24C
[1030]
63D-64D
SAE GRADE 8
725
[985]
-
1050
[1425]
1475
[2000]
2000
[2720]
2600
[3530]
3450
[4680]
4300
[5830]
5500
[7450]
6500
[8800]
160 000
1000
[1360]
1450
[1970]
2000
[2720]
2700
[3660]
3450
[4680]
4600
[6240]
5700
[7730]
7200
[9800]
8600
[11 700]
900
[1220]
1300
[1770]
1850
[2510]
2450
[3330]
3150
[4270]
4150
[5630]
5100
[6920]
6500
[8800]
7800
[10 600]
25C-26C
73G-74G
93G-94G
[1100]
NOTES:
1. Torque values shown represent results of extensive laboratory testing, field experience and study of
accumulated supplier data on various types of cap screws coated with zinc phosphate and oil in accordance
with Clark Protective Treatment specification H and used with hardened plain or H coated washers, such as
covered by Clark standard 27E.
viii
Engineering
Standards
2. All torque values
nearest multiple
(N.m) units are
torque wrenches
DATA SHEET 36
PAGE 2
shown in customary (LB.FT) units represent values as described in NOTE 1 rounded to the
of 5 or, in some cases, to the nearest whole number. All torque values shown in metric
rounded conversions that are estimated to be practical for the increments involved in
calibrated in newton-metre units.
3. The torque values listed develop clamping forces that are based on material proof loads specified in SAE
Standard J429 in conjunction with the coefficient of friction value found to be characteristic of the H
coating. For Grades 5 and 8 cap screws, the clamping forces developed are 85+5% and 75+5% of proof loads
for coarse and fine threads respectively. For socket head and 12 point cap screws,the clamping forces
developed are 100+5% and 90+5% of proof loads for coarse and fine threads respectively.
4. The same torque values apply to both coarse and fine threaded fasteners as a result of the clamping
forces being approximately equal when calculated in accordance with NOTE 3. To illustrate, the proof
loads for Grade 8 fasteners with .750-10 and .750-16 threads are 40 100 and 44 800 lb respectively. The
clamping forces, determined by multiplying these proof loads by 0.85 and 0.75 respectively, are 34 100 lb
and 33 600 lb, which for all practical purposes are considered equal.
5. The torque values given apply while the fastener is being turned. After a joint is tightened, it may be
checked by trying to tighten it further, recognizing that the torque required to start further motion
will be about 10% higher than the specified value.
ix
1-1.
INTRODUCTION
1-2. This manual provides operation, maintenance, and repair instructions for the
Model C500-Y45 Fork, Lift Truck, manufactured
by Clark Equipment Company, Industrial Truck
Division, Battle Creek, Michigan 49016.
1-3.
PURPOSE OF EQUIPMENT
1-4. The fork lift truck (herinafter referred
to as the truck) is designed for use in warehousing, storage, and shipping operations;
and is used for lifting, loading, stacking,
and moving cargo pallets, crates, boxes, and
packaged materials.
1-5.
GENERAL DESCRIPTION
1-6. The truck (See Figure l-l) is a gasoline
engine driven vehicle, designed for high
maneuverability and ease of operation in confined areas. The truck is outfitted with a
two-speed automatic transmission with HI
& LO range shift, pneumatic rubber tires,
power steering, and hydraulic brakes.
1-7. The truck will operate efficiently on
well surfaced gravel yards or on sol id floors,
runways, etc. Top speed approximately 12
MPH empty.
1-8. Maximum load capacity is 4000 pounds,
with the load center of gravity at 24 inches
from the heel of the forks. The maximum
fork height (loaded) is 149 inches. Refer
to Figure l-l for detailed specifications.
1-9. The truck is powered by gasoline
engine, which provides power to the drive
wheels through a two speed forward and
reverse automatic transmission and torque
converter. The transmission, torque converter, axle differential and axle end
adapters are assembled together and mounted
directly to the engine, forming a rigid,
unitized drive line.
1-10. Carriage lift and tilt functions are
accomplished by hydraulic cylinders. Act ion
of the lift and tilt cylinders is controlled
by valves which are manually operated through
levers on the instrumnet panel. Hydraulic
fluid pressure for Cylinder operation is
provided by a hydraulic pump mounted on the
engine, and gear driven from the engine.
1-11.
DETAILED DESCRIPTION
1-12. FRAME. The truck frame is of unitized
welded construct ion, and incorporates the body,
the fuel tank, the hydraulic fluid reservoir,
and provides the mounting facilities for the
engine and drive line, the steering axle, and
the upright and carriage assembly.
l-13.
ENGINE ASSEMBLY. The engine assembly
consists of the basic engine and its associated accessories, which comprise the fuel
system, cooling system, ignition system, and
exhaust system.
NOTE
Throughout this manual the terms right, left,
‘Front, and rear, with respect to the engine
and truck, indicate directions from the viewpoint of the operator when sitting in the seat
of the truck.
1-14. The engine is an in-line, four cylinder,
liquid-cooled, gasoline engine which developes
52 horsepower at 2350 RPM. Accessories mounted
to the engine and normally considered a part
of the complete engine, are the alternator,
starting motor, distributor, coil, fuel pump,
governor, coolant fan, water pump and thermostat.
ENGINE AND DRIVE LINE. The engine
1-15.
assembly complete with mounts, radiator and
hose, and accessories used in conjunction
with the torque converter, automatic transmission, and drive axle assembly from an
integrated unit referred to as the “engine
and unitized drive line.”
1-16. TORQUE CONVERTER. The purpose of the
torque converter is to multiply the torque
or twisting force of the engine to the transmiss ion. The amount of load or aresistance
applied to the output shaft of the torque
converter determines the extent to which engine
input torque is multiplied. There is no multiplication of torque when the load can be moved
with the amount of torque being produced by
the engine.
1-1
TABLE 1.
GENERAL :
Vehicle Model
....................
C500-Y45
Machine Weights:
Drive:
Empty . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4218 LBS.
Loaded . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10928 LBS.
Service
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8668 LBS.
Overall length with forks . . . . . . 139.41 inches
Overall length without forks . . . 97.41 inches
Overall width . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 45.38 inches
83 inches
Overall height . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Tread, drive tires . . . . . . . . . . . . . 37.75 inches
34.00 inches
Tread, steer tires . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Basic aisle for right angle stacking
(Add length of load) . . . . . . . . 104.41 inches
86.28 inches
Turning radius, outside . . . . . . . .
7.88 inches
Turning radius, inside . . . . . . . . .
Ground clearance
Under Counterweight . . . . . . . . .
6.88 inches
Under rear axle . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6.38 inches
Under front axle . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.38 inches
Under upright . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
5.12 inches
Between Frame . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
6.00 inches
Grade Clearance . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
59%
Draw bar pull (loaded) . . . . . . . . .
3870 LBS.
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . at 12 inch coupler height
Travel speeds :
Loaded . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Empty . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Gradeability: Low Forward
Loaded: Maximum . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Empty . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Lifting & Lowering Speeds:
Lift:
Loaded . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Empty . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Lower :
Loaded . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Empty . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
12.3 MPH
12.4 MPH
30.7%
21.8%
84 FPM
91 FPM
72 FPH
77 FPM
ENGINE:
Model . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
CLARK
Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Overhead Valve
Number of cylinders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4
Bore . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3.625
Stroke . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
4.25
Displacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176 Cu. In.
Governed speed (no load) . . . . . . . .
2350 RPM
Bare engine HP at governed RPM . .
52
Maximum torque . . . . . . . .
135 ft/lb @ 1200 RPM
Firing order . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1-2-4-3
Governed speed (Loaded) . . . . . . . . .
2200 RPM
1-2
SPECIFICATIONS
Crankcase capacity:
With filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 5 quarts
Without filter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4 quarts
Lubrication system . . . . . . . Pressure lubricated
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . by submerged gear-type pump
FUEL TANK CAPACITY: . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.5 gallons
FAN BELT DEFLECTION: . . . . . . . . . .
1/2 to 3/4 inch
TORQUE CONVERTER:
Diameter . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
11 inches
Torque multiplication . . . . . . . . . .
2.15 to 1.0
TRANSMISSION:
Speeds . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Gear ratio:
Forward :
First . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1.440
Second . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
.737
Reverse :
First . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.357
Second . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
.695
TWO
to 1
to 1
to 1
to 1
STEER AXLE:
Axle alignment :
Toe-in . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Camber angle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Caster . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Left-hand turning radius angle:
Left wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Right wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Right-hand turning radius angle:
Left wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Right wheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
0 degrees
1 degrees
0 degrees
75 degrees
55 degrees
55 degrees
75 degrees
TRANSMISSION/AXLE ADAPTER:
Ratio . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4.4 to 1.0
Common sump capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
18 quarts
WHEELS AND TIRES:
Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Pneumatic
Size:
Front . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7:00 X 12 12 Ply
Rear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 6:50 X 12 10 Ply
Air Pressure:
Drive . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Steering . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
100 LBS.
100 LBS.
WHEELS
Torque Specifications:
Drive Wheel..290-300 ft/1bs (dry thread)
Steer Wheel.. 115-125 ft/1bs (dry thread)
Steering gear pitman arm . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Lock nut torque . . . . . . . 120-130 16 ft.
Steering gear mounting bolts..33 lb. ft.
HYDRAULIC SYSTEM:
Sump tank capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . 8 gallons
Sump tank filter (replaceable).. 25 micron
Sump tank breather (replaceable).10 micron
Hydraulic Pumps:
Main Pump:
Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Gear
Capacity . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 7 GPM
. . . . . . . . . at 1040 engine RPM @ 100 PSI
Steer Pump:
Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Gear
Flow Control setting . . . . . . . . 2.5
GPM
Relief Valve setting . . . . . . . .1750
PSI
Hydraulic Valve:
Pressure Relief Valve Setting.. 1750 PSI
BRAKE SYSTEM:
Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . H y d r a u l i c
Brake pedal free travel . . . . . . . .
1/8 inch
DISTRIBUTOR:
Rotation (viewed from cap end)...Clockwise
Point opening . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0 . 0 2 1
Maximum advance:
1873
RPM . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Degree (Dist.). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 11
Cam angle range . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 31-34
Breaker spring tension:
(Ounces)...... 17-21 @ center of contact
. . . . . . . . . . . 19-23 @ back edge of contact
Dwell angle . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 69
- 3
DO NOT set contact gap outside limits to
obtain specified dwell.
Condenser .
Side play
Fit new
End play .
Measure
. . . . . 18 to .23 Microfarads
...............
.005" Max.
.0005"
bearings to . . . . . .
...........
.003" to .010"
with collar in place
SPARK PLUGS:
Gap:
Standard . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
0.025
STARTER RELAY:
Point opening . . . . . . . . 0.017 to 0.033
Opening voltage . . . . . . . . .
3.7 to 5.2
BATTERY (Negative Ground)
(Volts) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Number of cells . . . . . . . . .
Number of plates . . . . . . . .
20 Hour rate (amp/hr) . . .
300 Amps., 0 deg. F.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
12
6
9
45
STARTING MOTOR:
No Load Test:
Draw current (amps) . . . . . . . . . . . 125
. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . (Inc. solenoid)
Volts . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 10.6
Speed (RPM)....6200 min., 9400 max.
9
Teeth in pinion . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
142
No. teeth in ring gear . . . . . . . . . .
Starter to crankshaft ratio.. 1:15.77
S t a r t i n g m e d i u m . . . . . . . . . . . . Electric
ALTERNATOR:
F i e l d C o i l d r a w . . . . . . . . . . . . @ 80° F.
. . . . . . . . . . 2.2 to 2.6 amps @ 12 Volts
Type . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Delcatron
32 Amps
Rated output . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
output test:
@ 80 F 2350 engine RPM 30 Amps.
2350 engine RPM 14 Volts
7 Amps.
550 engine RPM
1-3
1-17.
The torque converter has three basic
components; t h e y a r e t h e i m p e l l e r , t u r b i n e ,
and housing or stator.
Under normal operating conditions, the action of the impeller
causes the turbine blades to turn almost
freely and fluid passes through the converter
easily and quickly, striking each blade at
a very slight angle. When a load is encountered, the turbine slows down because it
is directly connected to the load shaft, and
the fluid strikes the turbine blades at a
sharp angle. As the force of the fluid is
relayed from blade to blade, the output torque accumulates. The twisting force that
accumulates as the fluid is directed and
redirected is the output torque of the converter. Thus, the converter selects the
proper output torque for any load, doing
automatically what must be done manually
in a mechanical transmission.
1-18.
TRANSMISSION ASSEMBLY. The torque
converter and automatic transmission
assemblies are mounted between the engine
and drive axle assembly, immediately below
the driver's floor plates. The transmission
case is connected to the flywheel housing
on one end and the axle adapter housing on
the other. The transmission assembly is
controlled by valves mounted on the transmission. The valves are connected by
linkage to rods extending through the floor
plate and up to the cowl. Levers extending
thru the cowl are easily accessible to the
operator's right hand. By proper manipulation of the direction selector, the operator
can place the vehicle in neutral, forward,
or reverse gear. The oil used by the transmission when operating the vehicle is cooled
by the o i l c o o l e r i n t h e r a d i a t o r .
1-19.
DRIVE AXLE. The front vehicle axle is
the drive axle of the truck. The axle adapter
and axle end assemblies contain the gears,
s h a f t s , b e a r i n g s , and-other components
necessary to transmit power to the truck
drive wheels. The axle is of single speed
type, having double reduction gearing. Final
reduction is achieved at the drive wheels
through a ring and pinion gear mounted in
the axle and housing.
1-20.
UPRIGHT AND CARRIAGE. The upright
assembly consists of a vertical mast of
1-4.
twin steel rails, an intermediate section and an inner telescoping section.
The carriage is mounted to this telescoping section and the lifting forks
are attached to the carriage. A telescoping hydraulic cylinder within the
mast provides the lifting force.
1-21.
SYSTEM DESCRIPTIONS
1-22.
ENGINE COOLING SYSTEM. (See
Figure 1-2.) The engine cooling system consists of the radiator, water
pump, connecting hoses, engine water
jacket, thermostat, fan and fan belt.
Total cooling system capacity is
11-l/2 quarts. The radiator is of
the heavy duty, tube-and-fin, cross
flow type. Cooling air is drawn
through the radiator by action of the
fan, which is driven by V-belt from
the crankshaft pulley. The thermostat,
located between the water pump and cylinder head, restricts the flow of coolant through the engine until the engine
has warmed up to normal operating temperature.
The radio
1-23.
ELECTRICAL SYSTEM.
frequency emission electrical system
is negatively grounded andemploys a
12-volt alternator that is mounted to
the engine and driven by the V-type
belt.
Output of the alternator is
controlled by a voltage regulator
mounted in the alternator. Major components of the electrical system are
the alternator, 12-volt storage battery,
engine starting motor, distributor, coil,
spark plugs, vehicle lights, and various
electrically powered indicators.
To keep the starter from start1-24.
ing when the engine is running, a lockout
The automatic dissystem is employed.
engagement and lockout system functions
as follows:
a.
The starter relay has points which
are closed as long as the engine is not
running.Under this condition, the starter
can be operated.
b.
However, when the engine is running
the starter relay is energized, the relay
points open and the starter circuit is
broken. Thus . . t h e s t a r t e r c a n n o t b e
operated.
Figure 1-2. Cooling System Diagram
The engine
1-25.
ENGINE FUEL SYSTEM.
fuel system consists of the fuel tank
with a 10.5 gallon capacity that is built
into the left side of the truck frame, a
fuel filter installed in the main fuel
line between the tank and fuel pump, a
diaphragm fuel pump and an up-draft carburator that are part of the engine
The fuel tank has a vented
assembly.
lock-type safety fuel cap, and built-in
strainer.
system is powered by a gear-type hydraulic pump mounted on the timing gear
housing cover and driven by the camshaft
Major components of the power
gear.
steering system are the hydraulic pump
and a hydraulic cylinder, with an internal
control valve, that is anchored to a
The
welded bracket on the vehicle frame.
hydraulic control valve reacts to the
steering wheel movement directing hydraulic fluid under pressure to extend or
retract the piston and assist in steering
The system permits manual
the vehicle.
steering of the truck when the engine is
not running or when the hydraulic
steering is inoperative.
The truck is
STEERING SYSTEM.
1-26.
steered by movement of the rear wheels.
Steering is accomplished by a combination
of mechanical and hydraulic forces conThe
trolled by the steering wheel.
mechanical portion of the steering system 1-27.
EXHAUST SYSTEM.
Exhaust gases are
consists of a steering gear assembly, a
expelled from the engine manifold. TWO
drag link assembly that connects with the short exhaust pipes connect the exhaust
power steering cylinder, and a steering
manifold to the engine muffler, mounted
axle with two rods that connects the
above the steer axle.
steering spider of the axle with the
The steering booster
steering wheels.
1-5
1-28.
SERVICE BRAKE AND INCHING
CONTROL SYSTEM.
Examing the inching and brake circuits
you will note that we have two master
cylinders - the left one for left foot
inching and braking, the right one for
With neither
right foot braking only.
pedal applied, the inching valve is in
Note that there
a neutral position.
is no residual pressure from either
the right or left master cylinder to
the inching-and-brake selector valve
and wheel cylinders does have residual
pressure.
(Refer to Fig. 1-3)
The inching-and-brake selector valve,
mounted on top of the differential
housing, c o n t r o l s f l o w o f f l u i d t o t h e
wheel cylinders.
When the right master cylinder is applied
for braking, fluid under pressure flows
from the master cylinder, through the
s e l e c t o r v a l v e , and through the residual
check valve to both wheel cylinders.
(Refer to Fig. 1-2)
1-6
This detail of the selector valve shows
the flow through it when the right master
cylinder is applied. (Refer to Fig. 1-3)
This detail of selector valve shows
action of lockout piston and inching
piston during inching operations.
(Refer to Fig. 1-5).
When the left foot inching pedal is applied,
the primary lockout piston is forced in and
blocks the inlet passage from the right
master cylinder. Then the pressure rises,
and the inching piston moves to start disengaging. the transmission without brake
application. (Refer to Fig. 1-4)
1-7
When the inching pedal is pushed down to a
point where the transmission is partially
disengaged, the brake piston is applied.
Fluid, trapped between the brake piston
cup and the lockout piston, then flows
through the residual check valve, and to
the wheel cylinders to start applying the
brakes. (Refer to Fig. 1-6)
1-8
This detail of the selector valve
shows fluid, trapped between the
brake piston cup and the lockout
piston, being forced out of valve
to start applying brakes during
inching operation. (Refer to Fig. 7)
1-29.
HYDRAULIC SYSTEM. In the vehicle
lift and tilt hydraulic system, oil is
drawn from the reservoir by the pump
which is mounted to the engine gear case
cover.
The oil is forced through the
high pressure line to the control valve.
When the lift and tilt control levers
are in the neutral position, oil flows
through the valve and back to the reservoir.
When one of the control levers
is moved (forward or rearward), oil is
diverted through tubes and hoses to the
corresponding cylinder to extend or
retract the piston. When the limit of
this motion or stroke is reached,
the
oil pressure in the system builds up to
approximately 2,000 PSI, forcing a plunger in the relief valve section of the
control valve to open and return excessive oil to the reservoir.
The tilt
lock valve prevents the flow of oil to
and from the tilt cylinders when the
hydraulic cylinders are not pressurized,
even though the tilt control valve
lever is depressed.
This prevents
tilting of the upright mast when the
engine is not running. Major parts of
the hydraulic system are the oil reservoir that is built into the right hand
truck frame, the hydraulic pump that
operates off an idler gear of the crankshaft, the lift cylinder, two tilt
cylinders, a tilt lock valve, a lift
and tilt control valve. The valves are
controlled by mnaual levers.
1-30.
1-32.
AIR CLEANER. The carburetor air
cleaner is of the dry type, and is
mounted on the frame, to the manifold
side of the engine. The purpose of the
air cleaner is to prolong engine life
by preventing dirt and grit from being
drawn into the engine through the
carburetor and intake manifold.
Air
enters the cleaner through an opening
in the cleaner outer shell, passes
through the element and enters the
carburetor through a short "L" shaped
rubber tube.
1-33.
ENGINE GOVERNOR. The engine is
equipped with a centrifigual-type
governor for controlling excessive
speed of the engine.
The governor is
driven from the camshaft timing gear.
Governor setting is adjusted by means
of a spring on the governor control
linkage. Tension of this spring is
adjustable.
ENGINE WATER PUMP. The impeller1-34.
type water pump is bolted to the engine
block and is driven by V-type belt off
The coolant fan
the crankshaft pulley.
is bolted to the water pump pulley.
COMPONENT DESCRIPTION.
1-31.
FUEL PUMP. The fuel pump is
mounted to the engine cylinder block
on the left side.
This diaphragm pump
is actuated by an accertric lever that
operates against a cam on the engine
camshaft.
A fuel filter with a replaceable element is installed on the inlet
side of the pump.
1-9
1-35 CARBURETOR
PR I NC I PLE OF OPERAT I ON :
Marve1-Schebler
Carburetors
are
used
on
thousands of tractor and industrial
engines and have been designed to
provide many years of trouble-free
service, however, as in the case of all
mechanical devices, they do in time
require proper service and repairs. An
understanding of their construction and
how they operate as well as an understanding of their function with respect
to the engine will not only avoid many
false leads on the part of the service
man in diagnosing so-called carburetor
complaints but will create customer
satisfaction and a profitable business
for the progressive service shop.
To understand a carburetor it is
necessary to realize there is only one
thing a carburetor is designed to do and
that is to mix fuel and air in the
proper proportion so the mixture will
It is
burn efficiently in an engine.
the function of the engine to convert
this mixture into power.
There are three major factors in an
engine which control the change of fuel
I-Compress ion.
and air into power:
2-Ignition. 3-Carburetion.
Carburetion has been listed last because
it is absolutely necessary for the
engine to have good compress ion and
i g n i t i o n b e f o r e it can have good
carburetion.
When the average person thinks of
“c a r b u r e t i o n ” t h e y i m m e d i a t e l y t h i n k o f
the carburetor as a unit. Carburetion
is the combined function of carburetor,
manifold, valves, piston and rings,
combustion chamber, and cam shaft.
I t i s r e a d i l y s e e n t h a t “c a r b u r e t i o n ”
is a far deeper subject than consideration of the carburetor alone, and
expecting the carburetor to cure faulty
ignition, compression, valves, etc.
1-10
will only result in wasted time and
effort on the part of the service man
and added expense to the customer.
It must be remembered that the function
of the carburetor does not extend
beyond delivering the proper mixture of
fuel and air to the manifold and the
other factors which effect power and
economy cannot be changed or corrected
Inability to
by the carburetor.
understand all factors that effect
engine operation is the reason many
service mechanics change from factory
standards and attempt to improve on the
engine set-up by their own methods or
“s t a n d a r d s ”. A l l t h a t a n y s e r v i c e
mechanic should ever try to do is make
the particular engine he is working on
as good as the manufacturer intended it
to be, but he can make it a lot worse.
Far too many engines are running below
their standard of performance in service
today.
For the carburetor to accomplish its
function it must be able to vary the
mixture strength dependent upon engine
It must supply a mixture
demands.
strength that will allow the engine to
give maximum horsepower, whenever the
throttle is fully opened, while at part
throttle conditions it must lean out the
mixture so that maximum economy can be
In addition it must have
obtained.
flexibility throughout the entire range
of operating speeds, from idle and part
throttle to full power wide open
The carburetor must
throttle position.
a l s o h a v e a n a c c e l e r a t i n g “w e l l ” w i t h
enough fuel capacity to start handling
In other words
sudden maximum loads.
the carburetor not only varies volume
of fuel and air that enters the engine
but also varies amount of fuel that
goes in with a given amount of air, in
order to produce the proper mixture
proportion for any condition under which
the engine is operating at any time.
In order to understand the function and
operation of the Marve1-Schebler
Tractor and Industrial Carburetors it
is well to consider the systems that
These systems
make up each carburetor.
The Float System, The Idle
are:
System, The Power Fuel Feed System,
The Back Suction Economizer System,
and The Choke System.
A thorough knowledge of each system
will help the service mechanic to
quickly locate and correct legitimate
carburetor complaints as well as to
inspect, repair, and put back to
standard any carburetor that requires
an overhaul.
a.
FLOAT SYSTEM:
The float system controls the level and
s u p p l y o f g a s o l i n e i n t h e f u e l bowl
throughout the operating range o f t h e
engine.
When the fuel bowl (1) is empty the
float and lever (2) and float valve (3)
drop and fuel under pressure from the
fuel pump (or gravity feed) is forced
through the float valve seat (4) around
the float valve (3) and into the fuel
bowl (1).
As the fuel in the bowl
approaches the correct operating level
it raises the float and lever (2) with
enough force to raise the float valve
and cut off the flow of fuel into the
bowl.
As fuel feeds through the
carburetor jets into the engine the
fuel level (5) drops, allowing
additional fuel to enter the fuel bowl.
Under actual operating conditions the
fuel level (5) and float and lever (2)
automatically position themselves so
that the inward flow of gasoline to the
c a r b u r e t o r i s e q u a l t o the outward flow
of
gasoline
to
the
eng i n e .
1-11
As can readily be seen the float system
under the most favorable of operating
conditions is subjected to a certain
amount of wear. Under severe
conditions that result in excessive
vibrations being transmitted to the
carburetor, float valve and float valve
seat wear is accelerated.
It should be an established policy that
whenever the carburetor is disassembled
for whatever cause the service man make
following checks:
1.
2.
Examine float valve for any signs
of wear. If it is not absolutely
t r u e o r i s g r o o v e d a n d h a s n ‘t a
perfect taper, a new float valve
and also a new float valve seat
must be used. These float valves
and seats are supplied in matched
sets and are tested at the factory
for leaks. Always use a new float
valve seat gasket to make sure of a
perfect seal.
Examine float for any signs of
failure.
To
test
metal
float,
submerge float in pan of hot water
and if air bubbles are observed,
replace with new float.
Examine cork float for bare places
or cracks in coating. If either
are found, o r i f f l o a t s h o w s
evidence of having been soggy,
replace with new one.
attempt to recover f (do not
shellac or varnish.)
3.
Set float height to the proper
specification for the particular
model carburetor being serviced.
Make certain that the entire
assembly works free and that there
is no binding.
1-12
4.
Wash fuel strainer assembly in
gasoline and clean screen with air
under pressure.
If the screen, or
the threads on the strainer are not
in good condition, install a new
assembly. When reinstalling fuel
strainer assembly always use a new
strainer gasket if a gasket is used
to obtain a seal.
It has been proven, with few
exceptions, that with a float
system in good order, carburetor
flooding only occurs when dirt or
foreign matter becomes lodged
between the float valve (3) and the
float valve seat (4).
b. THE IDLE SYSTEM:
The idle system controls the flow of
fuel at idle speed and at slow speeds
until the throttle is opened wide enough
to allow the power fuel feed system to
function,
When the throttle valve (6) is in the
idle position the edge of the valve is
between the primary idle orifice (7)
and the secondary idle orifice (8).
With the valve in this position the air
pressure (manifold vacuum) at the
primary idle orifice (7) is lower than
the air pressure in the fuel bowl
chamber (9) and fuel is forced from the
fuel bowl (1) into the idle fuel
As the fuel travels
passage (10).
through the idle fuel passage (10) it
passes through the metering orifice of
the idle jet (11) to the point where it
is combined with air entering through
the idle adjusting needle seat (12).
The mixing of air with gasoline helps
to atomize the fuel and this process is
repeated at the secondary idle or if ice
(8) as the fuel travels through the
idle fuel passage (10).
As this rich mixture of fuel and air
emerges from the primary idle orifice
(7) it is reduced to correct proportions
by the air which passes around the
throttle valve (6) since this valve
must
be
slightly
open
to
permit
the
engine to idle. The resultant mixture
is correct for operating engine at idle
speed, provided the idle adjusting
needle (13) is properly adjusted.
As the throttle valve (6) is slowly
opened from the slow idle position it
gradually subjects the secondary idle
orifice (8) to intake manifold vacuum,
and the secondary idle orifice (8) no
longer bleeds air to the idle fuel
passage (10) but feeds an additional
quantity of fuel into the engine. This
is proper since the throttle valve is
now open wider and w i l l a d m i t a g r e a t e r
amount of air to b l e n d w i t h t h i s
additional fuel to maintain the correct
p r o p o r t i o n s o f f u e l and air for the
engine.
As the throttle valve (6) is opened
still wider, the idle fuel delivery
begins to fade out, however, the
throttle valve at this point is far
enough open for the power fuel feed
system to begin functioning.
The idle system is the most positive
and satisfactory of idle systems, as it
is working under very high suction and
the mixture flows through the small
passages and orifices at very high
velocities. It is necessary to bear in
mind, however, that there are times when
these small holes may become plugged
with particles of dirt or foreign
matter and will require cleaning. At
such times the passages, jets, and
small drilled holes should only be
cleaned with a cleaning fluid such as
gasoline and air under pressure. Never
use drills or wires as a change in size
of these small openings will change the
entire calibration of the carburetor.
1-13
c. POWER FUEL FEED SYSTEM:
With the throttle valve (6) in slow or
just off slow idle position, fuel rises
up through the nozzle (14) and out the
nozzle air bleeds (15) to fill the
accelerating well (16) to approximately
the height of the fuel level in the
fuel bowl (1).
As the engine speed
the slow idle posit
through the venturi
increased, and, as
begins to diminish,
the venturi (17) is
1-14
is increased from
on the air flow
(17) is gradually
he idle system
the
velocity
through
high enough to
create a pressure at the tip of the
nozzle (14) slightly less than the
pressure in the fuel bowl chamber (9)
and the accelerating well (16). Fuel,
therefore, feeds from the fuel bowl (1)
through the opening between the power
(load) adjusting needle (18) and the
power adjusting needle seat (19),
through the power jet (20) and out the
nozzle (14) to be discharged into the
At the
air stream at the venturi (17).
s
s
t
o
r
e
d in
t
h
e
f
u
e
l
t
h
a
t
same time,
i
s
a
l
s
o
the accelerating well (16)
forced through the nozzle air bleeds
(15) into the nozzle (14).
Because the size of the power jet
(20) and the position of the
power adjusting needle (18)
restrict the amount of fuel which
can enter the nozzle (14), the
fuel in the accelerating well
(16) will soon be exhausted and
air will then enter through the
nozzle air bleeds (15) to mix
with the fuel passing through the
nozzle
(14).
The
amount
of
air
that can enter into the nozzle
(14) is limited by the size of
the nozzle air vent (21).
The result of air bleeding into
the nozzle (14) is, to help
atomize or break up the fuel into
finer particles, to regulate the
quantity and rate of discharge of
fuel fed from the accelerating
we11 (16), during acceleration,
and to provide correct mixture
proportions for full throttle
operation.
As the throttle valve is opened toward
the wide open position the velocity
through the venturi (17) continues to
increase,
lowering
the
air
pressure
at
the nozzle (14) and resulting in
additional fuel being supplied to the
engine as the speed is increased.
When the throttle valve (6) is opened
suddenly from slow or just off slow
idle position, the fuel stored in the
accelerating well (16) is forced out
through the nozzle air bleeds (15) very
rapidly and serves to provide the extra
richness required by the engine to meet
the sudden load.
When the throttle
valve (6) is closed, fuel again fills
the accelerating we11 (16), ready for
the next acceleration.
d. BACK SUCTION ECONOMIZER SYSTEM:
The amount of fuel supplied to an engine
is controlled by the size of the power
jet, the position of the power adjusting
needle, and the difference in air
pressure between the fuel bowl chamber
and the venturi. However, in many
engines the mixture must be leaned out
additionally during part throttle
operation to obtain maximum economy. To
provide this leaner mixture MarvelSchebler Tractor and industrial
C a r b u r e t o r s m a k e u s e o f t h e “B a c k
S u c t i o n E c o n o m i z e r S y s t e m ”. W i t h t h i s
method of metering fuel, air pressure
in the fuel bowl chamber is regulated
and controlled according to load
conditions by a combination of bowl vent
and economizer passages communicating
with throttle bore of the carburetor.
1-15
Through regulations of the air pressure
in the fuel bowl chamber the fuel flow
through carburetor can be controlled
to provide proper mixture proportions
for the engine.
All the air that enters the fuel bowl
chamber (9) must first pass through the
air cleaner and the bowl vent (22).
The size of the bowl vent (22) controls
or limits the amount of air that can
enter the fuel bowl chamber (9). The
amount of air that is drawn out of the
fuel bowl chamber (9) is controlled by
the size of the economizer jet (23),
the economizer orifice (24) and the
position of the throttle valve (6) as
its position determines the manifold
vacuum or suction on the economizer
orifice (24). As the throttle valve
(6) is opened from the fast idle
position the economizer orifice (24)
is gradually exposed to manifold
suction, and air flows from the fuel
bowl chamber (9), through economizer
jet (23) and out the economizer orifice
(24). This air must be replaced by air
entering through the bowl vent (22) but
as the size of the bowl vent (22)
restricts the amount of air that can
enter, the resultant pressure in the
fuel bowl chamber (9) will be lowered,
reducing the difference in air pressure
between the nozzle (14) and the fuel
bowl chamber (9). The flow of fuel
will therefore be retarded so that the
exact economy mixture ratio will be
1-16
delivered to the engine at this
particular throttle opening. Opening
throttle valve (6) further exposes the
entire economizer orifice (24) to
manifold suction, which results in
additional air being removed from the
fuel bowl chamber (9), again leaning
out the mixture ratio to the correct
proportions for this new throttle
position.
After the economizer orifice
(24) is fully exposed to manifold
suction the amount of air that is drawn
out of the fuel bowl chamber (9) is
controlled by the manifold vacuum or
suction at any given throttle valve (6)
position and as this suction decreases
as the throttle approaches wide open
position, less air is drawn out of the
fuel bowl chamber and additional fuel
flows to engine to provide the extra
richness required for operation at
heavy loads where maximum horsepower is
necessary.
The "Back Suction Economizer System"
assures the proper metering of fuel to
the engine throughout the service life
o f c a r b u r e t o r a s t h e r e a r e n o moving
parts to wear out or adjustments to get
out of order. It is essential, however, that the system remain free of
dirt and foreign matter because any
foreign substance in the system will
restrict the flow of air thereby
creating improper pressures in the fuel
bowl chamber and resulting in improper
fuel delivery to the engine.
e. CHOKE SYSTEM:
The choke system is used during cold
starting and the warm-up period. Under
these cold conditions it is necessary
to supply an additional rich mixture of
f u e l a n d a i r , a s o n l y t h e “l i g h t e n d s ”
or more volatile port ions of the fuel
will vaporize with the manifold and air
temperatures at these cold conditions.
Consequently it is necessary that a
large quantity of fuel be available so
that
there
will
be
enough
"light
ends",
to combine with the air to form a
combustible mixture for starting the
engine.
The function of the choke valve (25) is
to restrict amount of air that can
enter the carburetor and to increase
the suction on the nozzle (14) so
additional fuel will be drawn into the
manifold.
As soon as the engine fires
and runs the rich mixture must be
rap idly reduced to prevent stalling.
This change in mixture is accomplished
by the operator positioning choke valve
to provide the proper mixture. However,
a few degrees movement of choke valve
(25) will make a big change in mixture
strength and help reduce sensitivity of
the choke valve (25) position. Use is
made of a spring loaded relief valve
(26)
in
many
applications.
This
valve
opens automatically with engine speed
and load and eliminates a great deal of
manipulation of the choke on the part
of the operator.
1-17
When the engine has obtained normal
operating temperature the choke valve
(25) must be fully opened to assure
maximum power and economy. In addition, extended use of the choke results in more gasoline being supplied
to the engine than can be burned. A
large percentage of the unburned gasoline is lost through the exhaust
system. The remainder of the raw
gasoline is forced between the pistons
and cylinder walls, washing away the
protective oil film and increasing
engine wear, and enters the crankcase
where it dilutes the engine oil.
The
reduce arcing and current leakage.
distributor features automatic spark
advance through the action of centrifugal
force on the advance weights. The 12
volt automative type coil is mounted just
forward of the distributor in a bracket
attached to the left side of the engine.
ALTERNATOR. The alternator is a
1-39.
12 volt, 32 ampere unit mounted on an
adjusting bracket to the side of the
engine and driven by a V-belt.
Any adjustments that are necessary on
the carburetor should never be attempted
until the engine has obtained its normal
operating temperature and the choke valve
(25) has been placed in the wide open
position.
STARTER MOTOR. The starting motor
1-36.
is bolted to the engine flywheel housing
on the right underside of the vehicle.
The motor is a two pole, four-field, 12
volt unit which cranks the engine when
the pinion drive is engaged to the flywheel ring gear. An electrical interlock prevents starter engagement when
the engine is running.
STARTER SOLENOID. The starter
1-37.
solenoid is bolted to the starter drive
housing and serves two functions; that
of engaging the starter pinion to the
flywheel ring gear, and acts as a
switch to close the circuit between the
The solenoid
battery and starter motor.
becomes energized when the ignition
switch mounted on the dash is held in
the start position.
IGNITION DISTRIBUTOR AND COIL.
1-38.
The single point set 'distributor is
located on the left side of the engine
and is driven by the oil pump shaft.
This location provides easy access for
service. The distributor shaft features
offset drive gear which makes improper
assembly impossible. The distributor
cap is molded of an alkyd material to
1-18
Typical 10-SI Wiring Diagram.
Basic principles of operation are as
follows:
When the SWITCH is closed, current from
the ENERGIZER follows through the
AMMETER and the RESISTOR to the
generator no. 1 terminal (at top of
REGULATOR), t h r o u g h r e s i s t o r R 1 , d i o d e
Dl, and the base emitter of transistor
TR1 to ground, and then back to the
ENERGIZER. The ammeter is then
energized. The resistor in parellel
with the ammeter reduces total
circuit resistance to provide higher
field current for initial voltage
buildup when the engine starts.
and system voltage decrease, and D2
then blocks current flow, causing
TR1 to turn back on. The field
current and system voltage increase,
and this cycle then repeats many
times per second to limit the alternator voltage to a preset value.
Capacitor C1 smooths out the voltage
across R3, resistor R4 prevents
excessive current through TR1 at
high-induced-voltages in the field
windings when TR1 turns off.
Resistor R2 is a thermistor which causes
the regulated voltage to vary with
the temperature, thus providing the
opimum voltage for charging the
energizer.
Cross-Section View of Typical Delcotron
with Built-in Solid State Voltage
Regulator in Frame.
With the alternatoroperating, a.c. voltages are generated in the stator windings,
and the stator supplied d.c. field current
through the diode trio, the field, TR1,
and then through the grounded diodes in
the rectifier bridge back to the stator.
Also, the six diodes in the rectifier
bridge change the stator a.c. voltage
to a d.c. voltaqe which appears between
ground and the alternatorBAT. terminal.
As alternatorspeed increases current is
provided for charging the energizer and
operating electrical accessories.
Also,
with the alternatoroperating, the same
voltage appears at the BAT. and No. 1
terminals, and the ammeter indicates
the alternator is producing voltage.
The No. 2 t e r m i n a l o n t h e a l t e r n a t o r i s
always connected to the energizer, but
the discharge current is limited to a
negligible value by the high resistances
of R2 and R3. As thealternator speed
and voltage increase, the voltage between R2 and R3 increases to the point
where zener diode D2 conducts. Transistor TR2 then turns on and TR1 turns
off. With TR1 off, the field current
1-40.
OIL FILTERS. The engine oil
filter and the transmission and power
steering fluid filters are both
spin-on throwaway cartridge type. The
engine oil filter is mounted on a
bracket to the right side of the
frame, j u s t i n s i d e t h e e n g i n e c o m partment. The filter uses a lo-micron
element. The transmission filter is
mounted to the left side of the
engine and uses a 15-micron element.
1-41.
MAIN HYDRAULIC PUMP. The
hydraulic pump is a high pressure
rotary-gear type pump that pumps
oil from the oil reservoir for use
in lifting and tilting operations
of the mast assembly.
1-42.
STEERING HYDRAULIC PUMP. The
steering pump is a rotary gear-type
pump, driven off the engine timing
gears. The pump draws hydraulic
fluid from the hydraulic sump and
provides fluid under pressure to the
power steering cylinder.
1-43.
UPRIGHT AND LIFT CARRIAGE.
The forks of the truck are mounted
on a carriage which is raised and
lowered on the upright rails. The
lift assembly utilizes a multistate system to raise the cargo loads.
1-19
Figure 1-8.
Serial Number Location
The first stage uses chains which have
one end attached to the lift cylinder
chain anchor. The other end is
attached to the lifting carriage. As
the first stage piston extends. It
At the
pulls the carriage upward.
upper extreme of the stroke, the piston bottoms against a spacer stopping
the piston and diverting the oil to
In the second
the inner piston rod.
the outer barrel,
stage of the lift,
intermediate rod, and stationary rod
are forced upward on the inner rod,
moving the inner rails and carriage
The carriage, inner and
upward.
outer tracks of the upright assembly
have rollers for ease of movement.
The carriage upper fork bar is
notched to permit forks to be moved
horizontally on the upper bar to
obtain varying distances between
To move fork horizontally,
forks.
lift lever on top of fork and slide
in direction desired.
LIFT CYLINDER. The telescopic
1-44.
lift cylinder is mounted in a vertical
position between the masts on the front
of the vehicle. The intermediate
piston rod of the cylinder is bolted
to the lifting chain sheave carriage
at the top. The cylinder innner
1-20
Figure 1-9.
Upright Deck Number
Location
stationary tube
is bolted to the
lower mounting bracket of the mast
assembly.
The purpose of the lift
cylinder is to supply the power to
hoist and hold the cargo load.
The
control lever for operating the lift
cylinder is on the cowl to the left
of the tilt control lever.
Lowering
rate of the mast assembly is regulated
by movement of the control valve
lever and lift cylinder flow control
valve and is in no way affected by
the engine speed.
1-45.
TILT CYLINDERS.
The two tilt
cylinders are located on each side of
the vehicle below the operator's
floor plates. The purpose of the tilt
cylinders is to tilt the mast assembly
forward or backward.
The control lever
for operating these cylinders is on the
cowl to the right of the operator.
1-46.
OVERHEAD GUARD. The overhead
guard meets the ANS B56.1 Safety
Standard for Powered Industrial Trucks
and has been subjected to an impact
test load of 16,000 foot pounds.
The
overhead guard should remain installed
on the truck at all times during operation.
With the upright completely
collapsed the overall height of the truck
with overhead guard will operate in a
84 inch door opening.
1-47.
COUNTERWEIGHT. The counterweight
at the rear of the truck counter balances
the truck when capacity loads are handled
or carried. The drive axle then becomes
the pivotal point of the vehicle.
1-48.
BODY AND SEAT. The truck has
hinged panels on both sides of the engine
and above the engine to provide easy
access to the engine compartment. The
floor plate may be removed to gain access
to the the torque converter, transmission,
t i l t c y l i n d e r s , brake master cylinder,
hydraulic lines, etc. The adjustable
operator's seat includes a back rest and
seat cushion.
1-51.
MACHINE SERIAL NUMBER AND
UPRIGHT DECK NUMBER LOCATION. The
machine serial number will be found
stamped into the frame, along the
right side, as shown in figure 1-8.
The upright deck number (essentially
a serial number for the upright and
carraige) will be found stamped into
the left or right side outer rail of
the upright as shown in figure 1-9.
These numbers should be shown on any
machine records, correspondence
regarding warranty claims, or parts
orders.
1-49.
WHEELS AND TIRES. The truck is
moved (powered) by the front vehicle
wheels and steered by the rear wheels.
The front (drive) wheels are driven by
a ring gear mounted in the hub of the
wheel.
The rear (steering) wheels are
connected by spindles to the axle.
All
the wheels are mounted on tapered roller
bearing hubs.
1-50.
PARKING BRAKE. The vehicle parking brake is operated by a brake lever
that is mounted on the front hood support
to the right of the operator. The brake
consists of a rotating drum affixed to
a shaft which is driven by the transmission gears. Two brake shoes and a
cam are mounted inside the drum.
The
position of the cam is controlled by
the parking brake lever and cable.
Then
the lever is pulled over-center, the cam
forces the shoes against the drum and
prevents moving the truck by locking
the output shaft. Tension of the cable
is adjusted through the knob on the
end of the lever.
1-21/(1-22 blank)
SECTION II
PREPARATION FOR USE
2-1. GENERAL.
2-2. When a new or reconditioned truck is first
received by the using organization, it is necessary
to determine that the vehicle is in satisfactory
condition and will operate properly when first
placed into service. For this reason, follow closely
the service procedures outlined in the following
paragraphs.
2-3. PRELIMINARY INSPECTION.
2-4. Visually inspect the vehicle upon receipt for
obvious damage, such as broken, cracked, dented
or missing parts. Unpack any removable equipment
and check against the packing list to determine
that all items are furnished and in good condition.
Report any damage, errors or discrepancies on the
appropriate forms.
2-5. Check the following for proper quantity:
a. Engine Coolant Level — Remove radiator cap.
Check to see that coolant level reaches the metal
tab located 2-3/4 inches below the top of the filler
neck. (See figure 2-1.)
b. Fuel Level — Remove fuel filler cap and
strainer, or check instrument panel gage reading
with ignition switch “ON”.
Note
If
vehicle
has
been
shipped
with
a
preservative in the fuel tank, a prominent
tag will be attached to the machine
indicating this fact. Drain the fuel tank of
preservative by
removing drain plug
directly underneath the tank.
C. Engine Oil Level —
Open the engine
compartment side panels and raise seat support for
engine access. R e m o v e d i p s t i c k o n l e f t s i d e o f
engine and check oil level, shown on dipstick. See
figure 2-2.
Figure 2-1. Checking Coolant Level
d. Transmission Fluid Level — The transmission
dipstick is located in the differential housing
between the drive wheels under the front dash
support. Easier access may be gained for dipstick
removal by tilting the upright forward. Check fluid
level on dipstick with engine running and
transmission in neutral, with parking brake set. See
figure 2-3.
e. Inching and Brake Master Cylinder Fluid Level
Check fluid level in each master cylinder by
removing filler cap. Fluid level should be 1/4 inch
below top of filler neck.
—
f. Hydraulic Fluid Level — Remove hydraulic
sump filler cap on top of right side frame. A
dipstick is incorporated in the filler cap to indicate
fluid level in the sump.
2-1
Figure 2-2.
Figure 2-3.
Checking Engine Oil Level
2-8. Pull light switch and check to see that
headlight and taillight are both operable.
Check operation of horn by depressing center
button in steering wheel.
g. Battery Water Level and State of Charge —
Remove filler caps on the battery and check
water level, which must cover plates at least
3/8 inch. Check state of charge with a
hydrometer.
x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x
X
WARNING
X
X
X DO NOT SMOKE, WELD, OR EMPLOY ANY OPEN
X
X FLAME NEAR THE BATTERY, AS AN EXPLOSIVE
X
X GAS IS PRODUCED BY THE BATTERY DURING
X
X ITS OPERATION.
X
x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x
x
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
x
2-6. SWITCHES, GAGES. AND LIGHTS. Set parking
brake and apply service brakes. Check
operation of neutral start switch by
placing direction selector in forward
or reverse position and turning ignition
switch to "START". S t a r t e r m u s t n o t e n gage until direction selector is returned
to "NEUTRAL" position.
2-7. Start engine and check hour-meter,
temperature gage, oil pressure gage,
ammeter, a n d f u e l l e v e l g a g e f o r p r o p e r
operation.
2-2
Transmission Fluid Level Check
2-9. OPERATIONAL CHECK. Refer to operating
instructions in Section III and check operation of tilt and lift cylinders. Check
inching and brake function. Check that parking brake will prevent truck motion with
transmission in gear and engine at full stall
speed.
LUBRICATION. Check machine record or
2-10.
service tags for indication of last periodic
maintenance performance. If necessary,
service the vehicle in accordance with the
lubrication chart, Figure 4-1.
3-1.
GENERAL
3-2.
This section provides information
and instructions concerning the theory
of operation and proper use of the truck.
Operating and maintenance personnel
should become thoroughly familiar with
the truck, and these instructions, before
attempting to operate or service the truck.
3-3.
PRINCIPLES OF OPERATION.
3-4.
GENERAL.
This truck provides a
compact, mobile means of transporting
and stacking or unstacking palletized
or skid-mounted loads of up to 4000 lbs.
The truck engine provides power for mobile
operation and drives the pumps for hydraulic
lift, tilt and steering.
3-5.
Torque generated by the engine is
multiplied by the torque converter as
required in the lower speed ranges with
the engine under load; under no-load
conditions, the converter acts as an
efficient fluid coupling between engine
and transmission.
The transmission is a
heavy duty power-shift, constant mesh type.
It provides forward, reverse and neutral
gear ranges and accomplishes shifting by
means of hydraulic clutch packs.
3 - 6 . A n "inching" circuit in the transmission provides for gradual disengaging
of engine power from the drive wheels,
even with engine running at top speed.
This provides for fast hydraulic lift
action while the truck itself is moving
The circuit is controlled by the
slowly.
free-travel Portion of the left foot inchThis initial
ing/brake master cylinder.
pedal travel controls hydraulic pressure
on the direction selector clutch pack,
allowing controlled slippage in the drive
l i n e . Excessive heat generated by clutch
action is drawn off in the oil cooler,
which is located in the left side tank of
the radiator.
3-7.
The transmission, which houses the
torque converter, is mounted directly to
the rear of the engine. The differential
case and axle adapter bolts to the back
forming a rigid,
of the transmission
unitized drive line.
3-8.
Final drive is accomplished
through a spiral bevel pinion and
ring gear with differential gearing
for the axle shafts.
The axle shafts
are full-floating; the axle housing
carries the weight of the truck.
Final gear reduction is made through
a fully enclosed ring gear and pinior
at the drive wheels.
The axle shaft
pinion gear engages the internal ring
gear in the axle ends and provides a
4:1 torque multiplication at the
wheel.
In this design, the axle
shaft carriers only one-fourth the
torque which is delivered to each
wheel.
3-9.
ENGINE.
3-10.
The engine is a four cylinder,
in line, 4 cycle overhead valve type,
which operates on regular grade gasoline.
The basic design of the engine
is derived from a diesel engine whichis inherently rugged in construction.
Fuel is atomized in the up-draft carburetor and ignited by a coil and
distributor spark ignition system.
The engine is cooled by water circulating in the engine which passes
through the radiator, where excess
heat is drawn off by the flow of air
through the radiator.
Filters are provided in the
3-11.
f u e l l i n e , lubrication system, and
intake air cleaner to protect the
engine from damage by dust, dirt,
sediment or other foreign materials.
A dynamic balancer is built
3-12.
into the engine crankcase which
absorbs some of the reciprocal forces
in the engine and provides smoother
operation than is normally obtainable
with the four-cylinder design.
3-13.
TORQUE CONVERTER AND
TRANSMISSION
The torque converter consists
3-14.
of three units: the impeller and its
c o v e r , which form the housing for the
converter, driven by the engine; a
stator which can rotate only in the
3-1
direction of impeller rotation because of
a sprag clutch built into the stator; and
a turbine which is driven by the fluid
thrown from the impeller. Each of these
units contain vanes or blades which act
upon, or are acted upon, by fluid within
the converter. This fluid is thrown from
the impeller (acting as a pump), through
the turbine blades, across the stator,
and back to the impeller. When the engine
is operating under load, turbine speed is
slowed so that fluid passing through the
turbine and stator adds its energy to
that of the impeller, thus increasing
Once
torque at sacrifice of speed.
turbine speed has built up to 9/10th of
impeller speed, torque multiplication
ceases, and the converter acts merely
as a fluid coupling between engine and
transmission. Through the action described above, the torque converter
eliminates the needs for changing gears
to accomodate heavier loads.
3-15.
With the forward or reverse
selector lever in neutral both forward and reverse packs are disengaged
and no power can be transmitted
through the intermediate gears and
high-low drum to the pinion or output shaft.
3-2
3-16.
When the transmission is in
forward and high speed, the forward
and high packs are engaged. Under
this condition, the forward gear
drives the intermediate high gear,
which drives the high gear. The
high gear drives the high-low drum
which drives the output shaft clockwise - thus driving the machine forward in high speed range. The gears
with borken arrows are idling and
transmit no power.
3-17.
When low speed is selected, with
the transmission in forward gear, the
forward and low packs are engaged.
Power flow goes from the forward gear,
through the intermediate high gear,
through the intermediate shaft, through
the intermediate low qear and through
the low gear. With the low pack locked
the
high-low
drum
drives
the
output shaft clockwise and the machine
moves forward in low speed.
up,
3-19.
With the truck in reverse and
low range, t h e f l o w i s a s f o l l o w s .
The reverse pack is locked up to drive
the reverse gear. The reverse gear
drives the idler gear which drives the
imtermediate low gear. The intermediate
low gear drives the low gear. With the
low pack locked up, the high-low drum
drives the output shaft counterclockwise,
and the truck moves in reverse and in
low range.
3-18.
With the truck in reverse and in
high range, t h e p o w e r f l o w i s a s f o l l o w s .
The reverse pack is locked up to drive
the reverse gear.
The reverse gear
drives the idler gear which drives the
intermediate low gear.
Power is transmitted through the intermediate shaft,
turning the intermediate high gear which
t u r n s t h e h i q h gear.
With the high pack
locked up, the high-low drum turns
counterclockwise and drives the output
shaft counterclockwise.
The truck now
moves in reverse and in high range.
3-2.1/(3-2.2
blank)
b. Pull back on parking brake lever to make
certain truck will remain in a stationary position
while it is being started.
c. Make certain the direction shift lever is in
neutral (central) position.
d. At initial starting, or if engine is cold, pull
choke control all the way out.
3-20. DRIVE AXLE. The drive axle is mounted
directly to the transmission and is driven by the
spiral bevel pinion on the ‘transmission output
shaft. The differential assembly is of the bevel gear,
full floating type and is mounted in the carrier on
tapered roller bearings. The differential case is
secured to the ring gear which is in mesh with the
drive pinion. The axle shafts are splined into the
differential side gears. Final gear reduction in the
axle is accomplished by a ring and pinion gear; the
pinion gear being on the end of the axle shaft and
the ring gear being a part of the wheel hub. The
service brakes are mounted inside the wheel hubs;
the backing plate mounted to the axle housing and
the drums being turned by the wheel hubs.
e. Press down on accelerator pedal approximately
one-third the distance from its normal position.
Do not operate the starter motor
continuously for more than 30 seconds. If
the engine fails to start after 30 seconds,
allow the starter motor to cool for at least
two (2) minutes before attempting to start
the engine again.
f. Turn the ignition switch to START position.
The starter motor will crank the engine. When the
will
e n g i n e s t a r t s , r e l e a s e s w i t c h a n d it
automatically return to ON position.
3-21. CONTROLS AND INSTRUMENTS.
Note
3-22. The following paragraphs explain the
function and proper use of all controls and
instruments furnished on the truck.
3-23. Refer to figure 3-2 for an illustration of all
controls and instruments. The table accompanying
the illustration explains the function of each
control and gives the normal reading for each gage.
3-24. OPERATING INSTRUCTIONS.
3-25. Personnel required to operate this vehicle
should become thoroughly familiar with all
controls and instruments as described in preceding
paragraphs and illustrations, and should also
become acquainted with the specific handling and
operating characteristics of this vehicle prior to
actual
loading/unloading
performance of
operations.
If
engine
becomes
over-choked
or
carburetor floods, push choke control in,
depress accelerator pedal fully, and engage
starter. If all equipment is in working
order, the engine should start.
g. Hold accelerator pedal steady and allow engine
to warm up at a fast idling speed. Immediately
observe engine oil pressure gage and ammeter for
normal readings. As engine begins to warm up,
gradually push in on choke control; as soon as
engine is warm, push choke control all the way in.
h. Warm engine until it will idle smoothly with
the choke control pushed all the way in. Check for
proper reading on ammeter, engine oil pressure
3-26. STARTING THE ENGINE.
gage, engine temperature indicator, and fuel
indicator. Be sure hour meter is operating properly.
a. Perform the daily preventive maintenance
services, indicated in figure 4-1.
i. Remove foot pressure from accelerator pedal.
Report any malfunctions to the proper authority.
3-3
LEGEND FOR FIGURE 3-2
INDEX NO.
NORMAL USE OR READ I NC
1.
Ignition Switch
When turned fully clockwise, actuates engine
starter — when released, returns to “ON”
position. Turned counterclockwise, shuts off
engine
2.
Lift Lever
Pull back to raise carriage, forks and/or
load — push forward to lower.
3.
Tilt Lever
Push forward to tilt upright and carriage
forward — pull back to tilt upright and
carriage to rear.
4.
Direction Selector
Lever
Push forward for forward gear; pull back for
reverse gear; center for neutral.
5.
Choke Control
Pull out to check engine for cold starting.
6.
Light Switch
Pull up to turn on headlights and taillight.
7.
Hourmeter
Indicates total engine operating time in’
hours and tenths.
8.
Water Temperature
Gauge
Indicates temperature of engine coolant water
in degrees (°F). Normally 175° F - 220° F.
9.
Oil Pressure Gauge
Indicates engine lubricating oil pressure in
PSI. Normally 15-32 PSI (5-15 PSI at idle).
10.
Fuel Level Gauge
Indicates quantity of fuel remaining in fuel
tank E - empty, F - Full (Tank capacity is 6.8
gallons) .
11.
Ammeter
Indicates rate of battery charge or discharge
With engine running, should read slightly to
the + side of "0"
14.
inch ing/brake Pedal
Free travel (initial depression) actuates
Inching valve, gradually disengaging power
from drive wheels. Further depression will
apply service brakes.
15.
Serv ice Brake Pedal
Depress to apply service brakes.
16.
Accelerator
Depress to Increase engine speed.
17.
Parking Brake Lever
Pull back to apply parking brake; pull forward
to release parking brake.
18.
Brake Lever Knob
Turn Clockwise to tighten linkage and remove
slack.
19.
Seat Adjuster
Push In to adjust seat position. Release to
lock seat in place. 4 Inches maximum fore/aft
seat adjustment.
20.
Hi & Lo Range
Shift Lever
Push Forward for High Range. Pull back for
low range up or down shift at about half
throttle.
21.
3-4
NOMENCLATURE
Side Shift Lever
Push forward for left side shift
Pull back for right side shift
Figure 3-2.
3-27.
Operators Controls and Instruments
DRIVING THE TRUCK,
a. Accelerate the engine slightly and move the
lift control lover gradually to the rear and
raise the forks to normal traveling position
(approxlmately 8 to 10 inches above the working
surface).
depress the accelerator pedal until safe operating speed is attained. If the truck falls to
move, shut off the engine immediately and report
this to the proper authority.
b. Move the tilt control lever backward to
tilt the forks backward,
c. Move the direction shift lever from neutral
position to forward or reverse position depending upon the desired direction of travel.
d. Place foot on the accelerator pedal, and
release the parking brake lever. Continue to
3-5
c. Move the truck forward until the forks are
positioned under the load. Make certain the forks
are fully inserted in the pallet or under the load.
Note
‘To inch the truck forks into a load, the
inching/brake pedal should be depressed in
the free-travel range, the parking brake
released, and the directional shift lever
placed in the forward position. Accelerate
the engine as required, while releasing
pressure on the pedal to regulate the
This’ permits
inching
control
valve.
controlled slippage of the transmission
clutches, allowing the truck to inch, or
creep, forward.
d. Apply the parking brake to prevent the truck
from shifting position during the lifting operation.
e. Move the direction shift lever to neutral.
When driving the truck, never "ride"
the inching brake pedal as this will
damage the transmission.
3-28. PICKING UP THE LOAD.
Note
At least once each shift, or every eight hours
of operation, the upright should be elevated
to its upper limit. This procedure insures adequate lubrication to the telescoping cylinder
rods and seals.
a. Approach the load squarely and halt the truck.
Move the tilt control lever forward and bring the
mast assembly to the vertical position. Raise or
lower the forks to the proper height to pick up the
load, or side shift the forks to the proper position to pick up the load by using the side shifter.
b. The forks should be adjusted sideways from the fork bar to obtain max-
f. Move the lift control lever to the rear and
accelerate
the
engine
to
raise
the
load
approximately 12 inches above ground level.
Release the control lever. Move the tilt control
lever backward to tilt the forks backward. Release
the lever and decelerate the engine.
g. Move the direction shift lever from neutral
position to the proper position for the desired
direction of travel.
h. Release the parking brake lever, depress the
accelerator pedal, and move the load to the desired
location.
3-29. DEPOSITING LOAD ON A TIERED
STACK.
a. Enter the unload area squarely, especially
when placing one load on top of another, in order
that all stacks will be square and secure.
b. Move the lift control lever to the rear and
accelerate the engine until the load reaches the
desired height above the tier.
imum balance in proportion to the width
of the load to be carried. To adjust fork
position, lift the lever behind the top of
the fork as shown in figure 3-4. Slide the
fork sideways to a desired position, and
return lever to latched position as shown
in figure 3-5. Make certain that the latch
pin engages one of the grooves in the fork bar.
3-6
Figure 3-4. Fork Latch Disengaged
Figure 3-5. Fork Latch Engaged
load is to be deposited. Depress the brake to halt
the truck.
b. Apply the parking brake and move the
direction shift lever to neutral position.
c. Drive the truck forward until the load is above
its resting place. To slowly maneuver the truck
forward while high engine speed is needed, use the
inching/brake pedal.
d. Pull back on the parking brake lever to apply
the parking brake.
e. Move the direction shift lever to neutral
position. Move the tilt control lever forward, tilting
forks, until the load is aligned with the tier.
c. Move the tilt control forward to bring the
upright to the vertical position.
d. Move the lift control lever forward and
carefully lower the load to the ground. Continue to
lower the forks until they can be easily withdrawn
from under the load.
e. Place the direction shift lever in reverse
position. Release the parking brake lever, and
slowly back the truck away from the deposited
load.
f. Move the lift control lever forward and
carefully lower the load into position on the tier.
Continue to lower the forks until they can be
easily withdrawn from the pallet.
3-31. STOPPING THE TRUCK.
g. Move the direction shift lever to reverse
position. Release the parking brake lever, and
slowly back the truck away from the tiered stack
until the forks are clear.
b. Apply gradual pressure on the brake pedal to
bring the truck to a safe smooth stop. Avoid
sudden stops.
h. Move the lift control lever forward to lower
the forks into normal traveling position (8 to 10
inches above surface).
3-30. DEPOSITING THE LOAD
IN A STORAGE AREA.
a. Carefully drive up to the position at which the
a. Remove foot from the accelerator pedal.
c. Apply the parking brake. Move the direction
shift lever to neutral position.
d. Move the tilt control lever forward to bring
the upright to the vertical position.
e. Move the lift control lever forward and lower
the forks to the ground.
3-7
f. Turn the starter and ignition switch to OFF
position to stop the engine.
If the engine has been operating at, or near,
full load, it should be allowed to run at fast
idle (600 to 800 RPM) for several minutes
after the load is removed before being
stopped. This allows internal engine
temperatures to equalize.
3-32. OVERHEAD GUARD OPERATION.
The overhead guard meets the ANS B56.1
Safety Standard for powered industrial
trucks
and
subjected
to
an
impact test load of 16,000 foot pounds.
The overhead guard should remain installed
on the truck at all times during operation. With the upright completely collapsed the overall height of the truck
with overhead guard will operate in a
84 inch door opening.
that cannot be overcome by purely mechanical
means. The exercise of intelligence, care and
common sense by the truck operator is essential to
minimize the hazards of overloading, slipping, and
unbalanced loads; obstructions in the path of
travel, or the use of equipment in operations for
which it is not intended or designed. Following are
a few suggestions that should be followed in the
operation of this vehicle:
a. Operate vehicle with forks close to floor,
loaded or empty, but high enough to avoid hitting
obstructions.
b. If vision is obstructed by the load, operate
vehicle in reverse, at low speed, turning in the seat
to maintain clear vision.
c. Avoid sudden stops or starts. When backing
up, check for obstructions or personnel in the path
of the truck before moving the truck.
d. Drive carefully at all times. Exercise caution at
cross aisles, sounding horn for safety.
e. Be sure loads are safe to move. Have loads
properly centered on forks. Refer to the capacity
data in Section I for various load centering ratings.
f. The operator should be qualified and drive in
accordance with safety rules.
g. If the truck does not operate properly, report
to proper authority. A minor adjustment now may
save a major repair later.
h. Do not allow riders.
i. Operate the truck at a safe distance behind
other vehicles.
Never drive the truck in open area of
the warehouse or storage yard witho u t t h e g u a r d i n p l a c e o v e r the
o p e r a t o r ’s c o m p o r t m e n t . T h e r e i s n o
periodic maintenance other than checking for security of mounting.
j. Do not operate truck with wet or greasy hands.
k. Observe highway traffic laws in the operation
of the truck.
l. Drive carefully on wet or slippery floors.
m. Keep feet within perimeter of floor board.
3-33. SAFETY PRECAUTIONS. The use of
powered equipment is subject to certain hazards
3-8
n. Observe the Operating Instructions and
Preventive Maintenance Instructions given in this
manual.
o. Avoid overloading the truck - this is a
hazardous practice, for the operator as well as the
equipment. Overloading shortens the life of the
truck and increases maintenance.
Do not operate machine for prolonged
periods in an unventilated area. All gasoline
engines
produce
poisonous
carbon
monoxide gas which is extremely toxic if
allowed to accumulate in a closed area.
3-41. SHELTER. The truck should be sheltered in
a closed building with some heat, if possible. If this
is not possible, cover with a tarpaulin or similar
kind of material.
3-42. COOLING SYSTEM. Add proper amount
of ethylene glycol anti-freeze to cooling system. A
solution of 6 quarts ethylene glycol and 5-l/2
quarts of water will afford protection to -35°F. If
anti-freeze is not available, drain radiator and
cylinder block when ambient temperature is
expected to drop below 32°F. Never add water to
the cooling system without subsequently checking
the anti-freeze solution for adequate strength and
adding anti-freeze if necessary.
3-43. ELECTRICAL SYSTEM.
p. Be sure the brakes are in proper working
condition. Be sure all mechanical and electrical
components are in good working order prior to
each shift of operation.
a. Test the specific gravity of the electrolyte in
the battery, using a hydrometer. Specific gravity
reading should be between 1.286 and 1.375 at
80°F.
3-34. OPERATION UNDER UNUSUAL
CONDITIONS.
b. Electrolyte
level
of
battery
must
be
maintained at l/2 inch above plates. Do not add
water to a battery which has been exposed to cold
temperature except when engine is to be operated
immediately.
3-35. EXTREME HEAT.
3-36. COOLING SYSTEM.
b. Check coolant level frequently, and be sure
radiator cap is secure.
c. Remove battery and store it in a warm place
when shelter for truck is not available. The
efficiency of the battery decreases at lower
temperatures, and a completely discharged battery
will freeze at 20°F.
c. Keep exterior of radiator clean and free of
foreign matter which might affect circulation of
air.
d. Be sure that wires and cables are in good
condition and that all connections are clean, dry
and secure.
a. Make sure fan belts are properly adjusted.
d. Flush and clean cooling system frequently.
3-37. BATTERY. Check
electrolyte
frequently and maintain at proper levels.
e. Clean spark plugs and check gaps.
level
f. Be sure terminal sockets and spark plug
terminals are clean.
3-38. LUBRICATION. Observe instructions on
Lubrication Chart, figure 41.
3-44.
Follow
LUBRICATION.
lubrication
instructions contained in Lubrication chart, figure
5-l.
3-39. FUEL SYSTEM. Fill fuel tank at end of day
to expel moisture which may collect in vapor form
inside the tank.
3-40. EXTREME COLD.
3-46. FUEL SYSTEM.
a. Use prescribed winter grade of fuel.
3-9
b. Fill fuel tank at the end of the day to expel
moisture.
3-48. DUSTY CONDITIONS.
3-46. HUMID CLIMATES.
3-49. Operators of trucks used in extremely dusty
3-47. In tropical areas, if paint is chipped, or
scratched, the affected area should be refinished
immediately to prevent rapid formation of rust.
Remove all loose paint with paint remover,
sandpaper, or sandblasting equipment. Apply two
coats of red lead primer and, when dry, apply
finishing coat of paint.
3-10
conditions should check the air cleaner and
hydraulic sump breather daily to insure that
excessive build-up of dust or dirt, which would
restrict air flow, is not permitted. Lubrication
service intervals for all items should be reduced to
one-half the normal period, or as short as 50 hours,
depending upon the severity of the service.
SECTION IV
PERIODIC INSPECTION, MAINTENANCE
AND
LUBRICATION
4-1. SPECIAL TOOLS.
indicates proper lubricants to be used in servicing
the truck, the points of application, and the
4-2. Special tools required for the performance of
maximum intervals for performance of lubrication
inspection, maintenance and testing of the truck
services. Adjust lubrication intervals to some
and its components are listed in Table 2.
shorter periods if extreme climatic conditions or
severity of service require more frequent attention
4-3. PERIODIC INSPECTION.
to lubrication.
4-4. A periodic inspection schedule must be
established and maintained in accordance with the
information given in Table 3. Intervals specified are
maximum periods permissible and are based on
optimum service conditions. Adjust inspection
intervals accordingly if extreme
4-6. Access to the engine compartment is gained
by depressing spring latch in the side panel,
opening side panels on each side of the truck, and
raising seat support as shown in figure 4-2.
climatic or
operating conditions exist for any extended period
4-7. AIR CLEANER. Air cleaner service intervals
of truck operation.
are determined primarily by the service conditions
under which the vehicle operates. The condition of
4-5. PERIODIC SERVICE AND LUBRICATION.
the filter element should be checked every 8 hours
Refer to figure 4-1 for the lubrication chart, which
and cleaned every 50 hours as a minimum.
TABLE 2. SPECIAL TOOLS FOR INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE
Nomenclature
Part/Model No.
Cooling System Tester
Manufacturer
Range
Application
Stant Manufacturing
4-17 psi
See para. 4-13
Expanded Scale
Voltmeter
260
Simpson
0-50 volts
See paras. 4-34 & 4-35
Pressure Bleeder
Fluid-Bal
Wagner-Electric
0-30 psi
See para. 4-20
0-300 psi
See para. 4-40
Compression Gage
Distributor Tester
Sun
See para. 4-45
Vacuum Gage
0-30 in. hg.
See para. 4-51
Hydraulic Pressure
Quadrigage
Mico Manufacturing
0-3000 psi
See para. 4-65
Hydraulic Circuit
Tester
HSD
Schroeder
0-3000 psi
0-30 GPM
0-240°F.
See para. 4-66
Brothers
4-l
TABLE 3. PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE INSPECTION
INSPECTION INTERVAL
DRY,
When
used
3 months or 300
operating hours,
whichever
comes first
Annual,
or 1200
operating hours,
whichever
comes first
AXLES
X
Check and tighten wheel driving flange bolts.
Check security of axle mounting to frame.
Check differentials for oil leaks.
Check differential and drive axle
planetaries oil level.
X
X
X
BATTERY
Check specific gravity.
Check electrolyte level.
Check terminals and cables for
corrosion and tightness.
X
X
X
BRAKES - SERVICE
Check brake lines for leaks.
Check brakes for proper operation.
Inspect linings for wear.
Check brake pedal for excessive travel.
X
X
X
X
BRAKES - PARKING
Check linkage for wear.
Check linings for wear.
Check for proper operation.
X
X
X
COOLING SYSTEM
Check coolant level in radiator
Check anti-freeze protection.
Check coolant color and cleanliness.
Check all hoses and connections for leaks.
Check water pump inlet and outlet
connection for leaks.
Flush coolant system.
Check radiator for leaks, and mounting
for security.
Check thermostat operation, and housing
for tightness.
4-2
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
TABLE 3. PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE INSPECTION (Continued)
INSPECTION INTERVAL
Daily,
When
used
3 months or 300
operating hours,
whichever
comes first
Annual,
or 1200
operating hours,
whichever
comes first
ENGINE
Check cylinder head nuts.
Check manifold nuts and gasket.
Check tappet clearance and oil supply
to valve springs and seats.
Check air cleaner for condition of the
element.
Check and adjust water pump and
alternator belt tension.
X
X
X
X
X
ENGINE FUEL SYSTEM
Drain fuel filter.
Clean fuel filter element.
Drain fuel tank.
Check all fuel lines for leaks.
Check fuel supply gage, for accuracy.
Check fuel pump gaskets for leaks.
Visually check fuel tank for leaks.
Check accelerator linkage clevis pins and
cotter pins for wear or damage.
ENGINE
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
ALTERNATOR
Check ammeter to ensure that the
alternator is functioning correctly.
Check for worn brushes.
Check voltage regulator output.
X
X
X
ELECTRICAL
Check all connections.
Check for chafed or broken wires.
Check retaining clips and grommets.
Check operation of lights.
Clean exterior of lamps.
W ith engine running, check for normal operation
and indications of instruments.
X
X
X
X
X
X
4-3
TABLE 3. PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE INSPECTION (Continued)
INSPECTION INVERVAL
Daily,
When
used
3 months or 300
operating hours,
whichever
comes first
Annual,
or 1200
operating hours,
whichever
comes first
HYDRAULIC SYSTEM
Replace filter, inspect for proper operation
and leaks.
Check pump attaching bolts.
Check lines for damage and leaks.
Check oil level. Add oil if necessary.
Drain and refill.
Check all fittings and connections. Tighten if
necessary.
Check operation of hydraulic valves and
cylinders. Check for leakage.
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
TRANSMISSION/CONVERTER
Check oil level. (Must be done with engine
running or immediately after)
Check for oil leaks at lines, fittings, and gaskets.
Check converter pump pressures (both converter
charging and transmission clutch pressure).
Drain oil and refill.
Remove and clean sump screen.
X
X
X
X
X
WHEELS AND TIRES
Check tires for cuts or foreign objects.
Check hub bolt nuts.
Check bearings for looseness.
Check oil seals.
Cross-switch tires, if uneven tread is noted.
Remove wheel bearings and check bearings and
race for defects.
X
X
X
X
X
X
UPRIGHT AND CARRIAGE
Bleed lift cylinder.
Check lift chain adjustment.
Adjust roller clearances.
Check for damage or warped
upright rails on carriage.
Check forks for damage.
Check cylinders for leakage.
4-4
X
X
X
X
X
X
Figure 4-1. Lubrication Chart (Sheet 1 of 2)
4-5
Figure 4-1. Lubrication Chart (Sheet 2 of 2)
4-6
Change 1
Figure 4-2. Opening Side Panel
4-7. AIR CLEANER (cont.)
a. Refer to figure 4-3 and remove wing nut (1)
from center stud (2) and remove element case (3).
Wipe the inside of case clean.
b. Remove element from air cleaner base (see
figure 4-4).
c. Tap the element on a hard, flat surface to
shake loose dirt and dust accumulations. Use
compressed air (100 psi max.) to blow away dust
loosened by tapping the element. Blow out inside
of element first.
When using compressed air to clean
element, do not place air nozzle too close
to the element, as the air blast could
rupture the element. If the element cannot
be cleaned sufficiently to remove all dust
deposits, replacement of the element will
be required.
d. Check the element gasket for damage or
deterioration, and replace as required.
4-7
1. Wingnut
2. Center stud
3. Element case
4. Hydraulic sump breather
5. Sump filter cover plate
6. PCV valve
7. Master cylinder
filler cap
8. Filter cartridge
Figure 4-3. Engine Compartment, Right Side
e. Install new or cleaned element, replace case,
and tighten wingnut securely.
f. Check hose connections between the air
cleaner and carburetor to make certain all clamps
are tight and secure. Replace hose or clamps as
required to restore air-tight connections between
air cleaner and carburetor. See figure 4-5.
OIL
ENGINE
LUBRICATING
4-8.
filter
change and
CHANGE. Proper oil
best determined
intervals are
replacement
according to the severity of service and climatic
conditions in which the truck operates. In
4-8
moderate service, the filter need only be changed
every second oil change. In severe service, oil
change periods should be shortened and the filter
replaced at each change.
a. The engine should be run up to operating
temperature before oil is drained, so that the
sediment in the crankcase will be drained off with
the oil.
b. Remove the magnetic drain plug, and allow the
crankcase to drain thoroughly.
c. Clean the magnetic drain plug thoroughly and
reinstall.
Figure 4-4. Element and Case
Figure 4-5. Air Cleaner Hose Connections
d. Refer to figure 4-2 and remove filter cartridge
(8) by unscrewing from base. If cartridge gasket
sticks to filter base, peel off and discard gasket.
e. Install new filter cartridge and gasket. Coat
gasket with a thin film of clean engine oil before
installing cartridge. Screw cartridge down over base
until cartridge contacts gasket, then tighten l/2
turn farther.
f. Refill crankcase as shown in figure 4-6. Use
4-1/2 quarts of oil of the proper grade and weight.
Note
Do not use multi-viscosity oils unless the
proper weight of oil for temperature
conditions to be encountered is unavailable.
Figure 4-6. Crankcase Fill Procedure
g. Start engine and check oil filter for leaks. Run
engine at idle for five minutes, then shut off and
allow time for oil to drain back to crankcase.
h. Check oil level on dipstick (see figure 4-7) and
add oil as required to bring level to full mark on
dipstick.
of the spin-on throwaway type is provided to
prevent dirt or foreign material from circulating
through the system. Transmission fluid and filter
should be changed at each 500 hours of service, or
at time of any transmission repair.
4-9. TRANSMISSION/POWER
STEERING
HYDRAULIC SYSTEM. The transmission sump
provides oil for operation of the torque converter,
transmission clutches, and power steering. A filter
a. Operate the vehicle until normal operating
temperature is reached, then remove both
transmission drain plugs, shown in figures 4-8 and
4-9.
4-9
Figure 4-7. Checking Oil Level
Figure 4-8. Transmission Drain Plug
b. Clean drain plugs of all foreign material, using
Specification
solvent,
P-D-680, and dry
thoroughly.
c. Refer to figure 4-10 and remove transmission
sump screens. Check sealing O-rings inside screen
cover for damage or signs of aging, and replace as
required.
d. Clean sump screens with solvent, Specification
P-D-680, and dry with compressed air stream.
When drying, direct air stream outward from inside
the screen.
4-10
Figure 4-9. Transmission Dipstick, Breather
and Drain
e. Install screens and drain plugs, and tighten
securely to prevent leakage.
f. Refer to figure 4-11, and remove the
1. Shut off the engine and check fluid level at
axle adapter dipstick, and add fluid as required to
bring level to full mark.
4-10. HYDRAULIC SYSTEM. Under normal
service conditions the hydraulic sump should be
drained and the filter element changed after each
500 hours of operation. Severe service or adverse
conditions
will
operating
require
that
a
proportionately shorter interval be allowed
between services.
a. Lower carriage, and make certain that parking
brake is set. Shut engine off.
b. Remove cover plate to gain access to main
control valve pressure check point, as shown in
figure 4-13.
Figure 4-10. Sump Screen Removal
c. Remove pipe plug from the pressure check
point and connect a hose to the open port. The
hose should be of sufficient length to reach into a
10 gallon container placed on the floor to catch
the drained fluid, as shown in figure 4-13.
transmission/steering filter cartridge by unscrewing
from the filter base.
d. Place the free end of the hose into the
container and start the truck engine, allowing the
engine to run at idle speed (500-550 RPM) while
holding lift control lever back until the fluid
g. Clean off the filter base, and install a new filter
cartridge. Lightly coat the new gasket (supplied
with each cartridge) with a light film of clean
transmission fluid before installing.
running from the hose starts to bubble and spurt,
which indicates that the pump is beginning to draw
air. Shut off the engine immediately.
h. Screw the cartridge down until gasket just
contacts base, and tighten l/2 turn more. Do not
overtighten.
i. Change steering in-line filter (in pump suction
line) every 1000 hours.
j. Refill transmission through filler opening on
axle adapter, as shown in figure 4-12. Use only
Type “A”, Suffix “A”, Automatic Transmission
Fluid. (Containers must display a qualification
number prefixed by “AQ-ATF”.)
k. Operate engine at fast idle for approximately
four minutes to distribute lubricant throughout the
system and expel trapped air.
Do not operate engine after the oil supply
to the pump is exhausted. Running the
pump without adequate lubrication can
result in serious damage to the pump.
e. Reinstall pipe plug in the pressure check point
of main control valve.
f. Place a flat pan of sufficient capacity under the
sump tank drain plug as shown in figure 4-14. The
pan should hold about 2 gallons.
4-11
1. Fuel tank filler
2. Trammission/steering fluid filter
5. Distributor
6. Crankcase dipstick
3. Inching master cylinder
4. Ignition coil
8. Fuel filter
Figure 4-11. Engine Compartment, Left Side
4-12
Figure 4-14. Draining Sump Tank
Figure 412. Transmission Refill Procedure
Figure 4-15. Removing Sump Tank Cover
g. Unscrew the sump tank dram plug and allow
the tank to drain thoroughly.
h. Remove filler cap breather from top of sump
tank cover. Replace breather if it appears dirty or
clogged with foreign matter.
i. Remove three nuts retaining the sump tank
cover, and disconnect suction hose by loosening
clamp as shown in figure 4-15.
j. Remove the suction pipe, cover and filter
Figure 4-13. Draining Hydraulic System from
Main Control Valve
housing assembly from the sump tank. Figure 4-16
shows internal details of the filter assembly.
4-13
Figure 4-16. Sump Filter Assembly
4-14
Figure 4-19. Sump Tank Refi Procedure
Figure 4-17. Element Retainer Nuts
Figure 4-20. Sump Breather Dipstick
Figure 4-18. Filter Disassembled
k. Remove the three filter element retainer nuts
from the retainer plate as shown in figure 4-17.
1. Separate element retainer, element, and
housing as shown in figure 4-18. Discard old
element and clean housing and retainer thoroughly.
m. Install a new filter element, inserting into
housing so that seal on top of element will contact
the closed upper end of housing.
n. Secure element in position by installing
retainer plate and three retainer nuts. Reinstall
filter assembly into sump tank and tighten clamp
on suction pipe.
o. Install sump cover plate, securing with three
nuts on cover studs. Tighten nuts to 7 lb./ft.
p. Refill sump tank, as shown in figure 4-19, with
7-l/4 gallons of hydraulic fluid per specification
shown in lubrication chart, figure 4-1.
q. Start engine and
several times, checking
breather dipstick (see
required to bring level
operate hydraulic controls
for leaks. Check oil level on
figure 4-20) and add oil as
to full mark on dipstick.
4-16
Figure 4-21. Fuel Filler Cap and Filter Screen
4-11. FUEL SYSTEM SERVICE. The fuel system
should be checked periodically for leakage at tube
fittings and hose connections, and the fuel filter
replaced, according to the schedule established in
figure 4-l.
a. Refer to figure 4-21 and remove filler cap and
filter screen with o-ring seal. Check condition of
filter screen and clean as required.
b. Check that the o-ring seal around neck of filter
screen is intact and in otherwise good condition.
c. Make certain that filter screen is properly in
place before replacing filler cap.
d. The fuel filter is mounted adjacent to the fuel
pump and is accessible from the left side of the
engine compartment.
Figure 4-22. Coolant Level Indicator
f. Remove filter element and housing gasket, and
discard. Clean filter element housing thoroughly.
g. Position the new element in the filter element
housing. Coat the new gasket with a light film of
engine oil and place gasket in position on filter
element housing.
h. Place housing under filter cover, with element
in place, and snap wire bail over bottom of housing
to retain assembly.
A small amount of fuel spillage will result
when the filter housing is removed. Make
certain that no spark or open flame exists
in the work area, and also that the engine is
sufficiently cool to prevent the possibility
of igniting the gasoline fumes resulting
from the fuel spillage.
e. Unhook the wire bail from underneath the
filter element housing and separate housing from
filter cover as shown in figure 4-21.
4-16
4-12. COOLING SYSTEM SERVICE.
This truck is equipped with a pressurized
cooling system. Use extreme care when
removing the radiator cap when the engine
has recently been operating. The sudden
release of pressure from the system can
d . C h e c k r a d i a t o r dd w a t e r p u m p g a s k e t
surfaces and hose connections for leakage.
e. Blow out debris and foreign material from
radiator core by directing a compressed air stream
through the radiator from outside the engine
compartment.
413. COOLING SYSTEM DRAIN AND REFILL.
a. Dram all coolant from engine cylinder block
and radiator. (See figure 4-23 for cylinder block
drain location.)
Note
Figure 4-23. Cylinder Block Drain Location
cause sudden boiling of the coolant and a
dangerous steam flash. Always loosen the
cap slowly and allow the pressure to vent
off slowly before removing cap.
a. Remove radiator cap slowly, and check
coolant level. The coolant level should be checked
with the engine shut off.
b. Make certain coolant level reaches the coolant
level tap inside the filler neck, 2-3/4 inches below
the top of the filler as shown in figure 4-22, but
never higher.
Never pour cold water or cold anti-freeze
solution into the radiator of an overheated
engine. Allow the engine to cool and avoid
the danger of cracking the cylinder head or
block. Keep the engine running while
adding water or anti-freeze. When using
ethylene-glycol
(permanent-type)
anti-freeze, the solution must contain a
minimum of 40% water.
c. Use only clean water, or clean water and
anti-freeze solution, in refilling the radiator. Add 1
ounce per gallon of soluble oil to the coolant. If
the truck is likely to be exposed to temperatures
lower than 32°F, check anti-freeze protection level
using a hydrometer.
Draining of cooling system is most effective
when the engine has just been operating, as
the combination of heat and circulation of
the water will hold some of the sediment in
suspension, to be drained off with the
coolant. Disconnecting the lower radiator
hose will allow larger particles of sediment
and scale to be drained off.
b. Close cylinder block and radiator drains and
refill cooling system, adding cleaning compound,
Military Specification MIL-C-10597.
c. Operate engine for approximately 15 minutes,
then completely drain the system and flush with
clean water.
d. Refill cooling system with clean water or
anti-freeze solution, to the level shown in figure
4-22.
e. Operate engine and check for leaks at radiator,
water pump gasket surfaces, and hose connections.
Recheck coolant level as engine will expel trapped
air while operating.
f. Check radiator cap gasket surfaces, and replace
cap if sealing surface appears cracked, broken or
deteriorated. See figure 4-24.
g. Inspect pressure cap for freedom of operation.
Pressure caps employ a spring loaded, rubber-faced
valve which presses against a seat in the radiator
top tank. Pressure caps employ either a vacuum
valve held against its seat under spring pressure, or
4-17
Figure 4-25. Pressure Testing Radiator Cap
temperatures, I f t h e t h e r m o s t a t i s s u s pected of being faulty, it may be tested
and/or replaced as follows:
C A U T I O N
Figure 4-24. Radiator Cap Sealing Surface
a weighted vacuum valve which hangs open until
forced closed by a surge of vapor or coolant. Check
to be sure components are free to operate.
Note
If a new cap is required, always install a cap
of the same type and pressure rating.
h. The radiator pressure relief valve can be tested
for proper operation by means of the cooling
system tester shown in figure 4-25. This device is
manufactured by the Stant Manufacturing Co., and
comes equipped with adapters so that it can be
used to check the radiator and the radiator cap.
i. Inspect for dented or clogged overflow pipe. To
remove clogged material, run a flexible wire
through pipe until obstruction is removed. When a
pressure cap opens the sudden surge of vapor or
liquid must pass thru the overflow pipe. If the pipe
is dented or clogged, the pressure developed by the
obstruction may cause damage to radiator or hoses.
AND
TEST
4-14. THERMOSTAT
REPLACEMENT. An engine which runs too hot or
too cold will not perform properly, will lack
power, and create more maintenance problems
than
an
engine
operating
at
the
proper
4-18
Never run the engine with the thermostat
removed.
Removal of thermostat will allow
water to bypass the radiator and circulate
only through the engine, causing serious
overheating and resultant engine damage.
a.
Drain the cooling system as outlined
in paragraph 4-13.
b.
Remove the bolts which retain the
water outlet elbow to the cylinder head
and thermostat housing.
NOTE
Mark or tag bolts during removal, so that
they may be installed in their original
holes at time of assembly.
C.
Remove thermostat by pulling out
from housing.
d.
Hand the thermostat in a pan or
glass breaker, so that no part of the
thermostat touches the bottom or sides
of the container, see figure 4-17.
Also suspend in the water a thermometer
of known accuracy, having a range of at
least 250° F.
e.
H e a t t h e w a t e r t o 1 5 8 ° F . , and
observe action of bellows in the thermostat as water termperature is raised
an additional 10 F. at a time, pausing
at 168° F., 178° F, and 188° F . f o r o n e
minute to check if thermostat is
beginning to open.
CHECK FOR:
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
Figure 4-17.
Thermostat
Test
f.
If thermostat starts to open
before 175 F. or doesn't open until
185° F., it is defective and must be
replaced.
thermostat should be fully
o p e n a t 2 0 2 F.
Using gasket sealer on both
g.
sides, affix both water outlet elbow
gaskets to water outlet elbow flanges.
NOTE
Scrape or otherwise remove all residue
of old gaskets and sealer before installing new gaskets.
h.
Position thermostat in bore of
water pump flange, and install water
outlet elbow, securing with capscrews previously removed.
1.
Torque attaching screws at
water pump and cylinder head flanges
to 20 ft./lbs. torque.
Whenever a malVISCOUS FAN:
4-15.
function of the viscous, fan is suspected, always make sure all other
parts of the cooling system are in
good working order first.
Low coolant level.
Broken or loose fan belt.
Defective radiator cap.
Broken or leaking hoses.
Inacurrate temperature sensing
unit.
Radiator core fins block by
debris.
Stuck or broken thermostat.
Sludged radiator core.
Worn water pump.
Transmission problems.
If all the above are checked out as not
the cause of overheating the engine,
then follow these steps for checking
the viscous fan.
a.
The engine should be relatively
cold (turned off for at least four hours.)
b.
Start engine and set throttle at
about 2000 RPM minimum.
This should be
done in a warm area.
C.
It should be noted that the fan
speed may be high upon initial engine
start, but will reduce in speed within
a few minutes time.
d.
Within ten minutes there should
be enough heat generated (180 degrees
F. air temp at bi-metal coil) to cause
the fan speed to increase.
e.
To make specific measurements
of coil air temperature and fan speed,
requires some reliable equipment. It
i s p o s s i b l e , with experience, to make
a judgment in this area without measuring equipment.
f.
If it is obvious that the
viscous fan clutch did engage and
increase the fan speed, then the
clutch can be considered to be
operating satisfactorily.
4-19
If on the other hand it is obvious
9.
that the viscous fan clutch did not engage
and increase the fan speed, the clutch can
be considered defective due to "low fan
speed at operating temperature".
F i n a l l y , a movement of the fan
h.
blade in excess of l/4", exclusive of
fan blade deflection, usually means a
mechanical failure.
4-15A. FAN AND ALTERNATOR BELT ADJUSTMENT.
The adjustment of the alternator drive
belt should be checked periodically and
if found to be excessively
adjusted
Too tight adjusted
tight or loose.
belts cause early bearing failure in
Belts that are too
the alternator.
loose cause engine overheating and
low battery charge.
Check belt tension by applying
finger pressure (approximately 25 lbs.
f o r c e ) t o p o i n t "A" shown in figure
The belt should deflect l/2 to
4-19.
3/4 inch under the pressure.
Loosen the adjusting bolt and the
b.
two mounting bolts shown in figure 4-29.
Move alternator away from engine
C.
to tighten the belt, or toward engine
When correct
to loosen belt tension.
tension is obtained by the method described in step a., tighten the adjusting bolt (4 foot/pounds) and the
mounting bolts (7 foot/pounds).
Figure 4-29. Alternator Belt Adjustment
4-16.
BRAKE SYSTEM MAINTENANCE
4-17.
PEDAL CHECK AND FREE TRAVEL
ADJUSTMENT.
The following checks
should be made at each 50-hour maintenance interval and appropriate adjustments made when necessary.
a.
Depress each pedal (brake and
inching) and hold under pressure for
at least ten seconds.
Pedal must be
solid, not spongy feeling, and no
drift or leak-down should be evident.
C A U T I O N
When tightening belt tension, apply
pressure against the stator laminations
between the end frames and not against
either end frame.
When adjusting for
deflection, pull alternator by hand.
Exercise caution
Do not use a pry bar.
when adjusting belts.
Belts adjusted
too loose will result in belt wear and
high engine temperature due to belt
slippage.
4-20
b.
Hold a ruler against the floor
board so that the pedal released height
can be measured as shown in figure 4-30.
C.
Push pedal down by hand until
resistance is felt in the master cylinder.
This initial travel should be
no more or less than l/8 inch.
d.
Adjust free travel by means of
the push rod nut shown in figure 4-30.
Figure 4-30. Pedal Adjustments
Pedal up-height must conform to
e.
the dimensions shown in figure 4-30.
Adjustment is made at the stop screw
shown in the illustration.
If pedal travel exceeds the
f .
approximate "low limit" shown in the
illustration, brake fluid is low, air
is trapped in the brake system, or
brake linings are worn and require
replacement.
4-18.
MASTER CYLINDER CHECKS. The
master cylinder should be checked
whenever pedal travel adjustments are
Proceed as follows:
made.
Check the fluid level within
a.
the master cylinder,
The fluid level
should be within 1/4 inch from the
top of the filler neck.
Use only
SAE 70 R3 Heavy Duty Hydraulic Brake
Fluid, when adding fluid.
Check the master cylinder filler
b.
cap vent hole.
This vent must be open
at all times, to allow proper fluid
movement within the master cylinder. If
necessary, use a fine wire or small drill
to clear the vent of any obstruction.
See Figure 4-31 for vent location.
C.
Always make certain that pedal
adjustments are properly made, as improper pedal up-height will cause the
internal porting in the master cylinder
to be blocked so that fluid will be
trapped, under pressure, in the brake
This fluid can hold the linings
lines.
in constant contact with the drums,
causing excessive lining wear and fuel
consumption.
4-21
Figure 4-31. Master Cylinder Cross Section
4-19. BLEEDING BRAKE SYSTEM. Whenever
the brake system is opened for any reason, such as
repairs to master cylinder, wheel cylinder, valves or
tubing, air will enter the brake system and must be
expelled through the bleeding procedure outlined
in the following paragraphs. Pressure bleeding, as
outlined in paragraph 4-20, is the preferred method
if the proper equipment is available.
4-20. PRESSURE BLEEDING. Make certain that
the pressure bleeding equipment will hold enough
of the right type of brake fluid to do the job
(about 2 quarts). Do not intermix different types
of brake fluid, and never reuse fluid that has been
drained from the brake system.
4-22
Make certain that pressure bleeder tank is
certified for use under pressures exceeding
30 psi before using.
a. Clean all dirt, grease, etc., from around the
master cylinder reservoir cap on both the brake
and inching master cylinder.
b. Remove the master cylinder reservoir cap and
fill reservoir with SAE 70 R3 Heavy Duty
Hydraulic Brake Fluid to within l/4 inch from the
top of the reservoir.
c. Fill the pressure bleeder reservoir with about 2
quarts of the same fluid, and pressurize the tank to
not more than 30 psi.
Figure 4-32. Brake System Bleed Points
d. Place a flat pan under the axle adapter to
catch brake fluid spillage, and connect the pressure
bleeder line to the brake master cylinder. Open the
pressure bleeder valve.
e. Refer to figure 4-32 for identification of the
various bleed points within the brake system.
f. With the bleeder hook-up completed as shown
in figure 4-33, open bleed points B and C (fittings
shown in figure 4-34) and allow fluid to flow from
loosened fittings until no further bubbles appear in
the flow. Tighten fittings securely when all air is
expelled.
g. When bleeding wheel cylinders (bleed points D
and E), attach a small hose to the bleeder screw on
the axle adapter, submerge the other end of the
hose into a jar of clean brake fluid. Hold the jar at
a point higher than the bleeder screw, and open the
bleeder screw, allowing fluid to flow into the jar
until no more bubbles can be seen in the flow as
shown in figure 4-35.
4-23
Figure 4-33. Pressure Bleeder Hook-up
h. When air bubbles stop coming into the
container, close the bleeder fitting and remove the
k. When bleeding operation is completed, fill
both cylinders to within l/4 inch from the top.
tube. Close bleeder tank valve.
i. Disconnect bleeder tank line from master
cylinder and connect it to the inching master
cylinder.
j. Follow the same procedure as outlined above,
but start at bleeding point “A,” shown in figure
4-36.
4-24
Always relieve pressure from bleeder tank
when bleeding operation is completed.
4-21. MANUAL BLEEDING. Manual bleeding
Figure 4-34. Axle Adapter Bleed Points
Figure 4-35. Bleeder Jar
Figure 4-36. Inching Valve Bleed Point
4-25
m a y b e p e r f o r m e d when pressure bleeding
equipment is unavailable. Manual bleeding will
require two men, one to depress and hold the
brake pedal while the other opens and closes the
bleeder valves. Proceed as outlined under pressure
bleeding,
but observe the following special
instructions:
4-22. It must be remembered that the brake pedal
should be depressed slowly and held until the line
connections or bleeder screws are securely
tightened. This prevents the possibility of air being
drawn into the system during the bleeding
operation. Check the master cylinder reservoir level
often during manual bleeding and keep within l/4
inch from the top.
4-23. With filler cap off the master cylinder,
depress and release brake pedal. A small
displacement of fluid should be noticed in the
cylinder reservoir. If this happens, the brake pedal
(upon being released) is returning the master
cylinder piston to its normal position to open a
master cylinder port. This port must be open.
4-24. If fluid is not displaced upon releasing the
brake pedal, a pedal adjustment is required.
4-25. BRAKE ADJUSTMENTS.
4-26. When the brake system is operating
properly, the cam like action of the reaction arm
allows self-adjustment for the total thickness of the
brake linings, without any noticeable increase in
brake pedal free travel. The self-adjustment feature
eliminates the need for manual adjustment of the
brakes.
Note
The parking brake must be capable of
holding truck, with rated capacity load, on
a 15% grade, If a major adjustment as
described in paragraph 4-30 will not restore
proper operation, the parking brake linings
should be replaced. See Section V.
a. Fully apply hand brake, moving lever from full
forward to full rearward position. Cable tension
should be sufficient to require a definite effort in
pulling the lever over the center position.
b. With hand brake set, start truck engine and
place directional control lever in forward position.
c. Depress engine throttle until engine runs up to
maximum stall speed (approximately 1500 RPM).
Truck should not move or creep.
d. If either of the above tests indicate a need for
adjustment, perform the minor adjustment first
and recheck brake action. Then, if necessary, a
major adjustment should be performed.
4-29. MINOR ADJUSTMENT. Minor adjustment
to the parking brake linkage is made by placing the
lever in the full forward (released) position, then
turning the knurled knob on the end of the lever
several turns clockwise. After making this
adjustment, recheck brake action as described
above. If necessary, repeat adjustment.
Note
If brake effectiveness cannot be restored
within the range of travel of the lever knob,
a major adjustment must be performed.
4-27. When the brake linings become worn beyond
their designed limits, there will be a noticeable
change in the brake pedal effort required to stop
the machine or, brakes will become noisy during
application. If either of these conditions exist, the
axle ends should be removed so an inspection of
the brake linings can be made to determine their
further serviceability. If lining replacement appears
necessary, refer to Section V.
a. Release hand brake lever, returning lever to the
full forward position.
4-28. PARKING BRAKE CHECK AND ADJUSTMENT. Periodic checks to determine efficiency of
the parking brake are to be made as described
below.
b. Rotate knurled knob on the end of the lever
counterclockwise as far as possible, and pull lever
rearward to the applied position.
4-26
4-30. MAJOR ADJUSTMENT. When minor
adjustment is not sufficient to restore brake
efficiency, a major adjustment should be
performed as outlined below:
Figure 4-37. Parking Brake and Linkage
c. Refer to figure 4-37 and locate the adjuster
nut. Turn this nut clockwise until all slack is
removed from the brake cable.
d. Check feel of brake lever to see if some
tension can be felt by moving the lever. Leave lever
in the applied (rearward) position.
g. Check brake tension by following the
procedures of paragraph 4-28. If additional
adjustments do not restore full brake effectiveness,
replace the parking brake linings (see Section V).
4-31. ELECTRICAL SYSTEM.
e. Turn adjusting nut on brake linkage to increase
cable tension until the bellcrank on the cable
bracket can be seen to move upward. Continue
adjustment until bellcrank has moved upward the
full extent of its travel. Check by pressing upward
on the lever by hand.
4-32. BATTERY MAINTENANCE. The battery is
the heart of the electrical system. It does not
produce electricity, but merely stores it, through
chemical action, until such time as it is needed. In
order for the battery to render its maximum
service, it must be properly cared for, according to
the following instructions.
f. Release hand brake lever to the full forward
position. Rotate knurled adjustment knob on the
end of the lever several turns clockwise to place
additional tension on the brake cable.
a. Check battery electrolyte level frequently,
especially in hot weather. Maintain the level at l/4
to l/2 inch over the top of the plates by adding
distilled water, when necessary.
4-27
Note
Do not add distilled water to electrolyte
immediately after charging the battery.
connections
battery
cable
d. Check
all
periodically to make sure they are clean and tight.
e. Remove any corrosion from battery terminals
by scrubbing with a solution of baking soda, or
ammonia, and water.
f. After cleaning, coat the exterior of the cable
terminals with a light film of Vaseline to retard
further corrosion.
4-33. BATTERY TESTS.
Figure 4-38. Checking Battery Specific Gravity
Never allow sparks or open flame in the
area when checking the battery. Storage
batteries produce hydrogen, an explosive
gas, as a normal by-product of operation.
b. Hydrometer readings should be used to
determine the battery state of charge. This is
particularly true in cold weather, as a partially
discharged battery may freeze at temperatures up
to 20°F.
c. Take readings on the hydrometer as shown in
figure 4-38. Battery will need charging if the
specific gravity reads 1.225 (or less) at 75°F.
Specific gravity should be 1.265 or greater
if
battery is exposed to freezing
temperatures. If machine is operated in
tropical climates where no freezing weather
is encountered, the full charge specific
gravity may be lowered from 1.375 to
1.225 by diluting the electrolyte with
distilled water.
4-28
4-34. LIGHT LOAD TEST. A defective battery or
a discharged battery may be found by performing
the following “Light Load Test.”
a. Place an electrical load on the battery by
cranking the engine for three seconds. If it starts,
turn the ignition off immediately.
b. Place a 10 ampere load across the battery
terminals for one minute. This will condition the
battery so an accurate voltage comparison test can
be made between cells.
c. After one minute, and with the 10 ampere
load still on the battery, check the individual cells
with an expanded scale voltmeter.
Note
Checking individual cell voltage on newer
batteries with the completely enclosed
“hard-top” case is not possible. Use the
tests described in paragraph 4-35 to
determine battery condition.
d. Place the positive voltmeter prod on the
positive side of the cell and the other prod on the
negative side. A good battery, sufficiently charged
will read 1.95 volts or more on each cell with a
difference of less than 0.05 volt between highest
and lowest cell.
e. If cells read both above and below 1.95 volts
read 12+ volts. If reading is below 12 volts, battery
is defective or under-charged.
f. Reconnect coil wire to distributor, and start
and accelerate the engine to obtain a reading of
alternator output. Charging system output should
be at least 12-l/2 volts. If not at least 12-l/2 volts,
then the problem is in the charging system.
4-36. ENGINE PERFORMANCE CHECK. At
l000-hour
maintenance
interval,
every
the
following check of engine performance should be
made to determine whether engine is in need of a
tune-up or is out of adjustment.
Figure 4-39. Battery Test Hook-up
and the difference between highest and lowest cell
is less than 0.05 volt, battery is good but requires
charging.
a. Before making check, run engine until unit is
at operating temperature. This is important as the
transmission oil temperature should be 200 degrees
F. and the engine water jacket should be at
operating temperatures. Apply parking brake.
g. If all cells read less than 1.95 volts, battery is
too low to test accurately. Boost-charge and repeat
light load test.
b. With the engine operating at idle and the
transmission in NEUTRAL, check the fluid level
on the dipstick. Fill if necessary to the FULL mark
on the dipstick, using Type “A”, Suffix “A”
Automatic Transmission Fluid (Clark Part Number
879803; fluid containers must display a
qualification number prefixed by “AQ-ATF”).
4-35. STARTING/CHARGING SYSTEM TESTS.
The following test will help in localizing any
problem within the alternator, starter or battery.
c. With a tachometer, check engine for governed
speed at full throttle. The unloaded engine RPM
should be set at 2350.
a. Disconnect the high tension coil wire from the
distributor cap. Clip a jumper lead onto the coil
wire terminal and ground the jumper to the engine
block or ground strap.
d. Check the governed engine speed with partial
load. With engine at full throttle and the tilt lever
in full backward tilt, momentarily hold the tilt
lever back to load the engine. With the engine
loaded in this manner, the approximate engine
RPM should be 2200.
f. If any cell reads 1.95 volts or more and there is
a difference of 0.05 volt or more between the
highest and lowest cell, the battery is defective.
b. Hook up a voltmeter across the battery
terminals as shown in figure 4-39.
c. Depress the accelerator pedal fully (to obtain
higher compression) and crank the engine over by
engaging the starter for a few seconds, while
observing voltmeter reading.
d. During cranking, voltmeter should read at least
9.6 volts. If reading is low, a problem exists in the
cranking system (battery, starter, or cables).
e. Immediately after cranking, voltmeter should
Prolonged stalling of the converter can
cause internal damage to the converter.
Stall converter only long enough to attain
the peak RPM reading - maximum 30
seconds.
e. With a capacity load on the forks, check for
normal stall RPM by positioning machine against
4-29
an immovable object, or by applying a correctly
adjusted parking brake equipped with good brake
linings. Place the machine in gear and accelerate
engine to full throttle. Normal stall is 1450 to
1600 RPM.
f. If readings taken are not reasonably close to
those listed above, appropriate repairs/adjustments
should be made. Refer to Engine Tune-Up
Procedures outlined in paragraph 4-37.
4-37. ENGINE TUNE-UP.
Engine tune-up is the orderly and systematic
process of checking the engine and accessory
equipment to maintain or restore satisfactory
engine performance. Engine tune-up must be
accomplished semi-annually and more frequently if
engine performance indicates the need for these
services. Perform engine tune-up as outlined in the
following paragraphs after checking the following
items:
a. Air Cleaner: be sure air cleaner has received
proper service. Air cleaner must be installed before
making engine tune-up.
b. Fuel Pump: be sure the fuel pump bowl and
strainer has been properly serviced and the fuel
pump is operating satisfactorily.
c. Torque Values for Threaded Fasteners:
Engines have many studs, bolts, screws, and nuts of
special material and varying sizes and it is very
important to see that all such fasteners are torqued
to the proper values in order that the engine will be
restored to its original efficiency. Refer to the
chart below for torque ratings of various fasteners.
Figure 4-40. Cylinder Head Torque Check Sequence
4-38. CYLINDER HEAD FASTENERS TORQUE
CHECK. Remove valve rocker arm cover from
cylinder head and check all fasteners for correct
torque. Refer to table in the preceeding paragraph
for proper torque values. Check cylinder head
gasket for leakage.
The sequence listed in illustration (Figure
4-40) must be followed. All hex capscrews
or nuts must be tightened evenly and
torqued in accordance with limits listed in
paragraph 4-37.
Check intake and exhaust manifold fasteners for
proper torque and check for evidence of gasket
leakage .
3/3
7/16
1/2
9/16
5/6
35-40
70-85
100-l10
130-140
145-155
5-20
25-30
40-50
50-60
50-60
60-70
Gear Covers, Pumps,
Front and Rear End Plates
15-20
25-30
50-55
80-90
Oil Pans
12-16
12-16
Size (Diameter)
5/16
APPLICATION
Cylinder Head
Manifold
NOTE: All above values expressed in foot-pounds torque.
4-30
Note
Before adjusting the valve clearance, run
the engine at approximately 1200 RPM, for
a minimum of 30 minutes in order to
temperatures.
Then
stabilize
engine
proceed as follows:
a. Reduce the engine speed to approximately 650 RPM, then shut engine off.
Apply parking brake.
Figure 4-41. Valve Arrangement
b. Remove the rocker arm cover hold down nuts.
c. Jar the rocker arm cover with the heel of your
hand or a soft leather hammer to loosen the gasket
from the cylinder head.
d. Remove the rocker arm cover.
e. “Bump” the starter and crank the engine until
the No. 4 (farthest from fan end) exhaust valve is
fully up and intake valve is just starting its
downward stroke, At this point the No. 1 valves
should both be up. See figure 4-41.
Figure 4-42. Setting Valve Lash
4 - 3 9 . VALVE
CLEARANCE
(LASH)
ADJUSTMENT. Maintaining the proper valve lash
setting is one of the most important factors
relating to excellent engine performance and long
life. Valve lash that is adjusted too tight causes the
valves to operate too early and close too late. This
does not allow the valve to remain on the seat long
enough to cool properly and results in early valve
warping and burning. When the valves are allowed
to operate with too loose a setting, they open too
late and close too early. When this condition exists,
the ramp on the camshaft lobe, which slows down
the closing of the valve before it contacts the seat,
is not allowed to perform its function. Therefore,
the valve strikes the seat while traveling at a very
high speed, resulting in increased valve and
camshaft wear and possible breakage of the valve
due to the high impact force.
f. Loosen the lock nut and the adjusting screw on
the rocker arm stud and with a flat feeler gauge
adjust the intake valve clearance to have 0.010
inch. Adjust the exhaust valve to have 0.020 inch
clearance - engine hot (normal water jacket
temperature). See figure 4-42.
g. Now tighten the lock nut and continue with
the other valves by cranking the engine until No. 3
exhaust valve is up and intake valve is just starting
down. Now check and adjust No. 2 cylinder valve
clearance as outlined in steps e, f and g above.
h. Crank engine until No. 1 exhaust valve is fully
up and intake valve is just starting down. Check
and adjust No. 4 cylinder valve clearance.
i. Finally, crank engine until No. 2 exhaust valve
is fully up and intake valve is just starting down.
Check and adjust valve clearance for No. 3
cylinder.
j. After all adjustments are made, clean the
gasket surfaces, install a new valve cover gasket,
and replace the valve cover.
4-31
g . A r e a d i n g o f m o r e t h a n 1 0 p o u n d s above
normal indicates carbon or lead deposits in the
cylinder.
h . A r e a d i n g o f m o r e t h a n 1 0 p o u n d s below
normal indicates leakage at the head gasket, rings,
or valves.
i. A low even compression in two adjacent
cylinders indicates a head gasket leak. This should
be checked before condemning the rings or valves.
Figure 4-43. Compression Check
A cylinder
4-40. COMPRESSION CHECK.
compression test aids in determining the condition
of the valves, rings and head gasket.
a. Be sure the battery is good. Operate the engine
until normal operating temperature is reached.
Turn the ignition switch off. Loosen the spark
plugs, blow out any dirt in the spark plug wells,
then remove the plugs.
b. Set the accelerator in the wide open position
and be sure the choke is wide open.
c. Remove the coil high tension lead in the
distributor, and ground it securely to the engine.
Install a compression gauge in No. 1 cylinder.
Crank the engine until the gauge registers a
maximum reading and record the reading and note
the number of compression strokes required to
obtain this reading. See figure 4-43.
d. Repeat the test on each cylinder, cranking the
same number of times that were needed to obtain
the maximum reading on No. 1 cylinder.
e. During the compression test, the indicated
pressure should rise evenly on each succeeding
stroke until the maximum reading is obtained. If
the pressure rise is erratic, or fails to rise on any
stroke, a sticky or stuck valve is indicated.
f. The pressure should be approximately 150-200
pounds. However, the compression of all cylinders
should be uniform within 20 pounds.
4-32
j. To determine whether the rings or the valves
are at fault, squirt the equivalent of a tablespoon
of heavy oil into the combustion chamber and
repeat the compression test. The oil will
temporarily seal leakage past the rings. If the same
reading is obtained, the rings are satisfactory, but
the valves are leaking. If the compression has
increased 10 pounds or more over the original
reading, it indicates there is leakage past the rings.
4-41. SPARK PLUG CHECK. Under normal
conditions, these spark plugs will give long life
performance with the normal maintenance listed in
this manual. The spark plugs should be cleaned,
tested and gapped at the recommended intervals.
a. Loosen the spark plugs one full turn, then
blow any accumulation of dirt out of the spark
plug wells before completing the removal.
b. Examine firing end of plug carefully and
compare findings with figure 4-44. Careful analysis
of spark plug deposits can reveal a great deal about
engine operating conditions.
c. Remove carbon and other deposits from the
threads with a stiff wire brush. Any deposits will
retard the heat-flow from the plug to the cylinder
head,
causing
spark plug overheating and
pre-ignition.
d. Clean any heavy carbon deposits from the
inside of the plugs with a thin-bladed knife, then
finish cleaning them with an abrasive-type cleaner.
Use the cleaner sparingly, as excessive abrasive
blasting may damage the porcelain around the
center electrode. If the porcelain is badly glazed or
eroded, replace the spark plugs.
Figure 4-44. Spark Plug Inspection Chart
4-33
e. After cleaning, examine the plug carefully for
cracked or broken insulator, badly eroded
electrodes and other signs of failure. Replace as
required.
f. Clean the electrode surfaces with a small file.
Dress the electrodes to secure flat parallel surfaces
on both the center and Bide electrode.
g. Adjust the spark plug gap to: Standard 0.025
inch, Resistor 0.035, by bending only the outside
electrode. Use a round wire-type gauge to check
the gap. If old spark plugs are reused, install with
new gaskets. Torque to 35 pounds/feet.
Note
Do not overtighten spark plugs, the gap
may change considerably due to distortion
of the plug outer shell, or the insulator may
be cracked.
4-42. SPARK PLUG WIRING REPLACEMENT.
Whenever an examination of the high tension
wiring reveals
cracks, c h a f e d a r e a s , b u r n e d
insulation or other deterioration, the wiring set
should be replaced. Such poor insulation leads to
rapid spark plug fouling and misfiring due to
current leakage.
When removing the wires from the spark plugs grasp, twist, and pull on the moulded cap only. Do
not pull on the wire because the wire connections
inside the cap may become separated or the
weather seal may be damaged.
Removal: Disconnect wires at plugs and at the
distributor cap. Remove coil high tension lead.
Installation: Connect wires to proper plugs. Insert
ends of wires in the correct Sockets in distributor
cap. Be sure wires are all the way down into their
sockets and that they are held firmly in position.
The No. 1 socket is identified on the cap. Install
wires in a clockwise direction in the firing order
l-2-4-3, starting at No. 1 socket. NOW install coil
high tension lead. Push all weather seals into
position.
4-43. IGNITION COIL CHECKS. Check the coil
for secure mounting. Wipe the coil with a damp
cloth moistened in Stoddard type solvent and
4-34
check for cracks in the coil case. Check coil
terminals for tight connections and proper
polarity.
4-44. DISTRIBUTOR CHECKS. Disconnect spark
plug wiring at the distributor cap, remove
distributor cap and make the following inspection:
a. Distributor Cap: Clean the distributor cap with
a soft bristle brush and Stoddard type cleaning
solvent. Dry the cap with compressed air. Inspect
the cap for cracks burned contacts, permanent
carbon tracks or dirt or corrosion in the sockets.
Replace the cap if it is defective.
b. Rotor: Clean the rotor with a soft bristle
brush and a Stoddard type cleaning solvent. The
rotor should be dried with compressed air. Inspect
the rotor for cracks or burning. Replace the rotor
if it is defective.
c. Check the contact dwell. If the contact dwell
is not within specifications, adjust the breaker
points.
d. Check the breaker arm spring tension and
adjust it if necessary.
4-45. CENTRIFUGAL ADVANCE. The spark
advance is checked to determine if the ignition
timing advances in proper relation to engine speed
and load.
a. Connect the electrical leads of a distributor
test set to the distributor. Do not connect the
vacuum line to the diaphragm. Set the tester for 0
degree advance at 300 RPM.
b. Operate the distributor in the direction of
rotation and slowly increase the RPM to the setting
specified for the first advance reading listed in the
specifications.
c. If the correct advance is not indicated at this
RPM, stop the distributor and bend one spring
adjustment bracket to change its tension. Bend the
adjustment bracket away from the distributor shaft
to decrease advance (increase spring tension) and
toward the shaft to increase advance (decrease
spring tension). After the adjustment is made,
identify the bracket that is bent.
Figure 4-45. Breaker Point Inspection
d. After an adjustment has been made to one
spring, check the minimum advance point again.
e. Operate the distributor at the specified RPM
to give an advance just below the maximum. If this
advance is not to specifications, stop the
distributor and bend the other spring bracket to
give the correct advance.
4-46. BREAKER POINT INSPECTION. During
the tune-up procedure, breaker points should be
examined as outlined below, aligned and/or
replaced, as necessary.
a. If points are pitted, burned or worn to an
unserviceable condition, install a new set of points.
b. The normal color of contact points should be
a light gray. If the contact point surfaces are black,
it is usually caused by oil vapor, or grease from the
cam. If they are blue, the cause is usually excessive
heating due to improper alignment, high resistance
or open condenser circuit.
c. Badly pitted points may be caused by a
defective or improper condenser capacity. See
figure 4-45.
Figure 4-46. Breaker Point Metal Transfer
d. If the condenser capacity is too high, the
crater (depression) will form in the positive
contact. If the condenser capacity is too low, the
4-35
Figure 4-47. Filing Contact Points
crater will form in the negative contact. See figure
4-46.
e. For a temporary repair, dress the contact
points with a few even strokes using a clean
fine-cut contact file. Do not attempt to remove all
roughness or dress the point surfaces down
smooth. See figure 4-47.
Never use emery cloth or sandpaper to
clean points as particles will be imbedded
in the points and cause arcing and rapid
burning.
4-47. BREAKER POINT ALIGNMENT. The
breaker points must be accurately aligned and
strike squarely in order to realize the full
advantages provided by this design and assure
normal breaker point life. Any misalignment of the
breaker point surfaces will cause premature wear,
overheating and pitting.
a. Turn the cam so that the breaker points are
closed and check the alignment of the points.
Contact area should be centered. See figure 4-48.
b. Align the breaker points to make full face
contact by bending the stationary breaker point
bracket. Do not bend the breaker arm.
4-36
Figure 4-48. Breaker Point Alignment
c. After the breaker points have been properly
aligned, adjust the breaker point gap or dwell.
4-48. POINT GAP ADJUSTMENT. A scope, a
dwell meter, or a feeler gauge can be used to check
the gap of new breaker points. A scope or a dwell
meter can be used to check the gap of used breaker
points. Due to the roughness of used points, it is
not advisable to use a feeler gauge to check the
gap*
a. Remove distributor cap and check and correct
point alignment, if necessary.
b. Rotate the distributor until the rubbing block
rests on the peak of a cam lobe.
c. If the distributor is in the engine, place the
rubbing block on the peak of the cam by
proceeding as follows:
d. With the ignition switch off, crank the engine
by using an auxiliary starter switch between the S
and battery terminals of the starter relay.
e. Insert the correct blade of a clean feeler gauge
between the breaker points. ( F o r p o i n t s o p e n i n g
S p e c . Refer
to
Table
I,
page
l-3).
f. Insert a screwdriver blade into the adjustment
slot in point set and breaker plate as shown in
figure 4-49.
g. Rotate screwdriver blade until only a very
slight drag is felt on feeler gage. This represents
proper adjustment. Make certain that the screw
securing the stationary contact is tightened after
adjustment is made.
h. Set the ignition timing. If scope or a dwell
meter is used to adjust new points, be sure the
points are in proper alignment. Also, set the
contact dwell to the low setting.
4-49. POINT SET REPLACEMENT. If point set is
burned or badly pitted, it should be replaced as
follows:
Figure 4-49. Setting Point Gap
a. Remove the distributor cap and rotor.
b. Disconnect the primary and the condenser
wires from the breaker point assembly.
c. Remove the breaker point assembly and
condenser retaining screws. Lift the breaker point
assembly and condenser out of the distributor.
d. Place the new breaker point assembly and new
condenser in position and install the retaining
screws.
e. Align and adjust the breaker point assembly.
f. Connect the primary and condenser wires to
the breaker point assembly.
g. Install the rotor and the distributor cap.
4-50. IGNITION TIMING ADJUSTMENT. (See
figure 450.) Ignition timing is indicated by a
pointer affixed to the engine, which aligns with the
edge of the crankshaft pulley. The pulley is marked
with two notches, one indicating exact Top Dead
Center (TDC) at the time No. 1 spark plug fires.
The other notch indicates 5° before TDC. A neon
timing light is used to illuminate the pulley at the
time the spark plug fires.
a. Remove the plug wire from No. 1 spark plug.
b. Install spark plug adapter on spark plug.
Figure 4-50. Timing Pointer and Crankshaft Pulley
4-37
Figure 4-51. Checking Timing with Timing Light
c. Connect plug wire to spark plug adapter.
d. Clamp timing light spark plug lead to the spark
plug adapter.
e. Connect timing light battery leads to battery
terminals.
f. If necessary, clean and mark the timing marks.
g. Operate the engine at the specified idle RPM
and point the timing light at the timing pointer.
See figure 4-51.
h. If the timing is incorrect, loosen the
distributor hold down bolt and rotate the
distributor until the desired initial advance is
obtained. See figure 4-52.
i. Tighten the distributor hold down bolt and
check the timing again.
4-38
Figure 4-52. Timing Marks
j. Remove the timing light and connect the
vacuum line.
4-51. INTAKE MANIFOLD VACUUM TEST. A
manifold vacuum test aids in determining the
condition of an engine and also in helping to locate
the cause of poor engine performance. To test
manifold vacuum: C A U T I O N : S e t p a r k i n g b r a k e
before attemptinq test.
a. Operate the engine at 1200 RPM until normal
operating temperature is reached.
b. Install an accurate, sensitive vacuum gauge on
the fitting in the intake manifold. See figure 4-53.
c. Operate the engine at idle RPM with the load
disengaged (transmission in Neutral).
d. Check the vacuum reading on the gauge which
should be 18 inches or higher.
e. Check vacuum at maximum governed speed
Figure 4-53. Intake Manifold Vacuum Test
(2150 RPM) which should be 14-16 inches.
f. With operator on seat and engine at
full throttle, hold tilt lever all the
way back, and read vacuum which should
be 4 to 6 inches.
one item may not increase the vacuum enough to
indicate that the trouble has been corrected. It is
important, therefore, t h a t e a c h c a u s e o f a n
abnormal reading be investigated and further tests
conducted where necessary in order to arrive at the
corrected diagnosis of the trouble.
g. Set parking brake firmly. Place transmission m
FORWARD range and accelerate engine to full stall
speed. At stall, vacuum should read 0 to l-1/2
inches.
j. Allowance should be made for the effect of
altitude on the gauge reading. The engine vacuum
will decrease with an increase in altitude.
h. Manifold vacuum is affected by carburetor
adjustment, valve timing, the condition of the
valves, cylinder compression, and leakage at the
intake manifold, carburetor, or cylinder head
gasket.
i. Because abnormal gauge readings may indicate
that more than one of the above factors is at fault,
use caution in analyzing an abnormal reading. For
example, if the vacuum is low, the correction of
4-52. FUEL MIXTURE AND IDLE SPEED
ADJUSTMENT.
4-53. INITIAL IDLE MIXTURE ADJUSTMENT
(See figure 4-54). Set the preliminary idle mixture
b y t u r n i n g t h e i d l e m i x t u r e s c r e w in ward
(clockwise) until it is lightly seated, then turn the
screw outward (counterclockwise) 1 to l-1/2 turns.
Do not turn the screw needle tightly against its seat
as this may groove the end. If the needle is
4-39
Figure 4-54. Idle Mixture Adjustment
Figure 4-55. Idle Speed Adjustment
damaged it must be replaced before a satisfactory
fuel mixture can be obtained.
4-54. INITIAL IDLE SPEED ADJUSTMENT (See
figure 4-55). A stop screw at the throttle lever
flange of the carburetor controls the engine idle
speed. Turn the screw outward (counterclockwise)
to increase the engine idle speed and inward
(clockwise) to decrease the engine idle speed.
Initial idle adjustment will automatically set the
preliminary fast idle (hot engine) RPM required.
a. Position the choke control lever so that the
choke plate is fully open.
b. Seat the throttle plate in the throttle bore. Set
the idle adjusting screw to just make contact with
the cam contour; then, turn the screw outward
(counterclockwise) l-1/2 turns.
4-55. FINAL IDLE MIXTURE AND SPEED
ADJUSTMENT. The final idle fuel mixture and
engine idle speed is adjusted to settings for a hot
engine.
Operate
the engine until
the engine
a.
temperatures are stabilized at a hot, normal
operating temperature.
b. Place the transmission control lever in neutral
position and set the parking brake.
4-40
c. Turn on the head lamp to place the alternator
under a load condition in this manner in order to
obtain the specified idle speed during the
adjustment procedure.
d. Attach a tachometer to the engine.
e. Make sure the choke plate is fully opened.
With the transmission selector lever in neutral
position, turn the idle speed adjustment screw in a
direction to obtain the specified engine idle RPM
(500 to 550). Open the throttle by hand and allow
it to close normally.
f. Place the transmission selector lever in
FORWARD range and adjust the idle speed to
specifications (500 to 550). The engine idle speed
is adjusted first with the automatic transmission
selector lever in neutral. The final idle speed and
fuel mixture adjustments are made with the
transmission selector lever in gear.
g. Turn the idle fuel mixture adjustment screw
inward until the engine RPM begins to drop due to
the lean mixture. See figure 4-54. Turn the idle
fuel mixture screw outward until the engine RPM
increases and begins to drop; then, turn the idle
mixture screw inward for maximum engine RPM
and smoothness. Always favor a slightly rich fuel
mixture.
Figure 4-56. Pedal and Linkage Adjustment
h. Check the engine idle (hot engine) speed and
adjust it to specifications, if necessary. See figure
4-55 for adjustment point.
j. Place the transmission selector lever in neutral.
Shut off the engine and switch off the headlamp.
Remove the tachometer.
4-56. GOVERNOR
AND
LINKAGE
ADJUSTMENTS. The governor of this engine is
external and is a flyweight type driven off the idler
pump drive gear. It is extremely accurate when
properly set, and is adjusted as follows:
a. With engine shut down, remove the accelerator
pedal return spring, as shown in figure 4-56.
b. Then
check
and,
if necessary,
adjust
accelerator pedal stop height which must be l-1/2
inches.
finger at (2) until breakover arm (3) contacts
governor arm (4).
e. Adjust clevis (5) to obtain 1:32 of an inch
clearance at (6).
f. Then, adjust the accelerator pedal clevis (7) to
obtain l/32 of an inch clearance at the carburetor
throttle shaft breakover arm (8).
g. Start the engine and check no-load maximum
governed speed, which should be 2350 RPM. If this
speed is low, adjust governor spring tension at
point (1) by loosening locknut on adjusting rod,
and tightening adjusting nut until proper engine
speed is obtained.
h. Tighten locknut at point (1) securely after
adjusting spring tension.
4-57. STEERING SYSTEM MAINTENANCE.
c. Refer to figure 4-57 and adjust governor
linkage as follows;
d. With governor spring (1) connected, push with
4.58. ADJUSTMENT CHECK. The following
check may be made to determine if steering system
is operating within original design limits.
4-41
Figure 4-57. Governor and Linkage Adjustment
a. Start the engine and run at idle until it has
warmed to normal operating temperature.
indicated by an audible hissing sound from
the pump.
b. Rotate steering wheel one full turn clockwise,
listening to see if pump starts by-passing through
the relief valve. No relief by-pass sound should be
heard.
c. Rotate steering wheel counterclockwise to one
full turn past the straight-ahead position, again
listening for the sound of by-pass operation. No
indication of by-pass operation should be heard.
Note
d. If pump is by-passing during either phase of
the above check, then the steering system
adjustments outlined in paragraph 4-59 will have to
be performed.
Operation of steering pump when
by-passing through the relief valve is
4-42
can now continue with the step-by-step procedures.
1. Check and adjust the tilt cylinder
rods to eliminate upright racking. Torque ti1t
cylinder yoke nuts 80 to 90 lbs./ft.
2. Torque the frame-to-axle adaptor bolts
It is necessary to remove
to 620-730 lbs./f t.
the wheels on pneumatic tire machines.
WARNINC
DEFLATE TIRES BEFORE REMOVING FROM MACH I NE.
AFTER RAISING MACHINE AND BEFORE MAKING ANY
ADJUSTMENTS OR ADJUSTMENT CHECKS, PLACE ADEQUATE (HEAVY) BLOCKING (SUFFICIENT TO SUPPORT
THE WEIGHT OF THE MACHINE) UNDER THE FRAME....
NOT UNDER THE COUNTERWEIGHT....TO PREVENT ACCI#10978 Typical Frame-To-Axle
Adapter Bolts
STEERING SYSTEM ADJUSTMENT:
NOTE
In making power steering adjustments, we are
out to acomplish these basic things:
(a) To torque all
i terns which have a
bearing on steering.
(b) To eliminate end play and free play of
the hand wheel.
(c) To center the hand wheel and the pitman arm with the steer wheel s straight.
(d) To eliminate any steering linkage
looseness caused by wear or misadjustment.
(e) To set the pitman arm stops so that
the power steering pump will operate at its minimum
pressure when steer wheels are turned full right
and full left . . ..with steer wheels off the ground.
DENTAL LOWERING OR FALLING OF THE VEHICLE, THUS
PREVENTING PERSONAL INJURY TO MECHANIC OR BYSTANDERS.
NOTE
Torque the center capscrew first; then, torque
the top capscrew....then, torque the bottom capscrew. Recheck torque, again starting with the
center capscrew.
The following procedures will I achieve these
They are laid out to enable you to
objectives.
do a thorough job, and at the same time, do it
efficiently and fast . . , .without jumping around
or backtracking. Thus, it will pay you to follow
the steps in the order given. It is also important to remember that incorrect power steering
adjustments can shorten the life of various
steering system components.
Before starting any adjustment, strip the
truck down to a point where you can get at the conponents . This includes: Removing the side hoods,
removing the floor board, and removing the entire
seat assembly.
With these operations out of the way, we
4-43
4-44
3. Now... check the torque of the steering
gear mounting bolts (refer to ‘Plate 9856):
Steer gear to frame bolts (A); 40-50 Ibs./ft.
Outboard bearing bolts (B): 110-150 Ibs./ft.
Al1 the above torqueing steps must be carried
out each time you perform power steering adjustments.... because each of the items torqued has
a definite bearing on the steering characteristics
of the truck. With these torqueing steps out of
the way . . ..we can now get to work on checking out
the steering system.. , . starting by determining
whether there is hand wheel end play.
#9844.
#9843.
Typical Side & End Caps
Security Check
Typical Hand Wheel End Play Check
4. To check for hand wheel end play....
first place the steer wheels in a straight
p o s i t i o n . T h e n . . . . place your left hand on the
steering column with your thumb just touching
the hand wheel mounting base, as shown. Now,, .
turn the hand wheel, with the right hand, back
and forth. Any up and down movement indicates:
(a) That the steering shaft thrust adjustment screw at the base of the steering shaft must
be drawn up.
5. If the capscrews that secure both caps
are loose, tighten them securely (#9844).
6. If there is still end play in the steering shaft, loosen the steering shaft thrust
adjusting screw locknut....and turn the adjusting
screw in until end play is eliminated. Then...
tighten the adjusting screw locknut (#9845).
#9845.
Typical Thrust Adjustor Check
7. With end play eliminated, now check to
make sure the hand wheel and pitman are are
centered in relationship to the steering gear.
T o d o t h i s . . . . remove the pitman arm stop jam
nuts (C) and completely back off the pitman arm
in both directions.
8 . N o w . . . . turn the hand wheel as far as
possible in both directions. The pitman arm
should not contact either stop. If the pitman
arm does hit a stop, then....reposition it on
the shaft one spline to the right or the left...
to center it between the stops.
4-45
NOTE
In some cases the pitman arm may barely contact
the stops when the hand wheel is fully turned
In such cases it i s not necessary
right or left.
to reposition the pitman arm on the shaft, since
final adjustment of the pitman arm stops will
correct this condition.
9846.
Typical Sector Lash
Adjustment Screw
If the pitman does not move instantly
12.
. . . . loosen the jam nut on the sector lash adjustment screw (H) and turn the adjustment screw
in until all free play between the hand wheel
and pitman arm is eliminated. Then....tighten
the jam nut,
9848.
Typical Pitman Arm Shaft
Locknut Torque
9. Torque the pitman arm shaft locknut
(I tern D) 105-130 pound feet....even when you
haven’ t had to reposition the pitman arm.
10. With the pitman arm (E) and steering
gear centered., . . next check for free play between
the hand wheel and pitman arm....by turning the
hand wheel. The pitman arm should move the instant
the hand wheel moves,
11. Then.... center the steering gear by
turning the hand wheel (F) full right to full
l e f t . . ..counting turns from right to left and
bringing the hand wheel back to its halfway
position. When installing the hand wheel . . . .
torque the hand wheel nut (G) to 35 to 40 pound
f e e t . . . . a n d , using a prick punch, stake the nut
t o t h e s h a f t . . . . in two places 180 degrees apart.
If the hand wheel has three evenly spaced spokes
. . . . then spoke position can be disregarded.
4-46
reconnect the front drag link
(1) to the pitmen are. Torque the front drag
link ball stud adjusting screw (J) to 18-22
pound feet, and back if off to the nearest hole,
install cotter pin.
14. Be sure cylinder piston rod stroke
is centered so that piston does not bottom out
in either direction.
15. With the cylinder and steering gear
centered, the steer wheels should be straight.
If they are not... it will be necessary to adjust
the rear drag I ink (K) as we check out the linkage.
16. Now check for free play caused by loose
or misadjusted linkage. T O d o t h i s . . . f i r s t ,
torque the cylinder valve control ball stud nut
(L) to 90 to 110 pound feet. Then...check the
cylinder valve control stud (M) for movement
before the steer wheels move.
Its normal allowable total valve travel is about l/4”. If ball
stud travel exceeds this.. . .cylinder removal and
adjustment will be required.
17. Then.. . inspect the rear drag I ink.
If necessary, adjust it to assure that the steer
wheels are straight with cylinder and steering
gear centered, making certain to tighten the locknut shown after the adjustment is made. Tighten
the rear drag link ball socket screw (0) to 18-22
pound feet and back if off to nearest hole.
18. N o w . . . i n s p e c t t h e s t e e r a x l e s t o p l o c k replace them. If you replace the tie rods the measurement for the
tie rod is 12 11/16'' from center tie rod. If
the tie rod stud is loose, tighten the stud nut. The tie rod stud
nut should be torque to 68-82 lbs. ft., then increase to next
cotter slot.
19. Now... inspect the steer axle stop lockIf an axle stop is
nuts (Q) for tighteness.
missing...install a stop...making certain to
maintain a 78 degree steer wheel angularity for
sol id tired trucks. For pneumatic tired trucks,
the steer wheel anguiarity is 75 degrees.
20. Then . ..place masking tape on right and
left spindle arm. PI ace tape on the spindle stop
bolt head, on some model s. Now.. .connect a tachometer and start the engine with the transmission
in neutral. With the engine running at 500 RPM,
turn the hand wheel full right and full left so
that each steer wheel contacts its axle stop
(stop contacts tape) or until engine speed decreases.
21. Then.. . shut off the engine and check
the masking tape for an imprint. Both tapes
If one of the tapes has
should have an imprint.
no imprint.. . then the rear drag link is out of
adjustment and must be adjusted so that the tape
will be imprinted when the wheel is fully turned.
hand wheel until pressure drops to a minimum:
Hydracool 90 PSI and Hydratork 70 PSI.
24. When minimum pressure is reached,
hold the hand wheel at this position and screw
in the pitman arm adjusting screw until it
touches the pitman arm. Then back off the hand
wheel and turn the pitman arm adjusting screw
one full additional turn toward the pitman arm.
2 5 . N o w . . . tighten the stop bolt jam nut
(C) . . .which must always be installed as shown.
Then, turn the hand wheel to contact the adjusting screw with considerable force. The pressure
should not rise above the minimum’pressure specified.
Repeat the same procedures for the left
turn adjustment.
When the tachometcr only is being used,
the same routine is followed except that instead
of reading pressures, you will read RPHs. With
the engine running at 500 RPH, turn the hand
wheel to the extreme right until the RPM drops.
Then.... slowly back off the hand wheel until
engine speed canes back to 500 RPM.
When 500 RPM is reached, hold the hand
wheel at this position and screw in the pitman
arm adjusting screw one full additional turn
toward the pitman arm...and install and tighten
.the adjusting screw jam nut. Now. . . turn the
hand wheel to contact the adjusting screw with
considerable force. The engine speed should not
decrease. Repeat these same procedures for the
left turn adjustment.
When the above adjustments have been made,
disconnect any gauges used and lubricate a11
axle and linkage points. Then lower the truck
to the floor and install the seat assembly,
floor board, and side hoods.
22. When both tapes are imprinted, we are
ready for final adjustment... .which is the setting
of the pitman arm stops. There are two ways of
d o i n g t h i s . . . . with a pressure gauge or with a
The use of a pressure gauge is pretachometer.
ferred, however, because it provides more accurate
readings.
23. When using a pressure gauge, hook up
the gauge in the pressure line going to the power
steering cylinder.
Now . . .with the parking brake set, the truck
blocked up, the transmission in neutral and the
engine idling, turn the hand wheel to the extreme
r i g h t . . . . until the axle stop makes contact and
you get a sharp rise in pressure. Then back off
4-47
4-48
#9852.
Typical Drive Wheel Lug
Nuts Torque
26. Now... torque all drive wheel lug nuts
to the correct torque: STD & TTU, 290-390 lbs.ft.
and wide drive, 190-225 lbs.ft.
The above specifications cover both cushion
and pneunatic tire model machines.
#9853.
#9854.
Typical Adjustments Check
28. To check the correctness of your
adjustments, drive the truck in full left and
right turns and measure the inside turning
diameter of each drive tire. The two diameters
should be nearly equal.
29. The basically simple routine we have
covered must be followed in every power steering
There is no short cut to doing the
adjustment.
job right. And every step shown should be
carried out in the order given. By so doing,
you will insure that the job will be done right
and efficiently.
Typical Steer Wheel Lug
Nuts Torque
27. Then. . . torque all steer wheel lug nuts
to 100-140 pound feet...all model s.
4-49
Figure 4-73. Hydraulic System Pressure Check
Figure 4-72. Fuses and Underdash Wiring
4-63. ELECTRICAL WIRING, SWITCHES,
AND FUSES.
a. The wiring system on
negative ground system.
taken when connecting an
to any component for test
proper ground polarity.
the vehicle is a 12-volt
Extreme care must be
outside source of power
purposes, to observe the
Disconnect battery ground strap before
performing any service on electrical system.
b. Wiring circuitry and color codes are indicated
on the electrical schematic, figure 1-3.
0-4000 psi scale at the discharge (pressure) line of
the hydraulic pump or at the hydraulic valve. See
figure 4-73.
a. Connect the pressure line from the gauge to
the test port of the pump or valve by removing
plug from test port.
b. Apply parking brake. Start engine and operate
at governed RPM. Hold tilt lever back until the
pressure builds up and moves the pressure relief
valve off its seat; avoid holding the tilt lever longer
than is necessary to check pressure reading of
gauge. Take reading then release accelerator and
tilt lever.
c. The pressure reading will indicate the setting
of the relief valve. If reading taken is not
reasonably close to those listed in specifications,
appropriate repairs should be made. Report to
designated authority.
c. Be sure to replace all light bulbs and
instruments with parts rated for 12-volt operation.
4-66. HYDRAULIC CIRCUIT FLOW TEST. If a
d. Access to the fuses may be gained through
removal of the underdash cowling. Fuses are
identified in figure 4-72.
Schroeder Hydraulic Circuit Tester (Clark Part No.
1800060) is available, the hydraulic relief valve
setting and the rate of flow being delivered by the
hydraulic pump may be checked as follows:
4-64. HYDRAULIC SYSTEM CHECKS.
4-65. PRESSURE CHECK. The hydraulic relief
valve setting may be checked with a Mico
Quadrigage (Clark Part No. 1800106) or, by
installing a conventional pressure gauge with a
4-50
a. Connect the pressure line from the tester to the
test port at the hydraulic pump, or at the test port
of the hydraulic valve. Remove sump tank breather
and insert the return line from the tester into the
sump tank.
FIGURE 4-75.
TRANSMISSION LINKAGE ADJUSTMENT
4-50A/(4-50B blank)
Applying parking brake. Start
b.
engine and operate at governed RPM.
Hold tilt lever back while gradually
closing the load valve until pressure reaches 1500 psi.. Continue to
hold the tilt lever until hydraulic
fluid reaches test temperature (120)
degrees F.)
With the hydraulic fluid
at this temperature, make a note of
the flow reading so it may be compared with the rate of flow found in
the following step.
With engine operating at
c.
governed RPM, hold tilt lever in
back position and continue to close
the load valve until the pressure
no longer increases on the gauge.
(Close the load valve ONLY ENOUGH
to reach the peak pressure reading
and avoid holding the lever longer
than necessary to check rate of
flow and pressure).
The pressure reading will
d.
indicate the setting of the relief
The flow reading should be
valve.
compared with the flow register at
1500 psi.
If the pump or valve is
worn, flow will drop off appreciably
This is
as pressure is increased.
due to internal oil slippage in the
components.
NOTE
Severely vibrating gauges are
often an indication of entrained
air.
Check for suction line leaks.
If readings taken are not ree.
asonably close to those listed in
specifications, appropriate repairs
Report to designated
should be made.
authority.
4-67.
ADJUSTING TRANSMISSION SHIFT
LINKAGE (Refer to Fig. 4-74)
Check forward-reverse and higha.
low control linkages for correct adjustment.
If these linkages are out
of adjustment operation of the transmission will be adversely affected.
Make sure you have full travel and can
feel the detents in all positions neutral, forward and reverse for the
forward-reverse shift lever, and high
and low for the high-low shift lever.
If you cannot feel the detents in any
one of these positions adjust the linkage as follows:
Step 1.
Remove the two capscrews from
the cowl access hole cover and remove
the cover.
Step 2.
Measure the distance (Refer to
figure 4-74) of the high-low linkage rod,
The
and the forward-reverse linkage rod.
pre-set measurement is 18" for the highlow linkage rod at neutral position and
13.38" for the forward-reverse linkage
rod at neutral position.
If adjusment is to be made
Step 3.
proceed as follows:
Remove the cotter pins from the
a.
link pins and remove the link pins from
(Refer to
the linkage arms and clevis.
Let linkage rods drop
Figure 4-74).
free, do not remove.
Make necessary adjustments
b.
loosening lock-nuts and turning
to make measurement fall within
set measurements of linkage rods
they are assembled.
by
clevis
the prewhen
After adjustment is made tighten
c.
lock nuts and install the linkage rods
to their prospective linkage arms and
install the link pins and cotter pins.
Measure the distances again and see if
they fall within the pre-set measurements, if they don't make adjustment
again.
Test linkage for full travel and
d.
that you can feel the detents in all
positions.
e.
Install cowl access hole cover
and its fasteners.
4-51
1 -SPEED AND 2-SPEED HYDRATORK TRANSMISSION CHECKS
TRANSMISSION STALL AND PRESSURE CHECKS
Minimum Tools Required
1 - Pressure Gauge, 0 - 250 PSI
1 - Tachometer
IMPORTANT
Before making transmission checks, the machine should be:
1. Steam cleaned..... it is important that the radiator be clean externally
and internally so that it is capable of maintaining proper cooling for the engine
and transmission.
2. Run machine until unit is at operating temperature....this is important
as the transmission oil temperature should be 200 degrees F. to obtain accurate
readings; and, the transmission plumbing and torque converter must be fully
charged.
3. W ith the engine operating at idle and the transmission in NEUTRAL,
c h e c k t h e f l u i d l e v e l o n t h e d i p s t i c k . Fill if necessary to the FULL mark
on the dipstick.....using Type “A”, Suffix “A” Automatic Transmission Fluid
(Clark Park Number 879803....fluid containers must display a qualification
number prefixed by “AQ-ATF”).
4 . C h e c k p e d a l f r e e t r a v e l . . . . . the inching/brake pedal/s must be adjusted
c o r r e c t l y . . . . . refer to page 4-20 & 4-21 for procedure and specifications.
Plate 9774.
4-52
1-SPEED Transmission Control Cover
Cushion Tire Machines.
Plate 9220.
P-SPEED Transmission Control Cover
Pneumatic Tire Machines.
5. With a tachomter, check engine for
governed speed at full throttle. The unloaded
engine RPM should be set at 2350.
6. Check governed engine speed with part i a l l o a d . With engine at full throttle and
the tilt lever in full backward tilt, momentarily hold the tilt lever back to load the engine. With the engine loaded in this manner,
the approximate engine RPM should be 2200.
NOTE
Engine properly tuned before making
transmission stall checks.
CAUTION
PROL0NGED STALLINGOF THE CONVERTER CAN CAUSE
INTERNAL DAMAGE TO THE CONVERTER.
STALL CON-
VERTER ONLY LONG ENOUGH ATTAIN THE PEAK
Plate 6683.
Engine RPM [no load]
Plate 6684.
Normal Engine Stall
RPM READING......MAXIMUM 30 SECONDS.
7. With a capacity load cm the forks,
check for normal stall RPM by positioning machine against an immovable object....or by applying a correctly adJusted parking brake.......
equipped with goodbrake linings. Place the
machine in gear and accelerate engine to full
t h r o t t l e . Normal stall is 1450 to 1600 RPM.
8. Low engine stall RPM is 850 to 1050
. . . . . . . . . .loss of engine power is indicated.
Plate 7327.
Interim Stall
4-52A
9. Low engine stall RPM is 850 to 1050
. . . . . . . . . converter malfunction is indicated.
Plate 6686.
Low Engine Stall
IO. High engine stall RPM is anything
above 1600..... either slippage of the selector
packs or low oil pressure is indicated.
NOTE
Any STALL READING other than NORMAL should be
reported to designated person in authority.
Plate 7328.
High Engine Stall
TRANSMISSION PRESSURE CHECKS
The transmission pressure checks are made at the testing ports
o f t h e c o n t r o l c o v e r . . . refer to previous page for location of
check points.... note that cover used on pneumatic tire machines
is identical with solid tired vehicles with the addition of H &
L ports at lower right corner of cover.
Refer to the following pages for test procedures (proper PSI and
proper RPM).... these procedures cover both l-SPEED and P-SPEED
Hydratork Transmission models (cushion and Pneumatic tire machines).
4-52B
Plate 9863.
Forward and Reverse Pressure Check...
Oil Temperature should be 200 degrees F. prior to
making the above checks.
4-52C
Plate 9864
Converter Pressure Check......
Oil Temperature should be 2OO degrees F. prior to
making the above checks.
4-52 D
Plate 9865.
Oil Flow To Control Cover......
Oil Temperature should be 200 degrees F. prior to
making the above checks.
4-52 E
Plate 9866.
High and Low Pressure Check..........
Oil Temperature should be 200 degrees F. prim to
making the above checks.
4-52F
TROUBLE SHOWING GUIDE
TRANSMISSION
FLUID AERATION CHECK
A fluid level that is too high will cause
the fluid to become aerated. Aerated fluid will
cause low control pressure and the aerated fluid
may be forced out the vent.
Check the transmission fluid level. Low
fluid level can affect the operation of the
transmission and may Indicate fluid leaks that
could cause transmission damage.
TRANSMISSION FLUID LEAK AGE CHECKS
Leakage at the control cover, inlet and
outlet ports often can be stopped by tightening
the attaching bolts. If necessary, replace the
gasket.
Check the fluid lines and fittings between
the transmission and the cooler in the radiator'
tank or on the transmission for losseness, wear,
or damage. If leakage cannot be stopped by
tightening a fitting, replace the defective
parts.
The cooler can be further checked for leaks
by disconnecting the Lines from the cooler fittings and applying 5 psi air pressure to the
f i t t i n g s . If the cooler is leaking and will not
hold this pressure, the radiator must be replaced.
The cooler cannot be replaced separately.
Inspect the pipe plug on the left side of
the transmission case at the front. If the
plug shows leakage, torque the plug to specification. If tightening does not stop the leeks,
replace the plug.
When converter drain plugs leak, remove
drain plugs. Coat the threads with a sealing
compound and install the plugs. Torque the
drain plugs to specification.
IMPORTANT
THIS TRANSMISSION USES ONLY TYPE "A", SUFFIX "A"
AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION FLUID (CLARKPART
#879803).
CONTAINERS MUST DISPLAY A QUALIFI-
CATION NUMBER PREFIXED BY AQ-ATF.
4-52G
CUSTOMER SERVICES ENGINEERING DEPARTMENT, BATTLE CREEK
TO ADJUST - USE ,010" SHIM GAUGE AND MINIMUM THICKNESS OF
SHIMS UNDER THE SWITCH TO CLOSE WHEN
TRANSMISSION IS IN NEUTRAL,
REMOVE GAUGE AND TORQUE SWITCH TO 25 FT-LBS,
NOTE: SHIM GAUGE USED TO ALLOW FOR WEAR OF PARTS,
4-68.
NEUTRAL START SWITCH ADJUSTMENT
The neutral starting switch should be adjusted
so that the engine will not start except when
the transmission is in the exact neutral
position.
1.
2.
Occupy the driver’s seat, set the parking
brake, and put the transmission in gear
(with clutch pedal depressed on standard
transmissions).
Turn and hold the ignition switch in the
start position while gently moving the shift
lever towards neutral position.
4-52H
3.
If the engine doesn’t start, repeat this
check in all other gears.
4.
If the engine should start, coming from any
gear position before reaching exact neutral
position, then the neutral start switch
must be either replaced or adjusted.
5.
Adjust by means of shims underneath the
switch until the engine will not start in
any gear position except exact neutral.
RIM AND WHEEL MAINTENANCE:
NOTE
“In order to maintain and insure
maximum service, a continuous maintenance program is advisable...
maintenance procedures should be
carried out both during tire inspections and during tire changes.”
WARNING
PULL DAMAGED RIMS OR WHEELS. DEFLATE
TIRES PRIOR TO THE REMOVAL OF RIMS OR
WHEELS FROM THE VEHICLE.
Check ail metal surfaces thoroughly while making
tire inspections...watch for...
or electric wire brushes, and blasting or chemical baths may be used.
Bead seat areas of the rim should be free of
rust and rubber deposits. This is especially
important for drop-center tubless rims...because of the air-sealing element.
Paint rim by brush or spray with a fast-drying
metal primer. Surfaces should be clean and dry
prior to painting. Insure that bare metal areas
on outside or tire side of rim are covered.
This is especially important on drop-center
tubless rims, because warm and sometimes moist
air is in constant contact with the metal surface on the tire side of the rim.
Lubricate tire side of rim base just prior to
mounting tire ...avoid the use of any lubricant
which contains water or solvent that is injurious to rubber ...a combination lubricant and
rust-preventive compound is preferable. This
protective measure is of particular importance
with drop-center tubless rims as the air in the
tire is contained by the tire-side rim surface.
1.
Fatigue cracks in metal.
2.
Bent flanges, resulting from road obstructions.
3.
Deep rim tool marks.
4.
Loose, missing or damaged nuts.
TIRE MAINTENANCE:
5.
Bent or stripped studs.
6.
Excessive rust or corrosion.
Inspect for proper inflation. Refer to Specifications for correct tire pressure.
(Table 1, page 1-2)
Inspect tires and wheels regularly for cuts,
breaks, alignment , security of wheel clamp bolts
(on machine using split rims), and lug nuts or
bolts.
Hark damaged or hazardous areas with chalk so
that part will be removed from service...replace
damaged parts .
Insure that replacements are made with the proper
sizes and types ...refer to your machine serial
number when ordering replacement parts. Care
should be taken to assure that ail replacement
parts are interchangeable with the original parts
and of a quality equal to that provided in the
original equipment.
Check ail metal surfaces, as listed above, and
check for cracks. These are caused by deep rim
tool marks, overloading and overinflating tires
and using larger than recommended tire sizes.
Cracks in wheel between stud holes are caused by
loose wheel nuts...improper installation procedures and use of incorrect sizes or types of
attaching parts. lnsufficient mounting torque
can cause wheel shimmy, resulting in damage to
parts and extreme tire tread wear. Excessive
mounting torque can cause studs to break and
disc to crack in the stud hole area.
Thoroughly clean wheels...remove rust, dirt and
other foreign materials from all surfaces. Hand
NOTE
Rim Distributors can supply the proper
compound that serves as a lubricant and
rust preventive.
Even with the best of maintenance practices,
cuts will still be a source of tire trouble.
The correct procedure for handling and repairing
tires should be given careful attention. Close
inspect ion of alI tires should be made at the
time of inflation check, and all tires having
cuts that penetrate into the cord body should be
taken off for proper repair.
Failure to make regular inspections and repairs,
when needed, will result in further deterioration of the cord body and eventually a blowout.
Small rocks and dirt will get into shallow cuts
in the tread and if neglected will gradually be
pounded through the cord body.
One simple method to forestall this action is to
clean out the cut with an awl or similar tool to
remove any stones or other matter which may be
lodged in the cut. Use a sharp, narrow-bladed
knife and cut away the rubber around the cut to
form a cone-shaped cavity extending to the
bottom of the injury. The sides of the cavity
should be slanted enough to prevent stones from
4-52 J
IMPORTANT
TIRE MAINTENANCE (CONTINUED) :
wedging into it. Tires with cuts treated in
this manner may be continued in service without
danger of further growth of these injuries. If
a tire has at least one deep cut that requires
a repair, then all smaller cuts may be quickly
and economically repaired and vulcanized by the
steam kettle method.
WARNING
WHEN REPAIRING TIRES USED ON MACHINES
THAT EMPLOY THE LOCK RING TYPE RIM, USE
CAUTION WHEN INFLATING TIRE, PROCEED AS
FOLLOWS:
WARNING
IT IS NOT RECOMMENDED THAT TIRES WITH
BREAKS BE USED AGAIN.
If uneven tire wear Is evident, wheel alignment
should be checked.
TIRE INFLATION:
Before inflating tires, make certain all wheel
nuts are tightened to proper torque (see Specifications on Table 1, page 1-3)
1. Always Inflate tires mounted on rims with demountable
side ring flanges or lockrings In an Inflation safety cage, or
serious Injury or loss of life could result.
2. Improperly seated side ring flanges or lockrings could
blow off during Inflation. Never attempt to seat side ring
flanges or lockrings during or alter lnflation. Serious Injury
or loss of life could result.
3. Never inflate tires over 40 pounds per square Inch (PSI)
to seat tire beads. Serious Injury or loss of life could result.
4. When Inflating tires In a safety cage, always use an
extension air hose and gage for safety cage use. Failure to
do so could cause serious Injury.
WARNING
WARNING
IN ALL CASES, WHEN REMOVING TIRES WITH
SPLIT RIMS FROM THE MACHINE FOR REPAIR
OR PERIODIC ROTATION, COMPLETELY DEFLATE
TIRES. THIS IS ACCOMPLISHED BY REMOVING
THE VALVE CORE.
WARNING
IN ALL CASES, WHEN REMOVING TIRES EQUIPPED
WITH THE LOCK RING TYPE RIM FROM THE HACHINE FOR REPAIR OR PERIODIC ROTATION,
COMPLETELY DEFLATE TIRES. THIS IS ACCOMPLI SHED BY REMOVING THE VALVE CORE.
IF LOCK RING IS NOT LOCATED PROPERLY, IT
IS POSSIBLE FOR IT TO POP OFF RIM WITH
GREAT FORCE WHEN TIRE IS INFLATED AND
COULD RESULT IN SERIOUS INJURY TO ANYONE
STRUCK BY IT.
On machines using split rims, make periodic
checks for noises in the wheel, as It is possible for damage to occur to the wheel bolts If
they are not securely tightened when tires are
changed. If the wheel bolts are loose or have
been sheared off as a result of being loose, a
grinding or scraping noise will be present when
wheels are turned. Should this condition exist,
It will be necessary to immediately remove the
rim and tire from the machine and determine the
cause of noise and repair or replace defective
parts.
NOTE
Refer to WARNING on deflation of
tires before removing wheels from
machine.
4-52K Change 2
LUBRICATION AND PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE
Plate 9702. Typical Tire Inflation Procedure
Torque wheel stud nuts or wheel bolts to the
values
listed in specifications. Excessive
torque of wheel nuts can cause stud and rim
damage.
Any replacement parts used should be of a
quality equal to that provided in the original
manufacture.
Tires with split wheels should be inflated in a
safety cage or when properly installed on the
vehicle.
In either case. make sure all nuts
and bolts are properly installed and torqued
according to specifications.
CAUTION
lnflation
USE ONLY AN APPROVED SAFETY CAGE DESIGNED
CAUTION
ALL FASTENERS SHOULD BE PROPERLY INSTALLED
BEFORE INFLATING WHEEL/TIRE ASSEMBLY.
FOR THIS PURPOSE.
Tires used on lock-ring type wheels
inflate in a safety cage (see previous
caution) using a clip-on type air chuck and
stand aside (in-line with the tire tread) during inflation. Insure that rings are properly
Change 2 4-52L
LUBRICATION AND PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE
Parts can be ordered from the following
suppliers:
Relief Valve - Model 250V-l/4”
Humphrey Products
P.0. Box 2008
Kilgore at Sprinkle Rd.
Kalamazoo, Mich.
Shut-Off
Valve
- lmperia1 #77E (1/4 to
Kendall Industrial Supplies, Inc.
702 N. 20th St.
Battle Creek, Mich. 49016
Air Gauge - Marshal town #23 (160 lb,
1/4 1 PT, 2 1/2” diameter gauge)
Kendall Industrial Supplies, Inc.
702 N. 20th St.
Battle Creek, Mich. 49016
Safetv Cane
Plate 7613.
Typical Split Wheel
seated prior to inflation. An inflated tire
contains potentially explosive energy that can
blow rings loose.
All wheel/tire assemblies should be inflated in
a safety cage. The air hose should have a
special set-up as shown in Plate 9702. The hose
should have an adapter so that it can be securely
fastened to the valve stem. Using this set-up
you would:
1.
Attach air hose to valve stem.
2. Open shut-off valve allowing compressed air
to enter tube.
3. Shut off air supply occasionally to check
pressure in tube at air gauge.
If pressure
4. Inflate to proper capacity.
exceeds proper inflation capacity, depress the
relief valve to release excess air pressure.
5. This alternating procedure is followed until
See specifications.
proper inflation is reached
IMPORTANT
MAINTAIN UNIFORM INFLATION IN BOTH TIRES OF A
DUAL ASSEMBLY SO THAT WEIGHT IS EQUALLY SUSTAINED.
NEVER RE-INFLATE A TIRE THAT HAS GONE FLAT WITHOUT FIRST INSPECTING IT AND THE WHEEL ASSEMBLY.
The tire inflation arrangement as shown in
Plate 9702 can be made up from local suppliers.
4-52M
Meyers Tire Supplies
6400 Epworth Blvd.
Detroit, Mich.
LUBRICATION AND PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE
DIRECTIONAL TREAD TIRES
2.
Ail directional tread tires are to be
mounted in the correct position with
respect to the arrow cast on the side of
the tire as explained and illustrated
below.
Outside dual tire arrow to point in
the direction of rearward rotation, see
Plate 6423.
(Rotate wheel t o b r i n g a r r o w o n t i r e
above the wheel. Arrow must point
toward rear of truck.)
Directional Tread Dual Tires:
Directional Tread Sinqle Drive Tires:
1.
1.
Inside dual tire
the
direction
of
Plate 6422.
arrow to point In
foward
rotation,
see
(Rotate wheel to bring arrow on tire
above the wheel. Arrow must point
toward front of truck.)
Plate 6422. Inside Dual Tire
(or Single Drive Tire)
(Arrow to point toward front of truck)
Tire arrow to point in the direction
of forward rotation, see Plate 6422.
(Rotate wheel to bring arrow on tire
above the wheel. Arrow must point
toward front of truck, see Plate 6422.
Plate 6423. Outside Dual Tire
(Arrow to point toward
rear of truck)
SOLID OR CUSHION TIRE AND RIM MAINTENANCE
1. Inspect tires regularly - remove ail sharp objects picked up by
treads before they have a chance to cut further into the rubber and
c a u s e c h i p p i n g o r p o s s i b l e s e p a r a t i o n o f t h e r u b b e r from the base
metal.
2. Avoid overloading a n d d o n o t a l l o w v e h i c l e to stand under heavy
loads for prolonged periods as this will cause a “flat” spot on the
tires.
3. C h e c k s t e e r i n g a x l e a l i g n m e n t r e g u l a r l y t o p r o t e c t a g a i n s t f a s t ,
irregular tread wear and separation.
4. I f r u b b e r t i r e s c o m e i n c o n t a c t w i t h o i l s , g r e a s e ,
they should be wiped off without delay.
and gasoline
5. R e g u l a r l u b r i c a t i o n o f a i l w h e e l b e a r i n g s w i l l a s s u r e f r e e - r o i l i n g
and elimination of tire drag when stopping or starting.
4-52N
SAFETY
1.
TIPS
NEVER WELD ON A RIM. REPLACE ANY PART
THAT IS DISTORTED, CRACKED OR DAMAGED.
2.
ALWAYS EXHAUST ALL AIR FROM A SINGLE TIRE
AND FROM BOTH TIRES OF A DUAL ASSEMBLY PRIOR
TO REMOVING ANY RIM COMPONENTS, OR ANY WHEEL
COMPONENTS, SUCH AS NUTS AND RIM CLAMPS.
MAKE SURE TO REMOVE THE VALVE
CORE AND EXHAUST ALL AIR FROM
THE TIRE.
REMOVE THE VALVE CORES FROM BOTH
TIRES OF A DUAL ASSEMBLY.
CHECK THE VALVE STEM BY RUNNING A PIECE OF
WIRE THROUGH THE STEM TO MAKE SURE IT IS NOT
PLUGGED.
3.
CHECK RIM COMPONENTS PERIODICALLY FOR FATIGUE
CRACKS. REPLACE ALL CRACKED, BADLY WORN,
DAMAGED AND SEVERAL RUSTED COMPONENTS.
4. CLEAN RIMS AND REPAINT TO STOP DETRIMENTAL
EFFECTS OF CORROSION. BE VERY CAREFUL TO
CLEAN ALL DIRT AND RUST FROM THE LOCK RING
GUTTER.
THIS IS IMPORTANT TO SECURE
THE LOCK RING IN ITS PROPER
POSITION.
A FILTER ON THE AIR INFLATION EQUIPMENT TO
REMOVE THE MOISTURE FROM THE AIR LINE PREVENTS
A LOT OF CORROSION. THE FILTER SHOULD BE
CHECKED PERIODICALLY TO SEE THAT IT IS WORKING
PROPERLY.
5. MAKE SURE CORRECT PARTS ARE BEING ASSEMBLED.
CHECK YOUR DISTRIBUTOR OR THE MANUFACTURER IF
YOU HAVE ANY DOUBTS.
6. DOUBLE CHECK TO MAKE SURE ALL COMPONENTS
ARE PROPERLY SEATED PRIOR TO INFLATION.
7.
8.
MIXING PARTS OF ONE MANUFACTURER’S RIMS
WITH THOSE OF ANOTHER IS POTENTIALLY
DANGEROUS. ALWAYS CHECK MANUFACTURER
FOR APPROVAL.
DON’T OVERLOAD OR OVER - INFLATE RIMS.
CHECK YOUR RIM MANUFACTURER IF SPECIAL
OPERATING CONDITIONS ARE REQUIRED.
9. DON’T REINFLATE A TIRE THAT HAS BEEN RUN FLAT
WITHOUT FIRST INSPECTING THE TIRE, RIM, AND
WHEEL ASSEMBLY.
DOUBLE CHECK THE LOCK RING FOR DAMAGE...MAKE
SURE THAT IT IS SECURE IN THE GUTTER BEFORE
INFLATION.
SAFETY TIPS
4-52P Change 2
- continued 10.
NEVER RUN A VEHICLE ON ONE TIRE OF A DUAL
ASSEMBLY. THE CARRYING CAPACITY OF THE SINGLE
TIRE AND RIM IS DANAGEROUSLY EXCEEDED, AND
OPERATING A VEHICLE IN THIS MANNER CAN RESULT
IN DAMAGE TO THE RIM.
11.
12.
DON'T BE CARELESS OR TAKE CHANCES,
IF YOU ARE NOT SURE ABOUT THE PROPER
MATING OF RIM AND WHEEL PARTS, CONSULT
A WHEEL AND RIM EXPERT. THIS MAY BE
THE TIRE HAN WHO IS SERVICING YOUR
FLEET, THE RIM AND WHEEL DISTRIBUTOR
IN YOUR AREA, OR THE CLARK DEALER.
DON’T USE UNDERSIZED RIMS.
USE THE RIGHT RIMS FOR THE JOB.
13.
DON’T SEAT RINGS BY HAMMERING WHILE
THE TIRE IS INFLATED.
DON’T HAMMER ON AN INFLATED OR PARTIALLY
INFLATED TIRE/RIM ASSEMBLY.
14. DON’T LET ANYONE MOUNT OR DEMOUNT TIRES
WITHOUT PROPER TRAINING.
15.
16.
19.
NEVER SIT ON OR STAND IN FRONT OF A TIRE
AND RIM ASSEMBLY THAT IS BEING INFLATED.
INFLATE IN A SAFETY CAGE.
USE A CLIP-ON CHUCK AND MAKE SURE INFLATION
HOSE IS LONG ENOUGH TO PERMIT THE PERSON
INFLATING THE TIRE TO STAND TO THE SIDE OF
THE TIRE, NOT IN FRONT OR IN BACK OF THE
TIRE ASSEMBLY.
DO NOT, UNDER ANY ClRCUMSTANCES, ATTEMPT TO
REWORK, WELD HEAT, OR BRAZE ANY RlM COMPONENTS
THAT ARE CRACKED, BROKEN OR DAMAGED. REPLACE
WITH NEW PARTS OR PARTS THAT ARE NOT CRACKED,
BROKEN, OR DAMAGED, WHICH ARE OF THE SAME
SIZE, TYPE AND MAKE.
17.
INFLATE IN A SAFETY CAGE.
18.
REGARDLESS OF HOW HARD OR FIRM THE GROUND
APPEARS, PUT HARDWOOD BLOCKS UNDER THE JACK.
BLOCK THE TIRE AND WHEEL ON THE OTHER
SIDE OF THE VEHICLE, BEFORE YOU PLACE
THE JACK IN POSITION...ALWAYS CRIB UP
WITH BLOCKS JUST IN CASE THE JACK HAY
SLIP.
20.
REMOVE THE BEAD SEAT BAND SLOWLY TO PREVENT
IT FROM DROPPING OFF AND CRUSHING YOUR TOES.
SUPPORT THE BAND ON YOUR THIGH AND ROLL IT
SLOWLY TO THE GROUND THIS WILL PROTECT YOUR
BACK AND TOES.
...IT SLIPS OFF, IT CAN FLY WITH ENOUGH
FORCE TO KILL.
ALWAYS STAND TO ONE SIDE WHEN YOU APPLY
HYDRAULIC PRESSURE.
21.
BEAD BREAKERS AND RAMS APPLY PRESSURE
TO BEAD FLANGES. KEEP YOUR FINGERS
CLEAR. SLANT BEAD BREAKER ABOUT IO
DEGREES TO KEEP IT FIRMLY IN PLACE. IF...
21.
WHEN USING A CABLE OR CHAIN SLING, STAND CLEAR...IT MIGHT SNAP AND LASH OUT.
SAFETY TIPS
* U.S. GOVERNMENT PRINTING OFFICE: 1991 543-016/40068
Change 2 4-52Q
4-72.
WHEELS AND WHEEL BEARINGS.
4-73.
CLEAN, REPACK AND ADJUST STEERING
WHEEL BEARINGS. (See Figure 4-75.)
a. Every 1000 operating hours or every six
months of operation, whichever occurs first,
clean, repack and adjust wheel bearings
using a smooth stringy multi-purpose grease
or refined mineral oil blended with a lithium
soap thickner containing anti-wear, anti-rust
and anti-oxidants with EP additives. To
meet or exceed Clark Specifications MS-107
and Timken Test 40 Lbs. minimum (NLGI No. 1
or NLGI No. 2). Examples:
Shell Aluania EP Grease No. 1 or No. 2.
Sun Prestige 741 EP No. 1 or 742 EP No. 2
Gulfcrown Grease Ep No. 2
AMOLITH Grease EP No. 1 or No. 2
Citgo HEP No. 1 or No. 2
Texaco Multifak EP No. 1 or Marfak all
Purpose No. 2
Poco HT Grease EP No. 1 or No. 2
Molub-Alloy General Purpose Grease No 1
or No. 2.
or the equivalent of the equivalent of the
above listed lubricants.
Figure 4-75.
Steering Wheel Bearings
4-53
Figure 476. Bearing Details
b. Raise the rear of the machine far enough to
clear the floor and place heavy blocking under
the machine frame, not under the counterweight,
so i t c a n n o t a c c i d e n t a l l y b e c o m e l o w e r e d .
Remove the wheels from the hub assembly.
After raising machine and before making
any adjustments or adjustment checks,
place adequate (heavy) blocking (sufficient
to support the weight of the machine)
frame,
under the
under
the
not
t
o
p
r
e
v
e
n
t
accidental
counterweight,
4-54
lowering or falling of the vehicle, thus
preventing personal injury to mechanic or
bystanders.
c. Clean the bearings in a Stoddard type cleaning
solvent. After all solidified particles of lubricant
are removed from the bearings, blow dry with
compressed air. Direct air stream across bearings to
prevent spinning. Slowly rotate bearings by hand
to facilitate drying. Inspect bearings and races
carefully to determine if they are in good
condition and suitable for further service. Dry the
hub with compressed air.
d. Repack with a smooth stringy multi-purpose
grease of refined mineral oil blended with a lithium
Figure 477. Wheel Removed
soap thickner containing anti-wear, anti-rust and
anti-oxidants with EP additives. To meet or exceed
Clark Specifications MS-107 and Timken Test 40
lbs. minimum (NLGI No. 1 or NLGI No. 2).
4-74. ADJUSTMENT CHECK.
a. Inspect adjustment
and bottom of tire,
determine looseness or
rear side of tire, chuck
looseness or wobble.
of bearings by gripping top
chuck tire in and out to
wobble. Now grip front and
tire in and out to determine
Note
Before making wheel bearing adjustment,
be sure play (looseness or wobble) is in the
wheel bearings and not in the king pins. (If
wheel bearings need adjustment, clean and
repack bearings before making adjustments.
Refer
to lubrication instructions in
preceding paragraph.)
Figure 478. Axle End Removed
4-75. CLEAN AND REPACK AXLE ENDS.
a. Every 1000 operating hours or every six
months of operation, whichever occurs first, clean
and repack the axle ends using a smooth stringy
multi-purpose grease or refined mineral oil blended
with a lithium soap thickner containing anti-wear,
anti-rust and anti-oxidants with EP additives. To
meet or exceed Clark Specifications MS-107
additives.
Test 40 lb. minimum (NLGI No. 1 or NLGI No. 2)
Shell Aluania EP Grease No. 1 or No. 2
Sun Prestige 741 EP No. 1 or
742 EP No. 2
Gulfcrown Grease EP No. 2
Amolith Grease EP No. 2
Citgo HEP No. 1 or No. 2
Texaco Multifak EP No. 1 or
Marfak All Purpose No. 2
Molub-Alloy General Purpose
Grease No. 1 or No. 2
or the equivalent of the above listed lubricants.
b. If bearings are loose and require adjustment,
refer to figure 4-76 and remove hub cap and
spindle cotter pin. Tighten nut with a 12 inch
wrench and at the same time rotate the wheel in
one direction and then in the other until there is
a slight bind to be sure all bearing surfaces are in
contact. Then back off the nut l/6 to l/4 turn,
allowing the wheel to rotate freely. Secure nut at
this position with a new cotter pin and replace
hub cap.
b. Tilt upright back. Place solid heavy blocks
under each upright rail. Tilt upright forward until
vertical to the floor. This should allow the drive
wheels to clear the floor. Remove the wheels
from the hub assembly. See figure 4-77.
c. Remove hub cap, cotter pin, washer, spindle
nut and pull hub assembly from vehicle (see
figure 4-78).
4-55
1. Axle end assembly, R.H., or L.H.
2. Hub cap bolt and lockwasher
3. Hub cap
4. Spindle support
5. Spindle support seal
7. Axle shaft, bearing and sleeve
11. Brake mounting bolt
13. Axle shaft sleeve
14. Ball bearing
15. Bearing bolt and lockwasher
16. Shaft seal
17. Bearing washer, nut, and cotter pin
20. Ring gear bolt
21. Internal ring gear
23. Outer bearing cone
24. Outer bearing cup
26. Drive wheel bolt
27. Drive wheel hub and bearing cup
28. Brake drum
29. snap ring
Figure 4-79. Axle End Details
4-56
30.
31.
32.
35.
36.
38.
38.
40.
41.
42.
Inner bearing cup
Inner bearing cone
Spindle bolt and washer
Brake assembly
Spindle
Bolt and washer
Stud, washer and nut
Vent
Dust shield
Dust shield screw
Figure 4-80. Repack Axle End Bearings
d. Remove bearings and clean in a Stoddard type
cleaning solvent. Slosh bearings up and down in
solvent. Remove and tap large side of bearing
against a block of wood to dislodge solidified
particles of lubricant. Repeat operation until
bearings are thoroughly clean. Blow bearings dry
with compressed air. Direct air stream across
bearing to avoid spinning. Slowly rotate bearing by
hand to facilitate drying. Dip bearings in gear oil
and wrap them in clean paper until time of
installation.
e. Clean ring gear, pinion drive shaft, hub
assembly, s p i n d l e a n d s p i n d l e s u p p o r t i n a
Stoddard type cleaning solvent. See figure 4-79 for
parts identification.
f. Inspect seal for cuts, scratches and nicks. It is
necessary to replace seal if such a condition is
found.
g. Refer to figure 4-80 and repack each axle end
with specified lubricant. Each- axle end holds
approximately 1 pound of grease. Check axle end
vent for obstruction, vent must be open.
Figure 4-81. Carriage Roller Travel Check
drift, leakage at packings, damage and security of
mountings. (Anchor pivot pins, flanges and
mounting rings.)
4-78. LIFT CHAINS. The lift chains are mounted
to the chain anchors on the lift carriage and at the
chain anchor rods near the lift cylinder piston
head.
a. If it becomes necessary to adjust the lift
chains, proceed as follows:
h. Install bearings, seal, hub, washer, spindle nut,
cotter pin and hub cap. Tilt upright back and
remove blocking.
4-76. UPRIGHT AND LIFT MECHANISM
MAINTENANCE AND ADJUSTMENTS.
4-77. LIFT AND TILT CYLINDERS. Check for
Keep clear of load and carriage when
making adjustments to avoid injury if any
malfunction should occur and cause load or
carriage to fall.
4-57
Figure 483. Blocking Wheels
Figure 4-82. Lift Chain Adjustment
b. Elevate carriage to about 4 feet.
c. Smear grease on the inner-slide channel as
shown in figure 4-81.
d. Pick up a capacity load.
Note
It is important that the chain adjustment
be made with a capacity load. In this
manner you will allow for chain stretch.
e. Making sure upright is either vertical or aft of
vertical, lower load to the bottom.
b. Check to be sure there is no bind, as the
upright is lowered slowly. Rail assembly should be
free to lower smoothly without hesitation or
hang-up.
c. If there is any evidence of binding (rail
assembly hesitates, remaining stationary briefly
while lift cylinder continues to retract), upright
rollers must be adjusted. Refer to paragraph 4-83.
4-80. LUBRICATE MACHINE. Lubricate all
miscellaneous linkage with SAE 20 oil and all
grease fittings with chassis grease. (Refer to
Lubrication Chart.)
f. Remove capacity load.
g. Raise carriage and measure the distance from
where the center of the bottom carriage roller
stopped, to the bottom edge of the inner slide.
Distance must not be less than l/2 inch. Adjust
chain length at anchors (see figure 4-82) as
required to obtain this dimension.
4-79. LIFT CARRIAGE AND UPRIGHT
ROLLER ADJUSTMENT CHECK.
a. Extend upright and carriage to the upper limit.
4-68
When lubricating machine, inspect for
leaking hydraulic lines, fittings and
electrical wiring.
4-81. HYDRAULIC CONTROL VALVE AND
LINES. Inspect for damage, leakage and security of
mounting.
4-82. LIFT BRACKET. Inspect for damage, bent
forks, etc.
4-83. UPRIGHT ROLLER ADJUSTMENT. If
upright is binding or sticking during operation, an
adjustment of the upright rollers is necessary. This
adjustment is to be performed as follows:
a. Tilt the upright forward to raise drive wheels
off the ground, and block up drive wheels and
steering wheels as shown in figure 4-83.
b. Raise carriage and secure at its upper limit on
upright with a heavy chain as shown in figure 4-84.
Support carriage by running chain through
lower carriage bar and wrapping chain
around the lift cylinder just above the
chain anchor bracket. Chain should contact
cylinder barrel, not the push rod.
Figure 4-84. Supporting Carriage
c. Position inner rail about 5 inches above the
full down position. Check for excessive clearance
at top and bottom of both sides of the inner rail
Figure 4-85. Roller Clearance Check
4-59
Figure 4-86. Upper and Lower Upright Rollers Exposed
Figure 487. Inside Spanning Tool
4-60
Figure 4-88. Outside Spanning Tool
(see figure 4-85). Some clearance must he evident
but not to exceed 1/32 inch. Record actual
clearances measured and determine the number of
shims required under the roller to bring clearance
into the 1/32 range. Write this number on the inner
rail (bottom rollers) or outer rail (top rollers),
adjacent to the roller.
d. Raise inner rail to 1/2 full up position. Check
roller clearances as in step c (figure 485) and
record number of shims needed to adjust clearance.
For top rollers, record number on the outer rail.
For bottom rollers, record number on the lower
rail.
e. Raise inner rail to its full up position and
repeat roller clearance check, recording numbers
on the inner and outer rails as before. There will
now be 3 numbers recorded on the upright rails
adjacent to each roller.
f. Lower inner rail part way and remove stop
block from top of inner rail
g. Lower inner rail until the upper and lower
rollers are exposed as shown in figure 4-86.
h. Remove the right and left hand upper rollers
and count the number of shims used with each.
i. Refer to the numbers previously recorded on
the outer rail. The smallest of these numbers
represents the number of shims to be added behind
the roller.
j. Ideally, there should be the same number of
shims behind each of the upper rollers. If, however,
an extra shim is required behind one of the rollers,
do not remove it. Mark the outer rail, on the side
having the extra shim, with a plus one (+l).
k. Repeat steps h, i and j on the bottom rollers.
If an extra shim is required on one of the bottom
rollers, it must be installed on the same side as the
extra shim (if needed) on the top roller.
1. After roller adjustment is made and all rollers
4-61
Figure 4-89. Checking Roller Angle
are in place, raise inner rail enough to install the
stop block behind the inner rail.
Figure 4-90. Securing Outer Thrust Roller
4-84. CARRIAGE ROLLER ADJUSTMENT.
Carriage roller adjustment will require removal of
the carriage. Refer to paragraph 5-140 for
carriage removal procedures.
d. Span upper carriage rollers
checking across the upper outside of the
roller (outermost camber point). Add or subtract
shims behind rollers until the span across the
rollers is equal to the inner rail span, less l/16 inch
total. The l/16 inch clearance must not be
exceeded. No more than l/32 inch clearance is
permissible over the roller on each side.
4-86. TOOLS REQUIRED. Special measuring
devices called spanners are required to perform the
carriage roller adjustments. Refer to figures 4-87
and 4-88 for details of construction.
4-87. CENTERING ADJUSTMENT.
4-86. CLEARANCE ADJUSTMENT.
a. Use inside spanning tool, figure 4-87, to check
the distance between the inner rails at every ten
inches over their entire length. Lock the tool at the
smallest span obtained.
Note
Measurements must be taken inside the
rails, not on the edges, and the spanning
tool must be held perpendicular to the
rails.
b. Use a sliding “T” bevel to check angle of the
carriage rollers. This angle must be 2° ± 1/2°. If
not, the roller pin must be replaced. (See figure
489.)
c. Set outside spanning tool to match span of the
inside spanning tool, and lock the outside tool in
position.
4-62
a. Check outer thrust rollers for wear and loose
mounting studs. If bearings are worn, replace, If
loose, tighten and stake in place as shown in figure
4-90.
b. Center the carriage roller within the outer
thrust rollers by placing a 6-inch scale on the
carriage roller surface and measuring the distance
to the outer thrust roller face. Check this distance
on both sides. (See figure 491.)
c. Transfer shim from one side to the other to
make the measurement equal on both sides. Do not
remove a shim from one side without replacing
that shim on the opposite side.
4-88. SQUARING ADJUSTMENT.
a. Check for an out-of-square condition by
placing a carpenter’s square over the rollers and
upper fork bar as shown in figure 4-92. Hold the
Figure 4-91. Roller Centering Measurement
Figure 4-93. Measuring Out-of-Square
d. After the lower roller on one side is squared,
shims will have to be added or removed from the
opposite side to bring the roller span to the proper
dimension, as outlined in paragraph 4-86, steps c
and d.
Figure 4-92. Checking Rollers for Squareness
square in place with hand and ankle as shown.
b. Hold square tightly and measure distance
between the top face of the upper fork bar to the
edge of the square at Point A shown in figure 4-93.
c. Take a similar measurement at far end of
square. This measurement should be the same as
that obtained in step b. If it is not, add or remove
shims on lower roller shaft to make these
measurements the same.
4-63/4-66 blank)
(Next printed p. 4-67)
TABLE 4. TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDE
TROUBLE
REMEDY
PROBABLE CAUSE
1. ENGINE
Battery discharged
Recharge or replace battery.
Battery cable terminals loose
or corroded. Ignition fuse blown
Remove and clean, reinstall and
tighten cables. Replace fuse.
Starting motor drive gear jammed
in flywheel teeth
Loosen starting motor and free-up
gear.
Improper oil
Change oil to proper grade.
Battery cable terminal broken
Replace cable.
Poor starting switch contacts
Replace switch.
Faulty Neutral Starting Switch
Refer to Starting Motor.
Starting motor gear does not
engage flywheel
Remove starting motor, and clean
drive mechanism.
Starting motor or drive gear
defective
Replace starting motor.
Ignition switch partly “on”.
Turn switch “on” fully.
Ignition switch defective
Replace switch.
Ignition primary wires or
starting motor cables broken or
connections loose
Repair, or replace and tighten.
Ignition coil primary winding
open
Replace coil.
Distributor points dirty
Clean and adjust points.
Distributor points not closing
Adjust or replace points.
Loose or corroded ground, or
battery cable connections
Remove and clean, reinstall and tighten
cables.
Engine will not start.
Defective condenser
Replace condenser.
Ammeter showing abnormal discharge with
ignition switch “on”.
Shortcircuited or burned distributor cap or rotor
Replace parts.
Starting motor will
not crank engine
Starting motor operates,
but fails to crank engine
when switch is engaged
Engine will not start. No
spark. Ammeter shows
no discharge (Zero reading) with ignition
switch “on”.
4-67
TABLE 4. TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDE (Continued)
TROUBLE
REMEDY
PROBABLE CAUSE
1. ENGINE (Continued)
Engine will not start.
Ammeter showing abnormal discharge with
ignition switch “on”.
(continued)
Weak spark
Good spark
4-68
Short-circuited wire between
ammeter and ignition switch
Repair or replace wire.
Shortcircuited primary winding
in ignition coil
Replace coil.
Distributor points not opening
Clean or replace, and adjust points.
Distributor points pitted or
burned
Clean or replace, and adjust points.
Distributor condenser weak
Replace condenser.
Ignition coil weak
Replace coil.
Primary wire connections loose
Tighten.
High-tension, spark plug wires,
or distributor cap wet
Dry thoroughly.
High-tension, spark plug wires,
or distributor cap damaged
Replace defective parts.
Distributor cap or rotor burned
or broken
Replace defective parts,
Spark plug gap incorrect
Reset gaps.
Shortcircuited
circuit in coil
Replace coil.
secondary
Fuel tank empty
Refill tank.
Dirt or water in carburetor,
or float stuck
Drain and clean carburetor.
Carburetor and engine flooded
by excessive use of choke
Depress accelerator pedal fully,
crank engine with starting motor, when
engine starts, reset throttle and
leave choke control “in”.
Fuel does not reach carburetor
Inspect for damaged or leaky lines or
air leak into line between tank and
fuel pump.
Dirt in fuel lines or tank
Disconnect lines, drain tank, and blow
out lines.
TABLE 4. TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDE (Continued)
TROUBLE
REMEDY
PROBABLE CAUSE
1. ENGINE (Continued)
Engine will not start.
Fuel line pinched
Repair or replace line.
Good spark. (Continued)
Ignition wires incorrectly
installed in distributor cap
Install wires correctly.
Ignition timing incorrect
Reset timing.
Fuel Strainer Clogged
Remove and clean strainer.
Fuel pump does not pump
Clean screen, replace pump if defective.
Lack of engine compression
Report to designated
authority.
Ignition out of time
Reset timing.
Spark plug wires incorrectly
installed at distributor cap
or spark plugs
Install wires correctly.
Distributor cap cracked or
shorted
Replace cap.
Valve holding open
Report to designated
authority.
Improper ignition timing
Reset timing.
Spark plug wires incorrectly
installed in distributor cap
Install wires correctly.
Dirt or water in carburetor
Drain and clean carburetor.
Carburetor improperly adjusted
Clean and adjust carburetor.
Carburetor float level low
Report to designated
authority.
Valve sticking or not seating
properly, burned or pitted
Report to designated authority.
Excessive carbon in cylinders
Remove carbon from cylinders.
Valve springs weak
Report to designated authority.
Backfiring
Engine operates, but
backfires and spits
4-69
TABLE 4. TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDE (Continued)
TROUBLE
REMEDY
PROBABLE CAUSE
1. ENGINE (Continued)
Engine operates, but
backfires and spits
(continued)
Engine stalls on idle
Engine misfires on one
or more cylinders
4-70
Heat control valve not operating
Free-up, and adjust valve.
Fuel pump pressure low
Clean screen; replace pump, if
defective.
Fuel strainer clogged
Remove and clean strainer.
Partly clogged or pinched fuel
lines
Clean and repair lines.
Intake manifold leak
Inspect gaskets and tighten manifold
stud nuts.
Distributor cap cracked or
Shorted
Replace cap.
Carburetor throttle valve closes
too far, or idle mixture incorrect
Adjust carburetor.
Carburetor choke valve remains
closed.
Free-up and lubricate valve.
Dirt or water in idler passages of
Carburetor
Clean or replace carburetor.
Air leak at intake manifold
Inspect gaskets and tighten manifold
stud nuts.
Heat control valve defective
Free-up and adjust valve.
Spark plugs defective, gaps
incorrect
Clean or replace spark plugs, set
gap clearance.
Ignition timing early
Reset timing.
Low compression
Report to designated
authority.
Water leak in cylinder head or
head gaskets
Replace gasket; report cylinder
head leak to designated
authority.
Dirty spark plugs
Clean, adjust, or replace plugs.
Spark plug gap incorrect
Reset gap.
TABLE 4. TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDE (Continued)
TROUBLE
REMEDY
PROBABLE CAUSE
1. ENGINE (Continued)
Engine misfires on one
or more cylinders
(continued)
Engine does not idle
properly
Engine misses at high
speeds
Cracked spark plug porcelain
Replace spark plug.
Spark plug wires grounded
Replace wires.
Spark plug wires incorrectly
installed in cap or at spark plugs
Install wires correctly.
Distributor cap or rotor burned
or broken
Replace defective parts.
Valve tappet holding valve open
Report to designated
authority.
Low engine compression
Report to designated
authority.
Leaky cylinder head gasket
Replace gasket.
Cracked cylinder block, broken
valve tappet or tappet screw
Report to designated
authority.
Ignition timing
Reset timing.
Dirty spark plugs, or gaps too
close
Clean and adjust spark plugs.
Ignition coil or condenser weak
Replace defective parts.
Distributor points sticking,
dirty or improperly adjusted
Clean, adjust, or replace points.
Distributor rotor or cap cracked
or burned
Replace defective parts.
Leaky cylinder head gaskets
Replace gaskets.
Uneven cylinder compression
Report to designated
authority.
High-tension or spark plug wires
leaky, cracked insulation
Replace defective parts.
Carburetor choke not adjusted
Adjust choke.
Carburetor accelerating pump systern defective, dirt in metering
jets or float level incorrect.
Report to designated
authority.
4-71
TABLE 4. TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDE (Continued)
TROUBLE
REMEDY
PROBABLE CAUSE
1. ENGINE (Continued)
Engine misses at high
speeds (continued)
Engine pings (Spark
Knock)
Engine lacks power
4-72
Fuel pump defective, causing lack
of fuel
Clean screen, replace defective pump.
Air cleaner dirty
Clean complete air cleaner and
refill oil cup.
Heat control valve defective
Free-up and adjust.
Valves sticking, weak or
broken valve springs
Report to designated authority.
Fuel strainer clogged
Remove and clean strainer.
Weak distributor bracket arm
spring
Replace point set.
Excessive play in distributor
shaft bearing
Replace distributor.
Spark plugs defective, dirty
or gap incorrectly set
Clean, adjust or replace spark plugs.
Ignition timing early
Reset timing.
Distributor automatic spark
advance stuck in advance
position, or spring broken
Replace distributor.
Excessive carbon deposit in
cylinders
Remove cylinder head and clean.
Incorrect fuel
Drain, use correct fuel.
Ignition timing late
Reset timing.
Incorrect fuel
Use correct fuel.
Leaky cylinder head gasket
Replace gasket.
Excessive carbon formation
Remove cylinder head, and clean
cylinder head, piston heads, cylinder
block, and valves.
Engine runs cold
Test thermostat; in cold weather,
cover radiator.
TABLE 4. TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDE (Continued)
TROUBLE
REMEDY
PROBABLE CAUSE
1. ENGINE (Continued)
Engine lacks power
(continued)
Engine overheats
Insufficient oil, or improper grade
oil
Lubricate in accordance with
lubrication section.
Oil system failure
Report to designated
authority.
Air Cleaner dirty
Clean complete air cleaner, change
oil in cup.
Spark plug gaps too wide
Reset gaps.
Choke valve partially closed, or
throttle does not open fully
Adjust valve or throttle.
Manifold heat control inoperative
F’ree-up and adjust control.
Exhaust pipe, muffler or tail
pipe obstructed
Service or replace obstructed parts.
Low compression, broken valve
springs, sticking valves
Report to designated authority.
Improper tappet adjustment
Adjust tappets.
Lack of fuel
Clean filter, inspect fuel pump, inspect
carburetor for water or dirt and
clean if necessary.
Cooling system deficient. Water
low, air flow through radiator
core restricted
Clean radiator core from engine side
with compressed air or water, or fill
radiator to proper level.
Clogged radiator core (Clogged
internally)
Clean by flushing radiator.
Cylinder head gasket leaking
Tighten cylinder head stud nuts
and/or replace gasket.
Radiator or water pump leaking
Repair or replace defective parts.
Damaged or deteriorated hose
or fan belt
Replace defective parts.
Loose fan belt
Adjust fan belt tension.
Cylinder block or head leaking
Report to designated authority.
4-73
TABLE 4. TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDE (Continued)
TROUBLE
PROBABLE CAUSE
REMEDY
1. ENGINE (Continued)
Engine overheats
(continued)
High fuel consumption
4-74
Ignition timing incorrect
Reset timing.
Damaged muffler, bent or
clogged exhaust pipe
Service or replace defective parts.
Excessive carbon in cylinders
Remove cylinder head, and clean
cylinder head, piston heads cylinder
block, and valves.
Insufficient oil, or improper
grade
Refer to Lubrication Instructions.
Air Cleaner restricted
Clean or replace element.
Inoperative
Replace thermostat and gasket.
thermostat
Water pump impeller broken
Replace pump.
Poor compression
Report to designated authority.
Valve timing incorrect
Reset timing.
High engine speeds (Excessive
driving in lower gear range)
Correct driving practice.
Air cleaner clogged
Clean or replace element.
Carburetor float level too high,
accelerating pump not properly
adjusted
Report to designated authority.
Fuel line leaks
Correct leaks, replace lines.
Overheated engine
See “Engine overheats”.
Carburetor parts worn or broken
Replace fuel carburetor.
Fuel pump pressure too high,
or leaky diaphragm
Replace fuel pump.
Engine running cold
Inspect thermostat, cover radiator
in winter.
Ignition incorrectly timed
Reset timing.
TABLE 4. TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDE (Continued)
TROUBLE
REMEDY
PROBABLE CAUSE
1. ENGINE (Continued)
High fuel consumption
(Continued)
High oil consumption
Low oil pressure
Spark advance stuck
Replace
distributor.
Leaking fuel pump bowl
gasket
Replace gasket.
Low compression
Report to designated
authority.
Carburetor controls sticking
Free-up and lubricate controls.
Engine idles too fast
Adjust carburetor throttle stop screw.
Spark plugs dirty
Clean or replace spark plugs.
Weak coil or condenser
Replace coil or condenser.
Clogged muffler, or bent
exhaust pipe
Service or replace defective parts.
Loose engine mounts, permitting
engine to shake and raise fuel
level in carburetor
Tighten; if damaged, replace
defective mounts.
High engine speeds, or excessive
driving in low gear range
Correct driving practice.
Oil leaks
Replace leaking gaskets.
Improper grade oil, or diluted
Oil
Use new oil of proper grade.
Overheating of engine causing
thinning of oil
See “Engine overheats”.
Oil filter clogged
Clean filter case thoroughly and
replace element.
Defective piston or rings,
excessive side clearance of
intake valves in guides,
cylinder bores worn (scored,
out-of-round, tapered); excessive bearing clearance, misaligned connecting rods
Report to designated authority.
Insufficient oil supply
Fill crankcase to prescribed level.
4-76
TABLE 4. TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDE (Continued)
TROUBLE
PROBABLE CAUSE
REMEDY
1. ENGINE (Continued)
Low oil pressure
(Continued)
Defective valves
Abnormal engine noises
Poor compression
4-76
Improper grade of oil, or
diluted oil foaming at high speeds
Change oil, inspect crankcase
ventilator, inspect for water in oil.
Oil too heavy (funneling in
cold weather)
Change to proper grade oil. (Refer
to Lubrication Instructions.)
Oil pump screen clogged
Remove oil pan and clean pump
screen.
Oil leaks
Report to designated
authority.
Faulty oil pump, pressure
regulator valve stuck or improperly adjusted, or spring
broken
Report to designated authority.
Incorrect tappet adjustment
Adjust tappets.
Other valve troubles
Report to designated
authority.
Loose fan, fan pulley or belt,
heat control valve
Tighten or correct conditions as
required.
Leaking intake or exhaust
manifold or gaskets, cylinder
head gasket, or spark plugs
Tighten loose components or replace
defective gaskets.
Overheated engine, clogged
exhaust system
Remove obstruction from exhaust
system. Inspect for further serviceability.
Other abnormal engine noises
Report to designated individual
in authority.
Incorrect tappet adjustment
Adjust tappets.
Leaking, sticking, or burned
valves; sticking tappets; valve
spring weak or broken; valve
stems and guides worn; piston
ring grooves worn or rings worn,
broken, or stuck; cylinder
bores scored or worn
Report to designated authority.
TABLE 4. TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDE (Continued)
TROUBLE
REMEDY
PROBABLE CAUSE
2. FUEL SYSTEM
Fuel does not reach
carburetor
No fuel in fuel tank
Fuel pump inoperative
Fuel reaches carburetor,
but does not reach
cylinders
High fuel consumption
Low fuel pressure
Engine idles too fast
Fill fuel tank.
Replace pump.
Fuel line air leak between tank
and fuel pump
Repair or replace line.
Fuel line clogged
Disconnect and blow out lines.
Fuel tank cap vent clogged
Clean vent.
Choke does not close
Free-up and lubricate, inspect for
proper operation.
Fuel passage in carburetor
clogged
Clean or replace carburetor.
Carburetor float valve stuck
closed
Report to designated authority.
Lubricant in power train too
heavy
Use correct lubricant.
Incorrect adjustment of
carburetor
Adjust carburetor.
Vehicle overloaded
Reduce loads to specified maximum
capacity.
Tight brakes
Adjust brakes.
Air leak in fuel lines
Tighten connections, repair lines if
damaged.
Fuel pump defective, diaphragm
broken; valves leaking, linkage
worn
Replace fuel pump.
Fuel lines clogged
Clean or replace lines.
Improper carburetor throttle
stop adjustment.
Adjust throttle stop screw.
Carburetor control sticking
Free-up and lubricate control.
4-77
TABLE 4. TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDE (Continued)
TROUBLE
REMEDY
PROBABLE CAUSE
2. FUEL SYSTEM (Continued)
Engine idles too fast
(continued)
Control return spring weak
Replace spring.
Fuel gauge does not
register
Loose wire connection at
instrument panel or tank
unit
Tighten connections.
Instrument panel unit or tank
unit inoperative
Replace unit.
3. IGNITION SYSTEM
Ignition system troubles
Weak spark
Refer to “Engine will not start”.
Timing incorrect
Retime ignition.
Moisture on distributor wires,
coil, or spark plugs
Clean and dry thoroughly.
Ignition switch inoperative
Replace switch.
Primary or secondary wiring loose, Service.
broken, or grounded
Ignition coil
Distributor troubles
4-78
Coil defective
Refer to “Ignition coil troubles”,
below.
Distributor defective
Refer to “Distributor troubles”,
below.
Spark plug defective
Refer to spark plug troubles below.
Connections loose; dirty or
broken external wire, wet
Clean and tighten, or repair, dry
thoroughly.
Coil defective
Replace coil.
Distributor breaker points
dirty or pitted, points gaps
incorrect
Clean, adjust or replace breaker points.
Distributor breaker point arm
spring weak
Replace breaker point arm.
Distributor breaker points
sticking
Free-up breaker points.
TABLE 4. TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDE (Continued)
TROUBLE
REMEDY
PROBABLE CAUSE
3. IGNITION SYSTEM (Continued)
Distributor troubles
(continued)
Spark plug troubles
Distributor automatic advance
defective
Lubricate and free-up. If seized,
replace distributor.
Distributor cap or rotor
shorted, cracked or broken
Replace defective parts.
Distributor rotor does not turn
Report to designated individual in
authority.
Condenser defective
Replace condenser.
Cracked, broken, leaking, or
improper type
Replace spark plug.
Spark plug wires incorrectly
installed on plugs or in distributor cap
Install wires correctly.
Spark plugs dirty; gap
incorrect
Clean, set gaps, or replace plugs.
Spark plug porcelain cracked
or broken
Replace plug.
4. STARTING MOTOR
Starting motor cranks
engine slowly
Starting motor does not
crank engine
Engine oil too heavy
Change to proper grade oil.
Battery charge low
Recharge or replace battery.
Battery cell shorted
Replace battery.
Battery connections corroded,
broken, or loose
Clean and tighten, or replace cables.
Dirty commutator
Clean commutator.
Insufficient brush surface contact
Free-up or replace brush.
Defective starting motor
Replace starting motor.
Starting switch defective
Replace switch.
Engine oil too heavy
Change to proper grade oil.
Starting motor, Solenoid, or
cables defective; loose
connections
Replace or tighten loose connections.
4-79
TABLE 4. TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDE (Continued)
TROUBLE
REMEDY
PROBABLE CAUSE
4. STARTING MOTOR (Continued)
Starting motor does not
crank engine
(continued)
Starting motor pinion gear jammed Remove starting motor and reinstall.
Replace defective driving gear.
in flywheel drive gear
Dirty drive mechanism
Clean and lubricate drive
mechanism.
Faulty Relay Switch
Replace Relay Switch.
Ignition fuse blown
Replace fuse.
Faulty ignition switch
Replace switch.
Faulty Neutral starting
switch
Replace switch.
5. BATTERY, LIGHTS AND HORN
Battery discharged
Battery (other troubles)
Light switch
4-80
Battery solution level low
Add distilled water to bring level above
plates; inspect for cracked case.
Short in battery cell
Replace battery.
Generator not charging
Inspect generator, fan belt, and
regulator.
Loose or dirty connections;
broken cables
Clean and tighten connections; replace
cables.
Excessive use of starting motor
Tune up engine; charge battery.
Idle battery, or excessive use
of lights with engine at idle
Recharge or replace battery. Use
lights sparingly.
Short circuits
Replace defective wiring.
Overheated battery
Inspect for short circuit or excessive
generator charge.
Case bulged (or out of shape)
Inspect for overcharging and overtightening of holddown screws.
Loose or dirty connections;
broken wire
Clean and tighten; replace broken
wire.
TABLE 4. TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDE (Continued)
REMEDY
PROBABLE CAUSE
TROUBLE
5. BATTERY, LIGHTS AND HORN
Light switch
[continued)
Defective switch
Replace switch.
Wiring
Loose or dirty connections;
broken wire or terminal
Clean, tighten, repair or replace.
Wire or terminal.
Lights do not light
Switch not fully “on”
Turn switch “on” fully.
Loose or dirty connections;
broken wire
Clean and tighten; replace or repair
wire or terminal.
Wiring circuit short-circuited,
or open
Correct short circuit or replace
defective parts.
Light burned out
Replace light.
Loose or dirty connection
Clean and tighten connections.
Wiring
Correct short circuit or replace
defective parts.
Lights dim
short-circuited
Defective switch
Replace switch.
Horn troubles
Loose or dirty wiring
connections
Clean and tighten connections.
Horn sounds
continuously
Short-circuit in wiring between
horn and horn button
Replace wire.
Improper tone
Loose or dirty wiring
connections
Clean and tighten connections.
Cover or bracket screws loose
Tighten.
Points adjusted improperly
Adjust points.
Horn fuse blown
Replace fuse.
Open circuit
Trace, repair or replace as required.
Faulty horn relay
Replace relay.
Horn will not operate
4-81
TABLE 4. TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDE (Continued)
TROUBLE
REMEDY
PROBABLE CAUSE
6. TRANSMISSION, CONVERTER AND AXLE ADAPTOR (HYDRATORK DRIVE)
Machine will not move
in either direction
Machine will move in
one direction only
Machine moves slowly
in both directions at
wide open throttle
Parking brake not released
Release brake.
Control linkage not properly
adjusted
Readjust linkage.
Oil level low
Determine cause and correct. Fill to
proper level with Type “A” Automatic Transmission Fluid Armour
Qualified.
No oil pressure
Report to designated authority.
Control linkage not adjusted
Adjust linkage.
No oil pressure to directional
selector. Seals and “0” rings
in directional selector may
be defective
Report to designated authority.
Directional selector discs not
releasing. Discs defective. Relief
hole in D.S. drum clogged
Report to designated authority.
Oil level low
Fill to correct level and determine
cause for loss of oil.
Low oil pressure. Faulty inching
valve, faulty relief valve,
faulty pump
Report to designated authority.
Brakes dragging
Report to designated authority.
Clogged sump screen
Clean screen.
Transmission overheating Low oil
4-82
Check and fill to correct level.
Low directional selector
pressure (check with gauge).
Inching valve not functioning
properly
Report to designated authority.
Seals in selector defective
Report to designated authority.
Regulating valve sticking open
Report to designated authority.
Brakes dragging
Report to designated authority.
TABLE 4. TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDE (Continued)
TROUBLE
REMEDY
PROBABLE CAUSE
6. TRANSMISSION, CONVERTER & AXLE ADAPTER (Hydratork Drive) (Continued)
Transmission overheating
(continued)
Clogged sump screen
Clean screen.
Insufficient oil to torque
converter and cooler
Report to designated authority.
Cooler clogged internally
stopping flow of oil
Machine has full power
and overheats
‘Clean cooler.
Bushing in torque converter
impeller hub worn, allowing
oil to leak out
Report to designated authority.
Slipping stator
Refer to transmission pressure checks.
Overloading machine
Check capacity loads. Never overload.
Radiator core clogged
externally
Clean core.
Pressure regulator valve
sticking, giving low pressure
Report to designated authority.
7. DRIVE AXLE
Badly worn parts
Replace worn parts with new.
Unevenly worn tires
Replace tires.
Improperly adjusted wheel
bearing
Adjust correctly.
Lack of lubricant
Add sufficient lubricant of correct
grade.
Axle noise on drive or
on coast only
Differential pinion gear and
ring gear out of adjustment
or worn excessively
Adjust, repair or replace entire unit
if conditions warrant.
Excessive backlash in
axle driving
Loose axle shaft drive flange
cap screws
Tighten cap screws.
Flange loose on axle shaft
Reweld flange to shaft.
Worn splines on axle shaft
at differential end
Replace drive flange and shaft
assembly.
Continuous axle noise
4-83
TABLE 4. TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDE (Continued)
TROUBLE
REMEDY
PROBABLE CAUSE
7. DRIVE AXLE (Continued)
Excessive backlash in
axle driving
(continued)
Differential drive pinion gear and
ring gear out of adjustment or
worn excessively
Adjust or replace as condition warrants.
Complete failure to
function
Broken axle shaft
Replace axle shaft.
Broken teeth on ring gear or
pinion gear
Replace ring gear and pinion and other
parts of differential necessary. Adjust
ring gear and pinion gear correctly.
8. STEERING AXLE
Trouble
Damaged axle
Replace axle.
Lubrication leaks
Replace oil seals. (Refer to lubrication
section). Report to designated
authority.
Incorrect caster or camber
Report to designated authority.
Uneven tire wear
Check wheel alignment.
9. STEERING
Steering difficult
Wander or weaving
4-84
Lack of lubrication
Lubricate.
Tight steering system connections
Lubricate and adjust linkage.
Tight steering gear; misaligned
wheels
Report to designated authority.
Bent steering connecting linkage
or arm
Straighten or replace linkage.
Misaligned steering gear
mounting
Adjust mounting.
Improper toe in, camber, or
caster (axle twisted)
Report to designated authority.
Steering system connections
or king pin bearings not
properly lubricated
Lubricate.
Loose wheel bearings
Adjust wheel bearings.
TABLE 4. TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDE (Continued)
TROUBLE
REMEDY
PROBABLE CAUSE
9. STEERING (Continued)
Wander or weaving
(continued)
low speed shimmy or
wobble
Vehicle pulls to one
side
Steering gear worn or
maladjusted
Report to designated authority.
Steering gear mountings
loose
Tighten mounting bolts.
Loose steering connections
Adjust and tighten linkage.
Steering gear worn, or adjustment
too loose
Report to designated authority.
Loose wheel bearings
Adjust wheel bearings.
Odd size, or new and old
tires on opposite wheels
Match tires.
Tight wheel bearings
Adjust. Lubricate wheel bearings.
Bent steering arm or
connection
Straighten or replace bent linkage.
10. BRAKES
Brakes drag
Improper pedal adjustment
Adjust brake pedal free travel.
Brake pedal return spring
broken or weak
Replace spring.
Brakes improperly adjusted
Adjust brakes.
Brake shoe anchor pin tight
in shoe
Free-up pin and lubricate lightly.
Brake shoe return spring
broken or weak
Replace spring.
Loose or damaged wheel bearings
Adjust or replace wheel bearings.
Insufficient brake shoe clearance,
or improper brake anchor pin
adjustment
Adjust brakes.
Brake backing plate loose
Tighten plate.
Grease on linings
Correct grease leakage; clean or install
new shoes and lining assemblies.
4-85
TABLE 4. TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDE (Continued)
TROUBLE
PROBABLE CAUSE
REMEDY
I
10. BRAKES (Continued)
Brakes drag
(continued)
Severe brake action on
light pedal pressure
Brake locked
Brake noisy or chatters
Excessive pedal travel
Excessive pedal pressure
4-86
Dirt imbedded in lining
Clean lining with wire brush.
Drums scored or rough
Replace drum and brake shoe and
lining assemblies.
Brake shoes improperly
adjusted
Adjust brakes.
Grease on linings
Correct grease leakage; clean or install
new shoes and lining assemblies.
Loose brake shoe anchor
Adjust and tighten.
Brake pedal lacks free travel
Adjust pedal free travel.
Brakes frozen to drums (cold
weather)
Break loose by driving vehicle.
Brake lining worn
Replace shoe and lining assemblies.
Grease on linings
Correct leakage; clean or replace shoe
and lining assemblies.
Dirt embedded in linings
Clean lining with wire brush.
Improper or loose linings
Replace shoe and lining assemblies.
Brake shoe or drum distorted
Straighten or replace.
Lining worn
Adjust or replace shoe and lining
assemblies .
Brake improperly adjusted
Adjust brake.
Scored brake drums
Repair or replace drums.
Grease on linings; worn or
glazed lining
Correct grease leakage; clean up and
replace shoe and lining assemblies.
Warped brake shoes, or
defective brake linings
Replace shoe and lining assemblies.
Shoes improperly adjusted
Adjust brakes.
Brake drum scored or distorted
Repair or replace drums.
TABLE 4. TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDE (Continued)
TROUBLE
PROBABLE CAUSE
REMEDY
I
10. BRAKES (Continued)
Excessive pedal pressure
(continued)
Wheel troubles
Shoes improperly adjusted
Adjust brakes.
Insufficient fluid in master
cylinder
Fill master cylinder to within l/4 inch
of the top.
Wheel wobbles; bent
Inspect mounting on hub, spindles,
and drive axle; replace defective wheel
or mounting.
Wheel loose on hub
Tighten.
Wheel out of balance
Balance wheel.
Wheel bearings run hot
Adjust, lubricate wheel bearings.
11. HYDRAULIC SYSTEM
Pump not delivering oil
Wrong direction of rotation
Must be reversed immediately to prevent
seizure and breakage of parts due to
lack of oil.
Tank oil level low
Add recommended oil.
Oil intake pipe or suction
filter plugged
Pump not developing
pressure
Replace filter cartridge, clean strainer
if so equipped.
Air leak in suction line
Will prevent priming, or cause noise
and irregular action of control circuit.
Oil viscosity too heavy to
pick up prime
Thinner oil should be used, per
recommendations for given temperature and service.
Broken pump shaft or gear
Report to designated authority.
Pump not delivering oil for
any of the above reasons
Check oil circulation by watching
oil in tank.
Relief valve setting not
high enough
Refer to relief valve instructions.
Relief valve sticking open
Dirt under pressure adjustment valve.
Refer relief valve instructions.
4-87
TABLE 4. TROUBLESHOOTING GUIDE (Continued)
TROUBLE
REMEDY
PROBABLE CAUSE
11. HYDRAULIC SYSTEM (Continued)
Leak in hydraulic control
system (cylinders or valves)
Find leak and correct.
Partially clogged intake line,
intake filter or restricted
intake pipe
Pump must receive intake oil freely
or cavitation will take place.
Small air leak at pump intake
piping joints
Test by pouring oil on joints while
listening for change in operation.
Tighten as required.
Air leak at pump shaft
packing
Repair or replace.
Tank air vent plugged
Must be open thru breather opening
or air filter.
Too high oil viscosity
Use recommended oils.
Shaft packing worn
Replace shaft packing per preceding
instructions.
Oil filter dirty
Replace filter element.
Forks do not lift to
maximum height
Hydraulic oil level low
Fill sump tank.
Lift or tilt action fails
Loss of oil pressure
Report to designated authority.
Oil leak at top of lift
cylinder assembly
Worn or damaged lift piston
seal
Replace seal.
Scored cylinder wall
Replace cylinder.
Plugged vent line
Clean out vent line. Replace if
collapsed.
Worn seal
Replace seal.
Scored piston rod
Replace rod and eliminate cause of
scoring which may be caused by misalignment, worn bearing or foreign
matter.
Lift chains out of adjustment
Adjust chains.
Pump not developing
pressure (continued)
Pump making noise
Oil leak around piston
rod at tilt cylinder
With load centered on
lift forks load is lifted
unevenly
4-88
SECTION V
REPAIR
5-1. GENERAL. Instructions within this section
provide for removal and repair of all major
components and assemblies of the vehicle. It is
assumed that organizations undertaking such depth
of repair shall have proper facilities and equipment
for proper performance of the work. The following
paragraphs 5-2 through 5-7 provide general
instructions to be used as a guide in performing
disassembly, cleaning, inspection, repair, and
reassembly.
Prior to performing any repair by welding,
refer to
paragraph 5-8 for specific
instructions regarding welding of highly
stressed parts.
5-2. GENERAL REMOVAL INSTRUCTIONS.
a. Before attempting removal of any electrical or
hydraulic component, make certain that the
system is not energized. Disconnect battery ground
strap, lower carriage to the floor and provide
suitable blocking to relieve all pressure from the
hydraulic system.
b. Insure that adequate clearance is available for
removal of the component. Disassemble the truck
to the extent necessary to provide adequate
working clearance.
c. Use a chain hoist, jack or other aid when
lifting the heavier components. The lifting device
should be positioned and attached to the
component to remove all strain from the mounting
hardware before the last of the hardware is
removed.
d. To facilitate reassembly and installation, apply
identifying tags to mating ends of electric or
hydraulic lines as they are disconnected. Identify
parts of similar configuration to insure correct
reassembly.
5-3. GENERAL DISASSEMBLY.
a. Preformed packings, gaskets, seals, and similar
material should be discarded when removed. Do
not use metal tools to remove sealing material. To
prevent damage to mating surfaces, use wood or
plastic as probes.
b. Cotter pins, lockwashers, lockwire, self-locking
nuts, and any similar locking devices shall be
discarded when removed.
c. To facilitate reassembly and installation, apply
identifying tags to mating points of electric,
pneumatic, hydraulic lines, etc., when they are
disconnected.
Identify
parts
of
similar
configuration to ensure correct reassembly.
d. To prevent moisture and foreign matter from
entering open housings, lines, and other openings,
apply protective covers as soon as practicable after
disassembly. Wrap all parts in clean paper or dip
parts in preservative oil, Military Specification
MIL-C-8188, or equivalent.
e. Remove only those parts requiring repair or
replacement. Do not disassemble a component any
further than necessary to accomplish needed
repairs.
5-4. GENERAL CLEANING.
a. When cleaning ball or roller bearings, place
them in a basket and suspend them in a container
of dry cleaning solvent overnight. If necessary, use
a brush to remove caked grease, chips, etc. Avoid
rotating the bearing before solid particles are
removed to prevent damaging races and balls. When
bearings have been cleaned, spin them immediately
in light lubricating oil to remove solvent.
b. Do not clean preformed packings or other
rubber parts in dry cleaning solvent. These parts
should be wiped clean with a clean, dry, lint-free
cloth.
5-1
c. Prior to disassembly of the vehicle, the
exterior parts of the equipment should be
thoroughly cleaned to remove accumulated mud,
tar, and grease. This procedure will facilitate
inspection and disassembly. For cleaning exterior
parts, use a vapor pressure spray rinse cleaner.
d. For cleaning the exterior of the engine frame
and hoods, use Gun, Engine, Kerosene Spray,
Stock No. 7900-402730, or equivalent. Use
Military
Cleaning,
Aircraft
Compound,
Specification MIL-C-25769, in a mixture consisting
of one part compound with four to nine parts dry
cleaning solvent, Federal Specification P-D-680.
Allow application to remain on item surface for
approximately 10 minutes before rinsing. Rinse
with hot or cold water under pressure. If available,
use hot water under 80 to 120 pounds pressure. An
ordinary garden hose with nozzle may be used if
other equipment is not available. Rinse thoroughly.
Do not clean tires, lubricant seals, rubber
h o s e s , o r electrical components with
preceding cleaning agent.
e. Electrical parts, such as coils, junction blocks,
switches, a n d w i r i n g , incorporating insulating
materials should not be soaked or sprayed with
cleaning solutions. Clean these parts with a clean,
lint-free cloth moistened with dry cleaning solvent,
Federal Specification P-D-680.
f. Oil and fuel tanks and similar reservoirs should
be flushed, using a spray gun and dry cleaning
solvent.
Flush with clean, hot water, or steam.
h. The electrical system battery exterior surfaces
should be cleaned with a weak solution of baking
soda and water. Apply the solution with a bristle
brush to remove any corrosive buildup on the
battery cable clamps and terminals and battery
tray.
i. When cleaning hydraulic system components,
use petroleum-free solvents. Clean and dry parts
thoroughly to make sure that no residue remains.
If a coating of preservative is required prior to
reassembly, apply a light film of preservative oil,
MIL-O-6083. If
Military
Specification
petroleum-free solvents are not available for
cleaning, use hydraulic fluid compatible with that
used in the vehicle system.
Do not use gasoline or other petroleum
base products to clean or preserve
hydraulic system components.
j, Wash painted surfaces of vehicle with a
solution consisting of l/4 lb. of soap chips, Federal
Specification P-S-579, to 1 gallon of water.
55. GENERAL INSPECTION.
a. Examine bearings for rusted or pitted balls,
races, or separator. Examine balls and races for
brinnelling, abrasion, and serious discoloration.
The following are causes for bearing rejection:
1. Cuts or grooves parallel to ball or roller
rotation.
2. Fatigue pits (as opposed to minor machine
marks or scratches).
Do not use soap or alkalies for cleaning
tank interiors.
g. The cooling system radiator core should be
cleaned with steam or hot water. If sediment
within the core cannot be completely removed by
this method, the core may be boiled in a solution
of sodium carbonate and water. Use a solution of
one pound of sodium carbonate, Federal
Specification O-S-571, to each gallon of water.
5-2
3. Cracks detected during magnetic particle
inspection.
Note
Excluding defects which may cause bearing
binding or misalignment, nicks or gouges
outside race load areas are not cause for
rejection.
b. Inspection consists of checking for defects
such as physical distortion, wear, cracks, and
pitting, and checking dimensions of parts for
compliance with maximum wear limits data. Parts
subjected to heavy load or pressure shall be
inspected more thoroughly by performing surface
temper, magnetic particle, or fluorescent penetrant
procedures where necessary. Clean all parts before
inspection.
c. When removing drain plugs from transmission,
engine, or hydraulic system components, inspect
the sediment adhering to the plug. Accumulations
of grit and/or fine metal particles may indicate
actual or potential component failure. A few fine
particles are normal. This inspection is effective in
determining defective parts prior to internal
inspection of the component, and to predict
degradation of the equipment.
d. Gears should be inspected upon removal for
the following conditions:
1. Normal wear in excess of practical limits.
2. Pitting of teeth due to extreme pressure
loading.
3. Abrasive wear due to foreign materials in
lubricant.
4. Scoring, siezing, and galling of teeth due to
excessive loads and clearance.
5. Burning and loss of temper due to extreme
high temperature operation. Caused by excessive
friction and lack of lubrication.
as for gears. However, the condition, if ever
will in most cases be much less
present,
When doubtful of the actual
pronounced.
serviceable condition o f s p l i n e s , p e r f o r m a
magnetic particle inspection.
f. Check all hose surfaces for broken or frayed
fabric. Check for breaks caused by sharp kinks or
rubbing against other parts of the truck. Inspect
copper tubing lines for kinks. Inspect the fitting
threads for damage. Replace any part found
defective. Following reassembly and during initial
truck operation period, check for leaks.
g. Visually inspect all castings and weldments for
cracks. Parts upon which great stress is placed may
be inspected further, using the magnetic particle
inspection method. Critical non-ferrous parts may
be flourescent penetrant inspected.
h. Inspect all harnesses for chaffed or burned
insulation. Inspect all terminal connectors for loose
connections and broken parts.
5-6. GENERAL REPAIR.
a. Remove burrs from gear teeth with a fine-cut
file or hand grinder.
b. Alternator slip rings and
may be polished in a lathe,
sandpaper. After polishing,
residue from commutator with
starter commutators
using a strip of 00
blow all dust and
compressed air.
c. Chassis and exterior painted parts may be
resurfaced where paint is damaged, or where parts
have been repaired, by using an abrasive disc driven
through a flexible shaft.
6. Rolling or plastic yielding due to extreme
loads over a long period.
7. Cracks and fractures due to shock-loading.
If visual inspection proves the service of
gears doubtful, perform a surface temper or
magnetic particle inspection, or both.
Suitable precautions should be taken to
guard other parts of the vehicle from
abrasive dust. The operation should not be
performed near exposed working parts and
all openings which would allow the dust to
reach working parts should be masked.
e. Inspect shaft splines for wear, pitting, rolling
or peening, and for fatigue cracks. In many
instances, the same inspection procedure will apply
d. Remove residue and oil stain from bearing
races with crocus cloth.
Note
5-3
e. Prior to resurfacing, scrape off loose and
blistered paint from damaged areas. Clean area to
be painted by sanding or buffing. Remove residue
cleaning material with paint thinner, Federal
Specification TT-T-306, and dry thoroughly.
f. During repair operations, bare steel surfaces
shall be protected from oxidation when not
actually u n d e r g o i n g r e p a i r w o r k , i . e . , w h i l e
reinspection or
awaiting any
repair
step,
reassembly. Such protection shall be accomplished
by dipping the parts in, or spraying them with
Military
preventive
compound,
corrosion
Specification MIL-C-6259. The same protective
coating shall be applied to other metals, if
necessary to prevent oxidation under climatic or
atmospheric conditions prevailing. Aluminum parts
may require protection in atmospheres having a
high salt content. Steel parts must be protected in
all instances.
resistance of the wire and impair efficiency of the
e l e c t r i c a l c o m p o n e n t s , especially the ignition
system.
i. Replace all broken, frayed, crimped, or soft
flexible lines and hoses. Replace fittings which are
stripped or damaged. Replace entire flexible hose if
fittings are damaged. Make sure the hose clamps do
not crimp hoses.
j. Replace any bolt, screw, nut, or fitting on
which threads are damaged. Inspect tapped holes
for thread damage. If cross-threading or spalling is
evident, retap the hole for the next oversize screw
or stud. When retapping will result in weakening
the part, or when the cost of the part makes
retapping impractical, replace the damaged part. At
times, merely chasing the threads with the proper
size tap or die will be adequate.
5-7. GENERAL REASSEMBLY.
Note
The above instruction is applicable to
polished and machined steel parts not
protected by cadmium, tin, copper, or
other plating or surface treatment. Bare
metal surfaces must be free of moisture
when applied. Acid present in perspiration
and skin oils may attack steel surfaces if
fingerprints are not removed. Dip parts in
fingerprint remover compound, Military
Specification MIL-C-15074, after handling,
to prevent such action.
g. Welding and brazing processes may be
employed for the repair of cracks in external steel
parts, s u c h a s b r a c k e t s , p a n e l s , a n d l i g h t
framework. However, the time required, the
difficulty of working with the metal, and the
chance of embrittlement and subsequent failure
make such repairs of questionable value. Hence
they should be attempted only when replacement
parts are not available. Welding and brazing of
castings and running parts or parts to which great
stress is applied is not permissible, except in
emergencies. Refer to paragraph 5-8 for specific
welding instructions.
h. Replace all broken, worn, or burned electrical
wiring. Wires on which several strands are broken
must be replaced. Broken strands will increase the
5-4
a. Remove protective grease coatings from new
parts prior to installation.
b. To replace a preformed packing, first dovetail
groove, then stretch packing and place into
position. Rotate component on flat surface,
applying a downward pressure to uniformly press
the packing into position.
c. To provide added sealing for gaskets, coat both
sides with Permatex Super 300 gasket sealant
(Permatex Co., Inc., West Palm Beach, Fla.) or
equivalent. Be sure that all traces of previous
gasket and sealant are removed before installing
new gasket.
d. Install oil seals with seal lip facing in, applying
an even force to the outer edge of seal. Coat oil
seals evenly with oil or grease before installing. If
oil seals are to be installed over keyed or splined
shafts, use a guide to prevent sharp edges of the
keyway of splines from cutting the leather or
neoprene seal. Guides can be constructed of very
thin gage sheet metal and shaped to the required
diameter. However, make certain the guide edges
are not sharp and are bent slightly inward so they
do not cut the seal.
e. During reassembly of shafts and bearings in
housings, first mount bearing on shaft, then install
the assembly by applying force to the shaft. When
mounting bearings on shafts, always apply force to
the inner races.
f. Lubricate all preformed packings with a thin
coating of light mineral oil before installation.
g. Lubricate bearings prior to reassembly with
the type of lubricant normally used in the related
housing or container. This will provide lubrication
during the first run-in until lubricant from the
system can reach the bearings.
5-8. REPAIR WELDING. CAUTION
5-9. GENERAL. Clark Equipment Company has
historically opposed field repair of critical
components of any Industrial Truck Division
product. It is recommended, rather, that the failed
or damaged component be replaced at the lowest
serviceable level. The manufacturer does, however,
recognize that situations may arise in which
replacement of the part(s) is not feasible for
reasons of time limitations, spare parts shortages,
etc.
5-10. In those cases of emergency where welding
repair is apparently the only practical means of
restoring the serviceability of the vehicle, the
instructions given below must be rigidly followed.
5-11. In no case is but&welding to be allowed on
rail section, channels, beams, forks, or fork bars. If
fractured, these must be replaced, preferably at the
next higher weldment assembly.
6-12. Personnel should be cautioned against
adding brackets and attachments by welding on
upright members, for personal interests. The nature
of this practice invites disregard for good welding
design, as well as creating unnecessary visibility
problems for the operator.
6-13. WELDING PRACTICES, The surfaces of
parts to be welded shall be free from paint, grease,
and scale which can be removed by chipping and
wire brushing, and other foreign matter. When
multiple layers of weld metal are required, each
layer shall be thoroughly cleaned before depositing
another layer. All welded parts and assemblies shall
be free from cracks and other imperfections that
may reduce the effectiveness of the part or
assembly. All weldments shall be free from slag,
flux, weld spatter, and other impurities detrimental
to the strength and soundness of the weld. Work
shall be positioned for flat welding whenever
practicable. Butt type joints having members of
equal thickness shall be aligned within 10 percent
of the thickness of the members involved.
Weldments shall be free from overlays. Undercut in
weldments of type 2 and type 3 steels shall not be
more than 0.01 inch deep when its direction is
transverse to the primary stress in the part that is
undercut. Undercut shall be not more than
1/32-inch deep when its direction is parallel to the
primary stress in the part that is undercut.
5-14. PREINSPECTION.
a. The area of the machine to be repaired must
be thoroughly cleaned. Steam-cleaning of the
entire machine is recommended.
b. It must be remembered that whenever a failure
occurs in any component, the same shock forces
causing the failure have been present elsewhere in
that component, and have been transmitted
throughout the structure wherever there is
resistance to that force. Because of this factor, a
thorough inspection of all members and weld joints
so affected must be made, such as:
*Forks
Fork hanger brackets
Carriage fork bars
Carriage lift brackets
*Carriage rollers
Carriage roller shafts
*Lift chain
*Chain sheaves
Upright mounting trunnions
All upright tiebars
Upright tilt brackets
Upright roller shafts
*Upright rollers
Upright lift cylinder
support casting
Upright lift cylinder
chain anchor
Reactive frame members
Attachment/Device members,
if any
Load backrest, if any
Overhead guard, if affected
*These components must be replaced.
DO NOT REPAIR.
5-5
c. The use of magnetic particle and/or dye
penetrant techniques of nondestructive testing for
this inspection are highly recommended.
5-15. SAFETY.
a. Protect-o-seal (anti-flashback) fuel tank cap
must be in place before grinding, burning, or
welding. Preferred procedure is to empty the fuel
tank and purge with CO2 .
Before attaching welding ground cable to
the machine, be sure that the alternator
harness
battery
cables are
and/or
disconnected. This is to prevent burning
out the diodes in the alternator because of
reverse polarity.
b. Always wear helmet, asbestos gloves, suitable
shoes, apron, or other suitably protective clothing
when welding.
c. Clothing should be heavy, free from oil or
grease. Pockets and cuffs should be protected
against sparks and slag.
5-16. FIRE PROTECTION.
a. Remove work from hazardous area before
cutting or welding. If this is not possible, remove
flammable material from work area, or cover with
flame arresting material.
b. Correct those conditions where sparks or slag
can travel into combustible materials.
c. Keep oil or grease separated from oxygen. This
combination is explosive if ignited.
d. Do not allow clothing to collect pure oxygen.
In this concentrated or oxygen-enriched condition,
materials burn violently.
e. Keep fully charged fire extinguishers nearby.
Employ standby assistant with extinguisher during
unavoidably hazardous conditions.
5-17. VENTILATION.
a. Fans on welders and work help to assure good
ventilation. Adequate exhaust fans are essential.
However, a breeze directed on the arc can destroy
the gas shield around the arc.
b. Never use oxygen for ventilation, or as air jet.
d. Portable grinders should have proper wheel
guards. Operator should be equipped with goggles
or safety shield.
e. Always use proper torch, tip, electrode, and
holder for the job.
f. Maintain good welding cables, preferably
protected by loom.
g. Ground cables to work, never to house
systems, hoists, chain falls, etc. Attach welding
ground cable to one of the two members being
joined. Do not run current through bearings or
wear surfaces.
h. Welding area should be clean and dry.
i. Oxygen should never be used as compressed
air, in cleaning or drying operations.
j. Do not use rope to suspend work when
flame-cutting, grinding, or welding.
5-6
c. Avoid all welding or cutting in paint booths,
around dip tanks, degreasing, or other naturally
hazardous areas.
d. Excessive or continued breathing of smoke,
toxic fumes, or dust is injurious. Use respirator in
addition to ventilation under severe conditions.
e. Keep all air in work area moving toward
exhaust system.
5-18. FILLER METALS.
a. All stick electrodes for subject contract joints
must be low hydrogen coated (herein called L.H.)
L.H. electrode E-7018 (AWS Class.) is recommended, except when specially noted.
b. E-7018, E-8018, E-9018, E-10018, E-11018
have AC-DC polarity, reversing current, with a
coating of low hydrogen iron powder.
c. L.H. electrodes are supplied from the vendor
Figure 5-1. Welding Repair of Carriage
5-7
Figure 5-2. Welding Repair of Fork Assembly
in hermetically sealed containers, and must have
storage care normal to their type. If containers
have been opened for electrodes to become
exposed to normal (and above) atmospheric
humidity, the electrodes should be oven baked at
700° F. for 1 hour, minimum.
d. L.H. electrodes which have been in water
should be scrapped.
e. Remove only enough electrodes from the
container to perform the immediate job. Open
containers should be stored in heated storage
containers held at 200° to 300° F.
f. Clark Equipment employs little or no TIG
production welding at the Industrial Truck
Division (ITD).
g. Clark Equipment (ITD) employs MIG welding
extensively in production welding. Due to its
nature however, the welding instruction herein
(repair, as opposed to production welding) will
deal only with stick electrodes. The precautionary
5-8
and preparation instruction herein applies also to
MIG or TIG welding.
5-19. PREPARATION.
a. In natural ambient temperatures of 60° F. or
less, the machine (or component) should be “room
soaked” o v e r n i g h t i n 7 0 ° F . ( + ) t o e q u a t e a
preheat. If this is impossible, the weld zone (area
6” to 10” each side) should be preheated to a
minimum of
l00oF. before welding. This
minimum temperature should be maintained on
the heat zone of each joint until that joint is
completed.
b. Repair of forks, hangers and guides require a
preheat of 150° to 250°F. Thermal sticks may be
used to check these weld heat-affected zones.
Tempil sticks are available from welding suppliers
in 50° increments from l00 o F. through 2200° F.
Welding repair of fork proper is not recommended.
c. All cracks in the damaged area, or in areas
listed in paragraph 5-14 above, must be
Figure 5-3. Welding Repair of Outer Rail Trunnion
groove-ground the entire length of the crack, and
the entire crack removed. Any weld repair must be
made on sound material.
d. No notches, gouges, or craters should be left in
the area of weld repair, but must be weld-filled and
ground to the original contour before repair
welding. Preparation for weld assumes smooth
surfaces and contours easily accessible to the weld
arc. Surfaces of the upright rails are to be
protected against such cratering, which can create
surface embrittlement and a tendency to fracture.
e. Finish grind marks after welding (if any) on
any surface should not exceed 63 microinches, and
should run in the direction of the load. When
5-9
Figure 5-4. Welding Repair of Outer Rail Assembly
required, a disc grinder with #80 grit abrasive is
recommended.
5-20. WELDING.
a. Welding should be performed by experienced/qualified welders.
b. Voltage/amperage/speed settings should be
balanced to produce a well-formed bead, and to
assure proper penetration.
c. For subject component welding, the following
ranges apply for E-7018, E-8018, E-9018, and
E-10018 electrodes:
Manufacturers
recommendation for arc length and amperage is to be
followed.
5-10
Size
Amperage
3/32
70-120
100-150
120-200
200-275
275-350
300-400
1/8
5/32
3/16
7/32
l/4
Weld Inches/Min.
(Average)
6-8
8-10
10-12
12-14
14-16
These ranges must be balanced per (b.) above.
d. On the rectifier type welders (most common
today) the voltage is variable and is automatically
keyed to the amperage. The voltage range is therefore omitted from the listing.
e. Average welding speed (inches per minute) is
based on l/4” fillets and on flat and horizontal
Figure 5-5. Welding Repair of Inner Rail Assembly
joints. It will be obvious that the selection of
electrode sizes under 5/32” is unwise for this
application.
f. All joints calling for 3/8” (or more) fillet must
be made in 2 or more passes. Bead from first pass is
to be chipped and work must not be allowed to
cool between passes.
g. Welding on fork assemblies or upright
members usually involves material with up to
0.45% Carbon. Two-pass welding with slag removal
between passes allows one pass to act as additional
preheat or post heat to the other pass. The
heat-affected zone hardness will be kept low and
safe in this manner.
h. Figures 5-1 thru 5-5 illustrate points of weld
and proper weld symbols for the types of weld to
be used in each case when welding on carriage and
upright parts.
for chill cracks. If any, prepare as in paragraph
5-19 (above) and reweld.
b. Joint inspection is recommended by either of
the following methods:
1. Dye penetrant, wet or dry process.
2. Magnetic particle inspection. Manufacturer’s
instructions included with the testing gear should
be followed as applied to the size, shape, or other
nature of the work being tested. In general,
however, the conditions shown below will serve in
most cases, whether the process employs direct or
rectified current.
(a) Distance between prods shall not be less
than 2 inches.
(b) Ratio for prod spacing/amperage/section
thickness:
5-21. INSPECTION.
Spacing
Thickness
Under 3/4”
Thickness
over 3/4”
a. Remove slag and spatter, and check for
conformity to paragraph 5-20 (above). Finished
and cooled joints should be thoroughly inspected
2 ” to 4 ”
4 ” to 6 ”
6 ” to 8 ”
200-300 amps
300-400 amps
400-600 amps
300-400 amps
400-600 amps
600-800 amps
5-11
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
Gasket
Well
Bolt, lockwasher
Hood
Hood
Bracket
Bolt, washer,
lockwasher, spacer
Bracket
Bracket
Bolt, washer,
lockwasher, nut
Hood
Bolt, lockwasher,
nut
13. Plug
14. Support
15. Bolt, lockwasher,
Washer
17. Bracket
18. Bushing
19. Pin, washer, cotter
2 1 . Latch
22. Bolt, lockwasher, nut
23. Handle
24. Prop
25. Pin, cotter
26. Spring
27. Plate
28. Bolt, lockwasher
29. Plug
30. Plug
31. Plate
32. Bolt, lockwasher,
washer
33. Cowl assembly
34. Bolt, washer, lockwasher, nut
35. Cover
36. Bolt, lockwasher
37. Cover
38. Bolt, lockwasher
39. Panel
40. Bolt, washer
41. Dovetail
42. Retainer
43. Spring
44. Nut, washer,
washer nut
45. Bumper,
lockwasher, nut
46. Support
47. Washer
48. Washer
50. Shield
51. Washer, lockwasher, nut
52. Clip
53. Spring
54. Prop bracket
55. Bolt
56. Washer
Figure 5-6. Sheet Metal
(c) For circular magnetization using the direct
method care must be taken to provide sufficient
contact area to pass the required amperage without
overheating or burning the work. 100 to 400
amperes per inch of diameter should be used.
c. Continuous or residual inspection may be
employed.
5-12
d. Repaired weldment should be checked for
straightness, flatness, and overall conformance to
original dimensions prior to returning to service.
5-22. INDEMNITY.
It is understood by all parties that the welding
1.
2.
3.
4.
Bracket
Stud, nut, washer
Bolt, nut
Mount
5. Washer
6. Bracket
7. Stud, nut,
washer
8. Bolt, washer,
nut
9. Mount
10. Washer
11.
12.
13.
14.
Mount
Mount
Washer
Washer
Figure 5-7. Engine Mounts
repair of any damaged fork, carriage, or upright
the
machines of
subject
component on
Government contract, and the compliance with the
instructions and conditions contained herein, is to
be the responsibility of the agency authorizing that
repair, and not Clark Equipment Company.
5-23. ENGINE
REPAIR.
The
following
instructions are provided to enable using personnel
t o p e r f o r m corrective maintenance involving
removal and replacement of major components and
restore these parts to their original degree of
serviceability.
5-24. The information presented in Table 5 will
aid in determining if worn parts should be
provides
also
service, and
continued in
specifications to be used when rebuilding an
engine.
5-25. ENGINE REMOVAL. In order to remove
the engine, it will be necessary to first remove the
5-13
TABLE 5. ENGINE WEAR LIMITS AND SERVICE SPECIFICATIONS
1. GENERAL.
5. RING GAP/MAX. WEAR LIMIT.
Model . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .Clark D176G
Displacement . . . . . . . . . . . . . 176 cu. in.
Number of cylinders . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .4
Bore . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .3-5/8 in.
Stroke . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 4-1/4 in.
Compression ratio . . . . . . . . . . . . 7.6 to 1
Compression test at cranking speed . 155-175 psi
Top-0.010-0.020
2nd-0.010-0.020
3rd-0.010-0.020
4th-0.010-0.023
2. TORQUE SPECIFICATION.
Main bearing cap bolts . . . . . . . .88-92 ft./lbs.
Connecting rod nuts:
Original equipment . . . . . . . .32-35 ft./lbs.
(elastic stop nut)
Service replacement . . . . . . . .45-50 ft./lbs.
(marsden lock nut)
Cylinder head bolts . . . . . . .
90-92 ft./lbs.
Rocker arm bolts . . . . . . . . .
20 ft./lbs.
Crankshaft pulley . . . . . . . . . .75-85 ft./lbs.
Flywheel . . . . . . . . . . . . . .67-69 ft./lbs.
Balancing cradle to crankcase bolt . . . . .35 ft./lbs.
(oiled)
No. 9 H e a d B o l t . . . . . . 8 9 . 5 - 9 1 . 6 f t . / l & .
in.
in.
in.
in.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
0.045
0.045
0.045
0.045
in.
in.
in.
in.
max.
max.
max.
max.
wear
wear
wear
wear
limit
limit
limit
limit
6. GROOVE CLEARANCE/MAX. WEAR LIMIT.
Top-0.0025-0.004
2nd-0.0015-0.0035
3rd-0.0015-0.0035
4th-0.0015-0.003
in.
in.
in.
in.
.
.
.
.
0.006
0.006
0.006
0.006
in.
in.
in.
in.
max.
max.
max.
max.
wear
wear
wear
wear
limit
limit
limit
limit
7. PISTON PIN.
Clearance in piston
. . . Light thumb pressure at
room temperature
Piston pin diameter . . . . . . .8741- .8743 in.
Piston pin running clearance
inbushing . . . . . . . . . 0.0008-0.0013in.
Piston pin out-of-round and
taper limit . . . . . . . . . . . . 0.00001 in.
8. CONNECTING ROD.
3. PISTONS.
Skirt clearance to give 3 to 6 lb. pull,
using l/2 x 0.002 in. Feeler.
Desired fitting clearance . . . 0.0005-0.0013 in.
Side clearance (total)
. . . . 0.0065-0.0125 in.
Permissible weight variation . . . . . . . . l/4 oz.
Manner of adjustment . . . . . Replace precision
bearings
Distance between center of large
and small end of corm. rod . . 6 . 8 9 0 - 6 . 8 9 5 i n .
Piston pin bushing:
Burnish in place . . . . . . . . .862-.863h
Diamond bore in place . . .
.8754-8751 in.
Permissible weight variation . . . . . . . . l/4 oz.
9. CRANKSHAFT.
Piston land
Top land
2nd land
3rdland .
4th land
clearance with bore:
. . . . . . . . . . . 0.024-0.0295
0.024-0.0295
: : : : : : : : : : : 0.020-0.0255
. . . . . . . . . . . .0.020-0.0255
in.
in.
in.
in.
4. RING WIDTH/TYPE.
0.093-0.0935 in. . . . Chrome plated compression
0.0925-0.0935 in. . . . Tapered face compression
(marked “TOP”)
0.0925-0.0935 in. . . . Tapered face compression
(marked “TOP”)
0.186-0.1885 in. . . . . . . Chrome plated groove
oil cutter (spring toward top)
5-14
Dia. of main bearing journals
. . .2.250-2.249 in.
Dia. of connecting rod
bearing journals . . . . . . . .1.749-l .750in.
Runningclearance-main brgs. 0.0002-0.0027in.
End clearance . . . . . . . . 0.0025-0. 0105 in.
(max. wear 0.012 in.)
Main bearing adjustment
. . . Replace precision
bearings
Crankshaft out-of-round and
taper limit
. . . . . . . . . . . 0.0005 in.
Crankshaft fillets ’ . . 3/32 in. min.; l/8 in. max.
WEAR LIMITS
1. Cylinder sleeve bore wear
.001” per inch of diameter
2.
.0005” per inch of piston travel
Cylinder sleeve bore - maximum
taper (after ridge removal and honing)
3. Piston diameter wear
.0005” per inch of diameter - measure at skirt
and above pin
4. Piston pin diameter wear
.001” total wear
5.
Piston pin bore wear and pin bushing wear
A. In piston
B. In rod
.0005” per inch of diameter
.0005” per inch of diameter
6. Journal clearance
A. Main and connecting rods
.0005” per inch of diameter over high limit
7. Crankshaft
A. Main journal maximum out-of-round
B. Main journal maximum taper
C. Connecting rod journal maximum
out-of-round
D. Connecting rod journal maximum taper
E. End play
8. Camshaft - minimum journal diameter
A. Bushing I. D.
B. End play
9. Valves
A. Minimum stem diameter
10.
Valve guide - maximum I. D.
11. Valve seat maximum width
.0004” per inch of diameter
2 times allowable taper of new shaft
.0004” per inch of diameter
2 times allowable taper of new shaft
.005” over high limit
.0005” per inch diameter under the low limit
.0005” per inch diameter over the high limit
.010” over high limit
.001” total wear
.0015” total wear
Original width + 15%
Piston rings must be replaced if they have been disturbed after 50 hours of operation.
5-14A/(5-14B
blank)
TABLE 5.
ENGINE WEAR LIMITS AND SERVICE SPECIFICATIONS (Continued)
10. CAMSHAFT
Ream Cam Bushing
i n p l a c e ........ . ...... . ... . ...1.7515-1.752 in.
Camshaf journal.0.D........................ 1.749-1.750 in.
Running..clearance........ ......... ............0.0015-0.003 in.
in.)
(max wear 0.005
End thrust taken up between camshaft
gear and thrust button.
Between rear idler and balancer
g e a r . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0.0054-0.0095 in.
(replace at 0.0145 in.)
Between balancing gears 0.0054-0.0135 in.
(replace at 0.0185 in.)
Between front idler gear and
c r a n k s h a f t g e a r . . . . . . . 0.002-0.012 in.
(replace at 0.017 in.)
15.
11.
Running clearance
on rocker shaft ........................ . . 0.0005-0.0025 in.
12.
GOVERNOR
Ream governor gear bushing
i n p l a c e . . . . . . . . . 0.439-0-440
Running clearance in
0.0025-0.004
bushing . . . . . . . .
Ream governor shaft bushing
i n p l a c e . . . . . . . . . 0.376-0-377
Running clearance
i n b u s h i n g . . . . . 0.0015-0.0032
13.
Spark plug gap . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0 . 0 2 5 i n .
Contact point gap . . . . . . . . . . . . . 0.020 in.
Time distributor at 5 deg. BTC at 400-500
RPM. (align timing pin and notch on crankshaft pulley.)
in.
16.
in.
N o r m a l o i l p r e s s u r e . . . . . . . . ...28-30 psi.
in.
17.
in.
Maximum loaded speed . . . . . . . . . . 2200 RPM
CYLINDER HEAD
Retorgue head after first warm-up
and after 50 hours of operation.
Exhaust valve
insert O.D. . . . . 1 . 5 0 1 5 - 1 . 5 0 2 5 i n .
Bore in cylinder head..1.499-1.500 in.
Counterbore depth . . . . 0.260-0.263 in.
Valve face runout...... 0.002 in max.
Valve seat angle . . . . . . . . . . 45 degrees
Valve seat width . . . . . . . . . 8 0 - , 0 9 0 i n .
VALVE SPRING PRESSURE
Free length (intake) . . . . . 2.78 in.
Free length (exhaust).....2.314 in.
Valve guide projection . . .9375 in.
14.
IGNITION.
ROCKERARMS
LUBRICATION.
GOVERNED SPEED
18. BALANCING SYSTEM
Idler gear bushing I.D. ..0.875-0.876 in.
Idler spindle O.D. . . . . 0.8745-0.8733 in.
Running clearance . . . . . 0.0005-0.0027 in.
Balancing shaft bushing I.D.
Front . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . 1.002-1.005 in.
1.290-1.2925 in.
Rear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Balancing Shaft O.D.
0.9975-0-998 in.
Front . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
1.2845-1.285 in.
...............
Rear
Running clearance
0.004-0.0075 in.
Front................
0.005-0.008 in.
Rear . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
0.002-0.010 in.
Idler gear end play . . .
0.005-0.008 in.
Shaft end play . . . . . . . .
(obtained by use of shims)
TIMING GEARS BACKLASH.
Dial indicator readings to be taken in
plane of rotation.
Between all gears except balancing
idler gear and balancing gears
0.0055-0.011 in.
(Replace at 0.016 in.)
19.
CLUTCH FACE RUNOUT........ .008 in.
20.
CYLINDER SLEEVE
PROJECTION . . . . .
.001 to .004 in.
5-15
hood and seat support, floor plate and side door
hoods. These parts are shown in figure 5-6.
a. After removal of sheet metal parts, tag and
disconnect all electrical wiring and hydraulic hoses
at the engine and pumps.
b. Disconnect fuel line at the fuel filter on the
left side of the engine.
c. Drain the cooling system and disconnect the
radiator hoses at the water pump inlet and
thermostat housing.
d. Drain the oil pan, and disconnect accelerator
linkage.
Figure 5-8. Rocker Arm Cover
e. Through the openings in the converter
housing, remove the 5/16 inch bolts securing the
torque converter driving disc to the engine
flywheel.
NOTE
It will be necessary to rotate the engine
flywheel to make all these bolts accessible
for removal.
f. Remove counterweight and radiator and hoses
to gain additional forward clearance for engine
removal.
g. Remove mounting bolts at torque converter
housing and flywheel housing flange.
h. Refer to figure 5-7 and remove mounting bolts
from left and right engine mounts.
i. Hook up a suitable hoist and sling arrangement
for engine removal. Move engine forward to
disengage s t a t o r s u p p o r t s h a f t f r o m torque
converter.
j. Lift engine from truck and place in repair
stand.
REPAIR.
repair
Engine
5-26. ENGINE
instructions are given below under functional
component headings (CYLINDER HEAD, etc.).
Refer to the table of contents for location of
functional group headings for each component.
5-16
Figure 5-9. Checking Camshaft Lift
HEAD.
The
following
5-27. CYLINDER
preliminary procedures should be performed prior
to removal of the cylinder head.
a. Refer to figure 5-8 and remove the rocker arm
cover retainer nuts and the rocker arm cover.
b. Scrape away all old gasket material from
rocker arm cover and cylinder head surfaces.
Figure 5-12. Rocker Arm Removal
Figure 5-13. Pushrod Removal
c. Remove P.C.V. system from rocker
arm cover.
g. Rotate the crankshaft over until the lifter is in
its lowest position.
d. Carefully inspect rocker arm assembly for
broken springs or rocker arms, excessive wear or
evidence of poor lubrication.
h. Zero the dial indicator. Continue to rotate
crankshaft slowly until the pushrod is in the fully
raised position.
e. Check valve (camshaft) lift by installing a dial
indicator as shown in figure 5-9.
i. Compare the total lift recorded on the
indicator with specifications.
f. Make sure the pushrod is in the valve lifter
socket. Install a dial indicator so that the actuating
point of the indicator is in the pushrod socket and
in the same plane as the pushrod movement.
j. If the lift on any lobe is below specified wear
limits, the camshaft and the valve lifters operating
on the worn lobe(s) must be replaced.
5-17
LEGEND FIGURE 5-15
Figure 5-14. Cylinder Head Removal
5-28.
REMOVAL
a . Remove water outlet assembly before
loosening cylinder head bolts. This prevents cracking of the water outlet casting.
b . Remove water outlet bolts and mark
them for proper position, as the bolts
vary in length.
c . Check water outlet casting for
cracks.
d . Remove the rocker arm assembly, noting
t h e l e n g t h o f t h e r e t a i n i n g b o l t s . Do not
mix these bolts with any others as bolts of
the proper length must be used at reassembly.
See Figure 5-12 for rocker arm removal.
e . Number all pushrods so that they must
be reinstalled in same location, and remove all pushrods as shown in Figure 5-13.
f . Check for bent or broken push rods.
Replace bent or broken rods . . . Do Not
attempt to straighten or repair.
g . Disconnect spring and linkage between
governor and carburetor, and remove carburetor from intake manifold.
h.
Remove cylinder head bolts.
5-18
21. cup
22. Lock
23. Lock
24. Rotator
25. Seat
26. Retainer
27. Spring
28. Spring
29. Seal
30. Guide
31. Guide
32. Seat
33. Valve. exhaust
34. Value intake
35. Head
36. Plug-expansion
37. Head
assembly
l.Gasket set
2. Lifter
3. Gear
4. Plunger, spring
6. Bushing
7. Key
8. camshaft
9. Push rod
10. Adjuster
11. Rocker arm assembly
12. Rocker arm assembly
13. washer
14. Hair pin
15. cap
17. Pivot
18. spring
19. support
20. Stud, nut, washer
1. Attach lifting eyes and remove
cylinder head (with manifolds attached)
from the cylinder block as shown in
Figure 5-14.
NOTE
It may be necessary to tap the
cylinder head sharply with a
fibre hammer a few times to
break the cylinder head gasket
seal.
5-29. DISASSEMBLY Cylinder head disassembly is outlined below. R e f e r t o
Figure 5-15 for general parts identification.
a. Using valve spring compressor as
shown in Figure 5-16, compress the valve
s p r i n g s , remove spring locks . . . release
spring compressor and remove . . . rotator
(exhaust) seat (intake), spring and spring
pilot.
See Figure 5-17 for valve parts
removed.
b . Check valve stem for burrs and remove before trying to take valve from
guide (burrs will damage valve guide).
c . Remove all parts of intake and exhaust valves in order. Mark valves and parts
and store together for installation in same
order and relationship as removed
Figure 5-15. Cylinder Head and Camshaft
5-19
5-30. REPAIR.
a. Test valve spring pressure and length, using
spring tester as shown in figure 5-18. If springs do
not meet specifications of Table 5, replace with
new spring.
b. Check valve face runout as shown in figure
5-19. Face runout must not exceed specifications
of Table 5. If runout is excessive, valve must be
refaced or replaced.
c. Check valve seat runout, using an accurate gage
installed as shown in figure 5-20.
Figure 5-16. Valve Removal
d. Place indicator point on face of seat, set
indicator at “0” and rotate the gauge set-up while
observing gage reading.
e. If runout exceeds 0.002 inch above or below
“O”, the seat must be refaced or replaced.
Figure 5-17. Value Parts Removed
5-20
Figure 5-19. Checking Valve Face Runout
Figure 5-18. Testing Valve Spring
f. Check cylinder head for flatness by placing a
straightedge across cylinder head in several
directions as shown in figure 5-21, and measuring
gaps under straightedge with feeler gage. Cylinder
head must be flat within 0.005 inch.
g. Clean valve guides using electric drill and
carbon cutter as shown in figure 5-22. Check valve
guides against specifications of Table 5 to
determine if they must be replaced.
5-31. VALVE GUIDE REPLACEMENT. If valve
guides are worn oversize, they must be replaced as
follows:
a. The old valve guide may be removed by driving
guide from head using an appropriate driving tool.
b. To insert the new guide, select an installation
tool of correct size to prevent damage to the guide,
and position in place. See figure 5-23.
Figure 5-20. Checking Valve Seat Runout
press. DO NOT DRIVE GUIDE INTO PLACE
USING A HAMMER; DAMAGE TO GUIDE WILL
RESULT IN DOING SO. Make sure guide is
extended above head as specified in Specifications
of Table 5.
d. Ream valve guide only if necessary to remove
high spots and burrs by the use of a valve guide
reamer (high spots sometimes occur when new
guides are pressed in head). See figure 5-24.
c. Press guide into place using an appropriate
5-21
Figure 5-21. Checking Cylinder Head Flatness
Figure 5-22. Cleaning Valve Guides
5-22
Figure 5-23. Installing Valve Guide
Figure 5-25. Refacing Valve Seat
available, proceed as outlined below:
Figure 5-24. Reaming Valve Guides
g. Obtain a scrap valve and grind three notches,
e. Do not over-ream valve guides. Use ream no
larger than original guide size (see Table 5).
5-32. VALVE SEAT REFACING
AND REPLACEMENT.
a. If valve seats are not worn too badly they
may be refaced, using an electric tool with seat
grinding attachment as shown in figure 5-25.
b. Be sure that the refacer grinding wheel is
properly dressed at the ‘correct angle and are the
proper wheels for the valve seat material (exhaust
valve seat inserts are Stellite No. 3).
c. Remove only enough stock to clean up pits
and grooves and to correct valve seat runout.
d. Exhaust valve seat inserts must be replaced if
seats are loose, pits and grooves too deep to be
removed, runout too excessive.
e. If seat is worn so badly that it cannot be
refaced to within specifications of Table 5, the
seat will have to be driven out and replaced.
f. The preferred method of valve seat removal is
to use a valve seat insert puller. If a puller is not
equally spaced, around the perimeter of the valve
face.
h. Place valve in position against valve seat to be
removed, as shown in figure 5-26, and tack weld to
seat at each notch. Use an old head gasket to
protect head surface while welding, and exercise
care not to weld on cast head metal.
i. Use a rawhide hammer to drive out valve and
old seat, as shown in figure 5-27.
j. Remove all burrs and foreign material from
counterbores.
k. To insure squareness in entering and driving
the insert in the counterbore, it is important to
provide a driving tool piloted in the valve guide.
Such a tool is easily made up or adapted from the
valve guide installation tool by slipping a sturdy
washer-like driving plate somewhat larger than the
insert over the tool pilot.
l. Shrink the valve seat by placing in dry ice until
sufficiently
chilled.
5-23
Figure 5-26. Scrap Valve Welded In Place
Figure 5-28. Valve Grinding Machine
cause serious freezing. Use gloves and
forceps or bent wire to remove metal parts.
Never touch metal that has been in dry ice
until temperature has risen above the
freezing point.
m. Using a pair of forceps or a hooked wire (see
warning), quickly lift the chilled insert from the
dry ice and locate it over the counterbore so the
lower edge is entered squarely. Start the driving
tool pilot in the valve guide, bringing the driving
face against the insert upper surface accurately,
and tap the tool with a medium weight hammer.
Figure 5-27. Driving Out Seat
WARNING
Dry ice is a solid with an extreme low
temperature. Contact with the skin will
5-24
If severe hammering seems to be required,
the counterbore is not clean or has burrs,
the insert is not chilled enough, or not
started into the counterbore straight and
true.
5-33. VALVE GRINDING (Refacing).
a. A valve grinding device similar to that shown
in figure 5-28 will be required to reface the valves
at the proper angle according to the specifications
of Table 5.
Figure 5-29. Rocker Arm Retainer
b. Be sure that the refacer grinding wheels are
properly dressed and are the proper wheels for the
valve material (exhaust valves are Stellite faced).
c. Remove only enough stock to correct the
runout or to remove pits and grooves. Care must be
exercised so that the entire Stellite facing is not
removed.(Stellite facing is .040" min.
depth)
d. If the edge of the valve head is less than l/32
inch after refacing, replace the valve as it will run
too hot in the engine.
5-34. ROCKER ARM DISASSEMBLY
AND REPAIR.
Figure 5-30. Captive Water Pump Bolt
clip is properly in place as shown by figure 5-29.
5-35. CYLINDER HEAD REASSEMBLY
AND INSTALLATION.
a. Refer to figure
5-15 and install the
components of the cylinder head assembly as
shown by the illustration. Do not install rocker
arm assembly at this time.
b. Install new head gasket into position.
a. Refer to figure 5-29 and remove retainer clip
as shown by arrow.
b. Slide parts off shaft, number rocker arms as
they are removed for reassembly in same order as
removed. See figure 5-15 for exploded view.
c. Check for wear and broken parts, clean,
making sure all oil passages are clear of dirt, varnish
and gum deposits.
d. Rocker arms cannot be rebushed and must be
replaced is the bushing surface is excessively worn
or is otherwise unfit for further service.
e. Reassemble the rocker arm assembly as shown
in figure 5-15, and make certain that the retainer
c. Install the cylinder head and head bolts.
Torque bolts to specifications and in proper
sequence as shown in figure 4-40.
The No. 9 head bolt is a special retainer
drilled for passage of oil and will require
less torque than the other retainers (see
Specifications, Table 5).
d. Install push rods, installing each rod into the
same socket from which it was removed. Replace
bent or worn push rods with new ones.
5-25
e . Install rocker arm assembly and make
certain that push rods engage with rocker arms. T o r q u e b o l t s t o s p e c i f i c a t i o n s
shown in Table 5.
f. Perform a valve clearance adjustment
as outlined in Section IV.
g. Install rocker arm cover, using a
new gasket and torque rocker arm cover
retainers to specifications. Do not over
tighten.
b. Loosen and remove all bolts (except
captive bolt shown by arrow in figure 5-30)
which secure water pump to cylinder block.
c. Captive bolt may be loosened for water
pump removal, b u t c a n n o t b e r e m o v e d f r o m
pump unless pulley is removed.
d. Carefully tap on the pump body (not
pulley) until gasket seal is broked and
pump can be removed.
5-37. DISASSEMBLY. (Refer to figure 5-32)
5-36. WATER PUMP REMOVAL
a. Proir to removing water pump, drain
colling system completely, remove colling
fan from water pump pulley and disengage
V-belts from water pump pulley.
a. With the fan blade
use a bar type puller
hub. Discard the hub.
re-use a hub that has
won't fit properly.
1 . Pump assembly
2. Capscrew
3 . Pulley
4 . Cover
5 . Screw
Figure 5-32 Water Pump Assembly
5-26
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
and pulley removed,
to remove the pulley
It is dangerous to
been removed since it
Gasket
Repair kit
Plug
Fitting
Washer
Body
b. Remove the pump cover which is secured
to the pump body with flat head screws.
c. Remove and discard the shaft retainer.
Place the pump (hub end down) on the base
of an arbor press. Using a dowel slightly
press the shaft out of the pump body. The
impeller blades will bottom against the inside of the pump body so that the shaft is
pressed out of the impeller as well as out
of the body. Discard the shaft and the impeller.
d. Turn
pressure
from the
seal and
the pump body over and apply slight
to the water pump seal to remove it
recess in the body. Discard the
the seal seat.
e. Carefully inspect the water pump body
for damage. I f t h e b o d y i s d a m a g e d , r e p l a c e
the entire pump. I f t h e b o d y i s s e r v i c e a b l e
reassemble the pump using a water pump
repair kit.
5-38. REASSEMBLY
a. Carefully wipe the carbon sealing surface of the water pump seal and the mating
face of the ceramic seal seat with a soft
cloth or absorbent paper to remove all traces
of wax, grease, or oil. Use a small amount
of solvent if necessary. To provide for
initial lubrication of the seal and the seal
seat, apply either a 1% soluble oil and water
solution or ethyoline glycol type antifreeze
to the sealing surfaces of both. Lubricate
the O.D. of the seal lightly with a soft
sealant, such Permatex No. 3, before installing the seal in the body recess. To install
the seal, press against the outer flange
with light pressure only to avoid damaging
the seal.
b. Place the pump body (cover end down) on
the base of the arbor press. Insert the long
end of the pump shaft through the seal carefully. To press the shaft into the pump body,
use a tube or pipe slightly smaller than the
O.D. of the shaft bearing, and press against
the outer race of the pump bearing until it
is seated in the pump body. Do not apply
pressure against the end of the shaft. Install the shaft retainer in the groove in
the pump body.
Figure 5-33. Cylinder Sleeve Locks
c. Turn the pump body over and support the pulley end of the shaft.
Carefully slide the seal seat (rubber
insert side up) onto the shaft. Use
a tube or pipe with an I.D. slightly
larger than the I.D. of the impeller
to press onto the shaft. Start the impeller straight and true on the shaft
to avoid binding while it is being
pressed on. Pressure should be applied
to the inner impeller flange area
only to avoid damaging the impeller.
Allow .010-.025” (.245-.635mm) clearance between the vanes and body.
After the impeller is installed, rotate the shaft to ensure that the impeller blades do not contact the pump
body.
d. Again turn the pump over and block
against the shaft, not against the impeller hub. Position the pulley on the
shaft so that the four holes align with
the threads in the pulley hub. Install
the two capscrews and torque to 70 in.
/lbs.
e. Replace the gaskets and pump cover.
5-39. INSTALLATION
a. Position pump, and new gasket,
against mounting surface of cylinder
block. Install all bolts and torque to
specifications on page vii.
b. Install and tighten V-belt . Refer
to Section
5-27
Figure 5-35. Pulley Removal
Figure 5-34. Removing Crankshaft PulIey Nut
LEGEND FOR FIGURE 5-36
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
Seal
Oil Lube
Fitting
Fitting
Bolt
Bolt, L.W.
Bolt, L.W.
Bolt, L.W.
Bolt, L.W.
Dowell
11.
12.
13.
14.
15.
16.
17.
18.
19.
20.
Bolt,
Bolt,
Bolt,
Bolt,
Bolt,
Bolt,
DoWel
Bolt,
Bolt,
Cover
IV for proper belt tension and adjustment
procedure.
d. Install cooling fan,
e. Refill cooling system with clean water or
water-antifreeze solution.
5-40. TIMING GEARS AND CAMSHAFT
REMOVAL.
a Refer to figure 5-33 and install cylinder sleeve
locks as shown in the illustration. If not locked
5-28
L.W.
L.W
L.W.
L.W.
L.W.
L.W.
L.W.
L.W.
21.
22.
23.
24.
25.
26.
27.
28.
29.
30.
Dowell
Plate
Retainer
Gasket
Snap Ring
Washer
Idler Gear
Bushing
Washer
Spacer
31.
32.
33.
34.
35.
36.
37.
38.
39.
Shaft
Bolt, L.W.
Bolt
Bolt, L.W.
Bolt, L.W.
Bolt, L.W.
Bolt
Plate
Gasket
down in this manner, cylinder sleeve will be pushed
out by upward travel of the piston.
b. Remove the crankshaft pulley nut by blocking
the flywheel with a piece of wood or soft bar stock
to prevent crankshaft motion, and removing pulley
nut with wrench as shown in figure 5-34.
c. Using a bar type puller, remove the
When using the puller, be
pulley.
carefull not to damage the threaded end
of the crankshaft.
d. Inspect the crankshaft pulley wear
sleeve. The wear sleeve provides a replaceable running surface for the front
Figure 5-36. Timing Gear Cover Parts
5-29
Figure 5-39. Idler Gear Removal
Figure 5-40. Camshaft Removal
Figure 5-38. Camshaft Thrust Plunger Removal
5-30
Figure 5-41. Backing Plate Removal
oil seal. If the seal running surface of
the wear sleeve is grooved or damaged,
the wear sleeve must be replaced to prevent oil leakage past the front oil seal.
n. Pull the camshaft forward, out
of the crankcase, very carefully to
avoid scratching the camshaft lobes
and bearing journals.
e. If it's necessary to replace the wear
s l e e v e , remove it by tapping with a hammer, by heating, or by careful use of a
rounded, blunt chisel. If is not necessary to cut the wear sleeve completely
to remove it.
o. Remove the timing gear backing
plate as shown in figure 5-41.
f. To install a new wear sleeve, remove
all dirt and oil from the seating surface.
Coat the shaft surface with a liquid sealant or gasket cement.
g. Press wear sleeve into position (.590",610" from end of hub) with an installation
tool. Do not hammer on the thin edge of the
sleeve for it may become warped or out
of round.
h. Remove excess sealant from the wear sleeve edges. None should be left on the finished working surface or seal leakage may result.
i. The installation tool for the National
wear sleeve is simple and inexpensive to make.
Use an "0" ring to avoid damage to the finish
of the sleeve, the tool is used to press-fit
the sleeve onto the shaft. (Refer to Fig. 5-37)
j. Refer to figure 5-36 for general parts
identification and proceed to remove the
timing gear cover.
k. Removal of timing gear cover will expose
timing gears as shown in figure 5-37.
1. Remove the camshaft thrust plunger and
spring as shown in figure
5-38
m. For camshaft removal, the lifters must
be blocked up in the raised position, or
removed.
p. Clean and inspect all parts in
accordance with the general instructions at the beginning of this
section.
q. Refer to Table S for maxium wear
limits to determine serviceability
of used parts.
r. Replace any parts that appear
danaged or worn beyond allowable
limits.
5-41. CAMSHAFT AND TIMING GEARS
INSTALLATION
a. Prior to camshaft installation
make certain that all lifters are in
place and blocked up out of position
This easily accomplished by inverting the engine on the bench as shown
in figure 5-40.
b. Install timing gear backing
plate.
c. Oil the camshaft bearing journals with a light film of clean oil,
and install the camshaft into the
cylinder block.
d. As the camshaft is nearly seated
rotate the camshaft gear to bring it
into proper time with the crankshaft
and idler gears. See figure 5-43 for
gear timing.
e. Dip all parts in oil before installing and oil idler shaft.
NOTE
The engine can be inverted on the
bench as shown in figure 5-40 to
hold the lifters off the camshaft
lobes.
f. Install spacer on shaft so it
seats flush with surface of crankcase.
5-31
Figure 5-43. Gear Timing
g. Install thrust washer on shaft with oil
grooves facing away from engine.
h. Install idler gear assembly on shaft with
longest side of hub facing away from engine.
i. Install thrust washer on shaft with
oil grooves facing engine and flush with
gear hub.
j . Using an external retainer ring pliers,
install snap ring in the groove on the idler
shaft.
k. Install camshaft thrust plunger.
5-32
1. Install timing gear cover and new
gasket. Torque timing cover bolts to
specifications on page vii.
m. Coat the pulley seal with a light
film of Vaseline, or vegetable shortening and install into timing gear cover.
n. Install pulley into position on
the crankshaft.
O.
Install pulley retainer and torque to specifications on page vii.
Figure 5-44. Oil Pan
5-42. PISTONS, CONNECTING RODS
AND CRANKSHAFT REMOVAL.
a. Drain the oil pan and remove cylinder head,
water pump, timing gears and camshaft as
previously outlined.
Figure 5-45. Removing Balancer Assembly
b. The engine should be inverted on the bench
for further disassembly as outlined below.
c. Remove the oil pan bolts and the oil pan.
Note the position of the extra long bolts which
are located in the fourth position from the front
of the engine. See figure 5-44.
d. Refer to figure 5-45 and remove the balancer
assembly by removing retainers and pulling
assembly away from engine.
e. Carefully inspect the balancer for excessive
wear and part failure, paying special attention to
the bushings and gears.
f. See figure 5-66 for exploded view of balancer
assembly.
g. Remove oil pump mounting screws and
remove the pump assembly as shown in figure
5-46.
h. Refer to figure 5-67 for an exploded view of
the oil pump.
Figure 5-46. Removing Oil Pump
5-33
Figure 5-49. Cap and Bearing Removal
Figure 5-47. Crankshaft Gear Removal
Figure 5-50. Bearing Inspection
j. To split the gear, first drill a hole of
approximately l/4 inch diameter lengthwise of the
gear and between the keyway and the teeth. After
drilling, a light blow with a cold chisel will spread
the gear a few thousandths and permit removal.
See figure 5-47.
Figure 5-48. Flywheel Removal
i. In those instances where replacement of the
crankshaft gear is necessary and a puller is not
available or the gear is too tight, it will be
necessary to split the gear.
5-34
k.
Remove the flywheel as shown in
figure 5-48.
1.
When removing the flywheel, mark the
crankshaft flange and flywheel as they
will reassembly in one position.
m.
To remove bell housing, remove
retainer and pull housing from engine
assembly.
Remove rear main seal from
housing by tapping aroung edge of seal
with drift & hammer.
Figure 5-48A
Before removing the ring gear inspect
it for worn or broken teeth as shown
by the arrow in Figure 5-48A.
When
gear teeth are worn to the point that
the starter will not engage the flywheel then the ring gear must be
replaced.
5-42A.
FLYWHEEL RING GEAR REMOVAL
a.
Remove flywheel as shown in
Figure 5-48.
Figure 5-48B
d.
After cutting a channel in the
ring gear, use a hammer and chisel (as
shown in Figure 5-48B) to slit the ring
gear.
b.
Place flywheel in a vise as
shown in Figure 5-48A.
CAUTION
USE A PROTECTIVE COVERING ON THE
VISE, TO PROTECT THE MACHINED
SURFACE OF THE FLYWHEEL.
CAUTION
USE ENOUGH FORCE TO SPLIT THE RING
GEAR, BUT DO NOT NICK THE MACHINED
SURFACE OF THE FLYWHEEL.
Remove the ring gear and discard.
5-42B.
C.
Use a hacksaw and cut ring gear
as shown in Figure 5-48A.
INSPECTION
a.
Inspect the flywheel machine
surface for nicks.
CAUTION
DO NOT CUT ALL THE WAY THROUGH,
FOR THE PROBABILITY OF CUTTING
OR NICKING THE MACHINE SURFACE
OF THE FLYWHEEL IS INCREASED.
If nicks occured during removal
b.
Use emery cloth to remove
of ring gear.
the nicks.
Do not use any other process
for the flywheel ring gear is a heat
press fit to the flywheel.
5-34A
5-42C.
INSTALLATION
Remove the flywheel from the vise
a.
and place it on a flat surface with the
side the ring gear slips over face up
(refer to Figure 5-48C).
Position ring gear on
b.
wheel and heat with a oxygen
acetyline mix torch (CAUTION
SECTIONS 5-15,
TO PAGE 5-6.
5-17 FOR SAFETY PRECAUTIONS.)
the flyand
: REFER
5-16 and
C.
Using a circular motion,heat
flywheel ring gear until it falls
into its place on the flywheel.
d.
Let the ring gear cool on its
DO NOT IMMERSE IN WATER.
own.
5-34B
Figure 5-48C
Figure 5-51. Piston Removal
Figure 5-53. Cylinder Sleeve Removal
Figure 5-52. Forcing Cylinder Sleeve Up
n. Remove connecting rod bearings and caps.
Make sure the rods and caps are marked for
position of piston for reassembly in same cylinder
as removed. See figure 5-49 for cap and bearing
removal.
o. As the caps are removed and the bearings are
exposed, carefully inspect each bearing. A careful
inspection of each bearing will indicate possible
trouble areas. See figure 5-50.
P. Remove ridge from top of cylinder
sleeve before removing pistons. To
remove the piston assembly, carefully
tap on connecting rod with a wooden
hammer handle until piston is free
from cylinder and remove piston and rod
from top of block. See figure 5-51.
Figure 5-54. Main Bearing Cap Removal
q. After piston is removed, remove the old rings
and discard. Do not attempt to reuse old rings as
they will not reseat properly.
r. Clean the piston to remove all carbon and
foreign material, paying special attention to ring
grooves, as foreign material will not allow the rings
to seat properly and ring breakage may occur.
5-35
Figure 5-55. Crankshaft Removal
s. The cylinder sleeve may be removed by placing
d wooden block between the crankshaft and the
bottom of the cylinder sleeve and turning the
crankshaft, forcing the sleeve out. See figure 5-52.
After the cylinder sleeve has been lifted from its
seat, pull the sleeve up and out of engine block, as
shown in figure 5-53.
Figure 5-56. Removing Valve Lifters
t. Remove the main bearing caps one at a time,
and match mark each cap for proper position at
time of assembly. See figure 5-54.
u. Inspect bearings as they are removed for
abnormal conditions shown in figure 5-50.
v. Remove crankshaft by lifting upward out of
crankcase, exercising care to prevent damage to
machined surfaces. See figure 5-55.
w. Carefully inspect crankshaft for wear, out of
round and rough areas on bearing surfaces.
x. Clean all oil passages and make sure they are
free of obstructions and foreign material.
y. Remove valve lifters one at a time, as shown in
figure 5-56, and mark for proper location so that
they may be reinstalled in the same position.
z. Inspect lifters for excessive wear and replace as
necessary. Refer to specifications of Table 5 to
determine wear limits.
5-36
Figure 5-57. Measuring Ring Gap
Figure 5-58. Filing Ring Gap
Figure 5-60. Connecting Rod Bushing Removal
d. Measure the gap between the ends of the ring
with a feeler gauge. If the rings must be filed to
allow the gauge to fit, see step e.
e. Place a medium to fine toothed file in a vise as
shown in figure 5-58. Grip the piston ring with
both hands as shown and apply even pressure to
both sides of the piston ring and file both ends of
the ring evenly by moving ring back and forth over
the file.
f. Check ring gap frequently as outlined in steps
b, c, and d, during the filing operation to avoid
removal of too much material.
a. Select the proper ring set (standard, oversize,
etc.).
g. Refer to figure 5-59 and check the ring side
clearance of the compression rings with a feeler
gauge inserted between the ring and its lowest land.
The gauge should slide freely around the entire ring
circumference without binding. Any wear that
occurs will form a step at the inner portion of the
lower land. If the lower lands have high steps, the
piston should be replaced.
b. Position the ring in the cylinder bore in which
it is going to be used.
Note
c. Use the head of a piston to position the ring in
the cylinder bore, at bottom of piston travel.
Measure the gap as shown in figure 5-57.
When piston rings are installed, the ring
gaps must be staggered and not in line with
each other.
Figure 5-59. Checking Ring Side Clearance
5-43. FITTING NEW PISTON RINGS.
5-37
Figure 5-62. Flywheel Housing Installation
5-45. CR.ANKSHAFT INSTALLATION.
a. Prior to crankshaft installation, install all valve
lifters in the bores from which they were originally
removed. Lifters should be dipped in clean engine
oil before installing.
Figure 5-61. Checking Rod Alignment
5-44. CONNECTING ROD BEARING
REPLACEMENT.
a. Connecting rod bearings must be inspected
according to figure 5-50, and bearings evidencing
any abnormal condition must be replaced.
b. The connecting rod bushing (wrist pin
bushing) should be checked for wear internally and
also for good fit in the rod eye.
c. If the bushing requires replacement, it should
be pressed out of the rod as shown in figure 5-60,
and the new bushing installed in a similar manner.
d. Ream the new bushing to size (see Table 5)
after installation.
e. Connect rod alignment should be checked in a
fixture such as that shown in figure 5-61. Do not
attempt to straighten a bent rod, it must be
replaced.
5-38
b. Install crankshaft and gear assembly, using
new bearings.
c. If new crankshaft gear is to be installed, heat
the gear to a maximum of 400°F, and using tongs
and asbestos gloves, install gear on crankshaft,
making sure that keyway is properly positioned.
d. Torque all bearing caps to specifications and
check bearing clearances.
e. Check to see that crankshaft rotates freely.
f. Install the rear main seal. Lightly coat the steel
edge of the seal (flywheel side) with non-hardening
Permatex.
g. The small side of the steel lip must be installed
toward the engine side and the oil seal must be
installed l/32 inch below machined surface on
engine side of flywheel housing.
h. Install flywheel housing. Install new O-ring
seal on flywheel housing, with vulcanized joint
toward top of engine.
Figure 5-63. Crankshaft End Play Check
Figure 5-65. Connecting Rod Orientation
j. If the housing alignment dowels are installed
in the cylinder block, coat the exposed ends with
non-hardening Permatex. If pins are removed
from the assembly, they will be installed in step
1.
k. Place the flywheel housing into position and
install fasteners, but do not tighten.
1. Coat the housing alignment dowels with
non-hardening Permatex and install as shown in
figure 5-62.
m. Torque
specifications.
all
housing
fasteners to
n. Install flywheel to crankshaft mounting
flange. Torque all fasteners to specifications, and
lockwire in pairs.
5-46. CRANKSHAFT END PLAY CHECK.
Figure 5-64. Flywheel Runout Check
a. Force the crankshaft toward the rear of the
engine.
i. Coat the rear seal assembly with a light film
of low temperature non-fibrous grease.
b. Install a dial indicator so that the contact
point rests against the crankshaft gear, as shown
in figure 5-63.
5-39
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
Balancer assembly
Oil tube seal
Dowel pin
Frame
Spindle plug
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
Spindle
Weight
Key
Shim
Bearing
11.
12.
13.
14.
15.
Gear
screw
Washer
Plug
Gear assembly
16.
17.
18.
19.
20.
21.
Retainer
Thrust washer
Bearing
screw
Washer
Oil tube
Figure 5-66. Engine Balancer Assembly
c. Zero the dial indicator. Push the crankshaft
forward and note the reading on the dial, and
compare to specifications.
bearing and crankshaft thrust faces for scratches,
burrs, nicks or dirt.
d. If the end play exceeds the wear limit,
replace the thrust bearing. If the end play is less
than the minimum limit, inspect the thrust
a. Install a dial indicator so that the indicator
point bears against the flywheel face. See figure
5-64.
5-40
5-47. FLYWHEEL RUNOUT CHECK.
b.
Turn the flywheel, making sure that
it is fully forward or rearward, so that
crankshaft end play will not be indicated
as flywheel runout.
c.
If the clutch face runout exceeds
specifications, remove the flywheel and
check for burrs between the flywheel and
the face of the crankshaft mounting flange.
d.
Replace the flywheel or machine the
crankshaft flywheel mounting face if the
mounting face is not square with shaft
axis and perfectly flat.
5-48.
CYLINDER SLEEVE INSTALLATION.
a.
Cylinder bore in block and cylinder
sleeve must be free of all dirt and foreign material.
b.
Install new O-rings on cylinder
sleeves.
c.
Soap cylinder sleeve with oil soap
or liquid detergent.
d.
Insert sleeve in sleeve bore, press
into place using finger pressure only.
e.
If sleeve will not position properly,
check to see that O-rings are still in
place and not damaged.
f .
Check to see that cylinder sleeve is
properly seated by laying straightedge
across cylinder sleeve, use feeler gage to
measure distance between engine block and
straightedge (see Table 5 for sleeve
projection).
5-49.
PISTON AND CONNECTING
ROD INSTALLATION.
e.
Before inserting piston, note
that the connecting rod and cap has
a large side.
The large side of the
No. 1 piston and the large side of
the No. 2 piston must face each other.
The large side of the No. 3 piston and
the large side of the No. 4 piston
must face each other.
See figure 5-65.
f .
Insert assembly in cylinder
bore and tap top of piston with wood
hammer handle to prevent damage to
top of piston.
Carefully guide connecting rod
g.
on crankshaft to prevent damage to
machined surfaces as piston is driven
into position.
h.
Install new lower bearing in rod
cap, and dip in clean oil,
1.
Install connecting rod cap and
torque retainers to speccifications in
Table 5, page 5-14.
Check connecting rod side
j .
clearance.
5-50 OIL PUMP ASSEMBLY
a.
Refer to Figure 5-67 for parts
identification
b.
Replace any parts that appear
damaged.
c.
Place oil pump in clean lubricating oil until pump is full of oil.
d.
Use new gasket.
The oil pump must be timed with
e.
the distributor.
See figure 5-68 for
special installation procedure.
5-51.
BALANCER ASSEMBLY.
a.
Install new piston ring sets onto
pistons as noted in Table 5, and stagger
ring gaps so that they are not in line.
a.
Refer to figure 5-56 for parts
identification.
Install new upper bearing, making
b.
sure it is free of all dirt and foreign
material.
Inspect all parts of the balancer
b.
assembly for wear or damage, particularly gears and bearings.
c.
Dip piston and rod assembly in
clean oil.
Replace any parts found to be
c.
defective before installing balancer
assembly.
d.
Compress rings with ring compressor.
5-41
1. Oil pump assembly
2. Drive gear
3. Pin
4. Body
5. Bolt, washer
6. Drive shaft
7. Vane
8. Spring
9. Cover
10. Bolt
11. Bolt
12. Strainer
Figure 5-67. Oil Pump Assembly
d.
Dip all parts in clean engine oil
prior to installation.
Make certain that the oil tube seals
e.
are in place and properly seated.
Refer to figure 5-43 for proper gear
f .
timing, and install balancer so that gears
will be in time.
5-42
Refer to Table 5 for torque specg.
ifications when tightening balancer
assembly retaining bolts.
h.
After balancer is mounted, apply
a coat of "Moly" grease to gear teeth.
Figure 5-68. Timing Oil Pump and Distributor
5-43
c.
Refer to figure 5-69 and remove
the bolts holding the starter pinion
flange to the flywheel housing.
d.
Remove the starter from the
machine.
e.
Pinion Clearance:
The pinion
clearance cannot be adjusted but
should be checked after reassembly
of the motor to insure proper clearance.
Improper clearance is an
indication of worn parts.
To check pinion clearance, follow the
steps listed below:
Figure 5-89. Starter Removal
5-52.
OIL PAN INSTALLATION
Inspect oil pan carefully after
a.
cleaning with Stoddard solvent.
Check for cracks, particularly
b.
along the mounting flange, and weld
any cracks to prevent leakage and
gasket damage.
Using a new gasket, install oil
c.
pan to cylinder block and tighten all
hardware finger tight.
Make certain
the special long fasteners are installed
in the fourth hole from the front of
the pan.
d.
Torque the screws at
pan/flywheel housing joint
then tighten the remaining
to the specified torque on
the oil
first,
fasteners
page vii.
e.
Install engine, reverse the
procedure as found in Section 5-25
page 5-13.
5-53.
STARTER
5-54.
REMOVAL
a.
Disconnect battery ground strap.
b.
Disconnect the field coil connections from the solenoid motor terminal.
5-44
1.
Disconnect the motor field coil
connector from the solenoid motor
terminal and INSULATE IT CAREFULLY.
2.
Connect a battery, of the same
voltage as the solenoid, from the
solenoid switch terminal to the solenoid
frame.
3.
MOMENTARILY flash a jumper lead
from the solenoid motor terminal to
the solenoid frame.
This will shift
the pinion into cranking position and
it will remain so until the battery
is disconnected.
4.
Push the pinion back toward the
commutator end to eliminate slack
movement.
5.
Measure the distance between
pinion and pinion stop .010" to .140".
5-55.
REPAIR
a.
Refer to figure 5-70 for parts
identification and procede as follows:
b.
Normally, disassembly should be
necessary only to the extent necessary
to effect the repair.
For example, the
field coils should be checked for opens
or grounds while still in the motor
frame, a n d i f f o u n d t o b e i n g o o d c o n d i t i o n , they need not be removed.
c.
Remove the thru-bolts (Item 29).
d.
Remove the commutator end frame
(Item 28) and field frame assembly
It may be necessary to tap
(Item 3).
the end frames with a fibre hammer to
remove them from the motor frame.
e.
shift
drive
(Item
Remove the solenoid (Item 9) and
lever assembly (Item 6) from the
housing, them remove the armature
14) from the drive housing.
Remove the thrust collar (Item 11)
f .
from the armature shaft.
Remove the pinion (Item 13) from
g.
the armature; by sliding a metal cylinder onto the shaft; with a hammer
striking the metal cylinder against the
retainer, drive the retainer toward the
armature core and off the snap ring.
Remove the snap ring (Item 12)
h.
from the groove in the armature shaft.
Remove the motor drive clutch
1.
(Item 15). Roller type clutches are
designed to be serviced as a complete
unit, therefore DO NOT disassemble.
Replace if necessary.
Clean all parts with a Stoddard
j .
type solvent and inspect carefully
for conditions of wear or damage. The
following tests will help to locate
electrical faults in the components.
5-56.
STEP 1.
ARMATURE TESTS.
by bending wire slightly and reinsulating
exposed bare wire.
If short cannot be
eliminated, armature must be replaced.
STEP 2.
Test for open circuits.
Open circuits in an armature may
a.
be caused by a poor connection of leads
in the commutator bars or by a broken
Either will
wire in a armature coil.
Poor
cause sparking at the brushes.
connections and broken wires can often
When this is
be detected visually.
test for open circuits
not possible,
as follows:
Set up the armature
Growler Test.
b.
on the growler as shown in figure 5-71.
Test the top two adjacent bars with an
Rotate the armature
AC Millivoltmeter.
When
and continue testing adjacent bars.
the millvoltmeter bridges the two bars
connected to the open coil, the meter
All other
pointer will not be deflected.
bars will give a deflection.
STEP 3.
Bar-to-meter test.
(Figure 5-72).
This method of finding an open
a.
coil is more satisfactory and reliable
than the growlermeter test and is often
used in preference to it.
Place the armature in "V" blocks
b.
and connect a source of direct current
to the commutator, using the circuit
of figure 5-72.
Test for shorts (Figure 5-71)
Check armature for shorts by
a.
placing it on a "growler" and with
a steel strip or hack-saw blade
held on armature core, rotate
If blade vibrates, armaarmature.
ture is shorted in an area of the
coare below the vibrating blade.
c.
Test by spanning bar with Millivoltmeter leads.
The meter will not show a reading
d.
until it bridges bars 6 and 7 as an
The meter
example shown in figure 5-72.
completes the circuit.
b.
Cooper or brush dust in slots
between commutator bars sometimes
cause shorts which can be eliminated
5-45
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
Starting motor
Bearing
Housing (pinion)
Lever pivot bolt
Pin
Lever
Plunger
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.
Spring
Switch
Screw assembly
Collar
Ring
Collar
Armature
15.
16.
17.
18.
19.
20.
21.
Motor drive assembly
Stud, nut, washer
Shift spring
Insulator
Pole shoe
Screw
Field coil assembly
22.
23.
24.
25.
26.
27.
28.
Grommet
Screw, washer
Support package
Brush package
Brushes
Screw
End frame
29.
30.
31.
32.
33.
36.
Bolt
Washer
Bolt, washer
Bolt, washer
Housing
Gasket
Figure 5-70. Starter Assembly
Figure 5-71. Growler Test
5-46
Figure 5-72. Bar-To-Meter Test
Figure 6-73. Undercutting Mica
Figure 5-74. Brush Spring Pressure Check
Meter needle will jump wildly; precautions
should be taken to avoid damage to
instrument.
Do not use silicone base varnishes.
STEP 4. To test armature for grounds, place one
probe of test lamp on armature core or shaft and
place other probe on commutator bars. If lamp
lights, armature is grounded and must be repaired
or replaced.
5-67. FIELD COILS TEST.
a. To test for gounded fields, place one probe of
test lamp on field frame and other probe on field
terminal. If lamp lights, field coils are grounded
and must be replaced if ground cannot be located
and repaired.
b. Paint or spray field coils and inside of motor
frame with Class “ F ” a i r d r y i n g v a r n i s h . T h e
armature coils, core, and end of commutator bars,
and mica cone ring can be sprayed or painted with
class “ F ” b a k i n g v a r n i s h . ( B a k e p e r v a r n i s h
manufacturer’s instructions.)
REPAIR. Carefully
5-58. COMMUTATOR
inspect the commutator. If burned, rough or
out-of-round, it must be turned and the mica
undercut.
a. Place armature in a lathe and turn down
commutator until true. Make certain cut is not
made on commutator riser bars as solder will be
removed and weaken coil connections. Remain
approximately 3/16 inch from riser bars when
cutting.
b. Undercut mica to a depth not exceeding 0.030
inch. Undercut must be full width of mica and flat
at bottom. See figure 5-73.
c. Sand commutator lightly with No. 00
sandpaper to remove any burrs left from
undercutting. Clean slots.
5-47
BRUSH REPLACEMENT.
Brushes can
5-59.
be replaced without removing motor from
truck.
a.
Disconnect battery cable.
Remove brush covers (band or
b.
plates).
Remove shunt retaining screw and
c.
remove brush from brush box.
d.
Seat new brush to contour of
commutator by sanding on a drum the
same diameter as communutator or inserting sandpaper between the brush
face and the commutator.
CAUTION
Never use emery cloth or emery
paper, the grit is metallic and
will cause damage.
Final seating of brushes can be
e.
achieved by using a fine mesh seating
stone compound similar to a product
made by Ideal Industries, Inc.,
Follow directions
Sycamore, Illinois.
on the box.
5-60.
CHECKING BRUSH SPRING PRESSURE
a.
Insert a paper strip between
brush and commutator.
See Figure
5-74.
b.
Place leather loop, or spring
scale hook, between pressure spring
and brush.
With pull in line with center of
c.
brush, lift spring scale until paper
begins to move free.
The reading on the spring scale
d.
is the total spring force.
Record
reading and compare with specifications.
Replace spring if necessary
5-61.
STARTER REASSEMBLY AND
INSTALLATION.
Refer to figure 5-70 and reassemble
a.
the starter assembly.
5-48
b.
As each part is reinstalled,
examine it for serviceability. Do
not reinstall worn or damaged parts.
Procede as follows:
c.
Place the clutch assembly (Item 15)
on the armature shaft (Item 14). To
facilitate replacing the snap ring (Item
12) and retainer (Item 13) onto the
armature:
1.
Place the retainer (Item 13) on
the armature shaft with the cupped
surface facing the snap ring groove.
Place the sanp ring (Item 12)
2.
on the end of the shaft.
With a
piece of wood on top of it, force
the ring over the shaft with a light
hammer blow, then slide the snap-ring
down into the groove.
3.
To force the retainer (Item 13)
over the snap ring place a suitable
washer over the shaft and squeeze
the retainer and washer together
with pliers.
4.
Remove the washer.
5.
Assemble collar (Item 11) over
shaft.
d.
Refer to the disassembly procedure
and follow in reverse to complete the
reassembly.
e. When the solenoid is reinstalled,
apply sealing compound between field
frame, f l a n g e a n d s o l e n o i d j u n c t i o n .
f .
After reassembly, install the
starter to the engine flywheel housing
and secure with three bolts as shown
in Figure 5-69.
Figure 5-79.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
Nut
Washer
Pulley
Fan
Colar
Drive End Frame
Oil Slinger
Bearing
Retainer Plate
Screw
Stator Assembly
12.
13.
14.
15.
16.
17.
18.
19.
20.
21.
22.
Alternator Assembly
Rotor Assembly
Lockwasher
Nut
bockwasher
Screw
Capacitor
Bracket
Screw
Diode Trio
Screw
Rectifier Assembly
23.
24.
25.
26.
27.
28.
29.
30.
31.
32.
33.
Rectifier Assembly
Screw
Bearing
Terminal Package
Frame Assembly
Voltage Regulator
Lockwasher
Screw
Brush Spring
Brush Holder w/Brushes
Screw
5-48A/(5-48B blank)
TROUBLE
SHOOTING
(DELCOTRON GENERATORS WITH BUILT-IN VOLTAGE REGULATORS)
5-62 TROUBLE SHOOTING PROCEDURES
Close adherence to the following procedures
in the order presented will lead to the
location and correction of charging system
defects in the shortest possible time.
Only a portion of these procedures need
be performed.
It will never be necessary
to perform all the procedures in order
to locate the trouble.
A basic wiring diagram showing lead
connections is shown in Figure 5. To
avoid damage to the electrical equipment, a l w a y s o b s e r v e t h e f o l l o w i n g
precautions:
1.
Do not polarize the alternator.
2.
Do not short across or ground
any of the terminals in the
charging circuit except as
specifically instructed herein.
3.
NEVER operate the alternator
with the output terminal
open-circuited.
4.
Make sure the alternator and
energizer have the same ground
polarity.
5.
When connecting a charger or a
booster Energizer to the vehicle
Energizer, connect negative to
negative and positive to positive.
UNDERCHARGED ENERGIZER - This condition,
A.
as evidenced by slow cranking and low
specific gravity readings, can be caused by
one or more of the following conditions even
though the indicator lamp may be operating
The following procedure also
normally.
applies to circuits with an ammeter.
Insure that the undercharged condi1.
tion has not been caused by accessories
having been left on for extended periods.
Check the drive belt for proper
2.
tension.
Inspect the wiring for defects.
3.
Check all connections for tightness
and cleanliness, including the slip
connectors at the alternator and
f i r e w a l l , and the cable clamps and
battery posts.
With ignition switch on and
4.
all wiring harness leads connected,
connect a voltmeter from:
a.
Alternator "BAT" terminal to
ground
b.
Alternator No. 1 terminal to
ground
c.
Alternator No. 2 terminal to
ground.
A zero reading indicates an open
between voltmeter connection and
Energizer.
5-49
5.
If previous Steps 1 thru 5
check satisfactorily, check Delcotron
alternator as follow:
a.
Disconnect Energizer ground
cable.
Connect an ammeter in the
b.
circuit at the "ABT" terminal
of the alternator.
c.
Reconnect Energizer gound
cable.
Fully load electrical circuit.
d.
Connect a carbon pile across the
Energizer.
Figure G-Grounding generator field
winding. (Wiring connections not shown.)
Operate engine at moderate
d.
speed as required, and adjust
carbon pile as required, to obtain maximum current output.
If output is not within 10 perj .
center of rated output, check the
field winding, diode trio, rectifier
bridge, and stator as covered in
"Alternator Repair" section.
f.
If ampere output is within
10 percent of rated output as
stamped on alternator frame,
alternator is not defective;
recheck Steps 1 thru 5.
If ampere output is not within
g.
10 percent of rated output, ground
the field winding by inserting a
screwdriver into the test hole
(Fig. 6).
C A U T I O N
from Alternator
k.
Remove ammeter
and turn accessories off.
B.
OVERCHARGED ENERGIZER
1.
Connect a voltmeter from alternator
No. 2 terminal to ground.
If reading is
zero, No. 2 lead circuit is open.
Tab is within 3/4 inch of casting
Do not force screwdriver
surface.
deepter than one inch into end frame.
2.
If Energizer and No. 2 lead circuit
check good, but an obvious overcharge
condition exists as evidenced by excessive
Energizer water usage proceed as follows:
Operate engine at moderate speed
h.
as required, and adjust carbon pile
as required to obtain maximum current
output.
a.
Separate end frames as covered in
"Disassembly" s e c t i o n u n d e r h e a d i n g o f
"Alternator Repair".
If output is within 10 percent of
1.
rated output replace regulator as
covered in "Alternator Repair" section, and check field winding.
5-50
Check field winding for shorts. If
shorted replace rotor and regulator.
b.
Connect ohmeter using lowerst
range scale from brush lead clip to
end frame as shown in Step 1, Fig. 8,
then reverse lead connections.
c.
If both readings are zero, either
the brush lead clip is grounded or
regulator is defective.
A grounded brush lead clip can
d.
result from omission of insulating
washer (Fig. 8.), omission of insulating sleeve over screw, or
Remove
damaged insulating sleeve.
If satisscrew to inspect sleeve.
facotry, replace regulator as covered
under heading of "Alternator Repair".
5-50A
changes the stator a. c. voltage to
d. c. voltage which appears at the
generator output terminal.
Generator field current is supplied
through a diode trio which also is
connected to the stator windings. A
capacitor, or condenser, mounted in
the end frame protects the rectifier
bridge and diode trio from high voltages and suppresses interference.
No periodic adjustments or maintenance
of any kind are required on the entire
generator assembly.
5-64.
Typical 10-SI Series Generator
5-63.
INTRODUCTION:
The DELCOTRON Generator illustrated on
this page features a solid state voltage
regulator that is mounted inside the
generator slip ring end frame.
All
regulator components are enclosed within
a solid mold, and this unit along with
the brush holder assembly is attached
to the slip ring end frame.
The regulator voltage setting never needs
adjusting, and no provision for adjustment is provided.
The generator rotor bearings contain a
supply of lubricant and require no further lubrication.
Two brushes carry
current through the two slip ring to
the field coil mounted on the rotor and
under normal conditions will provide
long periods of attention-free service.
The stator windings are reassembled on
the inside of a laminated core that
forms part of the frame.
A rectifier
bridge connected to the stator windings contains six diodes and electrically
5-50B
-REMOVAL:
-
a.
Disconnect battery ground strap.
b.
Disconnect wiring to alternator
c.
Loosen alternator mounting and
adjusting bolts and swing alternator
toward engine far enough to disengage
the V-belt from the alternator pulley.
d.
Remove mounting hardware and
remove alternator from its mounting
bracket.
5-65.
DISASSEMBLY:
a.
Refer to figure 5-79 for parts
identification.
Scribe a line to matchmark parts
b.
for reassembly in the same relative
position.
c.
Remove the
separate the drive
assembly from the
prying apart with
stator slot.
four thru-bolts and
end frame and rotor
stator assembly by
a screwdriver at the
d.
Place a piece of tape over the
slip ring
IMPORTANT: Read the introductory paragraphs on 5-50B
before proceeding with either one of these sections.
UNDERCHARGED ENERGIZER
This condition, as evidenced by slow cranking and law
specific gravity readings, can be caused by one or
more of the following conditions even though the indicator lamp may be operating normally. The following procedure also applies to circuits with an am
meter.
1. Insure that the undercharged contion has not
been caused by accessories having bee” left
on for extended periods.
2. Check the drive belt for porper tension.
3.
Inspect the wiring for defects. Check all connections for tightness and cleanliness, Including the
slip connectors at the alternator and firewall, and
the cable clamps and battery posts.
4. With ignition switch on connect a voltmeter from:
a. Alternator “BAT” terminal to ground
b. Alternator No. 1 terminal to ground
c. Alternator No. 2 terminal to ground
A zero reading indicates an open between voltmeter connection and Energizer.
5. If previous Steps 1 through 4 check satisfactorily,
check Delcotron alternator as follows:
OVERCHARGED ENERGIZER
1. connect a voltmeter fron alternator No. 2 terminal to ground. If reading is zero, No. 2 lead
circuit is open.
2.
If Energizer and No. 2 lead circuit check good, but
a” obvious overcharge condition exists as evidenced
by excessive Energizer water usage, proceed as follows:
a. Separate end frames as covered in “Disassembly”
section under heading of “ALTERNATOR REPAIR”. Check
field winding for shorts. If shorted replace rotor
and regulator.
b. Connect ohmmeter using lowest range scale
from brush lead clip to end frame as shown in
Step 1, Figure 8, then reverse lead connections.
c. If both readings are zero, either the brush lead
clip is grounded or regulator is defective
d. A grounded brush lead clip can result from
omission of insulating washer (Fig. 8), omission
of lnsulating sleeve over screw, or damaged insulating sleeve. Remove screw to inspect sleeve
If satisfactory, replace regulator as covered
under heading of “ALTERNATOR REPAIR”.
a. Disconnect Energizer ground cable.
b. Connect an ammeter in the circuit at the “BAT”
terminal of the alternator,
c. Reconnect Energizer ground cable.
d. Fully load electrical circuit. and connect a
carbon pile across the Energizer.
e. Operate enqine at moderate speed as required,
and adjust carbon pile as required. to obtain
maximum current output.
If ampere output is within 10 percent of rated output
as stamped on alternator frame, alternator is not defective; recheck Steps 1 thru 5.
If output is within 10 percent of rated output. replace regulator as covered in ALTERNATOR REPAIR"
section, and check field winging.
If ampere output is not within 10 percent of rated
output, ground the field winding by inserting a screwdriver into the test hole (Fig. 6). CAUTION: Tab is
within 3/4 inch of casting surface. Do not force screwdriver deeper than one inch into end frame.
Operate engine at moderate speed as required, and
adjust carbon pile as required to obtain maximum
current output.
If output iS not within 10 percent of rated output,
check the field winding, diode, trio, rcctifier bridge,
and stator as covered in “ALTERNATOR REPAIR” section.
5-50C
end frame bearing to prevent entry of dirt
and other foreign material; also place a
piece of tape over the shaft on the slip
ring end.
CAUTION
NOTE
If the rotor is not defective, but the
generator fails to supply rated output,
the defect is in the diode trio, rectifier bridge or stator.
USE PRESSURE SENSITIVE TAPE AND NOT
FRICTION TAPE, WHICH WOULD LEAVE A
GUMMY DEPOSIT ON THE SHAFT.
a. If brushes are to be reused, clean with
a soft dry cloth.
f. To remove the drive end frame from the
rotor, place the rotor in a vise and
tighten only enough to permit removal
of the shaft nut.
CAUTION
AVOID EXCESSIVE VISE TIGHTENING, AS
THIS HAY CAUSE DISTORTION OF THE ROTOR.
g. Remove the shaft nut, washer, pulley,
fan and the collar, then separate the
drive end frame from the rotor shaft.
5-66. INSPECTION
ROTOR FIELD WINDING CHECKS:
a. To check for opens, connect the test lamp or
ohmmeter to each slip ring.
If the lamp fails
to light, or if the ohmmeter reading is high
( i n f i n i t e ) , the winding is open, (Plate 12337).
Plate 12337. Checking Rotor Field Winding
DIODE TRIO CHECK:
The diode trio is identified in Plate 12338.
First, connect an ohmmeter using lowest range
scale from diode trio long connector to the end
frame (as shown in plate 12338, step 2), then
reverse lead connections. If both readings are
the same, check for grounded brush lead clip
caused by omission of insulating washer (plate
12338) , omission of insulating sleeve over screw,
b. The winding is checked for short circuits or
excessive resistance by:
1. connecting a battery and ammeter in series
with the edges of the two slip rings. An
ammeter reading above the value specified
(Refer to SPFCIFICATIONS section)indicates
shorted windings; a reading below the value
specified indicates excessive resistance.
2. an alternative method, which is to check the
resistance of the field by connecting an
ohmmeter to the two slip rings (per Plate
If the resistance reading is below
12337) .
the specified value, the winding is shorted;
if above the specified value, the winding
has excessive resistance.
NOTES:
1. The specified resistance value can
be determined by dividing the voltage by the current given in SPECIFICATION Section.
2. Remember that the winding resistance
and ammeter readings will vary slightly
with winding temperature changes.
5-50D
Plate 12338. View Inside Typical End Frame Ass’y
or damaged insulating sleeve.
nspect sleeve.
Remove screw to
NOTE
If screw assembly is correct, and both
ohmmeter readings are the same, replace
the regulator.
SINGLE CONNECTOR
Plate 12340. Rectifier Bridge Check
RECTIFIER BRIDGE CHECK:
Plate 12339. Diode Trio Check
a. To check the diode trio, remove it from the
end frame assembly by detaching the three nuts,
the attaching screw, and removing the stator assembly.
NOTE
The insulating washer on the screw is
assembled over the top of the diode
trio connector.
As shown on plate 12340, the rectifier bridge
has a grounded heat sink and an insulated heat
sink connected to the output terminal. (On 10-51
generators, there is an insulating washer located between the insulated heat sink and end
frame.) Check the rectifier bridge as follows:
a. Connect the ohmmeter to the grounded
heat sink and one of the three terminals
(plate 12340).
IMPORTANT
IF THE RECTIFIER BRIDGE IS CONSTRUCTED
AS SHOWN IN PLATE 12341, CONNECT OHMMETER PRESSING DOWN VERY FIRMLY ONTO
FLAT METAL CONNECTOR, NOT STUD (SHOWN
IN PLATE 12340).
b. Connect an ohmmeter having a 1-1/2 volt cell,
and using the lowest range scale, to the single
connector and to one of the three connectors (as
shown in plate 12333).
c. Observe the reading. Then reverse the ohmmeter leads to the same two connectors. if both
readings are the same, replace the diode trio.
A good diode trio will give one high and one low
reading.
d. Repeat this same test between the single
connector and each of the other two connectors.
Also, connect the ohmmeter to each pair of the
three connectors (not illustrated). if any rear
ding is zero, replace the diode trio.
NOTE
Plates 12338 and 12339 illustrate two
diode trios differing in appearance.
Either one of these diode trios may be
used, as they are interchangeable.
Plate 12341. Rectifier Bridge Check (Showing
Correct Terminal Assembly Section)
5-50E
b. Then reverse the lead connections to the
grounded heat sink and same terminal (or
If both readings are the same,
connector).
replace the rectifier bridge. A good rectifier bridge will give one high and one
low reading. Repeat this same test between the grounded heat sink and the other
two terminals, and between the insulated
heat sink and each of the three terminals.
This makes a total of six checks, with two
readings taken for each check.
c. The ohmmeter check of the rectifier bridge,
and of the diode trio as previously covered,
is a valid and accurate check. DO NOT replace either unit unless at least one pair
of readings is the same.
CAUTION
DO NOT USE HIGH VOLTAGE TO CHECK THESE
UNITS, SUCH AS A 110-VOLT TEST LAMP.
d. To replace the rectifier bridge, remove
the attaching screws, and disconnect the
capacitor lead.
NOTE
There is an insulator between the insulated heat sink and end frame (plate
12340). Rectifier bridges may vary in
appearance but are completely interchangeable in these generators.
CHECKING STATOR WINDINGS:
a. The stator windings may be checked with
a 110-volt test lamp or an ohmmeter.
b. If the lamp lights, or if the meter reading is low when connected from any stator
lead to the frame, the windings are grounded.
c. If the lamp fails to light, or if the
meter reading is high when successively
connected between each pair of stator
leads on 10-S1 Series, the windings are
open (plate 12342).
OHMMETER
(CHECK FOR OPENS)
OHMMETER
(CHECK FOR GROUNDS)
Plate 12342. Checking Stator Windings
shorted stator can cause the indicator
lamp to be on with the engine at low
speed.
BRUSH HOLDER AND REGULATOR REPLACEMENT:
After removing the three attaching nuts,
the stator and diode trio screw (plates 12340
and 12341). the brush holder and regulator may
be replaced by removing the two remaining screws.
Notice the two insulators located over the
top of the brush clips in plate 12338, and that
these two screws have special insulating sleeves
above the threads. The third mounting screw may
If not,
or may not have an insulating sleeve.
this screw must not be interchanged with either
one of the other two screws, as a ground may
result, causing no output or uncontrolled generator output. Requlators may vary in appearance
but are completely interchangeable in these
generators.
SLIP RING SERVICING:
If the slip rings are dirty, they may be
cleaned and finished with 400-grain or finer
polishing cloth. Spin the rotor and hold the
polishing cloth against the slip rings until
they are clean.
CAUTION
THE ROTOR MUST BE ROTATED IN ORDER TO
d. A short circuit in the stator windings
is difficult to locate without laboratory
test equipment due to the low resistance
of the windings. However, if all other
electrical checks are normal and the generator fails to supply rated output, shorAlso, a
ted windings are indicated.
5-50F
CLEAN THE SLIP RINGS EVENLY; CLEANING
SLIP RINGS BY HAND WITHOUT SPINNING
ROTOR MAY RESULT IN FLAT SPOTS ON
SLIP RINGS, CAUSING BRUSH NOISE.
Slip rings which are rough or out of round
should be trued in a lathe to .002 inch maximum
indicator reading. Remove only enough material
to make the rings smooth and round. Finish with
400-grain or finer polishing cloth and blow away
all dust.
BEARING REPLACEMENT AND LUBRICATION:
a. The bearing in the drive end frame can be
removed by detaching the retainer plate
screws and then pressing the bearing from
the end frame. If the bearing is in satisfactory condition and is to be reused, it
should be filled one-quarter full with
special grease (Part number 1800574)
CAUTION
d. To install a new bearing, place a fiat
plate over the bearing and press in from
the outside toward the inside of the
frame until the bearing is flush with
the outside of the end frame. Support
the inside of the frame with a hollow
cylinder to prevent breakage of the end
frame. Use extreme care to avoid misalignment or otherwise placing undue
stress on the bearing.
e.
DO NOT OVERFILL, AS THIS MAY CAUSE THE
BEARING TO OVERHEAT.
to re-lubricate and reuse the bearing.
To remove the bearing from the slip ring
end frame, press out with a tube or collar that just fits inside the end frame
Press from the outside of the
housing.
housing towards the inside.
USE ONLY THE REC-
COMMENDED LUBRICANT (PER 01M00 LUBRICATION SPECIFICATIONS AND RECOMMENDATIONS).
If the seal is separate from the bearing,
it is recommended that a new seal be installed whenever the bearing is replaced
Press the seal in with the lip of the
seal toward the rotor when assembled;
that is, away from the bearing. Lightly
coat the seal lip with oil to facilitate
assembly of the shaft into the bearing.
5-67. REASSEMBLY:
b. To install a new bearing, press in with
a tube or collar that just fits over the
outer race, with the bearing and slinger
assembled into the end frame (as shown in
plate 12343).
It is recommended that a
BEARING
‘SLINGER
\
ARMATURE
SHAFT
Plate 12343. Drive End Bearing Assembly with
Slinger (some models use flat
washer instead of slinger)
new retainer plate be installed if the
felt seal in the retainer plate is hardened or excessively worn. Fill the cavity
between the retainer plate and bearing with
special lubricant called for in Step I.
Reassembly is the reverse of disassembly.
Remember when assembling the pulley to secure
the rotor in a vise only tight enough to permit
tightening the shaft nut to 40-60 pound feet
If excessive pressure is applied agtorque.
ainst the rotor, the assembly may become distorted. To install the slip ring and frame assembly to the rotor and drive end frame assembly,
remove the tape over the bearing and shaft, and
make sure the shaft is perfectly clean after removing the tape. Insert a rod through the hole
to hold up the brushes. Carefully
install the
shaft into the slip ring end frame assembly to
avoid damage to the seal. After tightening the
thru-bolts, remove the brush retaining rod to
allow the brushes to fail down onto the slip
rings.
5-68. GENERATOR BENCH CHECK
To check the generator in a test stand, proceed
as follows:
IMPORTANT
GROUND POLARITY OF ENERGIZER AND GENERATOR MUST BE THE SAME. USE A FULLY
CHARGED ENERGIZER OR BATTERY.
c. The bearing in the slip ring end frame
should be replaced if its grease supply
is exhausted. No attempt should be made
5-50G
Plate 12344. Connections for Bench Check o f Generater (Negative Ground Generator Shown.)
Plate 12348. Grounding Generator Field Winding
(Wiring Connections Not Shown.)*
STEP 1
STEP 6. If output is within 10 per cent of rated
output as stamped on generator frame,
generator is good.
Make connections as shown in plate 12344,
except leave the carbon pile disconnected.
CAUTION
USE A TEN-OHM RESISTOR RATED AT SIX
WATTS OR MORE BETWEEN THE GENERATOR
NO. 1 TERMINAL AND THE ENERGIZER.
STEP 2. Slowly increase the generator speed and
observe the voltage.
STEP 3. If the voltage Is uncontrolled with speed
and increases above 15.5 volts on a 12-volt
system, or 31 volts on a 24-volt system,
check for a grounded brush lead clip as
covered in TROUBLE SHOOTING Section under
the heading, “Overcharged Energizer”,
Step 3. If not grounded, replace the
regulator and check field winding.
NOTE
STEP 7. If output is not within 10 per cent of
rated output, keep energizer or battery
loaded with carbon pile and ground the
generator field (as shown in plate
12348).*
STEP 8. Operate the generator at moderate speed
as required and adjust the carbon pile as
required to obtain maximum current output.
STEP 9. If output is within 10 per cent of the
rated output as stamped on generator
frame, replace regulator (as outlined
in this section under “Brush Holder and
Regulator Replacement,” page 12M103E).
STEP 10. If output is not within 10 per cent of
rated output, check the field winding,
diode trio, rectifier bridge, and stator
as previously covered.
The energizer or battery MUST be fully
charged when making this check.
STEP 4. If voltage is below 15.5 volts on a 12volt system, or 31 volts on a 24-volt
system, connect the carbon pile (as shown
in plate 12344).
STEP 5. Operate the generator at moderate speed
as required and adjust the carbon pile as
required to obtain maximum current output.
5-50H
*CAUTION
TAB IS WITHIN 3/4 INCH OF CASTING SURFACE.
DO NOT FORCE SCREWDRIVER DEEPER
THAN ONE INCH INTO END FRAME.
5-69.
INSTALLATION.
a.
When reassembly is complete,
install the alternator onto the mounting brackets on the engine and secure
with the mounting and adjusting bolts
previously removed.
b.
Install drive belt and adjust
belt tension as outlined in Section IV.
c.
Reconnect wiring to the alternator
in the same relationship as before removal.
d.
Connect battery ground strap.
S P E C I F I C A T I O N S
DELCOTRON GENERATORS WITH BUILT-IN VOLTAGE REGULATORS
GENERATOR
PART
NUMBER
SERIES
TYPE
GROUND
FIELD CURRENT
ROTATION
VIEWING
(80°F.)
DRIVE END AMPS
VOLT
905949
10-SI
100
NEG
EITHER
4.0-4.5 12
* At maximum operating speed.
@ Voltmeter not needed for cold output check.
output.
COLD OUTPUT
SPECIFIED
VOLTS
AMPS RPM
APPROX
RPM
AMPS
@
12 2000
33 5000
RATED
HOT OUTPUT*
(AMPS)
37
Load battery with carbon pile to obtain maximum
5-50J
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.
15.
16.
Cap
Rotor
Cover
Screw
Condenser
Screw
Point Set
Lock
Plate
Retainer
Cam
Bearing
Weight
Spring
Mainshaft
Primary Lead
17.
18.
19.
20.
21.
22.
23.
24.
25.
26.
27.
28.
29.
30.
31.
32.
33.
Bearing
Bearing
Bearing
Screw
Lockwasher
Spring & Support
Housing
Oiler
Nut
Lockwasher
Washer
Clamp
Bearing
Shim
Collar
Pin
Gasket
5-70.
IGNITION DISTRIBUTOR.
5-71.
REMOVAL AND DISASSEMLBY.
a.
Disconnect battery ground strap.
b.
Disconnect coil and spark plug
wires at distributor cap.
Disconnect
condenser lead.
Remove mounting hardware and clamp
c.
at base of distributor, and lift distributor off the engine.
Note
If possible, block the flywheel or
provide some other means of preventing
the engine from being cranked over while
the distributor is removed.
This will
simplify the retiming of the distributor
when it is installed.
d.
Refer to figure 5-80 for parts
identification.
5-51
and disassemble the distributor as follows:
e. Unsnap cap springs, take off cap, rotor and
dust seal.
f. Disassemble terminal. Loosen terminal nut and
pull wire spring from terminal. (The terminal nut
on the inside of the distributor bowl has been
eliminated, on some models, and replaced with a
notched terminal head screw and a special nut
which screws down into a recess in the outer
terminal block.) To detach the terminal assembly,
remove the outer hex nut and washer from
terminal screw. Remove the special slotted nut
with a slotted bit screwdriver or other pronged
tool. Remove the terminal screw and both matched
insulator blocks.
g. Take off breaker plate attaching screws and lift
out breaker plate.
h. Remove coupling or gear by grinding or filing
off the peened-over head of pin and then drive out
pin.
i. Unscrew bearing and take the accessory drive
shaft out of the housing.
j. Shaft and advance mechanism can now be
lifted out. Advance mechanism is disassembled by
taking off nuts fastening hold-down plate in place.
5-72. BUSHING REPLACEMENT.
Bushings or bearings can be replaced on many
applications, including units which have built-in
lubrication. Porous bushings are available as service
replacement parts (sold by special arrangement),
but the actual installation requires great care, as
well as the use of a special arbor, in order to
prevent damage to the bearing surface. Proper
lubrication with a porous bushing depends upon a
uniform predictable seepage of oil through the
structure of the bushing. The amount of oil which
seeps through a porous bushing may be seriously
affected by scratches or scuffed areas on the
bearing or transmitting surfaces. Porous bushings
are manufactured to an exact size and should not
be reamed, scraped, or filed. It is very important to
use only the grade of oil specified for the oil
reservoir since other grades will allow either
excessive or inadequate lubrication, depending
5-52
upon viscosity. Under no circumstances must
grease be used in the oil reservoir.
5-73. CLEANING, INSPECTION AND
TEST OF PARTS.
Clean and examine all parts of the distributor after
disassembly. Do not clean cap, rotor, condenser,
insulators or housing (on units with built-in
lubrication) in any degreasing compound, since this
may damage the part. Examine the centrifugal
advance parts, weights, springs and plate, for signs
of wear and replace parts that look worn or
otherwise damaged. On units with a dust seal,
replace the sealing washer if it is hard, worn or
dirty. Replace contact points that are worn or
pitted, or if the breaker lever rubbing block or
bushing is excessively worn. On units with a cam
lubricator, replace the lubricator if the lubricating
felt wick is worn, hard or dirty.
a. Condenser. Inspect the condenser for broken
leads, frayed insulation and loose or corroded
terminal. Make sure the condenser is firmly
mounted and makes a good ground contact. Be
sure terminal is tight.
b. Open the breaker contacts and insulate them
with a small card. Check the condenser for
capacity and grounds by testing from the primary
terminal to the distributor base. If this test shows
the condenser is defective, remove condenser and
test again. Replace if second test shows the
condenser is faulty.
c. Centrifugal Advance. Check the centrifugal
advance mechanism for freeness by turning the
breaker cam in the direction of rotation and then
release it. The advance springs should return the
cam to its original position without sticking.
d. Distributor Cap. Wipe out the distributor cap
with a clean cloth and inspect it and the rotor for
chips, cracks and carbonized paths which would
allow high-tension leakage to ground. Such defects
require replacement of the part.
5-74. REASSEMBLY AND TESTING.
Reassembly is the reverse of disassembly. After
reassembly, the contact point opening and cam
angle should be checked and adjusted, refer to
Table 5. The point opening of new points can be
checked with a wire feeler gauge, or a Dwell Angle
Meter. A meter of this type indicates the cam or
contact angle. This angle is the number of degrees
that the breaker cam rotates from the time the
points close until they open again. The cam angle
increases as the point opening is increased.
Manufacturers of this type equipment furnish
complete instructions as to their use. Refer to
Table 5 for dwell angle.
5-75. CONTACT POINT PRESSURE.
The contact point pressure should be checked with
a spring gauge. The scale should be hooked to the
breaker lever and the pull exerted at an angle of
90 degrees with the point surface. Reading
should be taken just as points separate. The
pressure can be adjusted by bending the breaker
lever spring. If the pressure is excessive, it can be
decreased by pinching the spring carefully. To
increase, the lever must be removed from the
distributor so the spring can be bent away from the
lever. Avoid excessive spring distortion. New
breaker lever springs may be stronger than required
in service; be sure to check the spring tension of all
new levers when installed. Remember that
excessive pressure causes rapid rubbing block, cam,
and contact point wear while insufficient pressure
will permit high-speed point bounce which will, in
turn, cause arcing and burning of the points and
missing of the engine.
Breaker lever spring tension should be 17-21
ounces when measured at the center of the contact
or 19-23 ounces when measured just behind the
contact. The tension may be measured with any
suitable spring gauge, provided the pull is exerted
at 90 degrees and the reading taken just as the
points begin to separate.
The distributor should be tested on a distributor
tester that will check the centrifugal advance
mechanism.
5-76.
REINSTALLATION.
When installing a distributor, observe the following
cautions:
1. Be sure the distributor mounting is clean so
there will be a good ground connection for the
distributor.
2. Check engine breather pipes, since clogged
pipes cause crankcase pressure which will force oil
up into the distributor.
3. If the advance mechanism of the old
distributor was found to be worn, check the engine
for worn oil pump gears, since these cause backlash
which produces torsional vibration; such vibration
causes rapid advance mechanism wear.
4. Be sure to install the new distributor all the
way down in its mounting well. If the distributor is
not pushed all the way down, the distributor shaft
is apt to freeze in the distributor housing and cause
complete destruction of the unit.
5. Be sure that unit is properly timed, as shown
in figure 5-68.
5-77. CARBURETOR.
5-78. REMOVAL.
a. Remove cotter key from accelerator rod at
throttle arm and pull rod from throttle arm hole.
b. Remove the air cleaner to the carburetor hose.
c. Disconnect choke control.
d. Disconnect fuel pump to carburetor line.
e. Remove two nuts and lockwashers at the
manifold to carburetor flange and withdraw
carburetor from machine.
5-79. DISASSEMBLY. (See figure 5-81.)
Disassembly of the carburetor is not recommended
except by
experienced
mechanics.
The
disassembled view will identify the various
component parts and show their relation to
assembly. Use the disassembled view with the
identifying part numbers to identify and locate
parts when performing the disassembly and
reassembly operations.
A. REPAIR PARTS.
Refer to the parts section of this manual for
carburetor repair kits. The use of the proper repair
parts kit is essential in the event repair is to be
performed on the carburetor. The following
5-53
LEGEND FOR FIGURE 5-81
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
Carbutor
Repair kit
Gasket kit
Screw
Spring
Screw
Screw
Screw
Float
Jet
Plug
12.
13.
14.
15.
16.
17.
18.
19.
20.
21.
22.
Screw
Gasket
Spring
Screw
Spring
Stud
Screw
Swivel
Cotter
Screw
Jet
suggested general hand tools will perform the
service job.
B. GENERAL HAND TOOLS.
7/16” Open End Wrench
l / 2 ” Open End Wrench
1 / 4 ” Blade Screw Driver
5/32” Blade Screw Driver
Long Nosed Pliers
6” Depth Gauge
Light Hammer
Long Rod or Punch
a. Remove the four assembly screws and
lockwashers which attach the throttle body to the
fuel bowl, using a screwdriver.
b. Separate the throttle body from the fuel bowl
assembly.
23.
24.
25.
26.
27.
28.
29.
30.
31.
32.
33.
Screw
Plug
Clamp
N u t
Lockkwasher
Nut
Washer
Plate
Stop
Lever
Pin
34.
35.
36.
37.
38.
39.
40.
41.
42.
43.
Lever
Pin
Venturi
Retainer
Body
Bowl
Plug
Bracket
Shaft
Plate
h. Remove the idle jet from passage in machined
surface of throttle body near fuel valve seat, using
a small screwdriver (5/32 inch blade).
i. Remove the idle adjusting needle and fiction
spring from the side of throttle body.
j. Remove the throttle plate, screws and
lockwashers, shaft and stop lever assembly as
follows:
1. Unscrew throttle stop screw until threaded
end is flush with lever.
2. Make match marks with file on throttle body
and levers to act as a guide to reassemble these
parts in the same position as removed.
Disassemble Throttle Body
c. Remove float axle as follows:
1. Press screwdriver against float axle at slotted
side of float hinge bracket and force through hinge
bracket.
2. Remove float axle completely with fiiers
from opposite side and remove float.
d. Remove fuel valve needle.
e. Remove the assembly gasket from the
machined surface of the throttle body.
f. Remove the venturi.
g. Remove the fuel valve seat and fibre washer
from machined surface of throttle body, using
screwdriver.
5-54
3. Remove the screws and remove the throttle
plate.
4. Remove the throttle shaft and stop lever
assembly from the throttle body.
k. Drive shaft hole plug out, using a 6-inch length
of l/4 inch drill rod inserted through opposite
shaft hole.
1. Remove throttle shaft seal and retainer using
the end of a small screwdriver to lift the parts out.
Disassemble Fuel Bowl Body
m. Remove the passage plug or main jet adjusting
needle assembly and fibre washer from bottom of
fuel bowl body, using a l/2 inch wrench.
n. Remove the drain plug (hex) from outside
Figure 5-81. Carburetor Assembly
5-55
bottom of fuel bowl, using a 7/16 inch open end
wrench.
o. Remove discharge jet and fibre washer.
p. Remove well vent jet from center of large
opening in machined surface of the fuel bowl with
a small screwdriver.
q. Remove main jet and fibre washer from inside
of fuel bowl, using a screwdriver.
r. Dissemble choke as follows:
1. Make match marks with a file or prick punch
on choke bracket, choke lever and adjacent shaft
boss as an aid to correct reassembly.
Note
Be sure all carbon despoits have been
removed from throttle bore and idle port.
d. It is advisable to reverse flow of compressed
air in all passages to insure that all dirt has been
removed. NEVER use a wire or drill to clean out
jets.
e. Replace float assembly if loaded with gasoline,
damaged, or if float axle bearing is worn
excessively. Inspect top side of float lever for wear
where it contacts fuel valve needle.
f. Replace the float axle if any wear can be
visually detected on the bearing surface.
3. Remove choke plate screws and lockwashers.
g. Always replace fuel valve seat and needle
because both parts wear and may cause improper
float level.
4. Remove the choke plate and choke shaft and
lever.
h. Idle adjusting needle point must be smooth
and free of ridges.
Note
i. Inspect throttle plate for burrs or damaged
edges. Never clean with a buffing wheel or sharp
instrument.
2. Remove choke lever spring.
In some cases it may be necessary to bend
the bowl vent tube up a very little to give
the choke clearance. (Use a screw driver
inserted in the tube.)
j. Inspect air shutter for bends, butts or damaged
edges.
5. Remove bracket assembly screws, packing
washer and choke bracket.
k. Check air shutter shaft bearing surface for
wear - see that shaft is straight.
6. Remove choke shaft hole plug, packing
washer and retainer, using method suggested in
throttle body disassembly section “Disassembly
Throttle Body,” items K and L.
1. Replace all gaskets and fibre washers every
time carburetor is disassembled.
5-80. CLEANING AND INSPECTION.
a. Refer to figure 5-81 for parts identification
and proceed as follows:
b. Clean all metal parts thoroughly with cleaning
solution and rinse in solvent.
c. Blow out all passages in the air intake and fuel
bowl assembly and throttle body.
5-56
Note
Replacement parts must be of the same
part number and specifications.
m. Check float level with throttle body in an
inverted position, measure level from machined
surface of body to top of float at highest point.
The measurement, “A” figure 2, should be 1-5/32
inches + or - 1/32 inch. To increase or decrease
measurement, bend float close to float body. See
figure 5-82.
5. Install lever spring to return the choke to the
wide open position.
c. Install main jet and fibre washer in the fuel
bowl, using a screwdriver.
d. Install well vent jet in fuel bowl and tighten
with a small screwdriver.
e. Install discharge jet and fibre washer in large
threaded passage beneath the fuel bowl.
f. Install the drain plug in threaded passage,
bottom of fuel bowl, using a 7/16 inch end
wrench.
Figure 5-82. Float Level Check
g. Install main jet adjustment or passage plug and
fibre washer, using a 1/2 inch wrench.
5-81. REASSEMBLY. (See figure 5-81.)
Throttle Body
Fuel Bowl Body.
a. Install the choke shaft hole plug, packing and
retainer in fuel bowl body as follows:
1. Assemble packing and retainer and place
completed assembly on bushing driver with
packing facing small end of tool.
2. Start retainer into counter bore in body and
lightly drive retainer into body until it is flush with
machine surface.
h. Install throttle shaft hole plug in the side
opposite the stop pin, using a light hammer to
drive it into place flush with the boss.
i. Install throttle shaft seal, open side out,
followed by retainer, using fingers only.
j. Install the throttle shaft and stop lever
assembly, throttle, screws as follows:
1. Insert the throttle shaft and stop lever
assembly in throttle body.
3. Install shaft hole plug with hammer.
Note
b. Reassemble choke parts as follows:
1. Refer to match marks for correct position
and install choke bracket, screws and lockwashers.
2. Start the choke plate, poppet valve first and
stem down, into the air intake.
3. Hold the choke plate up and insert the choke
shaft into place with cut-out section facing up.
4. Rotate the shaft to the closed position, place
the choke plate in the cut-out section and install
the screws. (Be sure the plate is properly centered
before tightening the screws.)
Be sure stop is backed out far enough to
permit complete closing of throttle.
2. Rotate throttle shaft to closed position,
insert throttle plate in the cut-out section of the
shaft, holding the plate in position with fingers.
3. Start throttle plate screws and tighten with
small screwdriver, being sure that the throttle plate
is properly centered in the throttle body bore.
Note
The screw holes in the throttle plate are off
center. Start the side of the throttle plate
5-57
LEGEND FOR FIGURE 5-83
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
Fuel pump
Stud
Gasket
Repair kit
Diaphragm k i t
Nut
7.
8 .
9.
10.
11.
12.
Lockwasher
Capscrew
Lockwasher
Screw
Retainer
Body
13.
14.
15.
16.
17.
18.
Arm
Retainer
Cover & Valve
Cover
Lockwasher
Capscrew
with the shortest distance between the
screw holes and beveled edge into place
first. The throttle plates are made with two
opposite edges beveled to-fit the throttle
body bore when the plate is closed. The
throttle plate will not close tightly if
installed upside down. Pressure on the plate
must be maintained with the finger until
the screws are tightened. When properly
installed, the side of the throttle plate
farthest away from the mounting flange
will be aligned with the idle port when the
plate is closed.
machined surface. The float setting is measured
from the machined surface (no gasket) of cover to
top side of float bodies at highest point.
k. Install idle adjusting needle and friction spring
in threaded passage on side of throttle body. Seat
lightly with screwdriver and back out 1-1/4 full
turns as preliminary adjustment.
q. Insert venturi in fuel bowl bore, small opening
down.
1. Install idle jet in counter-bored passage in
machined surface.
The flat side of venturi must be toward the
well vent jet.
m. Install fuel valve seat and fibre washer, using
wrench.
n. Place new throttle body to fuel bowl gasket on
machined surface of fuel bowl cover.
o. Install fuel valve needle in seat followed by
float and float axle;
p. Float Level. Check position of float assembly
for correct measurement to obtain proper float
level, using a depth gauge. The “A” dimension
should be 1-5/32 inch plus or minus 1/32 inch, see
figure 5-82.
1. With bowl cover assembly in an inverted
position, viewed from free end of float, the float
bodies must be centered and at right angles to the
5-58
2. Bending Float Lever. To increase or decrease
distance between float body and machined surface,
use long nosed pliers and bend lever close to float
body.
Note
Replace with new float if position is off
more than l/l6 inch.
Note
Assemble Carburetor Bodies.
r. Assemble the two completed bodies and four
screws and lo&washers and tighten screws evenly
and firmly.
s. Hold the throttle lever in a closed position
and turn the throttle stop screw in until it just
contacts the stop pin, then turn screw in l-l/Z
additional turns as a preliminary adjustment of
the idle speed.
5-82.
INSTALLATION.
a. Place the carburetor against the manifold
flange and install fasteners. Tighten evenly to
prevent vacuum leaks, and always install a new
gasket.
Figure 5-83. Fuel Pump
5-59
b. Connect fuel pump to carburetor hose, and
air filter hose.
c. Connect accelerator and governor linkage and
perform adjustments as outlined in Section IV.
5-83. FUEL PUMP REPAIR.
f. Remove the bolts securing converter housing
to engine flywheel housing.
g. Remove frame mounting bolts.
h. Remove transmission and wheel end as an
assembly.
a. Refer to figure 5-83 for parts identification
when disassembling the fuel pump.
b. Before disassembling any pump, scribe a mark
across the housings in such a manner that they may
be reassembled with inlet and outlet, fitting holes
in correct location.
c. When disassembled, clean all parts (except
diaphragms) in s o l v e n t a n d b l o w d r y w i t h
compressed air. Examine the diaphragm for cracks,
tom screw holes or ruptures. If deteriorated, install
new diaphragm and pull rod assembly. Check the
strainer screen and if found to be corroded or
clogged, install a new screen. Check rocker arm for
wear or scoring or that portion that contacts the
camshaft eccentric. If arm is scored or worn, install
a new one.
Make certain that the engine is properly
blocked (supported) before removing any
retainer capscrews.
i. Remove drain plug located on side of converter
and drain oil.
j. Remove converter assembly from stator
support by pulling converter straight outwards
from main shaft and stator support.
k. Separate transmission from axle adaptor by
removing the retainer bolts and stud nuts that
connect these two units.
Note
d. When reassembling a pump, do not use shellac
or other adhesive on a diaphragm.
5-84. TRANSMISSION AND DRIVE AXLE.
There is one large seal and one or more
shims located between the axle adaptor and
transmission. B e c a r e f u l n o t t o d a m a g e
these components at disassembly.
5-85. REMOVAL.
b. Remove all parts obstructing accessibility to
the transmission.
1. In the following instructions the front of the
transmission will be the TORQUECONVERTER
END, and the rear of the tranmission will be the
ADAPTOR-END. To aid in disassembly, see the
exploded view of the transmission shown in figure
5-93.
c. Disconnect hydraulic brake fluid lines,
directional range shifting linkage and shifting arms.
5-86. AXLE END REMOVAL AND
DISASSEMBLY.
a. Drain transmission and axle adaptor at drain
plugs.
d. Remove upright assembly.
e. Through opening in converter housing, remove
5/16 inch bolts securing torque converter assembly
to the engine flywheel.
a. It is not necessary to remove the transmission
in order to remove axle ends. Drain the axle
adaptor if the transmission is not to be removed.
b. Refer to figure 5-84 for parts identification
and proceed as follows:
Note
It will be necessary to rotate engine flywheel
to make these bolts accessible.
5-60
c. Remove axle end capscrews and washers.
Remove axle end stud nuts and washers.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
7.
11.
13.
Axle end assembly
Hub cap bolt
Hub cap
Spindle support
Seal
shaft
Bolt, brake mounting
Sleeve
14.
15.
16.
17.
Bearing
Retainer bolt
Seal
Adjusting nut, washer,
cotter pin
20. Hub gear bolt
21. Internal gear
23. Bearing cone, outer
24.
26.
27.
28.
29.
30.
31.
32.
Bearing cup, outer
Wheel mounting bolt
Hub, cup
Brake drum
Brake drum bolt
Bearing cup, inner
Bearing cone, inner
Spindle bolt
35.
36.
38.
39.
40.
41.
42.
Brake assembly
Spindle
Bolt
Stud
vent
Dust shield
Dust shield
bolt
Figure 5-84. Axle End Assembly
d. Remove axle end by pulling straight
out until the assembly is clear of the
adaptor housing.
e. Remove hub cap and fasteners.
Remove axle bearing nut, washers and
spacer as shown in Figure 5-86.
f. Remove the outer bearing cone as
shown in Figure 5-87.
g. Remove drive hub assembly by pulling
unit straight out, to separate it from
the axle end.
See Figure 5-88.
5-61
Figure 5-87. Outer Bearing Removal
Figure 5-86. Removing Outer Bearing Nut
Figure 5-88. Drive Hub Removal
h. Remove drive axle spindle fasteners and drive
axle spindle as shown in figure 5-89.
c. Before reassembling, carefully inspect all parts
for excessive wear, cracks and breakage.
i. Remove drive axle shaft as shown in figure
5-90, by striking splined end with a rawhide mallet
until shaft is driven out.
d. Install bearing on axle shaft, making sure
hearing is well seated on shaft.
5.87. AXLE END REASSEMBLY.
a. Clean all parts in a Stoddard type cleaning
solvent.
b. Carefully clean and inspect all bearings and
bearing surfaces for excessive wear, pits and
bearing failure, replace with new parts when
necessary. Replace all seals and gaskets.
5-62
e. Insert drive axle assembly into position in
housing. Using rawhide hammer, drive axle
assembly into position making sure bearing is well
seated.
f. Install inner bearing on drive axle spindle,
making sure bearing is well seated.
g. Install drive axle spindle to housing assembly.
Figure 5-89. Drive Axle Spindle Removal
Figure 5-90. Drive Axle Shaft Removal
h. Carefully install drive hub assembly on axle
spindle, making sure inner bearing is seated on
bearing race and drive axle is in mesh with inner
ring in hub assembly.
d. Remove the bearing carrier stud nuts and
washers from each side of the axle adapter.
i. Install outer bearing on spindle, making sure
bearing is well seated.
j. Install washer, bearing retainer, lock washer
and locking retainer. R e f e r t o S e c t i o n I V f o r
bearing adjustment procedure.
e. Removal of bearing carriers will free the
differential assembly for removal
Note
A number of shims (item 10) may be
installed under the bearing carriers. Keep
these
shim
packs
intact
for
later
installation.
5-88. AXLE ADAPTER AND DIFFERENTIAL.
5-89. REMOVAL AND DISASSEMBLY.
a. Remove both wheel end assemblies as
outlined in paragraph 5-86.
b. Refer to figure 5-91 for parts identification
and proceed as follows:
c. Remove the capscrews securing the axle
adapter to the rear of the transmission, and
separate the two units.
Note
A number of shims are installed between
the axle adapter and transmission (17,
figure 5-91). Keep this shim pack intact
for reinstallation.
disassembly is
accomplished
f. Further
according to the exploded view illustration.
5-90. CLEANING, INSPECTION AND REPAIR.
a. Immerse all parts, except bearings, in a
Stoddard type cleaning solvent until all parts are
thoroughly cleaned.
b. Dip bearings in a Stoddard type cleaning
solvent, and slosh up and down until bearings are
clean. Remove bearings from solvent and strike
large side of cone flat against a block of wood to
dislodge solidified particles of lubricant. Repeat
above operation until bearings are cleaned
thoroughly. Do not spin bearings dry with
compressed air. Allow to drip dry. Bearing may
be slowly rotated by hand to facilitate drying
procedure. Clean interior of housing thoroughly.
5-63
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
Differential housing
Drain plug
Inspection cover
Plug
Plug
Dipstick tube
Dowel pin
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.
15.
16.
Dipstick
Bearing carrier shim
Differential bearing cone
Differential bearing
Bearing carrier seal cup
Bearing carrier seal
Bearing carrier
Nut, washer
17.
18.
19.
20.
21.
22.
23.
Differential housing shim
Seal
Ring gear
Bolt, nut
Differential case
Spider
Case bolt
24.
25.
26.
27.
34.
35.
36.
37.
Thrust washer
Differential pinion gear
Differential side gear
Thrust washer
Ring gear, pinion set
Vent
Seal
Access cover
Figure 5-91. Axle Adapter and Differential
c. Examine differential case, side gears, pinions
and thrust. washers for damage or excessive wear.
Check clearance between pinions and pinion pin
and thickness of all thrust washers. If differential
side gears and pinions are worn or damaged,
always replace with complete set - consisting of
four pinions, two side gears and all thrust
washers.
5-64
d. Inspect all parts to detect cracks or fissures
to determine serviceability of parts. Surface of
spindle support which contacts oil seal lip must.
be round, smooth finished and free from nicks,
scratches, grooves or scores.
e. Carefully inspect rollers, cages and cups for
wear, chipping or nicks to determine fitness of
Figure 5-92. Tooth Contact Patterns
5-65
LEGEND FOR FIGURE 5-93
1. Transmission assembly
2. Auxiliary shaft bearing
3. Auxiliary shaft
4. Driven gear
6. Auxiliary shaft bearing
6. Retaining ring
7. Flange seal
8. Parking brake
9. Bolt, lockwasher
10. Parking brake drum
11. Bolt, lockwasher, nut
12. O-ring seal
13. Brake drum flange
14. Flange nut, washer
16. Stator support bearing
17. Stator support
18. Bolt, lockwasher
19. Pump drive gear
20. Oil distributor
21. O-ring seal
22. Forward oil tube
23. Reverse oil tube
24. O-ring seal
25. Input shaft
26. Output shaft nut
27. Outer bearing
28. Snap ring
29. Shim kit
30. Gasket
31. Control cover assemblv
32. Control cover stud
33. Bolt, lockwasher
34. Driven gear
35. Pinion shaft spacer
36. Auxiliary drive gear
37. Clutch pack
38. Intermediate gear
39. Retaining ring
40. Intermediate shaft
41. Retaining ring
42. Intermediate gear
43. Bearing
44. Reverse idler gear
45. Strainer spring
46. Strainer
47. Output shaft bearing
48. Snap ring
49. Spacer
50. Drain plug
51. Snap ring
52. Snap ring
53. Bearing
54. Bolt, lockwasher
55. Input shaft cap
56. O-ring seal
57. O-ring seal
58. Snap ring
59. Bearing
60. Thrust washer
61. Lock plate, bolt, washer
62. Reverse idler shaft
63. O-ring seal
bearings for further use. After inspection, dip
bearings in gear oil and wrap in clean cloth or
paper to protect them until installed.
f. It will be necessary to replace all O-rings and
oil seals when unit is disassembled. It is more
economical than premature overhaul to replace
these parts at a future time. Further loss of
lubricant through a worn seal may result in
faiIure of other differential parts. Handle seals
carefully, particularly when seals are being
installed. Cutting, scratching or curling under of
seal lip seriously impairs efficiency.
g. Examine teeth of both ring and pinion gears
carefully for wear, pitting, chipping, nicks or
scores. If gear teeth show spots where case
hardening is worn through, install new ring gear
and pinion set. Small nicks may be carefully
removed with a suitable hone. Examine pinion
gear teeth for wear and check pinion shaft for
5-66
64. Converter pump
65. Bolt, lockwasher
66. seal
67. Pedal shaft bearing
68. Driven gear
69. Key
70. snap ring
71. snap ring
72. Thrust washer
73. Gear, bearing
74. Bearing
75. Shaft
76. Lock
77. Sleeve
78. O-ring seal
79. Thrust washer
80. Snap ring
81. Bearing
82. Spacer
83. Sleeve
84. O-ring seal
85. Transmission case
86. Bearing
86. Top cover gasket
89. Top cover
90. Bolt, lockwasher
91. Pedal shaft bolt, lo&washer
92. Pedal shaft bolt, lo&washer
93. Gasket
94. Seal,
gasket kit
e v i d e n c e o f twisting, particularly at splines. If
evident, install new set of gears.
h. Pinion and drive (ring) gears are available
only in matched sets and must be installed as
such to assure satisfactory operation.
5-91. REASSEMBLY.
a. Reassembly is the reverse of disassembly.
However, after the axle adaptor and differential
has been reassembled, the backlash should be
checked. If the backlash is not right, it will be
necessary to add or subtract bearing carrier shims
in the axle adaptor and/or between the axle
adaptor and transmission.
06.200
05.000
05.033
05.034
05.057
05.067
05.068
05.090
05.091
05.092
05.130
05.132
05.133
05.134
05.152
05.153
06.206
06.233
06.234
06.235
06.377
06.393
06.555
06.556
06.557
06.558
06.559
06.560
TRANSMISSION ASSEMBLY (CONT’D)
CONVERTER, TORQUE
STATOR SUPPORT, TRANSMISSION
FASTENER, TRANSMISSION STATOR SUPPORT
GEAR. CONVERTOR PUMP DRIVE
SEAL, CONVERTOR PUMP
FASTENER, CONVERTOR PUMP
GEAR, CONVERTOR PUMP DRIVEN
KEY, CONVERTOR PUMP
FASTENER, CONVERTOR PUMP DRIVEN GEAR
SHAFT, CONVERTOR PUMP IDLER
THRUST WASHER, CONVERTOR PUMP IDLER GEAR
GEAR, CONVERTOR PUMP IDLER
BEARING, CONVERTOR PUMP IDLER GEAR
FASTENER, CONVERTOR PUMP IDLER GEAR
LOCK, CONVERTOR PUMP IDLER GEAR SHAFT
PLUG, TRANSMISSION SUMP DRAIN
SHAFT. INPUT
BEARING, TRANS INPUT SHAFT (ENGINE END)
BEARING, TRANS INPUT SHAFT (AXLE END)
PLUG-PIPE, TRANSMISSION CASE
THRUST WASHER, FORWARD CLUTCH HUB DRUM
BEARING, TRANSMISSION STATOR SUPPORT
DISTRIBUTOR, TRANSMISSION DIRECTION SEL OIL
SEAL, TRANS DIRECTION SEL OIL DISTRIBUTOR
TUBE, TRANSMISSION “FWD” OIL
TUBE, TRANSMISSION “REV” OIL
SEAL. TRANSMISSION DIRECTION SEL OIL TUBE
06.562
06.564
06.565
06.566
06.567
06.568
06.569
06.570
06.829
06.856
06.057
06.858
06.859
06.860
06.861
08.051
08.111
08.149
23.257
23.264
23.265
23.421
23.864
23.865
23.866
29.300
SEAL, INPUT SHAFT (AT STATOR SUPPORT)
SLEEVE, TRANS DIRECTION SELECTOR OIL DIST
SEAL, TRANS DIRECTION SEL OIL DIST SLEEVE
RETAINER, TRANS INPUT SHAFT BRG (AXLE END)
SEAL, TRANSMISSION INPUT SHAFT INBOARD
CAP, TRANSMISSION INPUT SHAFT
SEAL, TRANSMISSION INPUT SHAFT CAP
FASTENER, TRANSMISSION INPUT SHAFT CAP
THRUST WASHER, REV CLUTCH HUB & DRUM (THICK)
BEARING, AUXILIARY SHAFT (AXLE END)
SHAFT, AUXILIARY
GEAR, AUXILIARY SHAFT DRIVEN
BEARING, AUXILIARY SHAFT (ENGINE END)
RING-RETAINING, AUX SHAFT BRG (ENGINE END)
SEAL, PARKING BRAKE DRUM FLANGE
PLUG, BRAKE HOLE
SHAFT, TRANSMISSION REVERSE IDLER
FASTENER, TRANS REVERSE IDLER SHAFT
DRUM, PARKING BRAKE
BRAKE ASSEMBLY, PARK I NC
FASTENER, PARKING BRAKE
FASTENER. PARKING BRAKE DRUM
SEAL, PARKING BRAKE DRUM FLANGE
FLANGE, PARKING BRAKE DRUM
FASTENER, PARKING BRAKE DRUM FLANGE
PUMP CONVERTOR (NO SERVICEABLE COMPONENTS)
5-67
06.200
06.202
06.278
06.279
06.280
06.287
06.288
06.400
06.407
06.408
06.424
06.490
06.504
06.508
06.522
06.550
06.551
06.554
06.560
06.561
06.572
06.584
06.592
06.597
06.598
06.599
5-68
TRANSMISSION ASSEMBLY
STRAINER, TRANSMISSION SUMP
SPACER, OUTPUT SHAFT
BEARING, TRANS OUTPUT SHAFT (AXLE END)
FASTENER, TRANSMISSION OUTPUT SHAFT
BEARING, TRANS OUTPUT SHAFT OUTER
SHIM KIT, TRANS OUTPUT SHAFT BRG (ENGINE END)
CONTROL COVER ASSEMBLY
SEAL, CONTROL COVER OIL PASSAGE (SMALL)
GASKET, CONTROL COVER ATTACHING
FASTENER, CONTROL COVER
FASTENER, CONTROL COVER
RING, OUTPUT SHAFT BRG LOCATING (AXLE END)
RING, OUTPUT SHAFT BRG LOCATING (ENGINE END)
SEAL AND GASKET KIT, TRANSMISSION
COVER, TRANSMISSION CASE TOP
FASTENER, TRANSMISSION CASE TOP COVER
CLUTCH PACK, DIRECTION SELECTOR
SEAL, TRANS DIRECTION SEL OIL TUBE
SLEEVE, TRANS DIRECTION SEL OIL TUBE
CLUTCH PACK, SPEED SELECTOR
THRUST WASHER, 1ST CLUTCH HUB & DRUM
THRUST WASHER, 2ND CLUTCH HUB & DRUM
RETAINER, TRANS INTER SHAFT BEARING (ENG END)
BEARING, TRANS INTER SHAFT (ENGINE END)
SPACER, TRANSMISSION INTERMEDIATE SHAFT
06.600
06.601
06.602
06.603
06.604
06.605
06.606
06.607
06.608
06.610
06.611
06.612
06.613
06.615
06.714
06.855
06.862
06.863
06.864
06.865
08.037
08.112
08.113
23.124
23.125
08.377
GEAR, TRANSMISSION INTERMEDIATE (ENGINE END)
RING, TRANS INTER GEAR LOCATING (ENGINE END)
SHAFT, TRANSMISSION INTERMEDIATE
RING, TRANS INTER GEAR LOCATING (AXLE END)
GEAR, TRANSMISSION INTERMEDIATE (AXLE END)
RING, TRANS INTER SHAFT BKG LOCATING (AXLE END)
BEARING, TRANS INTER SHAFT (AXLE END)
RETAINER, TRANS INTER SHAFT BRG (AXLE END)
DISTRIBUTOR, TRANSMISSION SPEED SELECTOR OIL
TUBE, TRANSMISSION “HIGH” OIL
TUBE, TRANSMISSION “LOW” OIL
SEAL, TRANS SPEED SELECTOR OIL TUBE
SLEEVE, TRANS SPEED SELECTOR OIL TUBE
SEAL, TRANS SPEED SEL OIL DIST SLEEVE
SPACER, PINION SHAFT (ENGINE END)
SEAL, CONTROL COVER OIL PASSAGE
GEAR, OUTPUT SHAFT AUXILIARY DRIVE
SPRING, TRANSMISSION SUMP STRAINER
GASKET, TRANSMISSION CASE TOP COVER
RETAINER. SPEED SELECTOR OIL DISTRIBUTOR
CASE, TRANSMISSION
BEARING, TRANS REVERSE IDLER GEAR
GEAR, TRANSMISSION REVERSE IDLER
SEAL, BRAKE PEDAL SHAFT
BEARING, BRAKE PEDAL SHAFT
GASKET, TRANSMISSION TO ENGINE
2 SPEED FORWARD AND REVERSE HYDRATORK TRANSMISSION
(MODELS H-200 THROUGH H-211)
Whenever the Hydratork transmission is disassembled, the following steps must be carefully followed to insure proper operation of
the transmission upon reassembly.
Location of model and part numbers.
5-92.
TRANSMISSION DISASSEMBLY
Plate 10220
STEP 1.
Remove the torque converter.
Step l. Plate 10221
STEP 2. Remove all fasteners from axle adaptor
to transmission, and separate adaptor from
transmission by use of jackscrews and remove
axle adaptor assembly.
Step 2. Plate 10222
5-69
STEP 3. Remove the axle adaptor adjustment
shim/s and “O” ring seal.
Step 3. Plate 10223
STEP 4. Remove from the transmission assembly
the converter pump.
Step 4. Plate 10224
5-70
STEP 5.
gasket.
Remove the control cover assembly and
Step 5. Plate 10225
STEP 6. Using the control cover capscrews,
Install into the threaded oil sleeves. After
the capscrews are in place pry up on the
capscrews while holding the oil tubes, to prevent
damage to the tubes.
Step 6. Plate 10226
STEP 7. Remove the high and low oil
tubes.
Step 7. Plate 10227
STEP
8. Remove the forward and reverse
oil
tubes,
Step 8. Plate 10228
5-71
STEP 9. Remove the speed selector oil distributor
retainer ring.
Step 9. Plate 10234
STEP 10. Remove the speed selector oil distributor by pulling straight out from transmission.
Step 10. Plate 10235
5-72
STEP 11.
shown .
Block gear using soft brass stock as
Step 11. 10236
STEP 12.
Remove the output shaft retainer.
Step 12. Plate 10383
STEP 14. After shaft has been driven toward
axle adaptor end enough to clear auxiliary
gear, remove gear, spacer and thrust washer.
STEP 13. Drive the output shaft from the
converter end toward axle adaptor end using a
soft brass bar.
Step 13. Plate 10237
A. Continue to drive shaft until shaft assembly
is free of clutch pack.
B. Remove Hi & Lo Clutch pack,
Step 14. Plate 10238
5-73
Plate 10244
Output Shaft Assembly
5-74
STEP 15. Remove the transmission Input shaft
cap on axle adaptor end of transmi s s i o n .
Step 15. Plate 10229
STEP 16. Check the input shaft cap for ring
wear and imbeded foreign material. Cap must be
replaced if one or both conditions exist.
Step 16. Plate 10336
STEP 17. Remove the Input shaft retainer ring
on the axle adaptor end of transmission.
Step 17. Plate 10230
5-75
STEP 18.
Remove the stator support assembly.
Step 18. Plate 10231
STEP 19. Using a soft brass bar drive Input
shaft from axle adaptor end toward converter end.
Hold clutch pack as shaft is removed.
Step 19. Plate 10232
5-76
STEP 20. R e m o v e t h e f o r w a r d a n d r e v e r s e
pack from the transmission.
Step 20. Plate 10239
Plate 10243
Input Shaft Assembly
Located at the small gear end of the input
shaft is a 1/4 In. thrust washer. Care must
be used when reassembling transmission to
make sure this washer is located In Its
proper place.
5-77
STEP 21. Insert a long brass rod from axle
adaptor end and drive the oil distributor from
the transmission.
Step 21. Plate 10233
STEP 22. Check the oil distributor for ring
wear and foreign material. The distributor
must be replaced if one or both conditions
e-xlst.
Step 22. Plate 10335
5-78
STEP 23. Remove the thrust washers, small gear
and inner bearing race from the clutch pack.
STEP 24. Remove the thrust washers, large gear
and inner bearing race from the clutch pack.
Step 23. Plate 10337
5-79
STEP 25. Remove the clutch end plate and disc
retainer ring and remove the clutch plates.
Step 25. Plate 10338
STEP 26. Install the clutch pack disassembly
tool and remove the spring retainer snap ring,
spring retainer, and springs.
Step 26. Plate 10339
5-80
STEP 27.
Remove the clutch pack piston assembly.
Step 27. Plate 10340
STEP 28. The clutch drum assembly contains
bleedoff orifices and must be cleaned with a
fine wire to remove all foreign material and
obstructions.
Step 28. Plate 10341
STEP 29. Check the clutch hub ring seal side
clearance. A MAXIMUM of .008 and above will
require ring replacement.
Step 29. Plate 10331
STEP 30. Check the clutch piston outer seal
side clearance. A MAXIMUM of .008 and above
will require ring replacement.
Step 30. Plate 10330
5-80A
Plate 8039
Clutch Pack Assembly
5-80B
Step 31. Plate 10098
Step 32. Plate 10240
STEP 31. Remove the intermediate shaft retainer
ring on the axle adaptor end of transmission.
STEP 32. Remove the intermediate gear retainer
ring from retainer slot and slide to position
shown.
STEP 33. Using brass drift, drive intermediate
shaft toward converter end about four inches,
STEP 34. Remove intermediate gears and retainer
rings by sliding off shaft.
Step 33. Plate 10099
Step 34. Plate 10241
5-80C
Plate 10242
Intermediate Shaft Assembly
5-80D
STEP 34A.
Remove reverse idler gear
fasteners and gear.
STEP 35. Remove the converter pump idler gear
fastener.
STEP 36. Remove the thrust washer and idler
gear from shaft.
NOTE
The idler shaft has left hand threads, and must
be loosened in a clockwise rotation.
STEP 37. Bend locking tang from shaft fiat and
remove the shaft from transmission.
Step 37. Plate 10343
Step 35 - 36. Plate 10342
STEP 38. Note the position of the locking tang
to the transmission housing.
Step 38. Plate 10344
5-80E
Plate 10103
The parking brake will not have to be removed
except in the event of replacement of bearings,
gears or seals.
STEP 1.
Remove parking brake drum fastener.
STEP 2. Remove drum and flange assembly from
auxiliary shaft.
STEP 3. Remove parking brake fasteners and
remove parking brake.
STEP 4. Using puller, remove parking brake drum
flange seal.
STEP 5.
Remove auxiliary shaft retainer ring.
STEP 6. Remove bearing using appropriate puller.
(engine end)
5-80F
STEP 7.
Remove auxiliary gear and shaft
STEP 8.
Remove auxiliary bearing. (axle end)
STEP 1.
Install auxiliary bearing. (axle end)
STEP 2.
Install auxiliary shaft and gear.
STEP 3. Install bearing and retainer ring.
(engine end)
STEP 4. Install flange seal and parking brake
assembly.
STEP 5.
Install flange and drum assembly.
STEP 6. Install flange fastener (torque to
specifications).
5-95
TRANSMISSION REASSEMBLY
STEP 1.
Install reverse idler gear
and fasteners.
STEP 1A. Install the idler gear thrust washer
making sure the locking tang is in the locking
hole, and install the idler shaft.
Step 1. Plate 10344
STEP 2. After shaft is installed shaft must be
torqued (see specification page).
Step 2. Plate 10345
STEP 3. After shaft is torqued to specifications bend the locking tang down to prevent
loosening of the shaft.
Step 3. Plate 10346
5-80G
Plate 10242
Intermediate Shaft Assembly
5-80H
STEP 4. Insert the intermediate shaft from the
converter end of the transmission with bearing
installed on shaft,
STEP 5. Install on the shaft, the shaft spacer,
(making sure the beveled end of spacer is toward
the bearing) large intermediate gear, (hub of
gear toward converter end) large gear lock ring
small gear locking ring. Small intermediate
gear, (hub of gear toward axle adaptor end).
Step 4 - 5. Plate 10241
STEP 6. After the shaft has been installed into
the intermediate bearing install the large gear
retainer ring into position.
Step 6. Plate 10240
STEP 7. Install the intermediate shaft
retainer on the axle adaptor end of the transmission.
Step 7. Plate 10098
5-80J
Plate 8039
CLUTCH PACK HUB AND DRUM, PISTON AND DISC ASSEMBLY.
5-80K
STEP 8. Check the clutch hub ring seal side
clearance. A MAXIMUM wear of .008 and above
will require ring replacement.
Step 8. Plate 10331
STEP 9. Check the clutch piston outer seal side
clearance. A MAXIMUM wear of .008 and above
will require ring replacment.
Step 9. Plate 10330
STEP 10. Check the clutch bleed-off orifices
using a fine wire, to insure that all foreign
material is removed.
Step 10. Plate 10341
5-80L
STEP 11. Install the clutch piston into drum
and over hub.
Step Il. Plate 10340
STEP 12. Install the clutch springs, spring
retainer, and locking ring. Now install the
spring compressing tool and tighten the tool
until the locking ring can be installed and
then remove the tool.
The below tool is used for ease of selector
pack assembly. Two of the splines are slightly
more shallow than the remaining splines and are
used as an index to align oil holes. The shaft
will enter the selector hub and inner bearing
races in one position only.
Step 12. Plate 10339
Plate 10245
5-80M
STEP 13. Install a steel disc plate, then a
bronze disc plate alternate In this manner until
the appropriate number of plates have been
installed.
STEP 14.
ring.
Install the end plate and retainer
STEP 15. Now turn the drun assembly over and
complete steps 8 - 9 - 10 - 11 - 12 - 13 and 14.
Both sides of the drum assemble the same.
Step 13 - 14 - 15. Plate 8040
STEP 16. Install the clutch pack assembly tool
through the clutch hub, the tool will only fit
one way because of index splines. The part
number of this tool is 801435.
Step 16. Plate 10347
STEP 17. Install the inner thrust washer with
its grooves up . . . . . using the tool as a guide.
Step 17. Plate 10348
5-80N
STEP 18. Install the gear, turning it back and
forth until all of the bronze discs are engaged.
Step 18. Plate 10349
STEP 19. Insert the bearing race, remembering
it will fit in only one position on shaft.
Step 19. Plate 10350
5-80P
STEP 20. Install the outer thrust washer with
its face down on shaft. Now turn the clutch
pack up side down and complete steps 17 - 18 19 and 20.
Step 20. Plate 10351
STEP 21. Parts location of small gear end of
clutch pack.
Step 21. Plate 8038
STEP 22. Parts location of large gear end of
clutch pack.
Step 22. Plate 10337
5-80R
STEP 23. Turn the gear and watch the inner discs
to determine if they are engaged. When the gear
has completely entered the discs it should be
1/4 inch below the top of the end plate. Install
a thrust washer over the shaft with the lubbrication grooves facing the gear.
Step 23. Plate 8043
STEP 24. Check the total clearance of each set
of discs by inserting a feeler-gauge between
any two discs. if a .050 inch feeler will not
enter between the discs the clearance is insufficient and one steel disc should be removed
from the outer end of that particular pack. if
a .120 feeler will enter, the clearance is too
great and a steel disc should be added to the
pack. Add or remove a steel disc as necessary
to maintain a minimum clearance of .050 inch or
a maximum of .120 inch at each pack.
Step 24. Plate 8045
5-80S
Plate 10243
INPUT SHAFT ASSEMBLY
Located at the small gear end of the input
shaft is a 1/4 in. thrust washer. Care
must be used when reassembling transmission
to make sure this washer is located in its
proper place.
5-80T
STEP 25. Check the sealing rings on the input
shaft. Rings must be replaced if a MAXIMUM of
.008 wear and above exists.
Step 25. Plate 10352
STEP 26. Install the sealing rings by starting
the split locks first and pressing the ring down
and on . . . . this will prevent the ring from
becomming warped or broken.
Step 26. Plate 10353
5-80U
STEP 27. Lock ring by holding one end of the
split lock and roll the ring down into groove
until one lock is above the other and press down
on top lock until ring locks....this will prevent breakage of the locking tangs.
Step 27. Plate 10354
STEP 28. Check the oil distributor sleeve seals
with a flat type feeler gauge as Illustrated.
All three seals must not have more than a
MAXIMUM of .004 side clearance.
Step 28. Plate 10334
STEP 29. Carefully inspect the oil distributor
for ring wear and imbedded foreign material.
Normal ring wear will show up as a polished
surface free of ridges, rough spots, and grooves.
Ridges, rough spots and grooves will require
replacement of the distributor and sealing
rings.
STEP 30. Replace the old "0" ring seals in the
o i l d i s t r i b u t o r . Make sure seals are well
seated in the grooves.
Step 29. Plate 10335
Step 30. Plate 10376
5-80V
STEP 31. Replace the old oil distributor "0" ring
seals with new seal s.
Step 31. Plate 8046
STEP 32. Place the transmission on the axle
adaptor end and assemble oil distributor into
transmission.
Step 32. Plate 10355
5-80W
STEP 33. Assemble preassembled intermediate
shaft clutch pack into transmission with small
gear down.
Step 33. Plate 10356
STEP 34. The beveled end of the distributor
sleeve must face the input shaft bearing.
STEP 35. Insert the input shaft from the converter end, making sure index splines on shaft are
lined up with index splines in clutch pack.
STEP 36. Carefully tap the input shaft down
using a soft rawhide hammer, until index shaft is
driven from the transmission assembly, continue
to drive shaft down until shaft is seated into
position.
Step 35 - 36. Plate 10357
Step 34. Plate 10332
STEP 37. Install the stator support assembly
and fasteners. Remove the clutch pack installation tool.
Step 37. Plate 10358
5-80X
STEP 38. Place the transmission on the converter end of assembly.
Step 38. Plate 10359
STEP 39.
Install the inputshaft retainer ring.
STEP 40. Carefully inspect the input shaft
cap for ring wear, rough spots, and imbeded
foreign material.
Cap must be replaced if one or all conditions
exist.
Step 39. Plate 10375
5-80Y
Step 40. Plate 10336
STEP 41.
Install new input shaft cap seal.
Step 41. Plate 10229
STEP 42. Assemble cap to transmission over
end of input shaft and Install retainers.
Tighten retainers alternately and evenly to
prevent breakage and misalignment.
Step 42. Plate 10360
5-80Z
Plate 10244
Output Shaft Assembly
The clutch installation tool can be
easily made in your shop and its
dimensions are shown in this drawing.
5-80AA
Step 43. Plate 10361
STEP 43. Measure the output shaft oil distributor sleeve seals.
Seals must be replaced if a MAXIMUM of .008"
and above measurement is obtained.
STEP 45. Using clutch install tool, place clutch
pack assembly Into transmission with small gear
down and tilt to one side, install spacer with
beveled end toward auxiliary gear.
Step 45. Plate 10363
Step 44. Plate 10362
STEP 4. Assemble the auxiliary drive gear into
transmission with hub of gear facing the converter end.
STEP 46. Carefully install clutch pack into
position on spacer making sure spacer does not
move out of position.
Step 46. Plate 10364
5-80AB
Step 47. Plate 10365
STEP 47. Assemble output shaft into transmission
housing making sure index splines are in alignment with splines in clutch pack.
STEP 49.
housing.
STEP 48. Using a bearing puller, anchor the
output shaft in position . . . so it cannot move.
Position the transmission on its sump
STEP 50. Install an equal number of shims that
were removed upon disassembly of transmission.
Step 49. Plate 10367
5-80AC
Step 48. Plate 10366
Step 50. Plate 10368
STEP 51. Install the output shaft fastener and
torque to specifications.
Step 51. Plate 10369
STEP 52. Using an inch pound torque wrench
install on outputshaft retainer. Turn shaft
and take the reading required to keep shaft
rotating . . . . do not take reading required to
start shaft rotating.
STEP 53.
If torque to rotate shaft is above
8 to 13 inch pound add shims.
If shaft is below torque specifications subtract shims.
SEE SPECIFICATION PAGE FOR BEARING PRE-LOAD.
Step 52 - 53. Plate 10370
5-80AD
STEP 54. Install new "0" ring seals into the
high and low oil distributor making sure they
are well seated.
Step 54. Plate 10371
STEP 55. Assemble the oil distributor on the
output shaft on the converter end of transmission.
Step 55. Plate 10235
5-80AE
STEP 36.
ring.
Install the oil distributor retainer
Step 56. Plate 10234
STEP 57. Install forward and reverse oil tubes
into oil distributor. Be careful not to damage
the seals in the distributor when installing
tubes.
Step 57. Plate 10228
STEP 58. Install high and low oil tubes into the
oil distributor being careful not to damage the
oil seals.
Step 58. Plate 10227
STEP 59. Install new seals into the oil tube
sleeves and install on oil tubes being careful
not to damage seals.
Step 59. Plate 10372
5-80AF
Step 61. Plate 10373
Step 60. Plate 10225
Install control cover to transmission
STEP 60. Install new “0” rings into position
on control cover.
STEP 61.
assembly.
STEP 62. Install converter pump to transmission
assembly making sure teeth on pump gear is lined
up with teeth on idler gear.
STEP 63. Install the torque converter on the
stator support in the transmission.
Step 62. Plate 10224
5-80AG
STEP 63. Plate 10221
STEP 64. Install the axle adaptor assembly to
the transmission assembly.
5-96 INSTALLATION
Install transmission assembly into
a.
the machine, f o l l o w t h e r e v e r s e o f t h e
procedures found in Section 5-85 page
5-60.
Step 64. Plate 10222
5-80AH
2 SPEED FORWARD AND REVERSE HYDRATORK TRANSMISSION
(MODELS H-200 THROUGH H-211)
Converter pump idler gear shaft
70-85 LB.FT.
FLUID SEAL(S). SPECIFICATIONS:
Clutch piston outer seal, side clearance
MAX .008
Clutch hub ring seal, side clearance
MAX .008
Input shaft seals, side clearance
MAX .008
Oil distributor sleeve seals, side clearance MAX .004
5-80AJ
SECTION 5-97 DISASSEMBLY OF CONTROL VALVE
Step 1 Plate 8003
Remove the capscrews retaining the control
cover plate and b a f f l e .
Step 2 Plate 8004.
Remove the neutral switch and spacer
washer from the control cover.
CAUTION
Step 3 Plate 8005
Remove the plug, washer, spring, stop and
b a l l f r o m b o t h o f t h e c o n t r o l spool
locations.
Step 4 Plate 8006.
Unscrew the inching piston housing and
remove inching piston seal housing and
its components.
IF THE CONTROL COVER IS CLAMPED IN A
VISE FOR DISASSEMBLY - BE SURE THE VISE
IS EQUIPPED WITH A SET OF SOFT JAWS EXERCISE CARE TO AVOID SCRATCHING THE
POLISHED SURFACES OF THE COVER.
5-80AL
Step 5 Plate 8007.
Remove roll pins from cover with side
cutters. When removing the roll pins from
the convertor regulator and pressure regulator bores, wrap a cloth around the
end to catch the stop and spring which
is held under pressure by the roll pins.
Step 7 Plate 8009.
Remove the stop, spring and convertor
pressure regulating valve from housing.
Step 8 Plate 8070.
Step 6 Plate 8008.
Remove the stop, spring and pressure
regulating valve from the housing.
5-80AM
Remove stop and high and low selector
valve.
CLEANING AND INSPECTION
CLEANING:
Clean all metal parts thoroughly
u s i n g a Stoddard Type cleaning solvent.
It is recommended that parts be immersed
in cleaning solvent and gently agitated
until all old lubricant and foreign
material is removed and parts are
thoroughly cleaned. All parts cleaned
should be dryed by using moisture-free
compressed a i r .
Step 9 Plate 8071.
Remove inching valve and components shown
above.
INSPECTION: The importance of careful and
thorough inspection of all parts cannot
be overstressed. Any parts showing wear
or an indication of stress should be
discarded and new parts installed. It is
more economical to replace a questionable
p a r t a t t h i s time than risk the possibility of a premature malfunction, necessitat i n g a teardown of the assembly for
replacement of f a u l t y i t e m s .
Oil Seals, Inching Cup, “0” Rings
and Cover Gasket: These items should be
replaced with new parts. Apply a thin
c o a t o f P e r m a t e x # 2 o n the outer diameter
o f t h e s e a l s to assure an oil t i g h t f i t
Immerse inching cup in
in their retainers.
UCON-1145 fluid and lubricate sealing rings
and inner diameter of oil seals with
Automatic Transmission Fluid before assembly.
Inspect
Spools, Valves and Housing:
housing bores, valves and spools to be
certain they are thoroughly cleaned and
that mating surfaces a r e f r e e f r o m n i c k s
or burrs. Minor nicks or burrs may be
removed with a pocket type hone.
Step 10 Plate 8072.
Remove the stop and forward and reverse
selector spool. Pry the spool oil seals
from the cover. Exercise caution so as
not to scratch the spool bore during
removal of t h e s e a l s .
5-80AN
SECTION 5-97A
Plate 8002.
Disassembled View of Control Cover
REASSEMBLY OF CONTROL COVER
See Plate 8002 for sequence of parts and
parts identification.
NOTE
LUBRICATE ALL VALVES, SPRINGS, “0” RINGS,
SLEEVES AND OIL SEALS WITH A LIGHT COAT
OF TYPE “A” AUTOMATIC TRANSMISSION FLUID,
5-80AP
Coat the outside diameter of the selector
oil seals with a light coat of Permatex
number 2 to assure an oil tight fit in
the housing.
Using
press
the correct diameter seal driver,
t h e s e a l s into the housing.
Step 1 Plate 8072.
Exercise catuion to avoid damaging the
lip of the oil seal during installation
of the selector spool. Place a new “0”
ring on the stop and push it into the
housing.
Step 3 Plate 8071.
Install inching valve and components shown
above. Replace roll pin.
Step 4
Step 2 Plate 8073.
Plate 8070.
Exercise caution to avoid damaging the
lip of the oil seal during installation
of the high & low selector spool. Place
a new “0” ring on the stop and push it
into the housing. Install the retaining
roll pin.
Start a roll pin in the housing. Push
down stop with a punch and tap roll pin
in to retain the stop. This procedure
will be repeated at each roll pin after
the necessary components are installed in
their bores.
5-80AQ
Step 5 Plate 8009.
Install the convertor pressure regulating
valve, spring and stop. Replace the
retaining
roll
pin.
Step 7 Plate 8005.
Replace
the
detent
ball,
stop,
spring,
seal washer and plug in the hole provided
at the forward and reverse selector spool.
Replace a set of identical parts at the
high and low selector spool.
Step 6 Plate 8008.
Install the pressure regulating valve,
spring and stop. Replace retaining roll
pin.
5-80AR
Step 8 Plate 8004.
Replace the shim and neutral starting
switch at the forward and reverse selector
spool.
Step 9 Plate 8006.
Press a new oil seal in the inching
piston seal housing. Install a new “0”
ring and with finger pressure, push the
housing into its seat in the control
cover. Next place the inching piston in
the seal housing. Install a new cup in
the inching piston housing and screw
housing into cover. Refer to disassembled
view of control cover (Plate 8002) for
correct sequence of parts.
Step 10 Plate 8003.
Replace the control cover plate and baffle.
Secure with the capscrews and lockwashers.
Step 11
Install control cover onto the transmission using the new gasket and "O"rings.
N O T E
Immerse inching piston cup in
UCON 1145 Fluid before installing it in the housing.
5-80AS/(5-80AT blank)
FIGURE 5-131
5-98.
BRAKE REPAIRS
5-99
REMOVAL AND DISASSEMBLY WHEEL BRAKE
Brake removal is outlined under
a.
paragraph 5-86. R e f e r t o f i g u r e 5 - 1 3 1
for parts identification
and proceed as follows:
b.
Hold the guide pin from the back
side and push down on the upper spring
retainer cap and at the same time turn 90
degrees, t h e n r e m o v e g u i d e p i n , g u i d e
pin spring, and lower spring retainer
cap.
c . Disconnect the two brake shoe
return springs,
d . Remove the two brake shoes from
the backing plate.
5-81
If you should turn the brake
c.
adjusters too far and the index washers
come off the high spots, you will have
to remove the roll pin and loosen the
nut enough so you can relocate the two
index washers until the high sports line
up.
d.
When you check the torque, should
you find it is not correct, remove the
roll pin and tighten or loosen adjuster
bolt so you can insert the roll pin in
the next notch in the adjuster nut.
Repeat this until you have the proper
torque.
Check the brake adjuster brakee.
away force by the following: (Refer
to plate 10329).
THERE IS A SHOE ANCHOR KEY ON EACH SIDE
OF THE ANCHOR BLOCK. THESE ARE LOOSE
PIECES AND CARE SHOULD BE TAKEN SO THEY
ARE NOT LOST.
STEP 1.
Check the break-away force by
using a pound rated scale.
STEP 2.
Scale must be perpendicular
to the pin as illustrated
before reading is attempted.
STEP 3.
Reading is taken just as the
adjuster starts break-away
movement.
Reading should be
85-100 lbs.
STEP 4.
If the break-away ability is
under or above the specification the adjuster must be
replaced.
e. Remove the two brake shoe anchor block
mounting bolts and the anchor block.
f.
5-100.
Remove the wheel cylinder.
CLEANING AND INSPECTION.
Before reassembling the brake assembly,
a.
the backing plate should be checked for
correct torque of the adjusters. To do this,
an inch/pound torque wrench is used with a
small drag link socket and inserted in the
g r o o v e o f t h e b r a k e a d j u s t e r b o l t . Then
rotate the complete adjuster until the index
washer that is locked to the adjuster reaction arm starts to move on the index
washer that is locked to the backing plate.
The nut holding the adjuster arm to
b.
the disc should be tightened to 23 to 26
foot/pounds.
C A U T I O N
CARE SHOULD BE TAKEN SO THAT THE ADJUSTER IS
NOT TURNED FAR ENOUGH TO MAKE THE INDEX
WASHERS COME OFF THE HIGH SPOTS..
5-82
Change 1
g. After the brake has been reassembled as shown
in the complete brake assembly, to double check,
rotate each adjuster so the brake shoes will move
out. The brake shoes should stay out and not be
pulled back by the springs. Then turn the
adjusters back so the brake drum will slide on over
the brake shoes.
Note
Occasionally grease retainers become worn,
allowing lubricant from wheel bearings to leak
through in the brake drum. When grease comes
into contact with the end closures, they become
soft and enlarged, preventing them from protecting
the cylinder from foreign matter. If this occurs,
replace wheel cylinder.
Note
After a wheel cylinder is removed, it will be
necessary to bleed brakes, as air will have
entered the system with the wheel cylinder
removed.
5-101. REASSEMBLY AND INSTALLATION.
It may also be necessary to tap the shoes
either up or down to allow the drum to
slide over the shoes. There is no other
adjustment necessary. The first time the
brakes are applied, the shoes will be
centered and adjusted.
h. Install brake assembly on the axle end.
i. Install brake drum on axle end.
j. Install axle end in axle adaptor. Axle end
mounting bolts and nuts should be torqued to 35
to 40 foot/pounds.
k. Install lines.
1. After lines have been installed, the brakes are
ready to bleed. Refer to Section IV for brake
bleeding instructions.
5-102. MASTER CYLINDER ASSEMBLY.
5-103. REMOVAL.
b. Install the wheel cylinder casting onto the
brake backing plate.
a. Disconnect the pedal linkage at the push rod
clevis.
c. Install the brake shoe anchor block and bolts.
b. Disconnect hydraulic brake line at the outlet
fitting.
d. Install the brake shoe anchor key and the
brake shoe.
Note
c. Remove the three bolts which secure the
cylinder to the mounting bracket, and remove the
cylinder assembly.
Before the brake shoe anchor keys are
installed, they should be coated with
lubriplate.
e. Connect the two brake shoe return springs.
f. Install brake shoe guide pin, spring, and caps.
Change 1
5-83
5-104. CLEANING AND INSPECTION.
a. Clean master cylinder assembly with stoddard type
solvent or hydraulic brake fluid.
Do not use mineral-base cleaning solvent
such as gasoline, kerosene, distillant. carbon
5-04
Change 1
tetrachloride, acetone, paint thinner, etc.
These solvents deteriorate rubber parts,
causing them to become soft, tacky and
swollen in an extremely short time.
b. Replace master cylinder assembly if any damage,
malfunction, or leakage is identified.
5-106.
a.
STEERING GEAR REMOVAL (Refer
to figure 5-133 for Parts
Identification)
Disconnect battery ground cable.
b . Remove rubber horn emblem (Item 41)
by pulling up and away from steering wheel
(Item 39).
c. Position a screwdriver in small
square holes in the horn button and
rotate horn button (Item 42) 3/4"
counter-clockwise.
d . Remove button (Item 42), brass
contact plates (items 43 & 45) and
spring (Item 44).
e.
Remove retaining plate fasteners
(Item 46), retaining plate (Item 47)
and brush assembly (Item 40).
f . Remove steering wheel fasteners
(Items 21 & 22) and using a puller,
remove steering wheel (Item 39).
5-105.
INSTALLATION.
g . Remove floor plates and lower
dash panel.
h . Remove pitman arm fasteners
(Item 8 and 9) and remove pitman arm
from steering gear.
1. Remove mounting clamp fasteners
(Items 34, 3 5 , 3 6 a n d 3 7 ) a n d s u p p o r t
bracket fasteners (Items 48, 49 & 50).
a.
Fill the master cylinder reservoir
w i t h f l u i d , then force the piston through
one full stroke.
Repeat piston stroking
until fluid is forced past the check valve
a n d o u t o f t h e o u t l e t p o r t . This leaves
the master cylinder filled with fluid
prior to installing it on the vehicle.
b . Install the master cylinder to the
vehicle, hook up the brake line and pedal
linkage in the reverse order of removal
procedure.
c . Perform brake bleeding and pedal
free-play adjustment as outlined in
Section IV.
j . Remove steering gear mounting
fasteners (Items 32 and 33) and remove
steering gear from machine.
5-107.
DISASSEMBLY.
a. Rotate steering worm until nut
is in center of travel.
b.
Remove sector shaft nut
c.
Use puller to remove pitman arm.
d . Remove side cover screws and
remove side cover and sector shaft
from housing.
Change 1
5-85
e. To remove side cover from sector
shaft, turn adjustor screw in end of
sector shaft down through cover.
f . Remove screws and take out end
cover with worm bearing, adjustor and
nut.
g . Lift out worm bearing from end
cover, loosen worm bearing adjustor
lock nut and turn adjustor screw thru
cover.
h. Grasp lower end of steering
worm and draw steering shaft and nut
o u t o f s t e e r i n g h o u s i n g . Disassembly
o f worm nut is not recommended.
C A U T I O N
Be sure to keep shaft in horizontal position so that nut does
not move against stops at any
t i m e , causing damage to ball
return mechanism.
5-108.
CLEANING AND INSPECTION.
a. Clean all parts thoroughly in
a stoddard type cleaning solvent, and
dry thoroughly.
Inspect all bearings for
b.
pitting or wear.
Inspect worm, a n d r e - c i r c u l a c.
ting ball nut for nicks or excessive
If either of these parts are
wear.
unfit for use, it will be necessary
to replace with a new sub-assembly
as they are not serviced separately.
d. Inspect sector shaft for nicks
or excessive wear.
Inspect side cover bushing for
e.
excessive wear.
If the bushing cannot be reused, i t w i l l b e n e c e s s a r y
to replace the side cover new, as the
bushing is not serviced separately.
5-86
5-109.
REASSEMBLY.
Install worm shaft and nut
assembly in gear housing, keeping
ball nut away form stops on worm.
Install worm bearing adjustb.
ing screw with lower worm bearing,
and adjustor lock nut in end cover.
Install end cover and attachc.
ing parts on gear housing, making
sure bearings seat properly.
d . Tighten worm bearing adjusting
screw until a slight drag is felt on
bearings. Do not tighten lock nut.
Install a new gasket on side
e.
cover.
Install sector shaft and adf.
justing screw inside cover.
g. Rotate steering worm until ball
nut is in center of travel so that
center tooth on sector shaft will
enter center space on nut.
Install side cover and sector
h.
shaft in gear housing.
i . Tighten sector shaft adjusting
screw until a slight drag is felt on
bearing but do not tighten locknut.
j . Position steering gear in
machine, l i n e u p m o u n t i n g h o l e s a n d
install fasteners (Items 32 & 33).
Install support bracket (Item 10) and
fasteners (Items 48 & 49). Install
mounting clamp fasteners (Items 34
thru 37). Install steering wheel
(Item 39) and fasteners (Items 21 & 22).
k.
Install pitman arm and fasteners
(Items 8 & 9) and torque all fasteners
as outlined in Section 4-57, page 4-45.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.
15.
16.
17.
18.
19.
20.
21.
22.
23.
24.
25.
26.
27.
28.
29.
30.
31.
32.
33.
34.
35.
36.
37.
38.
39.
40.
41.
42.
43.
44.
45.
46.
47.
48.
49.
50.
NUT
BOLT
LOCKWASHER
BUSHING
BUSHING
GASKET
NUT
LOCKWASHER
SUPPORT
BUSHING
GEAR
SHIM
ADJUSTER
LOCKNUT
ADJUSTER
CUP
CONE
RETAINER
SHAFT ASSEMBLY
NUT
WASHER
CUP
BEARING
SPRING
SEAT
BEARING
GROMMET
JACKET
BUSHING
LUB FITTING
BOLT
LOCKNUT
NUT
LOCKWASHER
WASHER
BOLT
CLAMP
HANDWHEEL
BRUSH ASSEMBLY
EMBLEM
HORN BUTTON
CONTACT PLATE
SPRING
CONTACT PLATE
SCREW
RETAINING PLATE
CAPSCREW
LOCKWASHER
WASHER
FIG 5-133
5-86A/(5-86B blank)
1.
Install horn contact brush assembly
(Item 40) and retaining plate (Item 47)
and fasteners (Item 46).
Install contact
plates (Items 43 & 45) and spring (Item
44) under horn button (Item 42). press
down on horn button with thumbs and
rotate 3/4" clockwise to lock into place.
Install rubber emblem.
5-110.
b.
Screw the rod end sub-assembly
onto the end of the cylinder rod.
Align the split collar with the flat
on the rod and install the locking
bolt, nut and lockwasher.
STEERING CYLINDER (See figure
5-134 for Parts Identification).
a.
The cylinder assembly is a sealed
unit.
Overhaul procedures are restricted
to replacing the sealing parts on the rod
end and unscrew from cylinder piston rod.
b.
Remove nut, bolt and lockwasher
from the rod end and unscrew from cylinder
piston rod.
c.
Remove retainer snap ring with snap
ring pliers.
Rotate the rod and withdraw
it far enough from the cylinder to expose
scraper, wiper ring, retainer and washer.
The shaft seal may be removed with a hooked
scriber.
5-111.
INSPECTION.
Check cylinder shaft
to make sure no nicks or burrs exist which
could damage new seals.
Remove nicks or
burrs with a find hone.
Shaft must be
straight to avoid excessive and rapid seal
wear.
Replace any cylinder which has a
badly nicked, scored, or bent shaft.
5-112.
REASSEMBLY.
a.
After making sure that the cylinder
cap bore is clean, coat the rod seal
assembly parts with petroleum jelly.
Install two back-up rings over the rod and
in the cylinder cap bore.
Be sure that
the split ends are staggered.
Install
the seal ring and two outer back-up rings,
again with split ends staggered.
Install
the washer, retainer, wiper and scraper.
Install the snap ring.
5-87
Figure 5-134. Steering Cylinder Seals
5-113. STEERING VALVE. (See figure 5-135.)
5-114. DISASSEMBLY
a. Hold control ball stud housing and valve
assembly in a vise, by lightly clamping valve body.
Use care not to distort spool bore in valve body.
b. Remove control valve dust cover and remove
the wire snap ring which locks the control ball stud
sleeve plug and remove plug. Remove control ball
stud, two ball stud seats, spring washer and spacer.
c. Remove the bolts securing the ball stud
5-88
housing to the valve and remove self-locking nut
from spool capscrew. Remove capscrew, washer
and control ball stud sleeve. Then lift the two
centering spring retaining washers, centering spring
and spacer from the valve body. Remove O-rings
from valve body and from the spool.
d. Remove the check valve, O-ring, and ball from
the valve body to complete the disassembly.
5-115. INSPECTION.
a. Discard all O-rings and seals and replace with
new upon reassembly.
Figure 5-135. Steering Valve Assembly
b. Wash all parts in a Stoddard type cleaning
solvent.
c. Inspect all fluid passages in valve body to be
certain they are clean and free of obstructions.
d. Check each disassembled part for wear, cracks
or pitting that would render them unfit for
continued use. Replace all defective parts.
e. Inspect valve spool and valve spool bore for
deep scoring and excessive wear. As these parts are
not ordinarily serviced separately, they should be
replaced as a unit if badly worn. Do not rework or
attempt to touch up the valve spool. This practice
will only result in improper steering unit operation
and performance.
5-116. REASSEMBLY.
a. Immerse all parts in clean hydraulic fluid to
facilitate assembly. Coat all O-rings and seals with
petroleum jelly prior to assembly.
b. Install new O-ring (coated with grease or
petroleum jelly) in cylinder end of valve body and
5-89
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
Pump assembly
Shaft seal
Cover bolt, washer
Cover bolt, washer
Cover
Dowel
v-seal
Gasket
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.
15.
16.
Heat shield
Wear plate
Seal
Gear housing
Key
Retainer
Snap ring
Drive gear
17.
18.
19.
20.
21.
22.
23.
24.
Idler gear assembly
Valve spring
Valve
Valve seat
Retainer
Flow control valve assy.
O-ring
O-ring
25.
26.
27.
28.
29.
30.
31.
32.
O-ring
O-ring
Relief valve assembly
O-ring
Cover plug
O-ring
Cover assembly
Wear plate
Figure 5-136. Power Steering Pump
on control ball stud end of valve spool. Install
spool in bore from the control ball stud end to
avoid O-ring interference during assembly.
c. Install washer, spacer, centering spring, washer,
control ball stud sleeve, capscrew washer and
capscrew. Install self-locking nut and tighten until
play between parts is removed. Be sure that nut is
5-90
in good condition and that the centering spring
remains aligned between the two retaining washers.
Back nut off one flat (1/6 turn, or 60 degrees).
d. Start control ball stud sleeve plug in control
ball stud sleeve.
e. Slide the control ball stud housing over the
ball stud sleeve.
f .
Install new O-ring on check valve
and place ball and check valve in valve
body recesses and hold valve against its
port end mating surface, making sure
the locating pin on the check valve engages the recessed hole to insure port
alignment.
Locate control ball stud housing
g.
in desired position relative to control
ball stud.
Install four capscrews while
holding valve and control assembly in
place to prevent misalignment of O-rings.
Tighten capscrews to porper torque.
(Refer to Specifications on page vii).
h.
Install control ball stud spacer.
The spring washer must be installed with
its convex (raised inside diameter) face
toward ball stud to provide spring tension on ball stud.
Next install ball
stud seats and control ball stud.
Position the stud and sleeve so that the
stud is centered in the sleeve opening.
i .
Tighten control ball stud sleeve
plug snugly against seat.
Back plug
off until slot in plug lines with one
of snap ring anchor holes in sleeve
which are spaced at 60° i n t e r v a l s i n
control ball stud sleeve.
Install
hooked end in anchor hole and engage
snap ring in groove in sleeve plug.
This can most easily be done by engaging tang in hole in sleeve and then
applying pressure with small screwdriver
opposite tang on outside edge of snap
ring.
5-117.
DESCRIPTION AND PRINCIPLES OF
STEER AND HYDRAULIC PUMPS.
These gear type pumps consists of two
intermeshing hardened and precision
ground gear assemblies which are lapped
and enclosed in a three section housing
assembly consisting of a die cast aluminum front cover, an intermediate
(center) section made of high yield extruded aluminum and a back cover assembly
Passages within this housing connect the
intermeshing gears with the pump inlet
and outlet ports.
Each gear assembly is press fitted on
a separate precision ground and lapped
Retaining rings are installed
shaft.
in grooves in these shafts to insure
that gears will not move axially
along the shaft.
The drive shaft is keyed to the gear
to provide positive drive and extends
thru the front cover to permit coupling
the pump to an external driving means.
A double lip shaft seal is proveded in
the front cover to prevent external
leakage of fluid and the seal lip in
contact with the fluid is spring loaded.
Vent passages within the housing and
driven shaft transmit pump inlet pressures to the shaft seal area to insure
lowest possible pressures at the seal
to extend seal service life.
A phenolic sheld, a paper composition
gasket and molded rubber seal form
compartments behind a steel backed
These compartments
bronze wear plate.
are vented to either pump inlet or
discharge pressures.
Discharge pressure
within these compartments axially loads
and deflects the wear plate toward the
gear faces to take up gear end clearances.
This increases pump efficiency
by reducing internal leakage.
Pump rotation is dependent on proper
orientation of the heat shield, the
gasket and the seal in the front cover
with respect to the pump center section
Opposite pump rotation
and back cover.
may be achieved by rotating the heat
shield, the gasket, the seal, the wear
plate, the center section and the back
cover 180 degrees.
Pumping action is achieved by connecting
the pump inlet port to an oil supply,
the outlet port to a discharge line and
rotating the pump drive shaft in a
direction which causes the gear teeth
to rotate away form the pump inlet port.
5-91
STEP 3.
Rotation causes the volume at the gear
mesh to increase on the inlet side and
This
decrease on the pressure 'side.
STEP 4.
creates a suction at the pump inlet port
to allow filling of the gear tooth spaces
by the pressure acting on the fluid in
STEP 5.
the inlet line.
NOTE
Always thoroughly clean unit to be
disassembled with a non-corrosive
stoddard type cleaning solvent
which will not affect rubber
components.
STEP 7.
The pump center section (Item 12)
will remain attached to either
the front cover (Item 5) or the
back cover (Item 31)
STEP 8.
Place the pump drive gear and
shaft (Item 16) into the unseparated sections and, while
holding the center section (Item
12), tap lightly to separate
OR REASSEMBLING HYDRAULIC COMPONENTS
OF ANY TYPE.
POWER STEERING PUMP
5-118.
REMOVAL (Refer to page 7-70).
NOTE
Use caution to avoid "Cocking"
of the dowel pins (Item 6).
Remove all the hydraulic lines to
a.
the power steering pump.
Cap the lines so that contamination
b.
does not occure.
Remove the two mounting bolts that
c.
mount the pump to the engine.
d.
Remove pump from the machine
e.
Remove all fittings from the pump.
5-119.
DISSASSEMBLY (See figure 5-136
for parts identification).
STEP 1.
STEP 2.
5-92
Scribe a line across the three
sections of the pump assembly
This line
being dismantled.
will act as a guide in reassembly.
Remove the cotter pin from the
nut thats holding the drive
gear in place.
Remove the key (Item 13) from
the exposed end of the pump
drive shaft.
Remove the pump front cover
(Item 5) by tapping the flange
with a soft metal or fibre
hammer.
CLEAN WORKING AREAS ARE AN ABSOLUTE
5-117.
Remove the hex countersunk head
screws and hex head capscrew
(Items 3 and 4)
STEP 6.
C A U T I O N
MUST WHEN DISASSEMBLING, REPAIRING
Remove the nut washer and gear.
STEP 9.
Remove wear plate (Item 10) and
the thrust plate (Item 32)
STEP 10 . M a r k t h e f r o n t c o v e r i s l a n d n e x t
to the pressure vent hole in the
heat shield (Item 9), the gasket
(Item 8) and the rubber seal
(Item 7).
NOTE
This mark will aid you in reassembly
of the pump as the location of the
vent hold determines pump rotations.
STEP 11. Use a piece of small diameter wire
(paper clip) to remove the heat
shield (item 9), the gasket (Item
8) and the rubber seal (Item 7).
These three items should be thrown
away as they should always be replaced when pump is dissassembled.
STEP 12.
Remove and discard the two
O-Rings (Item 11) between
end covers and pump center
sections.
STEP 6.
Make certain that shaft snap
rings are secure; break off
and smooth up any sharp edges
on the sides of the gears.
STEP 13.
DO NOT REMOVE drive shaft
seal (Item 2) in the front
cover (Item 5) unless it is
damaged or is leaking. If
this seal must be replaced
use care not to damage the
seal recess in the front
cover.
STEP 7.
Depress the seal pressurizing
valve.
(items 18,19,20 and
21) to be sure that there is
some resistance but that movement is free.
STEP 8.
Check bearing bore diameters
in front and rear covers
(Items 5 and 31) for wear.
Specification for maximum
acceptable bore diameter is
.7518".
STEP 9.
If bearings are scored, rough,
or show signs of heat discoloration the end cover(s)
must be replaced.
STEP 10.
Inspect wear plate (Item 10)
and thrust plate (Item 32)
for wear.
If wear ridge
exceeds .0005" these plates
must be replaced.
STEP 11.
Inspect gear bore walls in
center section (Item 12)
for excessive wear or score
marks.
A wear ridge will have
developed at the end of the
bore where the thrust plate
is located.
This wear ridge
should not exceed 1/32".
Heating the cover to 250
degrees will reduce the
press fit and make removal
of this seal easirer.
STEP 14.
If the flow control valve
(Item 22) or the relief
valve (Item 27) are found
to be defective they must
be replaced as a unit.
Refer to Troubleshooting.
5-120 INSPECTION.
STEP 1.
STEP 2.
Inspect drive and driven
shaft assemblies (Item 16
and 17) for roughness in
the sealing and bearing
areas.
Measure drive and driven
shafts (Items 16 and 17)
Minimum acceptfor wear.
able shaft diameter is
.7492".
STEP 3.
Inspect shaft key for
excessive wear.
STEP 4.
Inspect gear end faces,
outside diameters and
teeth for roughness or
wear.
STEP 5.
Measure gear thickness and
outside diameter for wear.
Minimum acceptable gear
width is -4531" and minimum
gear diameter is 1.7140".
5-121.
REASSEMBLY
STEP 1.
All parts must be thoroughly
cleaned prior to reassembly
by dipping in solvent and
brushing to remove all traces
of contamination.
STEP 2.
Install shaft seal (Item 2),
if it was removed, in front
cover with the spring loaded
lip facing inward.
Force seal
into place with a flat steel
rod slightly smaller in diameter than the O. D. of the
seal.
5-92A
NOTE
STEP 5.
Install the wear plate (Item 10)
with the bronze surface against
the gears and the small hole in
line with the vent hole in the
heat shield (Item 9).
STEP 6.
Install drive gear assembly
(Item 16) and driven gear
assembly (Item 17) into front
Apply oil to pump drive
cover.
shaft at the drive end to prevent
damage to the shaft seal when the
Check
shaft is pushed through.
to make sure that the seal lip
and spring is not pushed out by
the shaft.
STEP 7.
Check wear plate to make certain
that it is still seated in its
oval cavity and install the center
section (Item 12) over the gears
until it contacts the wear plate.
Make certain that the scribed
lines on the housing exteriors
are in line.
STEP 8.
Install the dowel pin (Item 6) and
add a generous amount of oil to
Rotate the
the gear cavities.
gears to insure distribution of
the oil.
STEP 9.
Place thrust plate (Item 32) on
top of the gears in the center
Make certain that the
section.
bronze side is toward the gears
and the open side is toward the
inlet ports.
STEP 10.
Oil the O-ring (Item 11) and
place it in the groove in the
back cover face.
STEP 11.
Install the back cover with the
scribed mark aligned with the
scribe marks in the center section and the front cover.
STEP 12.
Install the housing retainer capscrews and cross-tighten to 16-19
lbs ft.
The front cover must be locked
by a smooth clean surface during this operation to prevent
damaging or scoring its face.
C A U T I O N
DO NOT BEND THE STEEL SEAL
RETAINER OR SCORE THE HOUSING
SEAL BORE.
STEP
3. Install the rubber seal (Item 7),
the gasket (Item 8) and the heat
shield (Item 9) into the end
cover cavity as follows:
a. The small vent hole through
all these parts must be aligned
and positioned next to the scribe
mark on the island made during
disassembly.
b. The lips of the rubber seal
must face toward the cavity and
be tucked into the groove with
a smooth dull tool to prevent
damage to the rubber surface.
c. The gasket (Item 8) must be
pressed firmly toward the
bottom of the cavity with the
thumbs so as to make sure that
all of its perimiters are completely within the groove to
avoid interference with subsequent reassembly.
d. The heat shield (Item 9) shall
be firmly pressed toward the
bottom of the cavity with the
thumb until sufficient space is
available for the wear plate.
STEP 4.
5-92B
Install O-ring (Item 11) into
groove in front end cover (Item
Oil the O-ring and stretch
5).
it slightly, if necessary, to
make it remain in the groove.
STEP 13.
Add a generous amount of clean
oil in both the inlet and outlet ports.
STEP 14.
Install pump drive gear, washer
Tighten nut snug and
and nut.
align hole in drive gear shaft
(Item 16) with a slot in the
nut.
Install cotter pin.
(Refer to page 7-72).
STEP 15.
Rotate the shaft to distribute
the oil.
Shaft should rotate
with the help of a short wrench
(Max. torque 10 pound feet).
STEP 16.
Install new O-ring on the fittings and install the fittings
onto the pump (Refer to page
7-70 for proper location of
fittings).
STEP 17.
Install Steer pump into its
position on the engine and
install the mounting fasteners.
STEP 18.
Remove caps from the hydraulic
lines and install the hydraulic
lines to their proper position
on the fittings on the steer
pump (Refer to page 7-70).
STEP 2.
Remove the four capscrews and
lockwashers (Items 31.012 and
90.775)
from the flange
(Item 31.011) and remove the
tube from the machine.
STEP 3.
Remove the fasteners that
mount the pump to the front
end cover and remove the
pump from the machine (Refer
to page 7-73).
5-124.
DISASSEMBLY (Refer to
Fig. 13344).
Scribe a line across the
three sections of the pump
assembly being dismantled.
This line will act as a
guide in accomplishing proper
reassembly.
STEP 1.
STEP 2.
Remove the cotter pin from
the slot in nut and remove
t h e n u t , the 2 washers and
the drive gear from the pump
shaft (Refer to page 7-73)
STEP 3.
Remove the hex countersunk
head screws and hex head capscrews (Item 2 and 3).
STEP 4.
Remove the key (Item 23) from
the exposed end of the pump
drive shaft.
STEP 5.
Remove the pump front cover
(Item 5) by tapping the flange
lightly with a soft metal or
fibre hammer.
STEP 6.
The pump center section
(Item 12) will remain attached
to either the front cover
(Item 5) or the back cover
(Item 21).
C A U T I O N
WHEN STEER PUMP IS REINSTALLED,
ALLOW TO RUN FOR 2 TO 3 MINUTES
TRY TO
BEFORE PRESSURIZING.
APPLY PRESSURE GRADUALLY FOR THE
NEXT 5 MINUTES BUT DO NOT PRESSURIZE FOR MORE THAN 5 SECONDS
AT A TIME.
5-122.
HYDRAULIC PUMP
5-123.
REMOVAL
STEP 1.
(Refer to page 7-82) Remove and
STEP 7.
cap the hydraulic line (Item
31.018) from the outlet fitting
(Item 31.014), loosen the clamp
(Item 31.007) that holds the
pump inlet hose (Item 31.006) to
the pump inlet tube (Item 31.008)
and remove the hose from the tube.
Place the pump drive gear
and shaft (Item 13) into the
unseparated sections and,
while holding the center
section (Item 12), tap
lightly to separate.
5-92C
Fig. 13344
NOTE
NOTE
Use caution to avoid "cocking" of
the dowel pins (Item 7).
This mark will aid you in accomplishing proper reassembly of the
pump as the location of the vent
hole determines pump rotation.
STEP 8. Remove wear plate (Item 10) and
the thrust plate (Item 22).
STEP 10.
STEP 9. Mark the front cover island next
to the pressure vent hole in the
heat shield (Item 9), the gasket
(Item 8) and the rubber seal
(Item 6).
5-92D
Use a piece of small diamter
wire (Paper clip) to remove
the heat shield (Item 9), the
gasket (Item 8) and the rubber
These three
seal (Item 6).
items should be thrown away as
they should always be replaced
when pump is reassembled.
STEP 11.
Remove and discard the two
O-rings (Item 11) between
end covers and pump center
section.
STEP 12.
Do Not Remove drive shaft
seal (Item 1) in the front
cover (Item 5) unless it is
damaged or is leaking. If
this seal must be replaced
use care not to damage the
seal recess in the front
cover.
Heating the cover
to 250 degrees will reduce
the press fit and make removal of this seal easier.
STEP 13.
5-125.
If the flow control valve
(Item 19) or the relief
valve (Item 20) on some
pumps in this series are
found to be defective they
must be replaced as a unit.
STEP 7.
Depress the seal pressurizing
valve, (Items 15,16,17, and 18)
if pump is so equipped, to be
sure that there is some resistance but that movement is free.
STEP 8.
Check bearing bore diameter in
front and rear covers (Item 5
and 21) for wear.
Maximum
acceptable bore diameter is
.9394".
STEP 9.
If bearings are scored, rough,
or show signs of heat discoloration the end cover(s) must be
replaced.
STEP 10.
Inspect wear plate (Item 10)
and thrust plate (Item 22) for
wear.
If wear ridge exceeds
.0005" these plates must be
replaced.
STEP 11.
Inspect gear bore walls in
center section (Item 12) for
excessive wear or score marks.
A wear ridge will have developed
at the end of the bore where the
thrust plate is located.
This
wear ridge should not exceed
1/32".
INSPECTION:
STEP 1.
Inspect drive and driven shaft
assemblies (Items 13 and 14)
for roughness in the sealing
and bearing areas.
STEP 2
Measure drive and driven shafts
(Items 13 and 14) for wear.
Minimum acceptable shaft diameter is .9365".
STEP 3
Inspect shaft keyways, keys or
splines for excessive wear.
STEP 4
Inspect gear end faces, outside
diameters and teeth for roughness or wear.
5-126.
REASSEMBLY:
STEP 1.
All parts must be thoroughly
cleaned prior to reassembly
by dipping in solvent and
brushing to remove all traces
of contamination.
STEP 2.
Install shaft seal (Item 1),
if it was removed, in front
cover with the spring loaded
Force seal
lip facing inward.
into place with a flat steel
rod slightly smaller in diameter than the O.D. of the seal.
STEP 5
Measure gear thickness and
outside diameter for wear.
Minimum acceptable gear width
is .8065" and diameter is 2.1047".
STEP 6.
Make certain that shaft snap
rings are secure: break off and
smooth up any sharp edges on the
sides of the gears.
NOTE
The front cover must be backed
by a smooth clean surface during this operation to prevent
damaging or scoring its face.
5-92E
C A U T I O N
STEP 6.
Install drive gear assembly
(Item 13) and driven gear
assembly (Item 14) into front
c o v e r . Apply oil to pump drive
shaft at the drive end to prevent damage to the shaft seal
when the shaft is pushed through.
Check to make sure that the seal
lip and spring is not pushed out
by the shaft.
STEP 7.
Check wear plate to make certain
that it is still seated in its
oval cavity and install the
center section (Item 12) over
the gears until it contacts the
w e a r p l a t e . Make certain that
scribed lines on the housing
exterior are in line.
STEP 8.
Install the dowel pins (Items 7)
and add a generous amount of oil
t o t h e g e a r c a v i t i e s . Rotate the
gears to insure distribution of
the oil.
STEP 9.
Place thrust plate (Item 22) on
top of the gears in the center
Make certain that the
section.
bronze side is toward the gears
and the open side is toward the
inlet port.
STEP 10.
Oil the o-ring (Item 11) and place
it in the groove in the back cover
face.
STEP 11.
Install the back cover with the
scribe mark aligned with scribe
marks on the center section and
the front cover.
STEP 12.
Install the housing retainer screws
and cross-tighten to the torque.
values given on the specification
page at end of this section.
STEP 13.
Add a generous amount of clean oil
in both the inlet and outlet ports.
DO NOT BEND THE SEAL RETAINER OR SCORE THE
HOUSING SEAL BORE.
STEP 3.
Install the rubber seal (Item 61,
the gasket (Item 8) and the heat
shield into the end cover cavity
as follows:
a.
The small vent hold through
all these parts must be
alligned and positioned
next to the scribe mark on
the island made during disassembly.
b.
The lips of the rubber seal
must face toward the cavity
and be tucked into the groove
with a smooth dull tool to
prevent damage to the rubber
surface.
c.
d.
The gasket (Item 8) must be
pressed firmly toward the
bottom of the cavity with
the thumbs so as to make
sure that all of its perimeters are completely within
the groove to avoid interference with subsequent
assembly.
The heat shield shall be
firmly pressed toward the
bottom of the cavity with
the thumbs until sufficient
space is available for the
wear plate.
STEP 4.
Install O-ring (Item 11) into
groove in front end cover (Item 5).
Oil the O-ring and stretch it
s l i g h t l y , if necessary, to make
it remain in the groove.
STEP 5.
Install the wear plate (Item 10)
with the bronze surface against
the gears and the small hole in
line with the vent hold in the
heat shield (Item 9).
5-92F
STEP 14.
Install the pump drive gear, the
two washers and the nut onto the
Tighten
pump drive gear shaft.
the nut snug and align
slot in
the nut with the hole in the pump.
Install cotter pin.
STEP 15.
Rotate the shaft to distribute
the oil.
Shaft should rotate
with the help of a short wrench
(Max. torque 100 pound-inches).
STEP 16.
Install the pump into its position
in the front end cover of the
engine and install the fasteners
that mount the pump (Refer to
page 7-73).
STEP 17.
Install the flanges around the
pump inlet tube and install a
new O-ring (Item 31.010) into
the flange.
(Refer to page
7-82).
STEP 18.
Install pump inlet tube (Item
31.008) onto the pump and
install the flange fasteners
(Item 31.012 and 90.775). (Refer
to page 7-82)
STEP 19.
Install the pump inlet hose
(Item 31.006) onto the tube
(Item 31.008) and tighten
clamp (Item 31.007) (Refer
to page 7-82).
STEP 20.
Remove cap from hydraulic line
(Item 31.018) and install line
onto the pump outlet fitting
(Item 31.014) (Refer to 7-82).
C A U T I O N
WHEN PUMP IS REINSTALLED, ALLOW
TO RUN FOR 2 TO 3 MINUTES BEFORE
PRESSURIZING.
TRY TO APPLY PRESSURE GRADUALLY FOR THE NEXT 5
MINUTES BUT DO NOT PRESSURIZE FOR
MORE THAN 5 SECONDS AT A TIME.
5-92G
PROBABLE CAUSE
TROUBLE
REMEDY
1.
Noisy Pump
a. Low oil supply
b. Oil too heavy,
(i.e. viscous)
c. Air leak in inlet line
d. Partly blocked inlet
line
a. Fill reservoir
b. Change to proper
viscosity
c. Check plumbing
d. Check for foreign object
and/or clean
2.
Foaming Oil
a. Pump cavitating
b. Water in the oil
a. See 1a, 1b, 1c, 1d
b. Check reservoir and/or
heat exchange
3.
Pump or oil overheating
a. Oil supply too thin
a. Drain & fill with proper
viscosity oil
b. Drain, clean filter, & fill
with clean oil
c. See 1a, 1b, 1c, 1d
d. Check alignment
b. Oil supply contaminated
c. Pump cavitating
d. Pump drive shaft excessively misaligned with
pump driven shaft
e. Pump drive shaft axially
loaded by driving shaft
(Prime Rover)
f. System relief valve bypassing
4. Low Flow
5.
Failure to build
pressure
e. Check for clearance at ends
of shafts, for shaft misalignment or worn driving
keys, keyways or splines.
If pulley drive check for
belt alignment
f. Check relief valve setting
(see 4c)
a. Pump cavitating
b. Foaming oil
c. Relief valve leaks or
set too low
d. Speed too low
e. Oil too hot
a. See 1a, 1b, 1c, 1d
b. See 2a, 2b
c. Check relief valve for
foreign particles
d. Check prime mover speed
e. Check temperature (see 3a,
3 b , 3 c 3d & 3e)
a. Defective Relief valve
b. Low oil supply
a. Check and reset or replace
b. Fill reservoir
NOTE
Always check the TROUBLE SHOOTING LIST before a pump is
removed or disassembled.
5-92H
TROUBLE SHOOTING
TROUBLE
PROBABLE CAUSE
1 External leakage through
valve cap vent hole.
2 Failure to tilt forward.
1 Ruptured "0" ring or porous
casting.
2 Spool stuck in spool cap
direction.
3 Chatter during forward tilt.
3 Oversize orifice.
POSSIBLE REMEDY
1 Replace "0" ring or complete
valve assembly.
2 (A) Replace spool assembly.
(B) Inspect orifice for
obstruction; clean out
orifice or replace body.
3 Replace entire assembly.
Fig. 13342
5-93
5-127
DISASSEMBLY AND INSPECT ION
WARNING
THE TILT LOCK VALVE SERVES AS A SAFETY
DEVICE ON THE MACHINE. ANY TAMPERING
WITH THE VALVE BY UNQUALIFIED PERSONNEL
COULD LEAD TO A SERIOUS ACCIDENT.
NOTE
The spool assembly is available as an
assembly only, not as individual parts.
STEP 1.
Avoid disassembly of tilt lock valve
plugs unless visible leakage or
malfunction makes overhaul necessary.
Remove spool cap and discard seal.
STEP 2.
Remove spool assembly, spool return
spring and stroke stop from valve body.
STEP 3.
Inspect threads of cap and body for any
scratches or nicks which could leak;
use proper light source to check inside
body cavity. Check spool major diameter
for distortion or damage.
STEP 4.
Check spool return spring and stroke
stop against specifications, and inspect
for distortion or unusual wear. Replace
as necessary.
STEP 5.
If trouble seems to be in the spool,
remove inner snap ring (Fig. 13545) and
disassemble and inspect plug spring and
ball, as well as the inside cavity of
the spool.
NOTE
If any part of the spool is damaged,
replace entire spool assembly as a unit.
5-94
Fig. 13545
CAUTION
USE GREAT CARE DURING DISASSEMBLY
NOT TO SCRATCH OR DAMAGE SURFACES
INSIDE VALVE,
5-128
REASSEMBLY:
STEP 1.
STEP 2.
CAUTION
USE GREAT CARE DURING ASSEMBLY NO T T O
Install spool check ball, Spring, plug
and internal snap ring. It may be
necessary to press or drive plug into
position SO the snap ring seats in
recess.
SCRATCH OR DAMAGE SURFACES INS IDE VALVE.
STEP 3.
Install stroke stop, spool return spring
and spool assembly (preassembled in
Step 1) into valve body (as shown in
Fig. 13343). Install new O-ring and
install valve cap, tightening properly.
Install new O-rings and reinstall plugs
in valve body, If tilt lock valve is
not to be installed on truck
immediately, insert shipping plugs in
all uncovered openings in valve body to
prevent dirt or particles from entering
valve.
Fig. 13343
SPECIFICATIONS FOR TILT LOCK VALVE:
BODY
SPOOL ASSEMBLY
TYPE
(DISCARD & REPLACE
CLARK PART NUMBER
AS COMPLETE UNIT)
233471
NOTES:
CASTING
yes
SPOOL RETURN SPRING SPECIFICATIONS
FREE
MAX.
MIN.
COMPRESSED
HEIGHT I.D.
O.D.
HEIGHT
1.540±.029" Note 1
.968" @
100-120 lbs
Note 2
STROKE STOP
DIMENSIONS
LGTH ROD 0.D.
.438
1.029
(MIN) (MAX)
1 Spring must work over .438 inch rod (test with the stroke stop),
2 Spring must move freely inside hole .750 inch minimum.
5-94A
LEGEND FOR FIGURE 5-138
1. Valve assembly
2. Inlet section
3. Inlet body
4. Screw
5. Sleeve retainer cover
6. Sleeve
7. Spring cover seal
8. Lower spool seal
9. Centering spring
10. C-washer
11. Valve spool
12. Plug, check valve
13. Back-up ring
14. Valve plug seal
15. Check valve spring
16. Check valve ball
5-129
17.
18.
19.
20.
21.
22.
23.
24.
25.
26.
27.
28.
29.
30.
31.
32.
Back-up ring
O-ring seal
Relief valve plug
Cap seal
Relief valve spring
Relief valve assembly
Plug
O-ring seal
Stud nut
Tie stud
Screw
Sleeve retainer cover
Sleeve
Spring cover seal
Lower spool seal
Centering spring
HYDRAULIC VALVE
5-130
DISASSEMBLY. Refer t o f i g u r e
5-138 and proceed as follows:
a.
Remove cowl access hole cover
fasteners and cover plate, remove
lower dash panel fasteners and lower
dash panel.
b.
Be sure the valve is not subject to pressure.
Disconnect and cap
all lines and disconnect linkage to
the spools.
Remove valve mounting
fasteners and remove valve from
machine.
NOTE
33.
34.
35.
36.
37.
38.
39.
40.
41.
42.
43.
44.
45.
46.
47.
C-washer
Spool
Plug, check valve
Back-up ring
Valve plug seal
Check valve spring
Check valve ball
Back-up ring
O-ring seal
Outlet section
Outlet body
Seal retainer
Seal
Seal
Seal
f. Screw out the plug which retains
the relief valve and remove the O-ring
from the plug.
Remove the spring and
the relief valve.
5-131 CLEANING AND INSPECTION.
a. Discard all old seals. Wash all parts in a clean
mineral oil solvent and place them on a clean
surface for inspection.
b. Carefully remove burrs by light stoning or
lapping. Be certain there is no paint or burring on
mating surfaces of valve bodies.
During disassembly, particular attention should be given to identification
of parts for reassembly.
Spools are
selectively fitted to valve bodies and
must be returned to the same bodies
from which they were removed.
Valve
sections must be reassembled in the
same order.
c. Inspect the valve spools and bores for burrs
and scoring. If scoring is not deer enough to cause
objectionable leakage, the surfaces can be stoned
or polished with crocus cloth. If scoring is
excessive, the valve body and spool must be
replaced. Check the valve spool for freedom of
c.
Attaching Parts:
Remove the tie
studs and nuts and separate valve
sections.
d. Check the relief valve for smooth movement in
its bore. The valve should move from its own
weight.
d.
Slide the spool out of its bore
and remove the O-rings from the grooves
in the spool and from the valve body
around the spool bore.
Do not remove
the centering spring and "C" washers
unless it is necessary to replace them.
e.
Grip the stem of the check valve
plug with pliers and pull it out of the
Remove the O-ring and backvalve body.
up ring.
Remove the spring and ball
from the valve body.
5-94B
movement in the bore.
5-132 REASSEMBLY.
a. Install the O-ring on the relief valve plug. Place
the relief valve assembly in its bore, hex nut end
up. Install the spring and plug and tighten the plug
securely but DO NOT over tighten.
Figure 5-138. Hydraulic Valve Assembly
5-95
Legend for Figure 5-160
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
Tilt Cyl. Assy.
Barrel
u-cup
Wear Ring
Spacer
O-Ring
Back-up Ring
Gland Assy.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.
15.
16.
Bushing
Packing Set
Shim
Retainer
Lockwasher
Capscrew
Wiper
Pin
b. Install a new back-up ring and O-ring on
the check valve plug with the O-ring toward
the spring and bail. Place the bail and spring
in the body and install the plug. Be sure the
hole in the plug lines up with the stud hole
in the body.
C. Install lower spool seal and back-up ring
on valve spool, making sure that scarfed ends
of back-up ring are closed up and correctly
seated.
17.
18.
19.
20.
21.
22.
23.
24.
Plate
Lockwasher
Capscrew
Lub-Fitting
Gland
Spacer
Retainer
Capscrew
25.
26.
27.
28.
29.
30.
31.
32.
Ring Segment
Boot
Retainer
Bushing
Adaptor
Retainer
Spring
Packing Kit.
b. Remove tilt cylinder pivot pins at rear
mounting and at upright. Remove tilt cylinder
from machine.
c. An exploded view of the tilt cylinder is
shown on the preceding page to aid in disassembly and reassembly of the unit. See figure
5-160.
d. Install one “C” washer at each end of the
centering spring. The fiat side of the “C”
washer faces away from the spring when installed.
e . Install the upper spool quad ring on the
spool, and install the O-ring on the spring
cover sleeve face.
f . Carefully position spring cover and sleeve
over the spool and against valve body. Install
spring cover screws and tighten to IO foot/
pounds torque.
g. After installation of valve and connection
to operating lever linkage, check valve operation. Spools should return to neutral automatically when the control lever is released.
The centering spring force is approximately 40
pounds. If more force is necessary, check
linkage for binds.
5-133 TILT CYLINDERS.
5-134 REMOVAL. Should it be found that the
tilt cylinders will not hold upright at desired
a n g l e o f t i l t , it will be necessary to remove
and disassemble cylinder to determine the
faulty condition.
a. Tilt upright to full forward position,
disconnect hose lines at front and rear of
cylinder.
x
X
X
X
X
X
X
X
x
x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x
X
X
WARNING
X
X
SECURE UPRIGHT WITH A CHAIN TO PREVENT
X
X
FALLING.
X
x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x x
5-96
Figure 5-161.
Tilt Cylinder Components.
5-135 DISASSEMBLY.
a. Refer to figure 5-160 for detailed parts
identification and proceed as outlined below:
b. Figure 5-161 shows components of the tilt
cylinder and body. Refer to this figure and
remove three retainer bolts (A) securing the
cover (6). seal guard kit (C), retainer (D) and
shims (E). Pull these components from end of
cylinder and piston rod.
c. See figure 5-162 for gland details and
loosen gland bolts (F), using suitable wrench.
Then, using a screwdriver, rotate each bolt
until head is against gland assembly.
d. Now tap gland assembly inward into cylinder,
being careful not to mar, nick, scratch, etc.,
the piston rod. Use a wooden or plastic mallet
that does not have a metal frame that might
contact piston rod when tapping gland.
5-97
FIG. 5-160
Figure 5-162.
e. Remove segment rings (G), This will allow
the gland assembly to be pulled from cylinder
and piston rod.
f . Refer to figure 5-161 if it is necessary to
remove and replace packing set (H) or seal guard
k i t ( C ) . Upon reassembly be sure that ail components mate or properly seat in one another.
The seal guard kit (C) must be correctly positioned in the seal guard retainer (D), and
the fiat side of the rubber ring must face
outward so the beveled sides of the ring will
properly mate with both bronze wiper rings.
The packing set has both a bottom and top
adaptor. The flat side of the bottom adaptor
must set fiat against the rear gland bushing
(L) with the beveled side of the adaptor facing
outward so it will properly mate with packing
seals, and fiat side of top adaptor must face
outward so it will set flush against the front
gland bushing (J).
g. The rear gland bushing (I) is held in place
by a snap ring (K), as shown in figure 5-163.
h. The gland assembly is equipped with one
O-ring (L) and one back-up ring (M). These
components must always be positioned as shown
in figure 5-164. The back-up ring is always
on the side opposite the pressure.
i.
Figure 6-163.
Gland Details
Pull piston rod from cylinder tube.
j . Check U-cup (N, figure 5-161) and wear ring
( 0 ) f or wear or damage and replace as required.
5-136 CLEANING AND INSPECTION.
a. After disassembly, clean ail metal parts in
a Stoddard type cleaning solvent and dry thoroughly with compressed air.
CAUTION
CLEAN ALL RUBBER, PLASTIC, FIBER, OR
SYSTHETIC PARTS IN CLEAN HYDRAULIC FLUID.
b. Before reassembly, check ail parts for
further serviceability. Replace all O-rings,
and check packings for wear or damage. Be
sure that mating parts have smooth surfaces.
The piston rod must not have any burrs, nicks
or rough spots - rod must be smooth finished.
If there are burrs, nicks, etc., polish surface
with crocus cloth until rod has an absolutely
smooth finish.
CAUTION
DO NOT USE EMBERY CLOTH OR SANDPAPER. DO NOT
POLISH SO MUCH THAT CHROME PLATING IS WORN OFF
ROD.
THIS IS IMPORTANT AS PACKINGS AND TUBE
WILL BE DAMAGED IF ROD IS BURRED, NICKED,
SCRATCHED, ETC.
TAKE CARE NOT TO DAMAGE
O-RINGS AND PACKING SEALS AT REASSEMBLY BY
CHECKING CYLINDER,
5-98
Gland Bushing
MAKING SURE THAT THE
C A U T I O N (CONTINUED)
SEALING AREAS ARE FREE OF NICKS, BURRS OR
SHARP EDGES THAT MIGHT DAMAGE SEALS.
LUBRICATE
EACH COMPONENT WITH CLEAN HYDRAULIC FLUID TO
FACILITATE ASSEMBLY.
5-137 REASSEMBLY.
a. Refer to figure 5-161 and install U-cup (N)
and wear ring (0) on piston and rod assembly.
b. After installing spacer (14, figure 5-160)
on end of piston, install piston and rod
assembly in cylinder tube.
CAUTION
WHEN INSTALLING THE SEALS, PACKINGS, RINGS,
ETC., THAT MAKE UP THE TILT CYLINDER, BE SURE
Figure 6-164.
O-Ring and Back-up Ring
5-138 INSTALLATION.
FLUID.
a. Place tilt cylinder in rear mounting
bracket, align pin hole and install cylinder
mounting pin. Secure mounting pin in bracket
with roil pin.
c. Install gland bushing (I) and snap ring (K)
as shown in figure 5-163. Make certain that
compression springs are in place behind bushing.
b. Support cylinder and align piston rod
clevis with mast, install plain pin and
secure with cotter pin.
d. Place gland (G) over piston rod and install
packing set (H) and bushing (J) as shown in
figure 5-161.
c . Install hydraulic hoses to cylinder elbow
f i t t i n g s . Secure hoses by tightening coupling
nuts.
e . Replace O-ring (L) and back-up ring (M) as
shown in figure 5-164. Install gland in place
by inserting ring (G) and retaining screws (F).
d. Start engine, raise carriage off floor
and operate tilt cylinders in both directions
to bleed air from the system. After several
minutes of operation, check fluid level in
fluid reservoir tank, fill as necessary.
TO LUBRICATE ALL PARTS WITH CLEAN HYDRAULIC
f . Install gland cover over gland assembly
end of tilt cylinder. Align threaded hole of
gland with hole provided in cover.
g. Install shims (E, figure 5-162) provided
in repair kit, and install shim retainer (d).
NOTE
After the machine has been in service with
the tilt cylinder in use, you may want to
remove shims (E) (Fig. 5-162) to increase
pressure on packings, preventing cylinder
leakage.
Install wiper
h. Install rod wipers (C).
retainer (B) and fasten with screws and
washers (A).
5-98A/(5-98B
blank)
Figure 5-141. Blocking Carriage
Figure 5-142. Fork and Carriage Blocking
CARRIAGE ASSEMBLY.
5-139. REMOVAL.
a. Set parking brake and block drive wheels
securely.
b. Raise carriage about 4 feet. Place a 4 x 4 oak
beam or steel I-beam, 3 to 4 feet in length, upright
between carriage and floor and lower carriage until
it rests on the end of the beam. (See figure 5-141.)
Remove Hydraulic hoses from carriage.
c. Remove chain anchor pins from the bottom
bar of the lift carriage. Remove only one pin at a
5-99
Figure 5-143. Securing Chains
time, and replace each pin with a 3/8 inch diameter
x 2 inch long bolt.
Figure 5-144. Seating Piston Head
d. Raise the carriage off the upright beam. Place
the beam on the floor so that the lift forks will rest
upon it when the carriage is lowered. (See figure
6142.)
upper carriage rollers, so that the carriage will be
entirely free of the upright.
e. Tilt the upright forward as far as it will go, and
place a pallet or other weight across the forks so
that the carriage will not tip backwards when it is
removed from the upright. (See figure 5-142.)
f. Remove the two 3/8 inch bolts holding chain
anchor in place. Pull the chain ends out of the
anchor brackets.
g. Secure loose ends of the lift chain around the
sprockets by wiring as shown in figure 6-143.
h. Grasp lift chains near piston head and raise
piston to the full up position.
i. Raise inner rail of the upright until it clears the
5-100
j. Remove wheel blocking, release hand brake,
and back truck away from the carriage.
5-140. CLEANING AND INSPECTION.
a. Clean components with a clean Stoddard type
solvent and dry thoroughly.
b. Inspect carriage and rollers for evidence of
wear or physical damage.
c. Check for cracks, particularly at welds, and
evidence of permanent distortion or bending due
to overloading or impact.
5-141. MINOR REPAIR.
a. Replacedamaged or bent forks and worn rollers.
b. Refer to the welding instructions at the front
of this section before attempting any welding on
the carriage.
c. Perform carriage roller adjustments as outlined
in Section IV.
5-142. INSTALLATION.
Before installing carriage, check roller
adjustment of the upright. (See Section
IV.)
a. With carriage resting on the floor, the heel of
the forks resting on a 4 x 4 inch timber or I-beam,
and a pallet or other weight on the free end of the
forks, drive the truck up to the carriage and tilt the
upright to match the angle of the carriage.
b. Raise the inner rails so that they just clear the
upper carriage rollers.
c. Slowly move the truck forward until the inner
rails are aligned vertically with the upper carriage
rollers.
h. Raise the carriage approximately 4 feet and
block it with a 4 x 4 timber as shown in figure
5-141. Lower the carriage so that it rests on the
end of the beam.
i. Replace the 3/8 bolts, one at a time, with the
cylinder anchor pins. Secure the anchor pins with
cotter pins previously removed.
j. Raise and lower the carriage several times to
check operation throughout the full range of
travel.
5-143. UPRIGHT ASSEMBLY.
5-144. REMOVAL.
a. Install suitable hoist to upper tie bar.
Upright assembly weighs approximately
750 pounds; use due safety precautions
w h e n removing
or installing upright
assembly.
b. Remove forks and load safety rack.
d. Lower the inner rails carefully over the
carriage upper rollers. After checking to see that
rollers are properly guided into the upright inner
rails, lower the rails to the full down position.
c. Remove cotter pins and plain pins securing tilt
cylinder clevises to upright outer channel brackets.
Note
e. Remove wires holding the chain ends over the
sprockets.
Note
The following steps will require the
assistance of another mechanic to operate
the lift valve.
f. Grasp one chain in each hand and have an
assistant open the lift control valve in the “down”
position. Pull the piston to full down position as
shown in figure 5-144, while the valve is open.
g. Position loose chain ends in the anchor
brackets on the back of the carriage. Secure each
chain anchor with a 3/8 diameter x 2 inch long
bolt.
Place suitable drain pan under cylinder to
catch oil
when
pressure
hose
is
disconnected from lift cylinder fitting.
d. Loosen hydraulic pressure line coupling nut
securing pressure line to lift cylinder fitting.
e. Remove support shaft lock plate bolt and
lockwasher securing lock plate. Remove support
shaft.
f. Using chain hoist, support and remove upright
assembly from truck.
5-145. DISASSEMBLY AND REPAIR.
a. Refer to file 5-145 and disassemble the
upright assembly according to the illustration.
5-101
LEGEND FOR FIGURE 5-145
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
Upright & Lift Cylinder Assembly
Outer Rail
Bolt
Roller
Shim
Bearing
Lock
Anchor
Capscrew
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.
15.
16.
17.
18.
Inner Rail
Lever
Support
Capscrew
Retainer
Sleeve
Retainer
Intermediate
Latch
19.
20.
21.
23.
24.
25.
26.
27.
Rail
b. Refer to welding instructions. at the front of
this section before attempting any welding repair
of the upright assembly.
5-147. LIFT CYLINDER.
c. Replace any worn upright rollers, or any other
parts which appear worn or damaged.
a. Remove lift carriage.
d. Reassemble the upright assembly according to
the exploded view illustration, figure 5-145.
5-146.
INSTALLATION.
Adaptor
Retainer
Retainer
Cylinder
Nut
Lockwashr
Lockwasher
Washer
5-148. REMOVAL.
b. Place suitable drain pan under lift cylinder and
loosen coupling nut securing hydraulic oil hose to
cylinder fitting. Remove hose from cylinder.
c. Remove snap-ring securing lift cylinder to
cylinder support adapter.
a. Using suitable hoist, position trunnion arms of
upright assembly on truck, making sure trunnion
bushings are in place and not damaged.
d. Install suitable chain hoist to lift cylinder
upper anchor bracket and support cylinder weight.
b. Position support shaft in trunnion arms and
secure with lock plate, fastener bolts and
lockwashers.
e. Remove bolts and lockwashers securing upper
cylinder adapter to mast assembly. Remove lift
cylinder with lift chains attached.
c. Position hydraulic hose on lift cylinder fitting.
Tighten hose coupling nut to secure hose to fitting.
Note
d. Position tilt cylinder clevises to align with
mast outer channel bracket holes. Install plain pins
and cotter pins to secure clevises to upright
channels.
Lift chains may be removed from lift
cylinder by removing cotter pins, locking
nuts, and adjusting nuts securing chain
anchor pins to lift cylinder. Mark position
of adjusting nuts on anchor pins before
removing nuts to assure proper reassembly.
e. Install load safety rack and forks.
5-149. DISASSEMBLY.
f. Remove hoist from upright tie bar.
g. Start engine and operate lift cylinder to bleed
air from hydraulic system.
h. Inspect hydraulic cylinder and lines for oil
leaks.
i. Check main hydraulic reservoir for proper fluid
level. Fill as necessary.
5-102
a. Refer to figure 5-146 for parts identification
and proceed as follows:
b. Lay cylinder across a bench, using notched out
2 x 4’s to prevent the cylinder from sliding around.
c. Clean all parts of the cylinder to prevent dirt
and grime from entering the cylinder body.
Figure 5-145. Upright Assembly
5-103
LEGEND FOR FIGURE 5-146
1.
2.
3.
4.
5 .
6 .
7 .
8 .
9 .
L i f t c y l i n d e r assembly
BarrelPacking kit
Seal
Feed tube
Packing
Gland
Wiper
Wear ring
Sheave c a r r i e r r o d
Bleeder
Adaptor
Retainer
Seal
15. Packing
16. Retainer
1 7 . Wiper
18. Bearing
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.
19.
20.
21.
22.
23.
24.
25.
26.
27.
Back-up r i n g
Inner
rail
rod
Retainer
Wiper
Packing
Adaptor
Setscrew
Pellet
Bearing
28.
29.
30.
31.
32.
33.
34.
35.
36.
37.
Inter rod
Retainer
Wiper
Packing
Adaptor
Cap
Pellet
Bearing
Bearing
Bearing
d. Remove pipe elbow, vent line and O-ring from
piston rod.
1. After end cap is removed, remove the flow
tube as shown in figure 5-152.
e. Refer to figure 5-147 and remove gland nuts
using a spanner wrench. Place a container beneath
cylinder end to catch oil spillage.
m. Plow tube guide bushing may be removed,
using a piece of drill rod as previously described
and a special bushing removal wrench.
f. Remove ail “V” packings from the ends of the
primary, stationary and secondary pistons, as each
piston is extended from its barrel, as shown in
figure 5-148.
n. Remove primary piston from barrel as shown
in figure 5-153. Remove any packings that did not
come out with pistons.
5-150. CLEANING AND INSPECTION.
g. If packings do not come out with pistons, they
may be removed by hand as shown in figure 5-149,
after pistons are removed.
h. Unscrew the stationary piston cap from the
barrel (using a spanner wrench inserted in the two
holes in the cap face) and pull out the stationary
piston assembly far enough to remove the two
allen head screws shown in figure 5-150.
i. Remove stationary piston cap from stationary
piston by pulling stationary piston out far enough
to insert a piece of drill rod through the cylinder
body as shown in figure 5-151, and applying a
spanner wrench to the end cap to unscrew it. The
drill rod will prevent the stationary piston from
turning.
j. Remove the secondary piston assembly from
the stationary piston, and place the secondary
piston assembly on the bench, supported by
notched-out 2 x 4’s.
k. Remove the end cap from the secondary
piston using a spanner wrench and piece of drill
rod in the same manner as removal of the
stationary piston end cap.
5-104
a. Clean all parts of the disassembled cylinder
with solvent (Stoddard solvent, or similar mineral
spirits), and dry thoroughly.
b. Check each cylinder wall and bore for cracks,
pitting or scoring.
Such irregularities will
necessitate replacement of the affected part.
c. Small nicks and burrs on external cylinder
surfacss may be removed by use of a fine india
stone or hone, provided that removal of such
defect does not leave a permanent notch or groove
in the cylinder wall which might lead to packing
damage and subsequent leakage.
d. All packings and seals should be replaced each
time the cylinder is disassembled.
5-.151. REASSEMBLY.
a. Dip all packings and rings in clean oil prior to
reassembly.
b. Place “V” ring packings together in sets of the
various diameters required. Arrange each set in the
following manner. Start with the brass ring, then
Figure 5-146. Lift Cylinder
5-105
Figure 5-148. “V” Packings
5-106
Figure 5-149. “V” Packing Removal
Figure 5-150. Stationary Piston End Cap
5-107
Figure 5-151. End Cap Removal
Figure 5-152. Flow Tube Removal
alternate one rubber and one plastic ring, always
starting with the rubber ring, and build up the set
until all rings are used. If any rubber rings are left
over, they should be placed in the first position
5-108
next to the brass stop ring.
c. Install primary piston into cylinder barrel, as
shown in figure 5-153.
Figure 5-153. Primary Piston Removal
Figure 5-154. Primary Piston Installation
d. Complete installation of primary piston by
compressing piston ring with two screwdrivers, and
pushing in on the primary piston with the thumbs
as shown in figure 6-154. Oil the piston ring prior
to installation.
e. Install secondary piston into stationary piston
by compressing piston ring by hand and inserting
5-109
Figure 5-155. Stationary Piston Installation
Figure 5-156. “V” Packing Arrangement
end of secondary piston into stationary piston.
Secondary piston ring should be oiled prior to
installation.
5-110
f. Assemble O-ring and backup ring to stationary
piston end cap. Backup ring should be assembled
to the side of O-ring, away from the oil pressure.
Figure 5-158. Side Bleeder Screw
Figure 5-157. “V” Packing Tool
g. Install brass stop ring over stationary piston.
Install end cap on stationary piston using a spanner
wrench and piece of drill rod as shown in figure
5-151.
h. Install setscrew and allen head lockscrew in
the position indicated in figure 5-150. Install
stationary piston cap into barrel and tighten as
shown in figure 5-155.
Note
Best mechanical practice when installing
stationary piston is to support the opposite
end
o f t h e s t a t i o n a r y p i s t o n while
threading in the end cap. Use a leather or
canvas belting sling to hold the piston
centered in
the
barrel to prevent
cross-threading of the stationary piston end
cap.
i. Replace spring seat, “V” packings and gland
nut on secondary piston as shown in figure 5-156.
DO NOT secure gland nut. Use packing tool to
install packings into mating tube as shown in figure
5-157.
j. Replace “ V ” p a c k i n g s a n d g l a n d n u t o n
primary piston. Use tool for guiding in “V”
packings as shown in figure 5-157. DO NOT secure
gland nut.
k. Replace “ V ” p a c k i n g s a n d g l a n d n u t o n
stationary piston as shown in figure 5-148. Use
packing tool for guiding packings into cylinder.
1. Tighten all gland nuts, using a spanner wrench
like the one shown in figure 5-147.
5-152.
INSTALLATION.
a. Using hoist, position lift cylinder on cylinder
support adapter and secure with snap ring.
b. Position cylinder adapter to mast assembly
and secure with bolts and lockwashers.
c. Position hydraulic hose on cylinder fitting and
tighten coupling nut to secure hose.
d. Remove chain hoist from cylinder.
5-111
LEGEND FOR FIGURE 5-160
1.
2.
3.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
Tilt cylinder assy.
Barrel assembly
Rod, piston assembly
u-cup
Gland bushing retainer
Bolt
Wear ring
Segment ring
10.
14.
15.
16.
17.
18.
19.
20.
Gland cover
Spacer
Gland seal
Back-up ring
Gland
Gland bushing
V-packing set
Shim
21.
22.
23.
24.
32.
33.
34.
35.
Shim retainer
Bolt, lockwasher
Rod wiper
Wiper retainer
Support pin
Cotter pin
Grease fitting
Rear support bearing
37.
38.
39.
40.
41.
42.
43.
44.
Packing spring
Rod end
Key
Lack bolt
Lockwasber
Nut
Pivot pin
cotter pin
e. Start engine and operate lift cylinder to bleed
air from the hydraulic system;
f. Check main hydraulic reservoir for proper fluid
level. Fill as necessary.
g. Inspect hydraulic cylinder and oil lines for
leaks.
5-153. BLEEDING LIFT CYLINDER. After
installation, the lift cylinder should be bled to
remove all trapped air from the cylinder.
a. Raise carriage about 4 feet or until bleeder
screw is accessible.
Note
Check for proper oil level in sump before
and after bleeding.
b. Loosen side bleeder screw, shown in figure
5-158, using an allen wrench. The piston will drop
a few inches as the air is forced out.
c. When oil starts to flow from the bleeder screw,
tighten the screw securely to stop leakage.
d. Now loosen the top bleeder screw, shown in
figure 6-159, using an allen wrench. The piston will
drop slightly as air is forced out. When oil starts to
flow from the loosened screw, tighten the screw to
stop leakage.
e. Check oil level in sump and add oil as required.
5-112
Figure 5-159. Top Bleeder Screw
SECTION 5-154
FULL FREE LIFT TRIPLE STAGE UPRIGHTS EQUIPPED
WITH 6-ROLLER CARRIAGES
Operational Checks & Adjustments . . . . . . . .
Latch Operation . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Intermediate Rail Chains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Carriage Chains . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Checking Carriage Roll Patterns . . . . . . . . .
Hydraulic Cylinder Seals . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Upright Racking . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Load Testing . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Cylinder Drift Test . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Carriage Remove & Replace . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Adjusting Carriage Railers . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Page
Page
Page
Page
Page
Page
Page
Page
Page
Page
Page
5-114
5-115
5-116
5-119
5-120
5-121
5-122
5-123
5-126 & 5-127
5-128 & 5-147
5-134
5-113
The following procedures cover FULL FREE LIFT TRIPLE STAGE
UPRIGHTS equipped with six-roller carriages used on trucks
rated from 2,000 through 12,000 pounds capacity.
The service procedure applies to all uprights with M-SERIAL
NUMBER designation.
These numbers, called DECK NUMBERS, are located in front of
the outer rails in the area indicated by the arrows.
Fig. 16155
OPERATIONAL CHECKS & ADJUSTMENTS
The triple stage upright should be load tested to determine
if adjustments are needed. First . . .
. . . the upright is a very heavy assembly with many moving
parts.
Fig. 16156
5-114
Maintenance procedures should be followed carefully.
Fig. 16157
WORK SAFELY Keep hands and feet out from between moving
parts unless parts are secured to prevent movement. Don’t
allow others to disrupt your work . . . and especially keep
all persons away from truck controls when you’re making
measurements or adjustments, Before beginning any service
on the triple stage upright . . .
. . . the following operational checks should be made to
determine if the upright is operating properly.
Any adjustments should be made prior to load testing, because
equipment in unsatisfactory condition could fail under load
and cause injury to personnel or damage to the truck.
LATCH OPERATION
A two-piece latch, located on the top inner rail tie bar, is
designed to prevent the inner rails from raising before the
carriage is fully extended.
Fig. 16158
5-115
Here the carriage has just passed maximum full free-lift
position. Notice that at this point the top carriage rollers
are visible. When the carriage reaches this position ...
Fig. 16159
. . . the latch is tripped by a finger that protrudes slightly
from the piston head. The latch should be checked immediately
after it’s tripped to see that it works freely.
Fig. 16160
Check the latch from behind the upright with the key off.
The latch should move up and down about 1/2-inch with slight
finger pressure.
Fig. 16161
INTERMEDIATE RAILS
The intermediate rail chains extend downward from their
anchor points on the lift cylinder ...
Fig. 16162
5-116
. . . pass around shives on the intermediate rail tie bar ...
Fig. 16163
. . . and anchor near the top of the outer rails. Inspect
chains for wear and for equal tension, Refer to the Index
for complete coverage of "Upright Lift Chain Check and
Adjustment Procedures”.
Two checks of intermediate rail chain length must be made.
Fig. 16164
F i r s t , the stop block on the intermediate rail tie bar
SHOULD NOT contact the outer rail tie bar.
Fig. 16165
Second, the lift cylinder base should move slightly out of
its socket ...
Fig. 16166
5-117
. . . when the upright is fully extended . . .
Fig. 16167
. . . like this . . .
Fig. 16168
. . . but not so much that it jams against its retaining bolts.
Either lack of free movement of the lift cylinder base when
the upright is fully extended or the stop block resting on
the tie bar, indicates that the intermediate rail chains are
too long,
Fig. 16169
5-118
They should be shortened by means of their adjusting nuts on
the anchor plate that’s attached to the lift cylinder.
Fig. 16170
If these nuts are removed, be sure the nuts with conical seats
are inserted first, so that the self-aligning design can work
properly.
Fig. 16171
CARRIAGE CHAINS
The carriage chains are attached to the bottom of the
carriage ...
Fig. 16172
. . . travel upward around rollers on the piston head . . .
Fig. 16173
5-119
. . . and anchor to the same plate as the Intermediate rail
chains, but enter the anchor plate from above.
Fig. 16174
Carriage chains should be adjusted so that forks are 1/2-inch
above the ground with the upright vertical.
Fig. 16175
As with the intermediate rail chains, conical ends on anchor
nuts should seat in the anchor plate. Inspect the carriage
chains for wear.
Fig. 16176
CHECKING ROLL PATTERNS
Impressions made by rollers on upright rails are called roll
patterns. Roll patterns can give an indication of upright
adjustment. Excessive metal sowing or gouging of the roller
paths may indicate excessive pressure caused by damaged or
misadjusted r o l l e r s . Roll patterns can be checked by . . .
Fig. 16177
5-120
. . . applying a light coat of spray paint or a thin layer of
grease to the roller contact area and then operating the
upright several times with a load.
Fig. 16178
Roll patterns of carriage rollers, Including thrust rollers
Fig. 16179
. . . and main upright rollers, can be checked in this way.
Fig. 16180
HYDRAULIC CYLINDER AND SEALS
Cylinder rod seals should be checked for leakage, Seals of
the primary piston rod . . .
Fig. 16181
5-121
. . . secondary piston rod . . .
Fig. 16182
. . . and feed tube assembly should be checked. Cylinder rods
should be free of grit, chemical residues, paint and nicks on
ground or polished surfaces.
Fig. 16183
UPRIGHT RACKING
Upright racking occurs when tilt cylinder strokes are unequal.
Tilt cylinders should be checked to determine if cylinder
strokes . . .
Fig, 16184
. . . are equal . To check for racking, start the/truck and
raise the carriage about six inches off the ground. Operate
the tilt circuit to full forward tilt and backward tilt
several times. Observe to see if cylinder strokes are equal
. . . movement of both cylinders should start and stop at the
same time. If not, the yokes at the piston rods should be
adjusted.
For adjustment procedures
covering your particular model
... refer to the INDEX for
‘Tilt Cylinder Rod Adjustment’.
5-122
If you observe no racking, check to see that keys are in
place and locking bolts are tight.
This completes the operational checks of the upright. Before
conducting the load tests . . .
. . . operate the upright without a load and look for unusual
operation. If the upright operates normally after the operational checks have been completed . . .
LOAD TESTING
. . . the load tests should be performed.
ing by . . .
Begin the load test-
5-123
. . . placing a capacity load on the forks and securing it to
the carriage. Tilt the upright back slightly.
Raise the upright to maximum extension several times. Smoothness of operation, carriage play and play between rails ! should
be noted. If operation is satisfactory, the load should then
be placed . . .
. . . four inches off center. In this case, to your left . . .
. . . and raised to maximum extension.
5-124
Then four inches off center in the other direction . . .
Fig. 16192
. . . and again raised to full extension. The offset has been
exaggerated here for clarity purposes. In your tests, offset
loading must not exceed 4 inches.
Experienced fork truck mechanics know that both too much
clearance and ...
Fig. 16193
. . . too little clearance can be the cause of binding and uneven operation.
The design of the interlocking rails requires some lateral
movement of the carriage within the inner rails.
Fig. 16194
Adequate clearance between rollers and rails is necessary to
insure smooth operation and minimum wear.
Fig. 16195
Change 1
5-125
Providing the upright works smoothly with a capacity load, the service man should consider
the application for which the truck is used in making a decision as to whether carriage or
rail adjustments are necessary.
If the product handled by the truck is very delicate or
the operation sensitive, the serviceman should take these into consideration.
The adjustment of new uprights that have minimal operating
time is not recommended unless there is some indication that
the upright is not operating properly.
Fig. 16196
TA501960
Rollers require some time to seat in rails and initial stress relieving at weld areas will
cause some dimensional changes that affect roller clearance.
Operators should be consulted on a regular basis as to any unusual operation of the upright
as well as other parts of the truck.
TESTING THE DRIFT OF THE UPRIGHT AND TILT
CYLINDERS
To check for drift, a TEST LOAD must be made up and the
TEST LOAD must have even distribution on a 48” by 48” pallet.
The TEST LOAD must be a fully rated load. Check the Serial
Number Plate on your truck for rated capacity.
TA501961
Fig. 16197
5-126
Change 1
The TEST LOAD must have stability on the pallet. The
material used to make up the TEST LOAD must be put on
the pallet so that it has stability. The TEST LOAD must not
extend beyond the pallet,
First, make a TEST LOAD as stated above then position the
load on forks.
1. Adjust fork width as wide as possible to get even
distribution of weight.
2. Keep forks level when you raise the load.
3. Engage pallet and TEST LOAD In as far as possible.
Move forward until forks completely engage the TEST
LOAD. TEST LOAD and/or pallet must be In contact
with load back rest.
4. Set parking brake and chock wheels.
Fig. 16197.1
TA501962
TESTING THE DOWN DRIFT
Raise carriage and TEST LOAD so that the inner rails move
up a few inches. Then tilt upright backward about 1 degree
from vertical.
Move to one side of the upright (clear of the load) and mark
the upright rails with a pencil and do a drift test.
DRlFT MUST NOT GO OVER ONE INCH PER MINUTE.
TESTING THE DRIFT OF THE TILT
Raise the carriage and TEST LOAD approximately 12 to
15 inches off the floor. Tilt the upright to the full back
position.
Measure the drift between points ‘A” shown in Fig. 16197.2,
THE LOAD MUST NOT DRIFT MORE THAN 1/2 TO 3/4 OF
AN INCH IN FIVE MINUTES.
Fig. 16197.2
Change 1
TA501963
5-127
Figures 16198 through 16202 and corresponding text are
rescinded.
When performing tests and services on a truck . . . never walk
under raised forks . . . with or without a load . . . and don’t
allow others to. If binding or excess carriage play is
suspected, the following carriage adjustment procedure
should be carried out.
REMOVE THE CARRIAGE
If the truck you are servicing is internal combustion powered,
the carriage should be removed in a well ventilated location
where you will want to do your work. With the truck
positioned, turn off the key . . .
Fig. 16203
5-128
Change 1
. . . set the parking brake and . . .
. . . block the steer wheels to prevent the truck from moving
forward or backward. With the transmission in neutral, start
the truck and . . .
. . . raise the upright until the carriages is at a comfortable
working distance above the ground. Place a 4 x 4 post
squarely beneath the carriage lower fork bar, below the
carriage chain anchor bracket as shown here. Then . . .
. . . standing clear of the upright, lower the carriage until
it contacts the post. Lower the lift cylinder an Inch or so
further so the carriage chains become slack. Check to see
that the chains are loose and the 4 x 4 post squarely in
place. Then turn the key off.
5-129
Working from behind the upright, remove the cotter keys
from the carriage anchor pins.
Then one at a time, hold the carriage chains with one hand
and remove the anchor pins with the other. The chains must
be held so they don’t flip up over the shives.
Replace them with machine bolts off the same length but of
slightly smaller diameter.
Here the anchor pin at the right has been replaced by a bolt.
5-130
When both carriage anchor pins have been replaced with bolts,
stand away from the carriage, start the truck, and raise the
lift cylinder until the carriage is clear of the post.
Remove the post . . .
. . . and place it beneath the forks just in front of the fork
heels. Slide a pallet about three-fourths of the way onto the
forks. Then lower the lift cylinder all the way and turn off
the key. The carriage chains will be slack.
Remove the bolts from both carriage anchor points.
5-131
Push the carriage chains up around their shives on the piston
head so that they will be out of the way of the carriage.
Remove chocks from the steer tires.
Start the truck and raise the lift cylinder until the carriage
rollers are clear of the inner rails.
Release parking brake, place the truck in reverse, and slowly
back away from the carriage.
5-132
Lower the lift cylinder until the upright rails are down . . .
. . . but not enough to lower the piston head. Shut off the
truck and set parking brake.
Tie the carriage chains front to back, just below the piston
head.
Make sure the removed carriage is stable . , . it's very heavy.
5-133
ADJUSTING CARRIAGE ROLLERS
These are special calipers designed for making carriage
adjustments. The top caliper is an inside caliper . . . the
lower one, an outside caliper.
The first step in adjusting carriage rollers is to span the
inner rails with the inside caliper. Loosen the thumb screws
on the caliper and place it squarely across inside surfaces on
the inner rails so it contacts both sides. Tighten the thumb
screws.
Move the caliper down and up the inner rails ...
. . . several times until the narrowest point is found. Now,
at the narrowest point . . .
5-134
...add a 1/32nd inch thick shim . . .
. . . between the contact point of the caliper and the inner
rail. Then re-tighten the caliper and re-check the inside
caliper setting. The shim will provide operating clearance
for the carriage rollers within the inner rails.
Now place the outside calipers so they contact the extreme
points on the inside calipers. Adjust the outside caliper
and tighten thumb screws when it’s square . . .
. . . and in contact with the inside calipers.
5-135
Now move to the back side of the carriage.
Inspect the side thrust rollers on the back side of the
upper fork bar.
Check the rollers for damage to contact surfaces, seals
and excessive play. These rollers are important when making
measurements, because their positions are located and
fixture drilled during carriage manufacture.
They are removed by loosening a socket head screw in their
centers.
5-136
If the thrust rollers are in good condition, place the outside caliper across the second set of carriage rollers.
Place the caliper on the side of the rollers near the back
of the carriage fork bar.
Remember that the carriage rollers are canted.
The caliper must be placed so that the maximum distance
across the set of rollers is measured.
Holding the caliper carefully, insert shims between the
roller side and caliper contact point until all clearance is
eliminated. Shims are 1/32nd inch thick, so in this case
three shims or 3/32nds of an inch clearance is indicated.
We need to increase the distance between rollers by
3/32nds of an inch. We’ll do this by adding three shims
behind the rollers.
5-137
But before adding any shims, we must center this set of carriage rollers with the side thrust rollers. Using a steel
rule, carefully measure the distance between the face of the
side thrust roller and the side of the carriage roller.
Do this on both sides of the carriage. To obtain equal distance between side thrust and main carriage rollers on both
sides, we find that two shims need to be added to the right
roller and one to the left roller.
Remove rollers by working them off with pry bars or tapping
them loose with a soft faced hammer.
Add the two shims to the right side . . .
5-138
... inspect the roller for damage or excessive wear ... replace
it if necessary ... and ...
. . . re-install by tapping it on with a heavy plastic or a
leather mallet.
Add the one shim to the left side, inspect the roller
and replace it.
We’re in good shape now. The caliper indicates a zero
clearance.
5-139
... a re-check with the rule shows that both thrust rollers ...
... are the same distance from the carriage rollers.
With the same caliper position, span the bottom carriage
r o l l e r s . Here we find two shims are needed to eliminate
clearance of the caliper.
Note that these rollers are canted in the opposite
direction . . .
5-140
. . . the calipers need to be placed on the side of the
roller closest to you.
The bottom rollers must be directly below the center carriage
rollers.
To get
piece a
bottom
roller .
lower rollers directly beneath the center rollers,
carpenter’s square between the back edge of the
roller and the front edge of the middle carriage
. .
. . . like this.
5-141
Use your steel rule to get one leg of the carpenter’s square
parallel to the upper fork bar.
Move the rule back and forth across the upper fork bar while
checking the position of the lower roller with the center
roller.
In this way the number of shims that need to be added . . . or
subtracted . . . is determined. We’ve determined that two shims
must be added to the right lower roller.
The roller is removed . . .
5-142
. . . and shims added.
A check with the square on the opposite side indicates no
shims are needed.
A re-check with the caliper shows zero clearance between the
caliper’s contact points and the bottom roller set. Remember
that the carpenter’s square must be used to position bottom
rollers directly below the center rollers.
The top carriage rollers are checked last. Notice that the
top carriage rollers extend out of the inner rails when
the carriage is fully extended. To make re-entry of these
rollers into the inner rails easier, additional clearance is
provided for this top set of rollers,
5-143
Place a square directly through the centers of the lower
and center rollers.
The top rollers nest be adjusted so that a 1/32nd inch inset
is obtained . . . like so:
Top rollers are removed by removing a socket head cap screw.
Add shims as indicated by your measurement . . .
5-144
. . . and re-check for the 1/32nd inch inset.
The inset should be achieved on both sides.
The last step in adjusting the carriage rollers Is to
adjust the carriage side thrust rollers that operate on the
inside of the inner rails.
With the carpenter’s square placed across the diameters of the
lower and center carriage rollers . . .
5-145
. . . the face of the thrust roller should overlap the edge of
the rule by 1/64th of an inch on both thrust rollers.
The side thrust rollers should also be checked with the
lower fork bar for squareness.
U-shaped shims, at the left, should be added as needed
beneath . . .
. . . either or both of the socket head mounting bolts used
on thrust roller mounts.
5-146
After both thrust rollers have been adjusted, their grease
fitting should be lubricated.
This completes the procedure for adjusting the six-roller
carriage used on the triple stage upright. If upright
rails are also going to be adjusted, the carriage would
not be re-installed at this time, Upright adjustment procedure is given in Section 11, of this Manual. Whether
installed at this point or after rail adjustment, here’s
how it’s done.
INSTALLING THE CARRIAGE
Drive the truck up to the carriage.
Move the truck up slowly and raise the lift cylinder
to position the carriage rollers directly below the inner
rails and lower the lift cylinder completely. Turn off
the truck, set the parking brake, and block the steer tires.
Untie the carriage chains.
5-147
Then prop the lift cylinder control . . .
CONTROLS VARY WITH DIFFERENT TRUCK MODELS.
REFER TO THE OPERATORS INSTRUCTION MANUAL
COVERING THE PARTICULAR MODEL TRUCK YOU ARE
WORKING ON.
. . . In the lower position with a block, or tie It forward with
a wire.
This wi11 permit you to pull on the carriage chains to lower
the piston head. You’ll have to lift the chains over the
load back-rest extension on the carriage.
When the carriage chains are all the way down, insert the
machine bolts.
5-148
Then start the truck ...
. . . and raise the lift cylinder until the pallet and the
4 x 4 can be removed.
Continue to raise the carriage until the 4 x 4 can be inserted beneath the carriage and . . .
. . . lower the lift cylinder until the carriage Is supported
on the post.
5-149
Turn off the truck. Exchange the machine bolts . . .
. . . for the carriage anchor pins.
Use new cotter keys to secure the anchor pins.
Then start the truck. Raise the lift cylinder and remove
the 4 x 4 ...
5-150
. . . then lower the carriage. Remove the safety blocks at
the steer wheels.
Operate the upright several times to be sure it is operating
properly.
Make operational checks and load test before placing the
truck in service.
This concludes the service procedure for making operational
checks, the load testing, and carriage adjustments on the
triple stage upright with six-roller carriage. The
following section list the procedures for making rail
adjustments on the triple stage upright.
5-151
Fig 13010
Fig. 13011. OUTSIDE SPANNING TOOL
5-152
5-153
F U L L
F R E E
W I T H
L I F T
T R I P L E
6 - R O L L E R
S T A G E
U P R I G H T S
E Q U I P P E D
C A R R I A G E S
U p r i g h t R a i l s a n d R o l l e r s . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 5-155
Measuring Rail-To-Roller Clearance-Part l... Page 5-158
Tools . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . Page 5-161
Measuring Rail-To-Roller Clearance-Part 2... Page 5-163
Adjusting Rail-To-Roller Clearance . . . . . . . . . Page 5-173
5-154
The following procedures cover Full Free Lift Triple Stage
Uprights equipped with six-roller carriages used on trucks
rated from 2,000 through 12,000 pounds capacity,
The service procedure applies to all uprights with M serial
number designation.
These numbers, remember, are called DECK NUMBERS, and are
located on the front of the outer rails.
UPRIGHT RAILS TO ROLLERS
The following procedure explains how to:
1st-Measure
2nd-Adjust
rail-to-roller
rail-to-roller
clearance.
clearance.
The triple stage upright, as the name implies . . .
. . . has three sets of upright rails. The rails are
identified as . . .
5-155
. . . outer rails . . .
. . . intermediate rails . . .
. . . and inner rails.
When the lift cylinder is raised, the fork carriage extends
through what is called the “ f r e e l i f t ” p o r t i o n o f c y l i n d e r
travel. Just beyond the maximum free lift position, the
rollers on the top of the carriage are visible as they
extend out from the top of the Inner rails.
5-156
As the maximum free lift position is reached, the primary
cylinder piston head trips a latch that permits the inner and
intermediate rails to rise to maximum fork height. At the
left the piston head approaches the latch . . . on the right
the piston head trips the latch . . .
. . . permitting the rails to extend.
The upright is equipped with 8 rollers. These diagrams
show the positions of the rollers within the triple stage
upright.
There are four rollers that work between the outer rails
and intermediate rails . . .
5-157
. . . and four rollers that work between the intermediate rails
and inner rails.
Sharp fork truck mechanics know that with age and wear, the
...
. . . clearance between upright rails can increase and cause
excessive looseness between rails. Upright rollers become
worn, rail surfaces wear, and stress relieving due to
handling of heavy loads over a period of time may cause
slight dimensional changes between upright rails.
MEASURING RAIL-TO-ROLLER CEARANCE
The method for measuring rail-to-roller clearance is
quite easy.
We’ll use this graphic example that shows the upright
rails without flanges, to show how it’s done. The
triple stage upright has four sets of rollers.
One set at the top of the outer rails . . .
5-158
. . . a second set at the bottom of the intermediate rails . . .
. . . a third set at the top inside of the intermediate rails,
and . . .
. . . a fourth set at the bottom of the inner rails.
The white arrows show clearance between the inner rails
and the top roller set of the intermediate rails.
5-159
By prying the rails to the right, we move all clearance to
the left side . . .
. . . by prying rails left, we have all clearance at the right.
In this way rail-to-roller clearance for each roller set IS
easily measured . . . as your'll see in a moment.
But obtaining the value for rail-to-roller clearance at only
one point is not always satisfactory, since rails cannot be
made or welded perfectly parallel.
measurement . . . rail-to-roller clearance is checked at more than one
place for each roller set. Clearance is checked with:
-- upright lowered,
- - at one-half extension and,
- - at full extension
-- for EACH ROLLER SET.
rails are welded in a slight “A” configuration . . . to make clearance minimal at
maximum upright extension.
5-160
TOOLS
To check and adjust rail-to-roller clearance, you will need
the following materials in addition to common hand tools.
About four or five 4 x 4 hardwood posts In lengths from
about 12” to 4 feet.
A ten foot chain with screw type clevices or locking hooks.
A steel mechanics rule graduated in 32nds of an inch . . .
5-161
. . . and a marking block equipped with a steel scriber or a
sharply pointed pencil.
The block needs to have smooth square edges, and a locking
bolt to hold the pencil or scribe firmly.
Pry bars like these lady slippers are also needed.
To begin, drive the truck onto short pieces of 2 x 6 or wider
boards. Remember that we’ve already removed the carriage.
5-162
Set the parking brake . . .
. . . and block the steer wheels to prevent the truck from
moving forward or backward.
If the truck is gasoline, diesel, or LP powered, the work area should be well ventilated.
You'll have to operate the truck at certain times during the measurement procedure, but
it should always be turned off when measurements or adjustments are made.
Work Safely ... don’t put your hands or feet between moving parts unless they’re secured
to prevent movement, and keep personnel away from truck controls during the service procedure,
WORK SAFELY
MEASURING RAIL-TO-ROLLER CLEARANCE
With the rule, a pencil or marking pen, a marking block, and
pry bars, you’re ready to make measurements.
5-163
Begin by measuring the clearance between the top roller set of
the outer rails and the intermediate rails.
With the upright down, insert the pry bar between the outer
and intermediate rail on the left and pry with moderate
pressure to the riqht.
Hold the block flush with the flange of the intermediate
rail and scribe a short line on the outer rail.
Then place the pry bar between the outer and intermediate
rail on the right side and pry gently to the left, and then
opposite the first scribe mark, make a second mark.
5-164
Then measure the distance between the two marks.
With pencil or a marking pen, record this below the scribe
In this case it is 7/32nds of an inch.
marks.
This means that 7/32nds of an inch is the total clearance
between this roller set and the intermediate rails when
they’re down completely.
Then raise the upright so that it is one-half extended and
shut off the truck. Repeat the same process. Pry the.
intermediate and inner rails right, make a mark . . .
5-165
. . . and then pry the intermediate and Inner rails left, and
make a parallel mark.
Measure the distance between the marks with a rule end record
the distance directly under the scribe marks.
Then raise the upright to full extension and shut off the
truck. Pry left, make a mark -- pry right, make a second
mark, and record the distance between them.
In this example the clearance of the top of the outer rails
with roller set at the LOP of the intermediate rails is
7/32nds of an Inch, 5/32nds of an inch, and 4/32nds of
an inch, when measured with the upright down, et one half
extension and fully extended.
Here we’ve re-written the values to make them more readable.
Remember that clearance is always written on the rail that
the rollers are attached to. These rollers are on the top
of the outer rails . . . so we’ve written clearance values
on the top of an outer rail. We shim to the smallest value,
which is 4/32nds of an inch.
5-166
Four shims will be added to the pair of rollers at the top
of the outer rails.
Next, determine clearance between the roller set at the
bottom of the intermediate rails.
With the upright rails raised slightly, and truck shut off,
pry the intermediate rail to the left, then right, and record
the clearance.
Repeat with the upright at one-half extension . . . pry
right...
5-167
. . . then left and record the clearance.
Repeat the same operation at full upright extension with the
key off. Pry to the right, make a mark...
. . . pry to the left, make a mark: measure the distance
between marks and record It.
The clearance between the roller set at the bottom of the
intermediate rails is 4/32nds, 6/32nds, and 8/32nds of an
inch. Shimming to the smallest value requires that four shims
be added to the roller set at the bottom of the intermediate rails.
Fig. 16343
5-168
Now we will measure clearance between the rollers set at
the top of the intermediate rails with the inner rails.
With upright fully down, pry the inner rails to the right and
make a mark on the intermdiate rail,
Note that the marking block is now placed on the flange of the
Inner rail.
Pry the inner rail to the left, and make a parallel mark.
Measure the distance between them and record it.
5-169
Repeat the same procedures at one-half and . . .
. . . at full upright extension. The key should be off
when making each measurement.
Notice that you must work quite high off the ground . . . use
ladders and maintenance stands that meet applicable
OSHA standards.
Clearance between the top intermediate roller set and inner
rails at full down, one-half extension and full extension,
is 2/32nds, 4/32nds and 6/32nds of an inch. We will
shim to 2/32nds of an inch, so two shims must be added
to the roller set at the top of the intermediate rails.
5-170
The last set of rollers that we must determine clearance for
are those at the bottom of the inner rails.
With the key off and rails slightly extended, pry right . . .
. . . pry left . . .
. . . and record the clearance.
5-171
Repeat with the
rails at one half...
... and full upright
extension ...
Here, clearance between the roller set at inner rails and
intermediate rails is found to be 3/32nds of an inch,
5/32nds of an inch, and 7/32nds of an inch. We must add
three 1/32nds inch shims to this roller set. This means
that two shims will be added to one roller and one to
the other.
Having recorded the number of shims to be added to each
set of upright rollers, we are now ready to make these
adjustments.
5-172
ADJUSTING RAIL-TO-ROLLER CLEARANCE
Remember, the parking brake is set ...
Fig, 16362
. . . drive wheels are on 2” thick boards, and steer
tires chocked.
Fig. 16363
The piston head should be up and carriage chains tied
back.
Fig. 16364
All rails have been marked with roller clearance.
Fig. 16365
5-173
We’re ready to disassemble the upright.
Fig. 16366
Always block the inner and intermediate rails when working on
the upright. Don’t put your hands or feet between parts that
move unless they are secured to prevent movement. Keep all
personnel away from truck controls during the service procedure. The key should be off at all times except when truck
operation is indicated in the procedure.
CAUTION
BLOCK INNER AND INTERMEDIATE
RAILS WHEN WORKING ON THE
UPRIGHT.
WORK SAFELY
Start the truck and raise the lift cylinder until 4 x 4
posts can be placed under the inner and intermediate
r a i I s . A longer post is placed beneath the inner rail,
since it extends higher than the intermediate rail.
Fig. 16367
Lower the lift cylinder until the rails make solid
contact with the posts, and the intermediate rail chains
become slack. Turn off the truck.
Fig. 16368
5-174
Remove the two-piece latch from the back of the inner
rail tie bar.
Fig. 16369
This is done by removing an allen head set screw and
pulling the two pieces of the latch apart.
Fig. 16370
On older uprights, the latch is disassembled by removing a cotter pin . . .
Fig. 16371
. . . driving out a roll pin . . .
Fig. 16372
5-175
. . . and then separating the halves of the latch.
Fig. 16373
Then remove the Iifting bracket or “moose horn” from the
intermediate rail lower tie bar. This is done by removing 8 bolts. Note the position of any shims behind
the lifting bracket and save them for replacement during
re-assembly later.
Fig. 16374
Push the bracket down until It’s clear of the tie bar . . .
Fig. 16375
. . . turn it 180°...
Fig. 16376
5-176
. . . and then push it down.
CAUTION
PUSH THE LIFTING BRACKET DOWN ALL THE
WAY . . . IF IT ISN’T ALL THE WAY, HYDRAULIC PRESSURE WILL PUSH IT DOWN
FORCEFULLY WHEN THE CYLINDER IS
OPERATED.
Fig. 16377
Now place a couple of sturdy wood blocks about 6" thick
on the outer-rail upper tie bar. The blocks should be
placed directly below the intermediate rail stop block.
Fig. 16378
Then stand away from the upright, start the truck, and
slowly raise the lift cylinder until the Inner and Intermediate rails are clear of the 4 x 4 posts. Remove the
posts and . . .
Fig. 16379
. . . lower the lift cylinder until the intermediate rail stop
block is seated firmly on the blocks.
Fig. 16380
5-177
Continue to lower the lift cylinder until the lift cylinder
is completely down. The inner rails will not lower further.
Turn off the truck.
Fig. 16381
Rollers at the top of the intermediate rails, and at the
bottom of the inner rails, are now exposed.
Fig. 16382
Remove the rollers one at a time at the bottom of the inner
r a i I s . Since we found the clearance between the inner rail
bottom rollers and the intermediate rail to be 4/32nds of
an inch, we wilI add two shims to each roller.
Fig. 16383
5-178
Here on your right we’re adding two shims . . .
Fig. 16384
. . . and removing the left roller for another two,
It’s important to keep track of the number of existing
shims found on each roller. The total number of shims
on each roller in the set should bee same.
Fig. 16385
If there is an odd shim, it should be kept to one side; say
the left side.
Fig. 16386
Moving now to the top set of rollers in the inner Intermediate rail set . . .
Fig. 16387
5-179
. . . our measurements Indicated a minimum clearance of 2/32nds
of an inch. In removing the top intermediate rail rollers, we
In adding
find two shims on the left and one on the right.
two shims, we’ll . . .
Fig. 16388
... have a total of 5 shims. Keeping the odd shim on the
left gives three shims on the left and . . .
Fig. 16389
. . . two on the right. This is consistent with the procedure to keep the “extra” or odd shim on the left.
Fig. 16390
Having added the shims, inspect and replace the rollers.
Fig. 16391
5-180
This completes the rail-to-roller adjustment of the inner
rail/intermediate rail set,
Fig. 16392
We will now adjust the four rollers that work between outer
and intermediate rails. Here’s the procedure for gaining
access to the rollers between the outer and intermediate
rails.
Fig. 16393
Start the truck and raise the lift cylinder until you’re able
to remove the blocks from beneath the intermediate rail stop
block.
Fig. 16394
Continue to raise the lift cylinder until 4 x 4’s can be
placed beneath the inner and intermediate rails. Longer
posts are needed here. The rails should be blocked like this.
Note that the inner rail is about one foot above the
intermediate rail. There must be some slack in the Intermediate rail chains. Turn off the truck.
Fig. 16395
5-181
Working from a secure
ladder or maintenance
stand . . . remove the
intermediate rail stop
block by removing two
bolts.
Fig. 16396
Then drape a service chain between the inner rail tie bar and
the intermediate rail tie bar so that two separate loops
are formed.
Fig. 16398
Pass the chain through the bend area of the intermediate rail
tie bar. Use a chain with sufficient capacity to support
the inner rails . . . but not so large that it won’t pass
between the tie bars.
CAUTION
USE A SERVICE CHAIN WITH ENDS THAT
CLOSE SECURELY. EITHER SNAP HOOKS
OR SCREW CLEVICES WILL WORK FINE.
Fig. 16399
Now the intermediate rail chains can be removed. Be sure
the chains are slack. Remove both chain retainers by
removing the bolts at the center of the chain shives.
Fig. 16400
5-182
Fig. 16401
Fig. 16402
Some uprights have their anchor plates welded onto the outer
r a i l s . To remove the chains on these models, cotter pins
are removed from the first link on the chains.
Fig. 16403
Drape the chains over the drive tires and coil them on the
floor where they’ll be out of your way and away from dirt,
Fig. 16404
Then stand away from the upright, start the truck, and
raise the . . .
Fig. 16405
5-183
. . . lift cylinder until the posts can be removed.
Fig. 16406
Lower the lift cylinder until the intermdiate ralis rest
on the floor. Then place a 4 x 4 beneath the inner rail and
lower the inner rail onto the post. Turn off the truck.
This is the condition of the upright.
Fig. 16407
Intermediate rail chains are dropped neatly over the drive
t i r e s , We’ve used the inner rails to lower the Intermediate
rails to the floor.
Fig. 16408
The roller sets at the bottom of the intermediate rails,
and . . .
Fig. 16409
5-184
. . . at the top of the outer rails, are not exposed for
shimming.
Fig. 16410
Remove the top rollers on the outer rails first. We find
two shims behind each roller.
Fig. 16411
Since the total clearance was 4/32nds, we will add two shims,
for a total of four, to each roller of the set . . . right . . .
Fig. 16412
Fig. 16413
Fig. 16414
5-185
Moving to the lower set of rollers, we find no shims on the
left side and one on the right side. Since our clearance was
3/32nds, we want to add three shims. We’ll have a total
of four shims.
Fig. 16415
Fig. 16416
. . . and left. Inspect and replace the rollers by tapping
them on with a soft faced hammer.
Fig. 16417
This completes the adjustment of all rollers on the triple
stage upright. We’re ready for re-assembly. To do this, the
truck is started and the ...
Fig. 16418
5-186
. . . lift cylinder is raised until the block beneath the
inner rail can be removed.
Fig. 16419
The longer blocks that were used earlier are placed again
beneath the inner and intermediate rails . . .
Fig. 16420
. . . so the upright looks like this.
The truck is shut off.
Fig. 16421
The intermediate rail chains are re-installed at their
anchor points on both sides of the outer rails ...
Fig. 16422
5-187
. . . and then the chain retainers are replaced.
Fig. 16423
The service chain is removed.
Fig. 16424
The Intermediate rail stop block is replaced . . .
Fig. 16425
. . . and the latch on the Inner rail is replaced. Here the
set screw on the current design is being tightened.
Fig. 16426
5-188
And the halves of the older style latch are being
assembled.
Fig. 16427
With the long blocks still in place, we’ll re-position the
lifting bracket.
Fig. 16428
To do this we must hold the lift cylinder valve open. The
engine is off.
Fig. 16429
Here is how we’ve propped the valve open.
CONTROLS VARY WITH DIFFERENT TRUCK MODELS.
REFER TO THE OPERATORS INSTRUCTION MANUAL
COVERING THE PARTICULAR MODEL TRUCK YOU ARE
WORKING ON.
Fig. 16430
5-189
We can now pry the bracket up . . .
Fig. 16431
. . . and turn it around.
Fig. 16432
Fig. 16433
. . . start the truck and raise the lift cylinder.
the long blocks and . . .
Remove
Fig, 16434
5-190
. . . position shorter blocks beneath the inner and intermediate
rails.
Fig. 16435
Lower the cylinder until the bolt holes for the bracket are
in line, Shut off the truck . . .
Fig, 16436
. . . and replace the 8 bolts of the lifting bracket . . .
Fig. 16437
. . . replacing any shims that were found during disassembly,
Tighten the bolts to the torque requirements listed in specifications found in GROUP 40 of this manual.
Fig. 16438
5-191
Start the truck and raise the cylinder and remove the posts
beneath the rails . . .
Fig. 16439
. . . and the lifting bracket.
Fig. 16440
Lower the lift cylinder completely.
Fig. 16441
Remove blocks from steer wheels and drive the truck off the
boards beneath the drive tires.
Fig. 16442
5-192
Replace the carriage by the procedure given in Section 10
in this manual.
Fig. 16443
When the carriage has been replaced, operate the upright and
note unusual operation.
Make operational checks and load test the upright before
placing the truck in service.
This completes the procedure for measuring rail-to-roller
clearance and the adjustment of rail-to-to roller clearance.
Work safely.
Be sure to keep rails blocked during upright disassembly and
re-assembly.
Fig. 16444
5-193
Figure 6-6. Counteweight
c. Disconnect tail light wires from wiring harness.
d. Hold tow pin “up” and remove bolt, washer,
lockwasher, and nut securing counterweight to
vehicle frame.
5-155. COUNTERWEIGHT. (See figure 6-6.)
5-156.
REMOVAL.
a. Install a suitable chain hoist or other lifting
device to a looped cable or to lifting eyes installed in
or through the two bored holes in the upper rib of
the counterweight.
e. Remove counterweight from vehicle by lifting
weight off frame hooks and then driving vehicle
forward.
5-127. INSTALLATIONS.
a. Raise counterweight to approximate mounting
height with chain hoist. (Refer to paragraph 6-24 a
above.)
b. Align rear of vehicle with counterweight. Back
vehicle slowly until vehicle frame hooks are in
slotted openings of counterweight.
Counterweight weighs approximately one
t o n ; use due safety precautions when
removing or installing the counterweight.
c. Lower counterweight until weight rests on
frame hooks.
b. Take slack from chain hoist, putting tension on
counterweight.
d. Hold tow pin “up” and install mounting bolt,
washer, lockwasher, and nut in slotted hole. Tighten
securely.
5-194
FIGURE 6-7 RADIATOR REMOVAL
1. D r a i n C o c k
2. Radiator Cap
3 . Hose Clamp
4. Upper Radiator Hose
5. Lower Radiator Hose
6. Radiator
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
Trans. Cooling Line
Trans. Cooling Line
Bolt
Lockwasher
Washer
Pad
Nut
5-158 RADIATOR
5-159 REMOVAL
a. Remove the Drivers Overhead Guard,
by removing the fasteners that mount
the Overhead Guard to the frame. (Refer to page 7-97 of parts manual). Using
a suitable chain hoist, or other lifting device lift the Drivers Overhead
Guard up and away from the machine.
b.
Remove the Counterweight fasteners
and Counterweight.
(Refer to Section
5-155 page 5-194).
c. Remove the top hood fasteners and
remove the hood.
5-195
d. Drain the radiator by opening the
drain cock (Item 1 in fig. 6-7) and
removing the radiator cap (Item 2 in
fig. 6-7).
e. Loosen the clamps (Items 3 in
fig. 6-7) that secure the upper and
lower radiator hoses (Items 4 & 5 in
fig, 6-7)
f. Place a drain pan under the radiator. Disconnect the transmission oil
cooling lines (Items 7 & 8 in fig.
6-7) and plug lines and fittings in
the radiator so contamination does
not occure.
g. Remove the fasteners (Items 9 thru
12 in fig. 6-7) that secure the radiator to the frame, remove the radiator.
5-160.
INSTALLATION
a. Position radiator onto the frame,
install the fasteners that secure the
radiator to the frame.
b. Remove the plugs in the transmission coolings lines and fittings in
the radiator, install the transmission
cooling lines onto the fittings in the
radiator.
c. Connect the upper and lower radiator hose to the radiator and tighten
the clamps.
d. Tighten the radiator drain cock.
e. Fill the cooling system with antifreeze.
f. Install the top hood and its fasteners.
g . Install the counterweight (Refer
to Section 5-155 page 5-194).
h. Install the Drivers Overhead
Guard and its fasteners.
5-196
i. Run the engine until it reaches operating temperature. Chec.. the cooling
system for leaks. Run t e truck a few
feet forward or backwards under its own
power, c h e c k t h e t r a n s m i s s i o n o i l l e v e l
; add oil if necessary.
Trouble-shooting
Hook Type Sideshift Carriage
PROBLEM
PROBABLE CAUSE
CORRECTIVE ACTION
Insufficient hydraulic oil in supply
tank.
Bring hydraulic oil supply to proper
level.
Insufficient hydraulic oil pressure.
Repair or replace hydraulic pump.
Obstruction of flow in hydraulic
line.
Remove obstruction.
Over capacity load being handled.
Reduce load weight to that recommended
for the carriage.
Insufficient lubrication.
Lubricate top segments and heel rollers.
Hydraulic pressure bypassing side
shift cylinder piston packing.
Replace worn or damaged piston seals.
Heel rollers fail
to turn.
Insufficient lubrication.
Lubricate all wear points.
Heel rollers fail
to turn (con’t.)
Contamination.
Remove pin from roller and clean.
Lubricate and reassemble.
Flat surface worn on roller.
Replace roller assembly.
Bent or damaged truck carriage.
Straighten or replace truck carriage.
Worn packing seals.
Replace cylinder packing.
Damaged or nicked chrome
finish on piston rod.
Polish the rod until the surface is smooth;
if damage is deep, replace rod.
Worn bronze bearing segments.
Replace bronze bearing segments.
Lower retaining hook loose or
damaged.
Repair or replace the hook as indicated.
Installation of new lower
mounting hooks should be
Positioned so there is 1/16
inch clearance between the
bottom of the fork bar. This
can be achieved by shims if
necessary.
Torque the hooks
to 65 ft. lbs.
Carriage fails to
move when control
lever is opened.
Side shift
cylinder leak.
Excessive
looseness of
side shift
carriage on
truck carriage.
5-197
5-161 SIDE SHIFT CYLINDER
5-162 REMOVAL
Remove the "O"-Ring and back-up
g.
ring from the Gland and Piston (Items
3 and 4 in fig. 6-9).
a.
Release the fork latches and remove
the forks.
Remove the wiper and gland packing
h.
from Gland (Items 5 and 6 in fig. 6-9).
Remove the hydraulic line tie strap
b.
and remove the hydraulic lines (items 1
and 2 in fig. 6-8) away from the fittings in the cylinder.
Install new packing and wiper into
1.
Gland.
Remove the cylinder anchor end nut
C.
(item 5 in fig. 6-8).
Remove the two cylinder rod end pin
d.
retainers and the one rod end pin (Items
6 and 7 in fig. 6-8).
Remove the cylinder (items 8 in fig.
e.
6-8) from the carriage.
Install new "O"-Ring and back-up
j .
CAUTION:
ring on Gland and Piston.
On Gland install Back-Up ring first
then "O"-Ring, o n P i s t o n i n s t a l l
"O"-Ring them Back-Up ring.
Install Piston Assembly into barrel.
k.
Make sure Piston Rod Assembly
CAUTION:
is free of all foreign material.
Install Gland into Barrel and
1.
tighten.
5-163 REPAIR
Should it be found the side shift cylinder is leaking, the cylinder packing
must be replaced.
Remove the side shift cylinder as
a.
described in Section 5-162.
Place the cylinder in a vise or
b.
other suitable clamping device.
Refer to figure 6-9 for detailed
C.
parts identification and proceed as
follows.
Remove the cylinder gland (Item 1
d.
in fig. 6-9).
Remove the piston rod assembly (Item
e.
To remove the piston rod
2 in fig. 6-9).
assembly, grab with hand and pull the
assembly out away from the barrel.
5-164 INSTALLATION
a.
Refer to figure 6-8.
Install new "O"-Rings onto the
b.
fittings and install the fittings
into the Side Shift Cylinder.
Install base end of cylinder in
C.
truck carriage cylinder anchor.
Install rod end of cylinder in fork
bar cylinder anchor.
Secure rod end with pin and
d.
Secure base end with
cotter pins.
nut.
(Tighten nut snug then turn
back 1/2 turn).
Connect the hydraulic hoses to
e.
the fittings in the cylinder and
secure the hoses with the tie straps.
f. Install the forks and latch them.
Inspect the piston rod for damage
f .
Polish the
or nicked chrome finish.
rod until the surface is smooth; if
damage is deep, replace the rod.
5-198
FIGURE 6-8
SIDE SHIFT CYLINDER REMOVAL
1. Tie strap
2.
Hydraulic l i n e
3. Fitting
4 . "O"-Ring
5.
6.
7.
8.
Nut
Cotter pin
Pin
Side Shift Cylinder
5-199
5-200
TROUBLE
PROBABLE CAUSE
REMEDY
Oil leaks at either
end of spool.
Defective “0” rings in valve
body.
Replace "0"
Spring-centered
spools do not return
to neutral.
Broken springs.
Foreign particles.
Misalignment of operating
linkage.
Replace springs.
Clean system and valve
Check linkage for
binding condition.
Worn detent.
Weak or broken detent spring.
Replace detent.
Replace detent spring.
Relief valve not properly set,
or stuck in base and/or worn.
Dirt or foreign particles
lodged between relief valve
control poppet and seat.
Spool not moved to full stroke.
Repair, clean and
read just.
Disassemble, clean and
reassemble.
No
relief
valve
action (High
Pressure).
Small particle of dirt
plugging orifice in relief
vaIve sub-assembly.
Remove relief valve
and check hole. If
blocked, clear hole.
Load will not hold.
Oil by-passing between spool
and body.
Oil by-passing piston in
cvlinder.
Spool not centered.
Replace valve.
Load drops when
spool is moved from
neutral to a power
Dirt or foreign particles
lodged between check valve
poppet and seat.
Disassemble, clean and
reassemble.
position.
Scored or sticking check
vaIve poppet.
Replace poppet.
Detent t y p e s p o o l s
will n o t s t a y i n
detent position.
Jo motion, slow or
jerky action of
hydraulic system.
rings.
Check travel.
Repair or replace
cylinder.
Refer to above spool
remedies.
5-201
5-165 INSPECTION AND MAINTENANCE
Periodic inspection of spool operat i o n ,o i l c o n d i t i o n a n d p r e s s u r e
connections saves time consuming
breakdowns and unnecessary parts
replacement.
b . End Caps - Remove the snap ring
(Item 1 in Fig. 6-10) which secures
the spool and cap and remove the cap
(Item 2 in Fig. 6-10)
a . All hydraulic connections
must be tight. Loose connections
not only allow leakage but also
permit air to be drawn into the
system resulting in noisy and
erratic operation.
C. O p e r a t i n g S p o o l - S l i d e t h e
spool (Item 5 in Fig. 6-10) out of
its bore from the cap end and remove
the "o"-rings (Item 6 in Fig 6-10)
from the valve body around the spool
b a s e . DO NOT remove the centering
spring assembly (Item 4 in Fig. 6-10)
unless it is necessary to replace
it.
b . Spool should return to
neutral automatically when control
is released. If more force is
necessary, the spool may be binding or control linkage may be
faulty.
d . Check Valve - Remove the check
plug (Item 7 in Fig 6-10)
valve
Remove the "o"-ring (Item 8 in Fig.
Remove the spring (Item 9 in
6-10).
Fig. 6-10) and poppet (Item 10 in
Fig. 6-10) from the valve body.
C. S y s t e m f i l t e r s a n d r e s e r v o i r
should be checked periodically for
If excessive
foreign particles.
contamination is found, the system
should be drained. The reservoir
must be cleaned thoroughly before
refilling.
e. Relief Valve - Remove the relief
valve plug (Item 11 in Fig. 6-10).
Remove the "o'-ring (Item 12 in Fig.
Remove the spring (Item 13
6-10).
in Fig. 6-10) and relief valve (Item
14 in Fig. 6-10) from the valve body.
5-166 OVERHAUL
During disassembly, give particular
attention to identification and
orientation of parts for reassembly.
Spools are selectively fitted to
valve bodies from which they were
removed.
Figure 6-10 is an exploded view
showing the proper relationship for
reassembly. R e f e r t o t h i s f i g u r e
in the procedures which follow.
5-167 DISSASSEMBLY
a . C o n t r o l s - Be sure the unit
is not subjected to pressure. Disconnect and cap all lines to the
Aux Valve and disconnect linkage to
t h e s p o o l . Remove Auxiliary Valve
from machine.
5-202
f . Valve Body - Remove all the
plugs and "0 "-ring from the blocked
ports on the valve body.
5-168 CLEANING, INSPECTION AND REPAIR
a . D i s c a r d a l l o l d s e a l s . Wash
all parts in a clean mineral oil
solvent and place them on a clean
surface for inspection.
b . Carefully remove burrs by
light stoning or lapping. Be certain
there is no paint or burrs on matting
s u r f a c e s o f v a l v e b o d i e s . Check all
parts for wear. Replace if necessary.
Inspect the valve spool and
C.
bores for burrs and scoring. If
scoring is not deep enough to cause
objectionable leakage, the surfaces
can be stoned or polished with crocus
If scoring is excessive, the
cloth.
valve body and spool must be replaced.
Check the valve spool for freedom of
movement in the base.
d. Check the relief valve for
smooth movement in its bore. The
Relief Valve should move by its
own weight.
5-169 ASSEMBLY
NOTE
Coat all parts with clean hydraulic
oil to facilitate reassembly and
provide initial lubrication.
a . Valve Body - I n s t a l l n e w
“ 0 ”- r i n g s o n p o r t p l u g s a n d p l u g
the appropriate valve body ports
(Refer to Fig. 6-10).
Install
plugs in cylinder "B" port, inlet
port and cylinder "a" port).
b . Relief Valve - I n s t a l l " o "
ring on relief valve plug (Item 12
to 11 in Fig 6-10). P l a c e r e l i e f
valve assembly (Item 14 in Fig.
6-10) in its bore.
Install spring
and plug (Item 13 and 11) in its
bore and tighten plug securely
but DO NOT overtighten.
C. Check Valves - I n s t a l l a n e w
"0" - r i n g (item 8 in Fig. 6-10) on
the check valve plug (Item 7 in Fig.
6-10) Place poppet (Item 10 in Fig.
6-10) and spring (Item 9 in Fig. 6-10)
in the valve body and install the plug
(Item 7 in Fig. 6-10).
d . Operating Spool.
Install new
“ 0 ”- r i n g s ( I t e m 6 i n F i g . 6 - 1 0 ) i n
"0"-rings grooves in the valve body
at each end of spool bore.
Install
spool (Item 5 in Fig. 6-10) in its
base from cap end. I n s t a l l e n d c a p
(Item 2 in Fig. 6-10) and end cap
retainer (Item 1 in Fig. 6-10).
Install Aux. Valve assembly
e.
onto the machine. Remove the caps
from the hydraulic lines and install
Install
the lines to the valve.
linkage.
5-203
5-204
5-170.
EXHAUST SYSTEM
5-173.
5-171.
REMOVAL (Refer to Figure 6-11)
a. Installation of the exhaust
system is the reverse of removal.
a.
Raise seat deck and open side hoods.
b. Remove the two nuts (Item 1) that
mount the exhaust pipe to the manifold
and remove the clamp (Item 2) that clamps
the exhaust pipe (manifold end Item 3)
and the exhaust pipe (muffler end Item 4)
and remove the exhaust pipe (manifold end
Item 3).
C. Remove the clamp (Item 5) that clamps
the exhaust pipe (muffler end Item 4) to the
muffler (Item 6) then remove the exhaust
pipe (muffler end) (Item 4) by pulling up
and out of the machine.
d. Turn the steering wheel all the way
to the right and remove the capscrew,
lockwasher and washer (Item 7) from the
muffler mounting bracket (Item 9).
e. Turn the steering wheel all the way
to the left, and remove the capscrew,
lockwasher and washer (Item 8) from the
muffler mounting bracket (Item 9).
f . After removing Items 7 and 8 the
muffler will drop and can be removed from
the right side of the machine.
g. Remove the clamp (Item 10) that
clamps the tail pipe (Item 11) to the
muffler (Item 6) and remove the tail
pipe.
5-172.
INSPECTION
a. Before removal of any of the exhaust
system, inspect the entire system and
remove only the parts that are leaking,
for it is not necessary to remove the complete system.
INSTALLATION
b. When isntalling a new exhaust
system use new clamps (Items 2, 5,
and 10).
C. Before installing exhaust
pipe (manifold end) Item 3) scrape
away gasket (Item 12) from manifold
and install a new gasket (Item 12)
d. Start engine and check for
exhaust leaks.
5-174.
GOVERNOR
5-175.
REMOVAL
a. Remove air cleaner assembly
and air cleaner hose.
b.
end)
C.
Remove exhaust pipe (manifold
Remove accelerator return spring,
d. Remove oil line from timing cover
to engine block.
e. Remove governor control spring
and governor control linkage.
f . Remove the governor mounting
fasteners.
g. Remove the governor from the
machine.
5-176.
INSPECTION
a. I n s p e c t o i l s e a l f o r l e a k s ,
replace if necessary.
b. Check running clearance in governor
gear and shaft bushings (refer to Table 5,
page 5-15). If found to be outside the
limits replace governor.
5-205
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
5-177.
NUT
CLAMP
EXHAUST PIPE (MANIFOLD END)
EXHAUST PIPE (MUFFLER END)
CLAMP
MUFFLER
INSTALLATION
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
CAPSCREW, LOCKWASHER, WASHER
CAPSCREW, LOCKWASHER, WASHER
CLAMP
CLAMP
TAIL PIPE
GASKET
d.
Install accelerator return spring.
a. Install governor into the engine
timing cover and install the governor
fasteners.
e. Remove the old gasket and install a
new one on the exhaust manifold, then install the exhaust pipe (Manifold end).
b. Install the governor control
linkage and the governor control spring.
f . Install the air cleaner hose and
the air cleaner assembly.
C. I n s t a l l t h e o i l l i n e f r o m t h e
engine block to the timing cover.
5-206
5-207
Legend for Figure 6-12
1.
2.
3.
Lower Dash Panel
Capscrew
Lockwasher
4.
5.
6.
5 - 1 7 8 . GAUGE REMOVAL (Refer to Fig.
6-12 for Parts Identification).
If any instrument gauges are found
inoperative (Refer to page 3-4 for
gauge operation) remove gauge as
follows:
a.
Remove battery ground cable.
b . Remove lower dash panel fasteners (Items 2 & 3) and remove
lower dash panel (Item 1) from
machine.
C. Remove gauge bracket fasteners
(Items 4 & 5) and bracket (Item 6)
from underside of dash.
d . Remove terminal fasteners
(Items 7 & 8) and wires from termi n a l s . Lift gauge (Item 9) from
top of dash.
5-179.
GAUGE INSTALLATION.
a.
Installation is the reverse of
removal as outlined in Section 5-178.
b . Refer to wiring diagram (page
7-108) f o r c o r r e c t w i r e l o c a t i o n .
5-180.
6-13)
SEAT REMOVAL (Refer to Figure
a . Raise seat support to full open
position.
b . Remove heat shield (Item 6)
from underside of seat support by
removing 2 nuts, lockwashers, and
washers (Items 9, 8, & 7) from the
1 right-hand seat adjustor mounting
bolts (Item 3).
C. Remove 4 seat adjustor mounting bolts, lockwashers, and nuts
(Items 2, 3, 4, & 5). L i f t s e a t f r o m
machine.
5-208
Nut
Lockwasher
Bracket
5-181.
7.
8.
9.
Nut
Lockwasher
Gauge
SEAT INSPECTION
a.
Inspect seat cushion and back
rest for cuts, tears, or similar
Replace if necessary.
damage.
b . Inspect seat for loose or missing
c u s h i o n o r b r a c k r e s t f a s t e n e r s . Tighter
(Refer to page
or replace as necessary.
7-95 for upholstery mounting fasteners.
Inspect seat adjustors for loose
C.
or missing fasteners. Tighten or re(refer to page 7-95
place as necessary.
for adjustor mounting fasteners.
d . Inspect both seat adjustor mechanisms for free movement and full travel
Adjustors should travel a total of 4".
Lubricate with MIL-L-10924 grease or
replace as necessary.
e.
Inspect adjusting lever on right
hand adjustor for free operation. Lubricate if necessary with MIL-L-46152
o i l . Also make sure adjustor locks
securely into position when lever is
If not, replace entire adreleased.
justor assembly. (Refer to page 7-95
for adjustor part numbers).
5-182.
SEAT INSTALLATION
Install the 2 rear seat mounting
a.
bolts (1 eash of Items 2 & 3) through
the rear holes of seat adjustors. NOTE:
The longer bolts are used on the right
hand adjustor to facilitate the installation of the heat shield (Item 6).
b . With the seat support raised to
the full open position, set seat on
s e a t s u p p o r t , inserting the two mounting
bolts through the two rear mounting hole:
in the seat support.
C.
Install lockwashers and nuts
(Items 4 & 5) on the two rear bolts.
DO NOT tighten at this time.
d . Adjust seat all the way to the rear.
Insert 2 front seat mounting bolts (Items
2 & 3) through the front mounting holes in
the adjustors - longer bolts on the right
h a n d s i d e - and through the mounting holes
in the seat support. Install lockwashers
and nuts (Items 4 & 5).
e.
Tighten all 4 mounting bolts.
f . Place heat shield (Item 6)
over longer bolts protruding under
RH side of seat support. I n s t a l l
washers, lockwashers, and nuts
(Items 7, 8, & 9) on mounting bolts
and tighten.
g . Return seat support to a
fully closed position.
5-209
5-183.
STEER AXLE
5-184.
REMOVAL & INSPECTION.
Remove the counterweight (Refer to
a.
Section 5-155)
page 5-194.
using a 12 ton hydraulic jack and
b.
adaptor (part number of adaptors is
1801093) raise each side of the machine
frame far enough so that the steer wheels
Place heavy block under
clear the floor.
each side of the machine frame.
W A R N I N G
AFTER RAISING MACHINE AND BEFORE MAKING
ANY ADJUSTMENT OR ADJUSTMENT CHECK,
PLACE ADEQUATE (HEAVY) BLOCKING (SUFFICIENT ENOUGH TO SUPPORT THE WEIGHT OF THE
MACHINE) UNDER BOTH SIDES OF THE FRAME,
THIS PRENOT UNDER THE COUNTERWEIGHT.
VENTS ACCIDENTAL LOWERING OR FALLING OF
THE MACHINE, THUS PREVENTING PERSONAL
INJURY TO MECHANIC OR BYSTANDERS.
Remove the four capscrews that
g.
fasten the steer axle to the silent
After removing the capscrews
blocks.
the weight of the steer axle will fall
onto the floor jack.
Lower the floor jack so that the
h.
steer wheels touch the floor and remove
the floor jack.
Roll the steer axle
out from under the machine.
To inspect the spider for free
1.
play on the steer axle pin:
Remove the
tie rods from the spider and grasp hold
of the spider to see if it turns freely
and check to see if any chucking is felt!.
If any resistance to movement or chucking
is felt spider bearings must be replaced.
For replacement of spider bearings refer
to page 5-211 Section 5-186 paragraph b.
Step 1.
5-185.
A.
Inspect knuckle for chucking by
C.
grasping the steer tire on top and
bottom and try to tip steer tire and
If any
wheel assembly in and out.
chucking is felt knuckle pin and bushFor replacement
ings must be replaced.
of knuckls and bushing refer to Section
5-185, paragraph A.
To remove steer axle, remove the
d.
cotter pin from the end of the ball
socket on the end of the steer axle
drag link, and loosen the plug in the
ball socket far enough to remove the
drag link from the steer axle ball
stud.
Remove the steer axle drag link
e.
from the steer axle ball stud.
Position a floor jack under the
f .
center of the steer axle and raise jack
high enough to support the steer axle
weight.
5-210
DISASSEMBLY OF STEER AXLE
COMPONENTS.
Knuckle
Step 1.
Remove steer wheel and
tire assembly.
Step 2.
Remove tie rod end from
knuckle.
Step 3.
pin caps
center of
hammer,
housing.
Remove upper and lower
by driving down on
caps with punch and
until cap loosens from
Remove knuckle-pin lockStep 4.
pin by driving out from rear of
steer axle with drift and hammer.
Drive knuckle pin down
Step 5.
and out of steer axle and remove
knuckle.
Step 6.
Remove bushings from
steer axle housing.
B.
5-186.
A.
Spider
B.
Spider
Remove snap ring from
Step 1.
top of spider and remove shim(s)
then pull spider up and off from
the steer axle pin.
Step 1.
Install new bearings
and seals into the spider and
install spider onto the steer
axle pin.
Remove seal and bearings
Step 2.
from spider housing.
Step 2.
Install washer then
snapring onto the steer axle
pin.
Measure distance between washer and snap ring,
if distance exceeds .015 remove snap ring and add shim(s)
128517.
REASSEMBLY OF STEER AXLE COMPONENTS.
Knuckle
Install new bushings from
Step 1.
knuckle pin kit into steer axle.
Step 3.
Install tie rod end
into the spider and install tie
rod nut and torque to 68-82
ft. lbs. then turn nut to next
cotter slot and install cotter
pin.
Step 2.
Hold knuckle in place and
position new thrust bearing on top
of knuckle.
Align holes in steer axle
Step 3.
knuckle pin from the top of steer
axle.
Pull up on knuckle and
Step 4.
measure the distance between
bottom of knuckle and top of steer
axle lower knuckle housing. If
this distance exceeds .022" knuckle
pin must be removed and add one
shim (part number of shim is 100194)
between bottom of knuckle and top
of lower steer axle knuckle housing.
Step 5.
Align notch in knuckle pin
with hole in knuckle and install new
lock pin from front side of axle and
tap into place with drift and hammer.
Step 6.
Install new upper & lower
expansion plugs into the steer axle
knuckle housings.
Tap on center of
expansion plug until it flattens and
locks into housing.
Install the tie rod end into
Step 7.
the knuckle and install the nut and
torque to 68-82 -Et. lbs. then turn
nut to next cotter slot and install
cotter pin.
5-187.
STEER AXLE INSTALLATION
a.
Before installing steer axle
inspect both silent blocks for any
deflection, if radial deflection exceeds .050 or axial deflection exceed
.500 replace the silent blocks.
To replace the silent blocks
b.
proceed as follows:
Remove cotter pin from
Step 1.
nut and remove nut.
Step 2.
Remove silent block
and discard.
Step 3.
Install new silent
block and install nut and
torque to 210-260 ft. lbs.
install cotter pin.
Roll steer axle under the
C.
machine to its approximate position
for mounting.
Position floor jack in center
d.
of steer axle and raise floor jack
and at the same time aligning the
steer axle to its mounting position.
Install steer wheel and
Step 8.
tire assembly to the steer axle.
5-211
Install the four capscrews that
e.
fasten the steer axle to the silent
block and torque to 140 ft. lbs.
Remove the floor jack and install
f .
the drag link over the steer axle ball
stud and tighten plug in the end of ball
Install cotter
socket of the drag link.
pin.
Raise machine with 12 ton hydraulic
g.
Lower machine
jack and remove blocking.
to floor and grease steer axle assembly
with grade NLG #1 per MS107B.
Install counterweight (refer to
h.
Section 5-157, page 5-194).
5-212
SECTION 7-1 ILLUSTRATED PARTS BREAKDOWN INDEX
THIS SECTION INCLUDES THE FOLLOWING PAGES
PART
PAGE
Accelerator Pedal and Linkage
Adjustable Headlamp . . . . .
Air Cleaner . . . . . . . . .
Alternator. . . . . . . . . .
Alternator Mounting . . . . .
Auxiliary Valve . . . . . . .
Auxiliary Valve Installation.
Axle Adaptor and Differential
Axle End Assembly . . . . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.7-29
.7-54
.7-25
.7-53
.7-50
.7-86
7-116
.7-58
.7-59
Ball Socket Assembly. . . . . . . .7-73
Brake Cylinder Mount. . . . . . . .7-67
Brake Pedal and Linkage . . . . . .7-66
Camshaft . . . . . . .
Carburetor . . . . . .
Converter Pump . . . .
Cooling System . . . .
Crankcase. . . . . . .
Crankcase Head . . . .
Crankcase Ventilation.
Crankshaft . . . . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
. .7-10
. 7-30
. 7-32
. 7-22
. .7-8
. .7-7
.7-114
. .7-9
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.7-109
. 7-39
. 7-49
. 7-68
Electric Assemblies Mounting .
Engine Balancing System. . . .
Engine Mount . . . . . . . . .
Engine Oil Filter. . . . . . .
Engine Oil Lines . . . . . . .
Engine Short Block and Engine
Gasket Sets. . . . . . . . .
Engine Sub-Assembly Mounting .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
Data Plates and Decals . . .
Directional Control Linkage.
Distributor. . . . . . . . .
Drive Wheels and Tires . . .
.
7-51
7-13
7-14
7-18
7-21
. . .7-5
. . .7-4
Fan and Drive . . . . . . . . .
Frame and Counterweight . . . .
Front End Cover . . . . . . . .
Front End Cover (continued) . .
Fuel Filter . . . . . . . . . .
Fuel Lines. . . . . . . . . . .
Fuel Pump . . . . . . . . . . .
Governor . . . . . . . . . . . .
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.7-19
.7-102
. 7-11
. 7-12
.7-28
.7-27
.7-26
.7-15
PART
PAGE
Hose Adaptation For Devices . . 7-110
Hose Adaptation For Devices . . 7-111
Hydratork Transmission . . . . . 7-34
Hydratork Transmission (cont’d). 7-41
Hydratork Transmission (cont’d). 7-42
Hydraulic Brake Lines. . . . . . 7-65
Hydraulic Pump . . . . . . . . . 7-82
Hydraulic Pump Drive . . . . . . 7-80
Hydraulic Sump Filter. . . . . . 7-81
Hydraulic Tilt Lines . . . . . . 7-88
Hydraulic Valve. . . . . . . . . 7-83
Hydraulic Valve. . . . . . . . . 7-84
Hydraulic Valve Mounting . . . . 7-90
Inching Check Valve. . . . . . . 7-64
Inching Master Cylinder. . . . . 7-63
Instrument Panel . . . . . . . . 7.103
Lamp Installation. . . . . . . .7-115
Lift Carriage Assembly . . . . . . 7-98
Lift Cylinder. . . . . . . . . . 7-96
Lift Cylinder Piping . . . . . . 7-97
Load Safety Rack- . . . . . . . .7-100
Main Hydraulic and Lift
Manifold . . . . . . . .
Master Cylinder . . . .
Muffler. . . . . . . . .
Lines.
. . .
. . .
. . .
.
.
.
.
7-89
7-23
7-60
7-24
Oil Pan. . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-16
Oil Pump . . . . . . . . . . . . 7-17
Overhead Guard . . . . . . . . . 7-106
Parking Brake . . . . . .
Parking Brake Linkage. . .
Power Steering Cylinder. .
Power Steering Lines . . .
Power Steering Pump. . . .
. .
. .
. .
. .
. .
Seat . . . . . . . . . . . .
Seat Mounting. . . . . . . . .
Sheave Carrier and Lift Chain.
Sheet Metal. . . . . . . . . .
Sheet Metal (continued). . . .
Side Shifter Components. . . .
Side Shifter Cylinder. . . . .
.
.
.
.
.
7-62
7-70
7-74
7-77
7-78
. 7-104
. 7-105
. 7-101
. 7-107
. 7-108
.7-113
.7-112
7-1
SECTION 7-1 ILLUSTRATED PARTS BREAKDOWN INDEX
THIS SECTION INCLUDES THE FOLLOWING PAGES
PART
Starter Motor . . . . . .
Steer Wheels and Tires. .
Steering Axle . . . . . .
Steering Axle (continued)
Steering Gear . . . . . .
Steering Linkage. . . . .
Steering Pump Drive . . .
Stop and Tail Light . . .
PAGE
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
Tilt Cylinder . . . . . . .
Tilt Cylinder Mounting. . .
Tilt Lock Valve . . . . . .
Torque Convertor. . . . . .
Transmission Clutch Pack. .
Transmission Clutch Pack. .
Transmission Control Cover.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
. .7-91
. .7-92
. .7-87
. .7-31
. .7-33
. .7-36
. .7-37
7-2
.7-48
.7-69
.7-75
.7-76
.7-71
.7-72
.7-79
.7-55
PAGE
PART
Transmission Control Cover.
Transmission Cooling Lines.
Transmission Fasteners. . .
Transmission Mounting Parts
Transmission Oil Filter . .
.
.
.
.
.
. .7-38
. .7-46
. .7-45
. .7-44
. .7-47
Upright . . . . . . . . . . . .
Upright Support . . . . . . . .
.7-93
.7-99
Valve Control Linkage . . . . .
.7-85
Water Pump . .
Wheel Brake. .
Wiring Diagram
Wiring Harness
Wiring Harness
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
. 7-20
. 7-61
. FO-1
. 7-56
. 7-57
7-3
7-4
7-5
GASKETS SETS FOR D176 WAUKESHA ENGINE
CLARK PART NUMBER
WAUKESHA NUMBER
ENGINE GASKET SET
WASHER
WASHER
COPPER GASKET
VALVE STEM SEAL
CYL. HEAD GASKET
OIL PAN GASKET
GASKET
GASKET
GASKET
GASKET
GASKET
GASKET
GASKET
GASKET
SEAL
GASKET
"0"-RING
SEAL
GASKET
GASKET
GASKET
GASKET
GASKET
WASHER
GASKET
GASKET
(4) O-RING
O-RING
GASKET
GASKET
.
.
.
.
.
7-6
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
.
VALVE GRIND GASKET SET
VALVE STEM SEAL
GASKET
GASKET
GASKET
GASKET
7-7
2351514 ENGINE ASSEMBLY
00.012-999279
1 SHORT BLOCK ASSEMBLY
00.100-994724
1 ENGINE GASKET SET
00.101-994725
1
01.085-890883
1 0IL PAN GASKET SET
VALVE GRIND GASKET SET
7-8
7-9
7-10
7-11
7-12
7-13
7-14
7-15
7-16
7-17
7-18
7-19
7-20
7-21
7-22
7-23
7-24
7-25
7-26
7-27
7-28
7-29
7-30
7-31
THE COMPONENTS OF THIS CONVERTER CHARGING
PUMP ARE NOT SERVICEABLE, REPLACE WITH A
NEW PUMP,
START -1-4560
END - AND ABOVE
CONVERTER PUMP
450263 CONVERTER PUMP
29,300-450263
7-32
1
CONVERTER CHARGING PUMP
7-33
7-34
7-35
7-36
7-38
7-39
06-418 DIRECTIONAL CONTROL LINKAGE
05.179-1300396
05.180-1300396
05.181-130096
05.182-1300396
06.006-713668
06.007-1318256
06.008-4F6106
06.008-1F312
06.009-2J6208
06.010-8D6J
06.011-1689775
06.012-1318257
06.016-799759
06.034-1311798
06.035-6J404
06.036-4F6106
06.036-1F312
06.037-1318256
06.038-1318256
06.039-1318256
06.040-1311668
06.041-1318256
06.042-1311668
06.043-9G816J
06.043-20E8
06.046-1318256
06.047-1318256
06.048-1318257
06.049-1689775
06.053-1311673
06.067-4F6106
06.067-lF312
06.070-4F6106
06.070-1F312
06.073-4F6106
06.073-1F312
06.079-4F6106
06.079-1F312
06.089-4F6106
06.089-1F312
06.090-1318734
06.091-8D6J
06.092-2J6208
06.093-4F6106
06.093-1F312
06.094-2C524J
06.094-23E6
06.094-6205J
06.095-1318256
06.096-1625357
06.097-6J404
06.098-1625457
06.099-1C624
06.099-23E6
06.099-61D6J
06.100-1625354
06.101-1721259
06.110-1697899
7-40
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
2
2
1
1
1
1
1
2
1
2
2
2
1
1
1
1
4
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
2
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
THRUST WASHER
THRUST WASHER
THRUST WASHER
THRUST WASHER
FWD & REV LINK
BUSHING
ROD END PIN
COTTER
FWD & REV LINK CLEVIS
ROD END NUT
FWD & REV LEVER
BUSHING
RETAINING RING
RING
KEY
FWD & REV PIN
COTTER
LEVER BUSHING
LEVER BUSHING
BUSHING
BUSHING
BUSHING
BUSHING
MTG BRACKET BOLT
LOCKWASHER
BUSHING
BUSHING
LEVER BUSHING
SPEED SEL LEVER
BRACKET BUSHING
LINK PIN
COTTER
LINK PIN
COTTER
LINK PIN
COTTER
PIN
COTTER
PIN
COTTER
SPD SELECTOR LINK
NUT
CLEVIS
LINK PIN
COTTER
BOLT
LOCKWASHER
NUT
BUSHING
ARM W/BUSHING
SHAFT KEY
SHAFT
BOLT
LOCKWASHER
NUT
SPD SEL LEVER
FWD & REV LEVER
FWD & REV LINK
06.111-1704250
06.126-1C624
06.126-23E6
06.126-61D6J
06.128-1721284
06.130-1625446
06.131-23E6
06.131-61D6J
06.155-1689767
06.157-1692547
06.158-1311651
06.158-1F210
06.159-1311651
06.159-1F210
06.160-1689767
06.161-1318257
06.163-1697896
06.164-1311651
06.164-1F210
06.165-1311651
06.165-1F210
06.166-2311286
06.168-1318257
06.170-1704258
06.171-1C524J
06.171-23E5
06.171-61D5J
06.907-2321946
06.908-2321946
06.909-2321946
06.910-2321946
06.911-2314196
06.912-2314196
1
1
1
1
1
1
2
2
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
SPEED LINK
LEVER BOLT
LOCKWASHER
NUT
FWD & REV SHAFT
MOUNTING BRACKET
LOCKWASHER
NUT
LEVER
SPD SELECTOR LINK
LINK PIN
COTTER
LINK PIN
COTTER
LEVER
BUSHING
LINK
LINK PIN
COTTER
PIN
COTTER
BRACKET
BUSHING
FWD & REV ARM
BOLT
LOCKWASHER
NUT
BOLT
BOLT
BOLT
BOLT
KNOB
KNOB
7-41
7-42
7-43
START - 1-4560
END - AND ABOVE
7-44
TRANSMISSION MOUNTING PARTS
7-45
7-46
7-47
7-48
7-49
7-50
7-51
7-52
7-53
7-54
7-55
7-56
Change 1
7-57
7-58
7-59
Page 7-60 is rescinded.
Change 1
7-61
7-62
Page 7-63 is rescinded.
7-64
Change 1
23-696 HYDRAULIC BRAKE LINES
23.142-16F2
23.146-1309676
23.173-859727
23.174-613750
223.175-620236
23.176-620238
23.186-430565
23.188-1719180
23.207-1719179
23.208-1721252
23.209-1311480
23.224-107802
23.225-107802
23.226-615374
23.227-615374
23.228-107801
23.229-107801
23.230-615374
23.231-615374
1
1
1
2
1
1
1
2
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
PLUG
FITTING
FITTING
GASKET
FITTING BOLT
GASKET
LINE
CLIP
LINE (LH)
LINE (RH)
TEE
FITTING BOLT
FITTING BOLT
GASKET
GASKET
FITTING
FITTING
GASKET
GASKET
23.436-1309676
23.437-892250
23.438-2352547
23.613-430565
23.630-59F2
23.631-59F2
23.632-1742408
23.634-1758173
23.659-1742407
23.689-1692507
23.807-613750
23.808-859727
23.809-620238
23.810-620236
23.819-16F2
23.856-41K2
23.870-2351790
23.886-799119
1
2
1
1
1
1
1
1
2
2
1
1
1
1
1
1
2
2
FITTING
BLEEDER
LINE
L I NE
FITTING
FITTING
LINE
LINE
LINE
DUST COVER
GASKET
FITTING
GASKET
FITTING BOLT
PLUG
PLUG
INCHING CK VALVE
RETAINER
7-65
23-772 BRAKE PEDAL AND LINKAGE
22.027-8D7
22.040-8D7
22.055-1302813
23.084-1C614
23.085-1C614
23.100-2348281
23.114-1618250
23.118-4F7115
23.119-1311671
23.125-1625319
23.126-1C628
23.136-316480
23.139-2308056
23.439-2347886
23.440-1618250
23.446-1625319
23.559-1304028
7-66
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
2
4
1
1
1
1
2
1
NUT
NUT
ROD END
CAPSCREW
CAPSCREW
BRAKE PEDAL
PAD
PIN
BUSHING
PILLOW BLOCK
BOLT
SPRING
STOP
BRK INCHING PEDAL
PAD
PILLOW BLOCK
ANCHOR
23.560-4F7115
23.561-1302813
23.563-2308056
23.665-2327985
23.854-1311671
23.855-7D5
23.876-1C628
91.687-1F312
92.026-1F312
92.027-23E6
92.028-61D6
92.029-23E6
92.030-61D6
92.031-23E6
92.032-25E17
92.033-25El7
92.034-23E6
1
1
1
1
1
2
4
1
1
4
4
2
2
1
1
1
1
PIN
ROD END
STOP
SPRING
BUSHING
NUT
BOLT
COTTER
COTTER
LOCKWASHER
NUT
LOCKWASHER
NUT
LOCKWASHER
WASHER
WASHER
LOCKWASHER
7-67
7-68
Change 1
7-69
7-70
Change 1
1618298 STEERING GEAR ASSEMBLY
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
2
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
25.032-991735
25.033-850063
25.034-1C716
25.034-23E7
25.039-40K8
25.040-898457
25.041-898458
25.042-898459
25.043-1C612
25.043-23E6
25.044-851770
25.045-853187
25.046-8D7
25.094-898455
25.098-898456
1
2
3
3
1
1
1
1
3
3
1
* 1
1
1
1
25.342-898461
1
STEERING GEAR ASSEMBLY
HORN BUTTON SET
NUT
WASHER
STEERING HANDWHEEL
SPRING
SEAT
BEARING ASSEMBLY
BOLT
WASHER
CLAMP
LOCKWASHER
NUT
NUT
CUP
BEARING
BEARING
CUP
GROMMET
SHAFT & BALL NUT
SEAL
BUSHING
CAPSCREW
LOCKWASHER
FILLER PLUG
SHAFT & GEAR
GASKET
COVER & BUSHING
BOLT
LOCKWASHER
ADJUSTOR
SHIM KIT
NUT
END COVER
HOUSING, JACKET AND
BUSHING
RETAINER
7-71
25-177 SLEERING LINKAGE
25.031-1697860
25.031-23E14
25.047-1305959
25.047-7D8
25.051-1719187
25.054-12H15
25.055-1F530
25.056-894355
25.063-1636426
25.064-2C836
25.064-23E8
25.064-62D8
25.065-12H15
25.071-1636478
25.072-635448
25.073-635451
25.075-604405
25.076-604406
25.077-1F428
25.087-8D22
7-72
1
1
1
2
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
2
1
1
1
NUT
LOCKWASHER
ADJUSTOR
NUT
DRAG LINK (STEER AXLE)
LUB FITTING
COTTER
BALL SOCKET ASSEMBLY
ROD END
BOLT
LOCKWASHER
NUT
LUB FITTING
PITMAN ARM
DUST COVER
DUST COVER
PRESSURE CUP
PLUG
COTTER
NUT
25.090-635451
25.120-634924
25.122-1636454
25.123-106328
25.124-106329
25.125-356057
25.179-635448
25.374-2315068
26.020-782874
26.021-4D14
26.021-1F428
26.050-726958
26.051-1614023
26.052-852372
26.052-8D8
38.261-660231
38.263-1766527
38.264-1C1032
38.264-23E10
38.264-25E25
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
2
2
1
1
1
1
2
2
2
DUST COVER
SEAT
DRAG LINK (PITMAN ARM)
BUMPER
SPRING
CLAMP
DUST COVER
BRACKET
DUST COVER
NUT
COTTER
WASHER
INSULATOR
NUT
NUT
BUSHING
BRACE
CAPSCREW
LOCKWASHER
WASHER
894355 BALL SOCKET ASSEMBLY
25.056-894355
1
BALL SOCKET ASSEMBLY
25.057-429224
1
SPRING GUIDE
25.058-429225
1
SPRING
25.059-429226
2
PRESSURE CUP
25.060-886331
1
PLUG
7-73
180040 POWER STEERING CYLINDER ASSEMBLY
26.000-180040
26.001-135101
1
1
26.002-755855
26.003-136882
26.004-136861
26.005-134455
26.006-10J6
26.007-135059
26.007-1F208J
26.008-134060
26.009-134059
26.010-134116
26.011-784057
26.012-135058
26.014-134076
26.015-134055
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
2
1
1
1
1
1
2
CYLINDER ASSEMBLY
SUB-ASSEMBLY WITH
ROD SEALS
SNAP RING
PISTON ROD SEAL KIT
VALVE SEAL KIT
CHECK VALVE
BALL
SPOOL NUT
COTTER
WASHER
SPACER
SPRING
WASHER
BOLT
SPRING WASHER
BALL STUD SEAT
26.016-134054
26.017-94G684J
26.018-952319
26,019-134052
26.020-134070
26.021-4D14J
26.021-1F428J
26.022-135076
26.023-134056
26.024-134078
26.029-18C628CR
26.029-23E6
26.029-64D6J
26.042-134289
26.043-136808
26.076-136873
26.077-134430
1
4
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
SLEEVE
CAPSCREW
GREASE FITTING
STUD
SHIELD
NUT
COTTER
BALL STUD HOUSING
PLUG
LOCK RING
BOLT
LOCKWASHER
NUT
SEAL RETAINER
SEAL RETAINER KIT
VALVE BODY KIT
SPOOL
193348 STEERING AXLE ASSEMBLY (CONTINUED)
26.100-193348
26.121-13G732C
26.122-108792
26.123-10705
26.124-100194
26.125-103890
26.129-11H15
26.130-654388
26.131-654388
26.132-129088
26.133-103861
26.134-654139
1
2
2
AR
AR
2
4
2
2
1
2
2
STRG AXLE ASSEMBLY
SCREW
KEY
BEARING
SHIM
GREASE FITTING
FITTING
BEARING
KNUCKLE (RH)
KNUCKLE (RH)
SEAL
CONE
26.135-654167
26.136-122354
26.138-654162
26.139-654134
26.140-100588
26.141-100575
26.142-815984
26.143-122324
26.148-129089
26.170-12F108
26.279-7D7J
26.281-1F428J
2
2
2
2
2
9
2
2
1
4
2
2
CUP
HUB & CUP
CUP
CONE
WASHER
NUT
KNUCKLE PIN KIT
CAP
KNUCKLE
EXPANSION PLUG
NUT
COTTER
7-75
193348 STEERING AXLE ASSEMBLY (CONTINUED)
26.100-193348
26.101-107136
26.102-103404
26.103-2C730
26.104-12H15
26.105-10H25
26.106-111563
26.107-10H25
26.111-128518
26.112-663834
26.113-128521
26.114-1F416
26.115-4D10
26.117-128516
26,119-128519
26.129-11H15
26.145-103405
26.146-103406
26.149-120514
7-76
1
2
4
4
2
2
4
1
2
1
1
4
4
1
1
4
2
2
1
STRG AXLE ASSEMBLY
TIE ROD
CLAMP
BOLT
LUB FITTING
LUB FITTING
DUST COVER
LUB FITTING
BEARING
SNAP RING
SPIDER
COTTER
NUT
WASHER
AXLE & BUSHING
LUB FITTING
TIE ROD END (RH)
TIE ROD END (LH)
TIE ROD ASSEMBLY (RH)
26.150-120514
26.171-1722071
26.172-2C1056
26.173-4D18
26.174-1722071
26.175-4D18
26.176-2C1056
26.177-128515
26.183-122050
26.184-122051
26.189-128517
90.985-23E10
90.987-1F636
90.988-23E10
90.990-1F636
91.373-86D7
92.103-104412
92.104-1F416
1
1
2
1
1
1
2
2
1
1
AA
2
1
2
1
4
1
1
TIE ROD ASSEMBLY (LH)
SILENT BLOCK
CAPSCREW
NUT
SILENT BLOCK
NUT
CAPSCREW
SEAL
BALL STUD
NUT
SHIM
LOCKWASHER
COTTER
LOCKWASHER
COTTER
NUT
WASHER
COTTER
START -1-4560
END - AND ABOVE
POWER STEERING LINES
26-116 POWER STEERING LINES
28.258-91F7
28.290-667289
29.090-1765756
31.098-42H10
31.099-1307059
31.100-1307059
31.102-15K10
31.104-1307833
31.111-660408
31.111-17K7
31.115-656644
31.116-17K6
31.121-66686
31.122-663264
31.147-2337313
31.149-1303429
1
1
1
2
26"
2.5"
1
1
1
23"
1
1
1
1
1
1
O-RING
CONNECTOR
STEEP PUMP FILTER
CLAMP
HOSE
HOSE
CONNECTOR
ELBOW
ELBOW
HOSE
HOSE ASSEMBLY
ELBOW
CONNECTOR
HOSE COUPLING
TUBE
CONNECTOR
31.161-730086
31.164-660408
31.373-91F5
31.399-91F6
31.449-91F10
31.466-91F6
31.479-6H21
31.499-6lD5
31.606-1307059
31.607-1316264
31.608-42H10
31.681-1300693
31.745-11K6
31.749-30H50
31.885-663264
90.763-23E5
1
18"
1
1
1
1
2
2
2.5"
1
1
1
1
2
2
2
HOSE ASSEMBLY
HOSE
O-RING
O-RING
O-RING
O-RING
CLIP
NUT
HOSE
TEE
CLAMP
ELBOW
ELBOW
CLIP
HOSE COUPLING
LOCKWASHER
7-77
2316008 POWER STEERING PUMP ASSEMBLY
29.200-2316008
29.202-993346
29.203-991988
29.208-1C548J
29.208-784057
29.214-6J605
29.217-992214
29.228-993347
29.238-1C536J
29.238-784057
29.283-991990
29.284-991991
29.290-994274
29.326-991993
29.327-992215
7-78
1
1
1
2
2
1
2
1
6
6
1
1
1
1
1
PWR STRG PUMP ASSEMBLY
FLOW CONTROL VALVE
WEAR PLATE & SEAL KIT
COVER BOLT
WASHER
PUMP SHAFT KEY
COVER DOWEL
RELIEF VALVE
COVER BOLT
WASHER
GEAR & SHAFT ASSEMBLY (DRIVE)
GEAR & SHAFT ASSEMBLY (DRIVE)
COVER ASSEMBLY (SHAFT END)
SNAP RING RETAINER
SNAP RING
26-404 STEERING PUMP DRIVE
29.200-2316008
1
STEERING PUMP ASSEMBLY
29.212-4D8
1
NUT
29.269-1C624
2
CAPSCREW
29.270.618053
1
GASKET
29.271-1686577
1
GEAR
90.891-23E6
2
LOCKWASHER
92.194-1F320
1
COTTER
92.195-874606
1
WASHER
7-79
29-052 HYDRAULIC PUMP DRIVE
7-80
29.100-2334954
1
HYDRAULIC PUMP ASSEMBLY
29.106-2C828
2
CAPSCREW
29.114-4D10
1
NUT
29.143-25E29
1
WASHER
29.149-2351512
1
GEAR
29.150-2351511
1
GASKET
90.517-23E8
2
LOCKWASHER
90.518-25E21
2
WASHER
92.184-1F422
1
COTTER
93.007-25E26
1
WASHER
START -1-4560
END - AND ABOVE
HYDRAULIC SUMP FILTER
1799525 HYDRAULIC SUMP FILTER ASSEMBLY
29.738-1799525
29.728-1779011
29.740-1810437
29.742-1798012
29.754-1784651
29.759-25E13
29.759-23E4
29.759-61D4
29.768-61D5
29.768-23E5
29.768-25E16
29.809-2304918
29.810-85G108
29.810-15E10
1
1
1
1
1
3
3
3
3
3
3
1
1
1
HYDRAULIC SUMP FILTER
CAP
CARTRIDGE
COVER
GASKET
WASHER
LOCKWASHER
NUT
NUT
LOCKWASHER
WASHER
DIPSTICK
SCREW
LOCKWASHER
7-81
2334954 HYDRAULIC PUMP ASSEMBLY
29.100-2334954
29.119-11G652J
29.119-994580
29.140-6J808
29.146-994472
29.171-995953
29.187-995954
29.198-11G656J
29.198-994580
29.260-994583
7-82
1
4
4
1
1
1
1
4
4
1
HYDRAULIC PUMP ASSEMBLY
BOLT
WASHER
KEY
WEAR PLATE & SEAL KIT
GEAR & SHAFT
IDLER GEAR ASSEMBLY
BOLT
WASHER
COVER ASSEMBLY
3734222 HYDRAULIC VALVE ASSEMBLY (CONTINUED)
30.000-3734222
1
HYDRAULIC VALVE ASSEMBLY
30.100-905342
1
VALVE INLET SECTION
30.001-892923
2
SCREW
30.002-892924
1
RETAINER
30.002-892925
1
SLEEVE
30.006-888074
1
SPRING
30.018-24K6
1
PLUG
30.020-888140
1
SPRING
30.022-889001
1
RELIEF VALVE
30.032-892871
1
SEAL KIT
30.063-24K7
1
PLUG
30.066-896605
4
SHIM
30.101-892669
2
C-WASHER
30.104-10J20
1
BALL
30.105-888069
1
SPRING
30.106-888070
1
PLUG
30.107-61D6
4
NUT
7-83
3734222 HYDRAULIC VALVE ASSEMBLY (CONTINUED)
30.108-990223
1
VALVE OUTLET SECTION
30.033-1C632
1
BOLT
30.039-892924
1
RETAINER
30.039-892925
1
SLEEVE
30.040-892923
2
SCREW
30.107-1C688
4
BOLT
30.107-61D6
4
NUT
30.l09-892669
2
C-WASHER
30.110-888074
1
SPRING
30.113-10J20
1
BALL
30.114-888069
1
SPRING
30.115-888070
1
PLUG
30.116-892871
1
SEAL KIT
90.575-23E6
1
LOCKWASHER
90.576-61D6
1
NUT
30.064- NOT USED
7-84
30-095 VALVE CONTROL LINKAGE
30.085-1685098
30.089-2348889
30.090-1685092
30.092-4F6106
30.092-1F310
30.094-2314196
30.097-2314196
30.099-4F6106
30.099-1F310
30.127-1C624
30.127-23E6
30.127-6106
30.136-2361633
30.137-1311669
30.146-1685097
30.147-664957
30.148-61D6
30.148-23E6
30.152-799759
2
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
4
3
3
1
LINK
LIFT CONTROL LEVER
TILT CONTROL LEVER
PIN
COTTER PIN
KNOB
KNOB
PIN
COTTER PIN
BOLT
LOCKWASHER
NUT
BELLCRANK
BUSHING
BRACKET
BUSHING
NUT
LOCKWASHER
SNAP RING
30.165-1C522
30.165-23E5
30.165-6105
30.168-1C624
30.168-1685096
30.168-23E6
30.168-61D6
30.169-1685911
30.170-2332877
30.354-1685098
30.355-4F6106
30.355-1F310
30.356-4F6106
30.356-1F310
30.438-1311669
30.457-5J406
30.551-1311798
30.552-1311798
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
2
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
BOLT
LOCKWASHER
NUT
BOLT
LOCK PLATE
LOCKWASHER
NUT
PIVOT SHAFT
PIVOT SHAFT
LINK
PIN
COTTER PIN
PIN
COTTER PIN
BUSHING
KEY
SLEEVE
SLEEVE
7-85
1692517 AUXILIARY VALVE ASSEMBLY
30.200-1692517
30.260-9Jl0
30.261-990078
30.262-990079
30.264-990080
30.268-990081
30.269-990082
30.270-990083
30.274-888066
30.275-888140
30.276-990076
30.278-1C540
30.278-23E5
30.278-61D5
30.295-24K6
30.320-990077
30.321-48K12
7-86
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
2
2
2
1
1
1
AUXILIARY VALVE ASSEMBLY
SNAP RING
SPRING
SPRING COVER
SNAP RING
CONE
VALVE SPRING
VALVE PLUG
RELIEF VALVE ASSEMBLY
SPRING
SEAL KIT
BOLT
LOCKWASHER
NUT
PLUG & O-RING
GUIDE
O-RING
233471 TILT LOCK VALVE ASSEMBLY
31.500-233471
28.461-91F3
31.501-47K7
31.503-91F7
31.504-135013
31.505-233467
31.506-47K3
31.508-1C640
31.508-23E6
31.512-135049
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
2
2
1
TILT LOCK VALVE ASSEMBLY
PLUG O-RING
CAP & O-RING
O-RING
SPRING
SPOOL ASSEMBLY
PLUG & O-RING
CAPSCREW
LOCKWASHER
SPOOL STOP
7-87
31-530
HYDRAULIC TILT LINES
31.061-1303429
31.062-17K6
31.065-91F6
31.070-1302000
31.071-1302000
31.072-1723949
31.073-1723949
31.075-17K5
31.077-17K5
31.081-742733
31.082-742733
31.083-675092
31.152-91F6
31.158-675092
31.160-17K5
31.162-17K5
31.175-1324818
31.176-91F6
31.177-91F5
7-88
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
CONNECTOR
ELBOW
O-RING
HOSE ASSEMBLY
HOSE ASSEMBLY
TUBE
TUBE
ELBOW
ELBOW
CLAMP
CLAMP
HOSE ASSEMBLY
O-RING
HOSE ASSEMBLY
ELBOW
ELBOW
HOSE ASSEMBLY
O-RING
O-RING
31.178-12K5
31.179-12K5
31.180-18K5
31.181-743108
31.182-656643
31.183-91F6
31.184-91F6
31.185-743108
31.188-18K5
31.336-667297
31.355-18K6
31.356-91F6
31.357-11K6
31.358-91F5
31.359-17K6
31.364-91F5
31.365-91F5
31.366-91F5
31.367-91F5
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
2
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
ELBOW
ELBOW
ELBOW
CONNECTOR
HOSE ASSEMBLY
O-RING
O-RING
CONNECTOR
ELBOW
SPACER
ELBOW
O-RING
ELBOW
O-RING
ELBOW
O-RING
O-RING
O-RING
O-RING
31-819 MAIN HYDRAULIC AND LIFT LINES
28.335-1301060
31.006-1309037
31.007-42H32
31.008-2332872
31.010-25K40116
31.011-19J20
31.012-1C720
31.013-91F8
31.014-1324212
31.018-1300917
31.019-1723951
31.020-30H45
31.021-1C512
31.023-91F8
31.026.91F7
31.027-1723950
31.028-30H37
31.029-1C512
31.030-660160
31.036-17K8
1
10''
2
1
1
2
4
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
SPRING
HOSE
CLAMP
TUBE
O-RING
FLANGE
CAPSCREW
O-RING
ELBOW
HOSE ASSEMBLY
HOSE ASSEMBLY
CLIP
BOLT
O-RING
O-RING
HOSE ASSEMBLY
CLIP
CAPSCREW
HOSE ASSEMBLY
ELBOW
31.041-763652
31.051-763652
31.052-42H28
31.054-660408
31.055-42H10
31.085-42H28
31.191-1704344
31.193-6H34
31.194-1C612
31.198-661676
31.200-15K7.
31.393-16F8
31.394-NOT USED
31.439-11K7
90.775-23E7
90.776-61D5
90.777-23E5
90.778-25E17
90.789-23E5
91.474-61D6
92.475-23E6
5"
24.5"
2
44"
1
2
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
4
1
1
1
1
1
1
HOSE
HOSE
CLAMP
HOSE
CLAMP
CLAMP
TUBE
CLAMP
BOLT
CONNECTOR
CONNECTOR
PLUG
ELBOW
LOCKWASHER
NUT
LOCKWASHER
WASHER
LOCKWASHER
NUT
LOCKWASHER
7-89
31-955 HYDRAULIC VALVE MOUNTING
30.000-3734222
30.033-1C632
30.061-24K7
30.195-1C724
31.038-25K40028
90.573-25E19
90.574-25E18
90.575-23E6
90.576-61D6
91.209-23E7
91.788-61D7
7-90
1
1
1
2
1
2
1
1
1
2
2
HYDRAULIC VALVE ASSEMBLY
BOLT
PLUG
BOLT
O-RING
WASHER
WASHER
LOCKWASHER
NUT
LOCKWASHER
NUT
START -1-4560
END - AND ABOVE
TILT CYLINDER
1791918 TILT CYLINDER ASSEMBLY
32.000-1791918
32.001-1791918
32.002-100239
32.005-743810
32.008-757757
32.014-1303779
32.015-25K40324
32.016-743816
32.017-1742499
32.018-1665682
32.019-1831042
32.020-757762
32.021-1636930
32.022-2C520J
32.022-23E5
32.023-1657085
32.033-1758541
1
1
1
2
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
4
1
3
3
1
1
TILT CYLINDER ASSEMBLY
TILT CYLINDER ASSEMBLY
CYLINDER WELDED ASSEM
U-CUP
WEAR RING
FRONT SPACER
O-RING
BACK-UP RING
GLAND ASSEMBLY
BUSHING
GLAND PACKING SET
SHIM
SHIM RETAINER
CAPSCREW
LOCKWASHER
ROD WIPER
PIN
32.034-1C612
32.034-23E6
32.034-719779
32.035-l0H25
32.036-1748592
32.037-762609
32.038-507695
32.039-1636868
32.040-755626
32.041-757766
32.042-1636931
32.043-665199
32.046-1655983
32.048-1665681
32.049-1623399
32.072-1811180
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
3
3
1
1
1
1
1
6
1
CAPSCREW
LOCKWASHER
PLATE
LUB FITTING
ROD & PISTON ASSEMBLY
REAR SPACER
RETAINING RING
SPECIAL CAPSCREW
RING SEGMENT
BOOT
WIPER RETAINER
BUSHING
ADAPTOR
SPRING RETAINER
PACKING SPRING
PACKING KIT
7-91
START -1-4560
END - AND ABOVE
TILT CYLINDER MOUNTING
32-058 TILT CYLINDER MOUNTING
32.027-1748527
32.029-1C1044
32.030-1758225
32.031-1F748
32.032-10H25
32.033-1758541
32.034-719779
32.035-10H25
32.043-665199
32.053-1776027
32.073-1722564
90.437-23E8
90.438-61D10
90.439-1C612
90.440-23E6
7-92
2
2
2
2
2
2
1
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
ROD END
BOLT
PIN
COTTER PIN
LUB FITTING
PIN
PLATE
LUB FITTING
BUSHING
BUSHING
PLATE
LOCKWASHER
NUT
CAPSCREW
LOCKWASHER
M0772 UPRIGHT ASSEMBLY
34.000-M0772
1
UPRIGHT ASSEMBLY
34.001-2340559
1
OUTER RAIL ASSEMBLY
34.002-2C614
2
BOLT
34.013-342957
8
ROLLER
34.014-662655
AR
SHIM
34.036-1301848
4
BEARING
34.042-1307092
3
SEGMENTED RING
34.043-1730241
1
BRACKET
34.044-93G1024
4
CAPSCREW
34.050-2354629
1
INNER RAIL ASSEMBLY
34.053-1782356
1
LEVER
34.146-1729407
1
BRACKET
34.147-2C824
8
CAPSCREW
34.149-1307921
1
SNAP RING
34.196-1642498
1
RING RETAINER
34.197-663823
1
SNAP RING
34.200-2357469
1
INTERMEDIATE RAIL ASSEM
34.210-1782354
1
LATCH
34.238-1783535
1
ADAPTOR
34.239-660516
1
SNAP RING
34.253-2304601
1
SETSCREW
34.271-1310527
3
SEGMENTED RING
34.400-2355448
1
LIFT CYLINDER ASSEMBLY
91.609-86D6
2
NUT
91.643-22E10
4
LOCKWASHER
91.646-23E8
8
LOCKWASHER
91.847-1321094
1
WASHER
TRIPLE STAGE UPRIGHT
7-93
START -1-4560
END - AND ABOVE
7-94
2355448 LIFT CYLINDER ASSEMBLY
34.400-2355448
34.401-2355201
34.402-1811164
34.465-16G406
34.475-1741259
34.477-1780360
34.478-2357020
34.479-1657088
34.490-2306714
34.491-2354468
34.493-393266
34.495-2307536
34.496-2306705
34.497-25K60416
34.498-2307546
1
1
1
2
1
1
1
1
1
1
2
1
1
1
1
34.501-2306704
34.502-2306724
1
1
34.505-2307544
34.514-1320803
1
1
34.515-2357301
34.516-2307327
34.517-1743522
34.518-1780359
34.519-2307538
34.522-2357024
34.523-662634
34.524-2307543
34.526-1626284
34.527-2306706
34.528-1657095
1
1
1
1
1
1
2
1
1
1
1
34.529-1780362
1
34.530-2307537
34.533-1626368
1
1
34.534-662634
34.536-1626369
34.537-2306708
34.835-2307542
2
1
1
1
LIFT CYLINDER ASSEMBLY
BARREL
PACKING KIT
SETSCREW
FEED TUBE
U-CUP FEED TUBE)
GLAND INCLUDES BEARING)
WIPER (FEED TUBE)
WEAR RING
SHEAVE CARRIER ROD
BLEEDER VALVE
ADAPTOR BUSHING
NUT
O-RING (GLAND SEAL)
U-CUP (SHEAVE
CARRIER ROD)
NUT (INCLUDES BEARING)
WIPER (SHEAVE
CARRIER ROD)
BEARING
BACK-UP RING (GLAND
SEAL)
INNER RAIL ROD
NUT
WIPER INNER RAIL ROD
U-CUP INNER RAIL ROD
ADAPTOR BUSHING
SETSCREW
NYLON PLUG
BEARING
INTERMEDIATE RAIL ROD
NUT
WIPER (INTERMEDIATE
RAIL ‘ROD)
U-CUP (INTERMEDIATE
RAIL-ROD)
ADAPTOR BUSHING
CAP (INTERMEDIATE
RAlL ROD)
NYLON PLUG
BEARING RING
BEARING
BEARING (INCLUDED
IN SHEAVE CARRIER ROD
7-95
34.400
34.401
34.475
34.491
34.515
LIFT
CYLINDER
MFH ASSEMBLY
BARREL
FEED
TUBE
SHEAVE
CARRIER
ROD
INNER
RAIL
ROD
149 2355448
2355201
1741259
2354468
2357301
START -1-4560
END - AND ABOVE
7-96
34.526
INTERMEDIATE
RAIL
ROD
MFH
1626284
149
M0772 UPRIGHT ASSEMBLY (CONTINUED)
34.444-2330656
1
FLOW CONTROL VALVE
34.543-94G428
4
CAPSCREW
34.547-25K20022
1
O-RING
34.550-91F7
1
O-RING
34.565-1687951
1
ELBOW (INCLUDES O-RING)
91.877-22E4
4
LOCKWASHER
START -1-4560
END - AND ABOVE
LIFT CYLINDER PIPING
7-97
2355320 CARRIAGE ASSEMBLY
34.301-666354
34.307-1300177
34.308-398453
34.310-74G624
34.310-8E6
34.316-342957
34.320-1729514
34.323-763321
34.324-619038
34.325-766423
34.328-342957
34.329-1725273
34.330-96G616J
7-98
2
2
2
4
4
4
2
AR
4
AR
2
2
2
THRUST WASHER
THRUST ROLLER
SHAFT
CAPSCREW
LOCKWASHER
ROLLER
SHAFT
SHIM
SPACER
SHIM
ROLLER
WASHER
CAPSCREW
34.331-1301818
34.332-662655
34.333-663655
34.350-1772340
34.359-1810138
34.300
2
AR
AR
2
2
GREASE FITTING
SHIM
SHIM
FORK
FORK STOP PIN KIT
34.340
CARRIAGE ASSEMBLY
WELDED
FORK
COMPLETE
ASSEMBLY SPREAD
2355320
2355191
39
OVERALL
WIDTH
41
START 1-4560
END - AND ABOVE
UPRIGHT SUPPORT
34-712 UPRIGHT SUPPORT
34.036-1301848
4
BUSHING
34.040-1301798
2
BUSHING
34.600-336347
2
SUPPORT SHAFT
34.604.794829
2
LOCK - PLATE
34.605-2C612
2
CAPSCREW
34.607-l0H25
2
LUB FITTING
91.780-23E6
2
LOCKWASHER
7-99
34-748 LOAD SAFETY RACK
7-100
34.998-93G632
4
BOLT
34.999-2344665
1
LOAD SAFETY RACK
92.226-2342129
4
NUT
M0772 UPRIGHT ASSEMBLY (CONTINUED)
34.080-659065
34.100-2306721
34.101-1703719
34.102-156606
34.103-1697965
34.104-1F212
34.107-1703720
34.108-1772171
34.109-2329841
34.110-1772171
34.112-1692093
34.150-1703719
34.152-1703720
34.153-1692093
34.154-659065
34.156-1772171
34.268-1703991
34.269-1703992
34.270-2C1232
34.277-2340639
34.278-1C512
66.016-1758622
91.407-1309436
91.408-2360649
9l.409-62D10
91.410-1F416
91.411-1F210
91.413-1F416
91.414-1F210
91.417-62D10
91.418-1F416
91.419-1F210
91.420-23E5
91.611-2360649
91.612-62010
91.860-23E12
2
1
2
1
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
4
1
1
4
2
4
2
1
2
2
2
2
2
2
4
2
4
4
2
2
4
SNAP RING
PISTON HEAD
LIFT CHAIN (71 PITCHES)
SETSCREW
SAFETY STOP
COTTER
ANCHOR - AT CYLINDER
PIN
ANCHOR - AT CARRIAGE
PIN
SHEAVE
LIFT CHAIN (87 PITCHES)
ANCHOR - AT CYLINDER
SHEAVE
SNAP RING
PIN
ANCHOR - RH
ANCHOR - LH
CAPSCREW
CHAIN RETAINER
CAPSCREW
BRACKET
LOCKSCREW
NUT - SPHERICAL FACE
NUT
COTTER
COTTER
COTTER
COTTER
NUT
COTTER
COTTER
LOCKWASHER
NUT - SPHERICAL FACE
NUT
LOCKWASHER
7-101
38-022 FRAME AND COUNTERWEIGHT
38.020-232809
02.022-774563
29.732-774563
38.093-1758190
38.100-1C610
38.488-349679
38.851-1C820
38.852-1636498
38.853-2352147
38.869-1765748
38.870-15C16104
7-102
1
1
1
1
2
2
1
1
AR
1
1
FRAME
PLUG
PLUG
STOP
CAPSCREW
PAD
CAPSCREW
SPACER
BLOCK
COUNTERWEIGHT
BOLT
38.879-2352148
38.920-1310401
38.922-654722
91.202-1304106
91.203-23E16
91.204-61D16
91.829-25E21
91.830-23E8
91.891-23E6
91.892-25E17
AR
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
2
2
SHIM
COUPLER PIN
COUPLER PIN CROSS PIN
WASHER
LOCKWASHER
NUT
WASHER
LOCKWASHER
LOCKWASHER
WASHER
START -1-4560
END - AND ABOVE
INSTRUMENT PANEL
39-086 INSTRUMENT PANEL
13.023-1743826
13.024-648556
13.028-947257
13.029-1534136
13.030-12D6
13.032-12D6
13.042-2349766
13.043-949286
13.045-12D6
13.047-2339413
13.048-2343175
13.049-775735
13.052-947248
13.057-947255
13.754-1692521
13.755-61D6
1
1
1
1
6
1
1
1
2
1
1
1
1
1
1
ENGINE HOUR METER
GASKET
FUEL-GAUGE
STRAP
NUT
NUT
PLUG
AMMETER
NUT
IGNITION SWITCH
LENS & HOLDER
BULB
ENGINE OIL PRESS GAUGE
ENG TEMPERATURE GAUGE
BRACKET
NUT
39.500-1636487
39.501-61D6
39.570-1689799
39.571-646289
40.134-2335281
60.143-1743826
1
1
1
4
1
1
90.848-10E6
91.333-17E10
91.334-14D10
91.339-17E6
91.340-17E6
91.341-17E6
91.966-23E6
91.967-1743826
1
8
8
8
3
3
2
1
INSTRUMENT PANEL
NUT
DASH COVER
RIVET
DECAL
CLAMP (COMPONENT OF
HOUR METER)
LOCKWASHER
LOCKWASHER
NUT
LOCKWASHER
LOCKWASHER
LOCKWASHER
LOCKWASHER
NUT (COMPONENT of
HOUR METER)
7-103
START - 1-4560
END - AND ABOVE
SEAT ASSEMBLY
SEAT ASSEMBLY
39.719-995189
37.204-995305
37.205-995286
37.206-995287
39.720-995190
39.721-995191
39.722-995306
39.731-89G512
90.650-89G410
90.651-995289
90.652-89G410
7-104
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
4
4
4
4
SEAT ASSEMBLY
BACK CUSHION COVER
LITERATURE TRAY
LITERATURE HOLDER
SEAT CUSHION
SEAT BACK CUSHION
SEAT FRAME ASSEMBLY
BACK CUSHION SCREW
SCREW
WASHER
SCREW
START -1-4560
AND - AND ABOVE
SEAT MOUNTING
39-173 SEAT MOUNTING
39.726-1649241
1
SEAT ADJUSTOR (LH)
39.727-995223
1
SEAT ADJUSTOR (RH)
39.728-43G516
4
CAPSCREW
39.729-1C520
4
BOLT
90.307-23E5
4
LOCKWASHER
90.308-61D5
4
NUT
7-105
START -1-4560
END AND ABOVE
OVERHEAD GUARD
39-204 OVERHEAD GUARD
7-106
39.932-2353937
1
OVERHEAD GUARD
39.933-93G820
2
CAPSCREW
39.934-1C824
2
CAPSCREW
90.962-23E8
2
LOCKWASHER
90.966-23E8
2
LOCKWASHER
92.307-25E22
4
WASHER
START -1-4560
END - AND ABOVE
SHEET METAL AND TRIM
39-493 SHEET METAL AND TRIM
37.014-1739534
37.308-619021
39.535-1719070
39.536-1719069
39.537-1C816
39.584-1C622
39.585-1618572
39.586-1704268
39.589-1C512
39.590-2353501
39.591-2353500
39.594-2327735
39.595-1C412
39.596-773208
39.600-610967
39.778-635682
39.920-1704281
2
2
1
1
2
4
2
2
8
1
1
1
4
1
2
AR
2
CLIP
SPACER
BRACKET (LH)
BRACKET (RH)
CAPSCREW
CAPSCREW
BRACKET
LATCH
BOLT
HOOD SIDE (LH)
HOOD SIDE (RH)
TOP HOOD (GAS & LPG)
CAPSCREW
PLUG - BUTTON
DAMPENER
SHIM
GRIP
39.921-990159
39.922-990157
39.923-990155
39.924-990158
90.810-23E5
90.811-61D5
90.812-8D8
90.813-990156
90.817-7D5
90.818-9E5
90.821-23E4
90.822-25E18
90.823-23E6
90.826-23E8
91.268-25E14
91.347-25E16
2
2
2
2
8
8
2
2
2
2
4
4
4
2
4
10
DOVE TAIL
SPRING RETAINER
SPRING
NUT
LOCKWASHER
NUT
JAM NUT
WASHER
NUT
LOCKWASHER
LOCKWASHER
WASHER
LOCKWASHER
LOCKWASHER
WASHER
WASHER
7-107
39-494 SHEET METAL AND TRIM
37.022-1725216
37.161-17J224
37.210-1784637
39.475-2353138
39.479-1C620
39.484-1C610
39.540-1797793
39.541-1307834
39.544-1636427
39.545-1C510
39.546-2314892
39.547-1C828
39.610-1313106
39.640-742708
39.702-1784638
39.704-1725238
39.705-1F416J
39.706-2341181
39.707-1C628
7-108
1
1
1
1
2
2
1
6
1
2
1
6
1
1
1
1
1
1
4
SPRING (INNER)
PIN
BRACKET
FLOOR PLATE (FRONT)
CAPSCREW
CAPSCREW
LOWER DASH PANEL
CAPSCREW
COVER
CAPSCREW
COWL ASSEMBLY
BOLT
PIN
PLUG - BUTTON
HOOD PROP
SPRING
COTTER
SEAT SUPPORT
BOLT
39.739-2335904
39.740-1324273
39.741-25E21
39.742-1F414J
39.930-1303141
90.018-23E5
90.703-25E21
90.704-23E8
90.706-25E17
90.707-23E6
90.802-23E6
90.803-25E17
90.806-1C616
90.807-23E6
90.808-25E15
90.820-61D8
90.830-23E6
90.831-25E17
92.525-61D6
2
2
2
2
2
2
12
6
4
4
4
8
2
2
6
6
4
4
4
BRACKET
PIN
WASHER
COTTER
WASHER
LOCKWASHER
WASHER
LOCKWASHER
WASHER
LOCKWASHER
LOCKWASHER
WASHER
CAPSCREW
LOCKWASHER
WASHER
NUT
LOCKWASHER
WASHER
NUT
40-090 DATA PLATES AND DECALS
40.000-2315709
40.001-1751924
40.006-1747706
40.008-2338780
40.010-2348904
40.011-2348904
40.019-2350033
40.024-1781660
40.025-1751924
40.032-2338779
40.054-2338781
40.073-2360528
40.089-1747702
40.091-2350158
40.117-2338782
40.130-2349361
40.131-2349998
1
4
1
1
2
2
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
NAME PLATE
SCREW
DECAL - PATENT
DECAL - TILT
DECAL - LOGO - 3 INCH
DECAL - LOGO - 3 INCH
DECAL - TRANSMISSION CHECK
PLATE - UL CLASSIFICATION
SCREW
DECAL - LIFT
DECAL - FWD - REV
DECAL - STARTING PROCEDURE
INSTRUCTION SAFETY
DECAL - TRANSMISSION FLUID
DECAL - HI-LO
DECAL - CAUTION FORKS
DECAL - HANDS OFF
7-109
2354694 HOSE ADAPTATION KIT
75.031-2354694
34.103-1782282
50.006-2346459
50.007-2345090
50.200-1321839
50.201-1321835
50.202-1321839
50.203-2327930
50.253-2327933
50.412-1738792
50.413-1773008
50.449-1317240
50.547-13K6
50.548-11K6
50.549-1321839
50.550-1321835
50.551-1321838
50.552-1757512
50.553-1736548
50.554-635682
50.567 -NOT USED
50.604-1C510
50.632-2354558
50.657-86F5
50.665-86F5
50.808-1322554
50.813-7D8
90.284-7D8
92.111-23E5
START - 1-4560
END - AND ABOVE
HOSE ADAPTATION
7-110
FOR DEVICE
1
2
2
2
2
AR
2
1
1
2
2
4
2
4
2
AR
1
2
2
2
2
2
2
2
4
2
2
2
HOSE ADAPTATION KIT
SAFETY STOP
UPPER SHEAVE
BOLT
HOSE COUPLING
HOSE
HOSE COUPLING
JUNCTION BLOCK RH
JUNCTION BLOCK LH
SPRING
SLIDE TUBE CONNECTOR
WASHER
TEE
ELBOW
HOSE COUPLING
HOSE
HOSE COUPLING
SLIDE TUBE CONNECTOR
SPRING
WASHER
CAPSCREW
SPACER
NUT
NUT
SPRING
NUT
NUT
LOCKWASHER
2354694 HOSE ADAPTATION
75.031-235469
50.009-1758496
50.010-1307967
50.015-30H48
50.016-1C512
50.025-11K6
50.027-15K6
50.028-91F6
50.072-15K6
50.074-91F6
50.403-1321839
50.404-1321835
50.405-1321839
50.408-1321839
50.409-1321835
50.410-1321839
50.555-1757490
50.556-2C1232
50.559-1757489
50.560-45K6
50.561-1757246
50.562-1758622
50.563-1740296
50.564-1307967
50.565-1C512
50.566-lC512
50.814-86F6
50.819-2340639
50.837-1316008
90.285-23ES
90.286-61D5
90.287-61D4
90.289-23E5
90.292-23E5
90.293-7D5
1
6
6
2
2
1
1
1
1
1
2
2
2
2
2
2
1
4
1
2
2
2
4
4
4
4
2
2
2
2
2
6
4
4
4
HOSE ADAPTATION KIT
LOWER SHEAVE
BOLT
CLIP
BOLT
ELBOW
CONNECTOR
O-RING
CONNECTOR
O-RING'
HOSE COUPLING
HOSE
HOSE COUPLING
HOSE COUPLING
HOSE
HOSE COUPLING
GUIDE (RH)
CAPSCREW
GUIDE (LH)
CONNECTOR
BRACKET
BRACKET
GUIDE
BOLT
BOLT
BOLT
NUT
BRACKET
ANCHOR
LOCKWASHER
NUT
NUT
LOCKWASHER
LOCKWASHER
NUT
7-111
2329090 SIDE SHIFTER CYLINDER
53.020-2329090
53.102-2328803
53.105-2329062
53.106-25K402000
53.107-730965
53.108-2324619
53.109-2328972
53.112-1657084
53.113-2329095
53.114-NOT USED
53.676-2328970
53.677-25K30022
53.678-66D4J
54.222-1811244
54.437-25K40128
7-112
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
SIDE SHIFTER CYLINDER ASSEMBLY
PISTON
PACKING
O-RING
BACK-UP RING
PACKING
GLAND
WIPER
CYLINDER BARREL
SPACER
PISTON ROD
O-RING
NUT
PACKING KIT
O-RING
2355779 SIDE SHIFTER PACKAGE
53.099-2355779
40.054-1747728
51.531-9K1
51.699-9K1
52.148-80F5
52.149-80F5
53.003-2355785
53.020-2329090
53.022-70D20
53.023-2317678
53.025-2350388
53.026-2C824
53.027-2350386
53.075-2347662
53.076-2347663
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
2
4
2
2
2
SIDE SHIFTER PACKAGE
DECAL - SIDE SHIFT
ADAPTOR
ADAPTOR
NUT
NUT
FORK BAR WELDED ASSEM
SIDE SHIFT CYLINDER
NUT
PIN
RETAINER BLOCK
CAPSCREW
RECTANGULAR FLAT
LOWER BEARING
RETAINER
53.082-2350564
53.201-17K3
53.202-91F3
53.206-1323045
53.207-1323044
53.208-1323045
53.216-91F3
53.217-1323045
53.218-1323044
53.219-1323045
53.437-17K3
53.473-1715312
90.794-1F416
92.055-26E8
10
1
1
1
AR
1
1
1
AR
1
1
2
2
4
SLIDE PLATE
ELBOW
O-RING
HOSE COUPLING
HOSE
HOSE COUPLING
O-RING
HOSE COUPLING
HOSE
HOSE COUPLING ASSEMBLY
ELBOW
TIE STRAP
COTTER PIN
LOCKWASHER
7-113
2343853 CRANKCASE VENTILATION KIT
75.411-2343853
00.123-991868
00.127-666864
00.134-1779629
00.135-656247
00.141-666839
00.146-42H10
00.165-lC412
00.165-23E4
02.259-16F2
02.262-2343858
02.264-2334529
02.266-2343790
02.267-42H36
7-114
1
1
1
1
24''
1
2
4
4
1
1
1
1
2
CRANKCASE VENTILATION KIT
GASKET
CONNECTOR
COVER
HOSE
ELBOW
CLAMP
CAPS CREW
LOCKWASHER
PIPE - PLUG
HOSE
TUBE
HOSE
CLAMP
2339254 LIGHT INSTAL LATI O N
75.200-2339254
13.062-707688
13.063-316484
13.214-852372
13.216-1796980
13.221-1752531
13.223-620313
13.241-336570
13.270-1721777
14.000-661271
14.012-602335
14.013-333814
14.019-333814
14.020-602355
15.205-624425
15.206-1010769
18.100-30H15
18.104-61D5
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
AR
AR
3
1
1
7
7
LIGHT INSTALLATION
LIGHT SWITCH
KNOB
NUT
STOP & TAIL LIGHT
BRACKET
STOP LIGHT SWITCH
BRACKET
ADJUSTABLE HEADLAMP
WIRE ASSEMBLY
CONNECTOR - 2 WAY
WIRE ASSEMBLY
WIRE ASSEMBLY
CONNECTOR - 2 WAY
BOOT
GROMMET
WIRE CLIP
NUT
7-115
2362319 AUXILIARY VALVE INSTALLATION KIT
75.021-2362319
28.483-1F310
30.061-16F6
30.200-1692517
30.278-1C532
30.582-1C540
30.817-1689758
30.843-1763307
30.845-1316146
30.846-4F5062
30.851-1759751
30.887-1307041
30.910-1C508
31.302-11K6
7-116
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
1
3
1
AUX VALVE INSTALL KIT
COTTER PIN
PIPE - PLUG
AUXILIARY VALVE ASSEM
BOLT
BOLT
KNOB
AUXILIARY LEVER
PIVOT PIN
PIN
BRACKET
TOLERANCE RING
CAPSCREW
ELBOW
31.550-18K6
31.551-1326047
31.554-91F6
31.559-91F7
31.564-47K6
31.565-91F
31.566-1324753
31.568-743562
31.569-42H10
31.583-666854
90.534-lF420
90.535-23E5
90.536-61D5
90.973-23E5
1
1
1
1
2
1
1
AR
2
1
1
3
3
3
ELBOW
HOSE ASSEMBLY
O-RING
O-RING
PIPE - PLUG
O-RING
ELBOW
HOSE
CLAMP
CONNECTOR
COTTER PIN
LOCKWASHER
NUT
LOCKWASHER
NUMBERICAL
MFGR.
NO.
VENDOR NO.
01100200
103405
103406
103861
106328
106329
L-18-SV-5000-Z11
L-18-SV-148-A-95
40101
L-16-DE-39-X-1
L-16-SP-5
107136
107327
107348
107405
107801
107802
110222
111563
111966
112149
120514
121892
1300917
1302000
1304790
1309676
1310115
1323240
1325757
1513816
1513839
1618298
1618574
1625352
1649241
1692093
1692517
1706939
1721276
1721777
1723625
1743826
1750988
1752522
1765756
1779011
1799452
1800421
1830006
1830826
209158
211433
224237
224289
L-14-RT-514
49627
600207
T-113
FC-24200
FC-24199
2757-5036
L-16-VC-79
69020
451508-52
L-18-VT-5067-A-11
FD-73475
12C-12FJS-43
5F-6FJS-14.5
550X3
1980035
10F-64
Group1/Type
C/7-12/F/F/LKR
1513839
L43670
5654782
RD-342
11800-500
C-2691
CMD12-P10-2000-10
1970166
173441
54-0072-00
6426401
15094-26
10748-A
235116
C-6900
MA103
Ml-1372-300 PSI
GP5/6.50-10/TR15
CW/OFF Center
A-27801
854568
49505
569022-03
CCNSlSTS OF
NEXT 2 ITEMS
M88048
CONSIST OF
NEXT 2 ITEMS
VENDOR
CODE
92867
59875
81596
59875
59875
59875
63477
81596
60038
63477
63477
73680
59875
99003
81596
59875
63477
70434
70434
12603
79470
16764
73842
81348
16764
40152
52788
70040
71425
40157
51588
62983
16764
73370
78422
70040
74400
76700
73370
99537
27469
74400
81348
56118
70040
76700
31695
60038
60038
INDEX
MFGR.
NO.
224339
224388
225953
229252
230365
2309891
2316008
232474
2330656
2334954
2339413
2351309
2351790
2352593
2355693
316484
351953
3734222
429224
429225
429226
430565
525318
551323
551835
604405
604406
613750
615374
620236
620238
620313
634924
641924
648334
6511956
6511957
654044
654139
654154
654162
654134
654167
654388
656247
656643
656644
658019
VENDOR
CODE
VENDOR NO.
HM-89411
HM-89449
X7-X-90
246-10055
207-S
F40-492
322799
F401M-201
H25-B1G2-FA17525A
324682
2ZXP2192-103
M07AB2J
LS-196-E
lBT-4105
06-460-015
GLE-44
1109090
8157
26729
CH11-N09-J22WDL21
L-19-DE-24
L-20-SP-31
L-20-HB-37
F57819
AAX-0613
1513462
169522
L-16-HB-29
L-17-HP-6
FC-602-F
FC-1511-B
FC-3474
FC-603
4760
L-16-DE-34
28619
387-A
1876682
1876681
2793
26882
2720
15245
15123
26822
SK-206-S
6R1
6F-8FJS-18
6F-8FJS-30
208-W
Change 1
INDEX 1
60038
60038
75958
75958
76062
75958
06848
14351
45681
06848
96259
45681
77326
19728
40190
96152
16764
13445
64104
62983
59875
59875
59875
63477
78225
70040
64104
59875
59875
63477
63477
63477
63477
16764
59875
64104
60038
16764
16764
60038
60038
60038
60038
60038
60038
60380
70434
70434
21335
NUMBERICAL INDEX
MFGR.
NO
VENDOR NO.
VENDOR
NO.
MFRG.
NO.
VENDOR NO.
VENDOR
NO.
658998
659065
660160
660408
661556
663264
668788
712512
712839
713155
733623
730086
733633
743564
752453
763843
775735
782874
784057
791454
793560
794584
850063
382A
5100-156
8C-10FJS-22.5
1525-10
307014
33-4741-10S
150933
16284
1324185
16150
1116920
6N-8FJS-22
1116920
3219
45737
B-912
1891
L-20-H-124-A-1
34X144
B-148
12720
1941978
266316
60038
79136
70434
00624
75915
00624
73370
60038
12603
60038
16764
70434
16764
24161
30076
60380
24446
59875
45681
60380
49234
16764
52788
850337
850363
850757
851770
1839345
1928023
264831
26678
16764
16764
52788
52788
851860
853097
187540
169619
52788
64104
853187
853189
857712
859369
859727
266909
3206X1A
44504
1915172
FC-5733
52788
43334
64104
16764
63477
860818
876133
877752
878608
880690
884581
886265
886331
887714
888066
888069
888070
1BB2042-SS-1
80107-D
54-0328-00
1928021
1176
1114458
1875627
L-21-HP-3
1952410
232799
223388
222640
19728
64104
78422
16764
24446
16764
16764
59875
16764
62983
62983
62983
888074
888140
888505
888968
889001
890273
890410
890412
890414
890415
890416
890450
890462
890474
890473
890490
890562
890563
890564
890565
890566
890567
890610
890883
890887
890888
890927
890928
890929
890930
890931
890934
890935
890937
890941
890945
890947
890950
890959
890963
890964
890978
890979
891069
891191
891602
892182
892250
892669
892871
892923
246632
259871
1847933
1958679
233019
18-Z8
180238-A
180068-F
B-6717
162406
166518
164011
152464-F
A-220113A
220075
FP-1156
3900
3842
3878
3880
3801
3851
A220257
168921
220026
220023
224509
180009-D
169577
190336-E
180336-C
A-167887
73927
27277-B168142-A
168720
168145-A
A-168435
152311
180341-C
220142
180040-0
C-220002-A
28481
1950307
1962602
176955
29-200-001
284156
922906
282027
62983
62983
16764
16764
62983
19728
64104
64104
64104
64104
64104
64104
64104
64104
64104
71425
14765
14765
14765
14765
14765
14765
64104
64104
64104
64104
64104
64104
64104
64104
64104
64104
64104
64104
64104
64104
64104
64104
64104
64104
64104
64104
64104
64104
16764
16764
64104
92865
62983
62983
62983
INDEX 2
Change 1
NUMBERICAL INDEX
MFGR.
NO.
VENDOR NO.
VENDOR
CODE
MFGR.
NO.
VENDOR NO.
VENDOR
CODE
892294
892925
893051
893513
894355
895388
895389
895390
895887
895888
896125
896126
896605
897456
897457
897467
897700
898438
898445
898447
898451
898452
898453
898454
898455
898456
898457
898458
898459
898461
898490
899499
899499
284154
284155
1700-A2
54-0519-30
L20-SD750-A11
168132
168149
190035
RD-387
RD-388
1966232
1951567
307198
1971993
1959991
1956975
D108-23
1960770
5690593
5667628
5676217
5666683
5666693
5699338
5666681
5699333
7812881
5666734
5666722
5668489
F600B-234
1964117
FE-2775
62983
62983
77857
78422
59875
64104
64104
64104
71425
71425
16764
16764
62983
16764
16764
16764
74465
16764
52788
52788
52788
52788
52788
52788
52788
52788
52788
52788
52788
52788
14351
16764
63477
899584
905223
905247
905342
905396
905949
905951
905952
905953
906026
906027
940104
940774
9400778
940891
X-1698
D164-397
A220354-C
CM11N09-J22W-21
220511A
1103060
1974939
1975471
1974937
16716041
167877-C
1115066
0-151103
180100
152868
1928022
14351
74465
64104
62983
64104
16764
16764
16764
16764
64104
64104
16764
64104
64104
64104
16764
942542
947257
947248
947255
949286
952707
952709
952710
952711
952716
952717
952718
952719
952725
952727
952728
952729
952730
952732
952733
952734
952735
952739
952741
952745
952757
952775
952779
952795
953129
954573
957113
957223
957225
957229
957230
957239
957294
958232
980829
980884
980899
990046
990047
990048
990050
990051
990052
990076
990077
176412
6431140
6461897
6489238
6473990
180037
76420
74993
160027-S
150134
B-8230
118172
150116
73888
76898
76899
0180567-A
0180467-A
B-6466-A
76771
160115
160016
116777
116273
190235
41283-B
120475
B-2135
4493
116292
B-175
B-4296
B-2747
B-8556
3337
120934
B-4171
B-2857
119563-B
54-0379-00
157472
154801-A
315932
3359574-10
313015
311250
313997
900882-K6
923288
320473
64104
70040
70040
70040
70040
64104
64104
64104
64104
64104
64104
64104
64104
64104
64104
64104
64104
64104
64104
64104
64104
64104
64104
64104
64104
64104
64104
64104
64104
64104
64104
64104
64104
64104
64104
64104
64104
64104
64104
78422
64104
64104
06848
06848
06848
06848
06848
06848
62983
62983
942142
Change 1
INDEX 3
NUMBERICAL INDEX
MFGR.
NO.
VENDOR NO.
VENDOR
CODE
MFGR.
NO.
VENDOR NO.
VENDOR
CODE
990078
990079
990080
990081
990082
990083
990223
990245
990299
990304
990306
990308
990309
990314
990315
990390
990391
990392
990396
990397
990400
990401
990403
990412
990789
990936
990937
991038
991057
991087
991090
991091
991092
991093
991328
991366
991735
991831
991867
991867
991868
991869
991988
991990
991991
991993
992214
992215
992356
992648
320786
320973
327926
327382
320787
324232
CM11N02-DL-21
169420B
220214A
K-918-274
K-918-273
918-272
980-134
AC-220002-A
T180180
169510
169529
169414-A
169410-A
121029-A
A-180153-B
168146-A
A-220020-E
220012-B
P-90-749
235114
PH3381
56-0228-00
28-080-001
220061-A
176365
169411-E
169409-B
169411-D
28474
169723
7801626
810245
176624
176624
176625
168191-A
696173
695652
695634
695901
117X176
695762
324684
800594
62983
62983
62983
62983
62983
62983
62983
64104
64104
64104
64104
64104
64104
64104
64104
64104
64104
64104
64104
64104
64104
64104
64104
64104
19728
73370
73370
78422
92865
64104
64104
64104
64104
64104
64104
64104
52788
64104
64104
64104
64104
64104
45681
45681
45681
45681
45681
45681
45681
16764
993154
993346
993347
993420
993458
993509
993553
993554
993555
993579
993580
993581
994009
994274
994299
994300
994302
994373
994374
994378
994381
994383
994472
994580
994583
994714
994718
994719
994722
994724
994725
994727
994728
994732
995185
995189
995190
995191
995305
995306
995223
995397
995438
995455
995501
995502
995503
995566
995910
995913
A-220144
715267
695763-02
32-660-052
800832
CA-169511-C
A169511-C
169407-F
169680
220073
220144
177127
A199178
725321
910-231
913-648
220230
1876668
7451931
1851612
1116392
1971528
715567
675418
705799
220294
41236G
199719
73654X
900-355
979-200
199451A
A220295
905-746
1869573
1000-00025
1000-00011
1000-00021
1000-00023
1000-00002
1000-00026
A220545E
37030
930-602
910-233
910-234
912-2
D110-51
A220360
A-220207
64104
45681
45681
96865
16764
64104
64104
64104
64104
64104
64104
64104
64104
45681
64104
64104
64104
16764
16764
16764
16764
16764
45681
45681
45681
64104
64104
64104
64104
64104
64104
64104
64104
64104
16764
40157
40157
40157
40157
40157
40157
64104
64104
64104
64104
64104
64104
74465
64104
64104
INDEX 4
NUMBERICAL INDEX
MFGR.
NO.
995914
995931
995932
995953
995954
996465
996466
996830
996831
997575
998600
998601
998602
998712
998713
998920
998922
998925
999170
999172
999173
999253
999281
999289
999304
999305
999307
999308
999392
999458
999478
999890
VENDOR NO.
VENDOR
CODE
960-215
220577
220178
745687
675191
B4858A
906-197
177032
177031
IBT-1007S
IBT-1059B
IGP-1016F
IBK-1009A
02-400-063
29-030-040
IBT-2004RCS
IBP-2040RA
90-353C
207867
207868
207865
54-0982-00
54-0983-00
286-1722
907998
1876163
801466
1971411
1894594
1974183
854569
A220015K
64104
64104
64104
45681
45681
64104
64104
64104
64104
19728
19728
19728
19728
92865
40190
19728
19728
19728
64104
64104
64104
78422
78422
96152
16764
16764
16764
16764
16764
16764
70040
64104
INDEX 5
TM 10-3930-647-14&P
SUPPLEMENTAL
OPERATING,
MAINTENANCE
AND REPAIR PARTS INSTRUCTIONS
FOR
T R U C K ,
L I F T ,
G A S O L I N E
F O R K ,
E N G I N E
D R I V E N ,
144-INCH
C L A R K
P N E U M A T I C
T I R E
4 , 0 0 0 - L B . ,
LIFT,
M O D E L
C 5 0 0 Y 4 5
(NSN 3930-01-085-3767)
M H E
Paragraph
SECTION
I.
SECTION
II.
SECTION
III.
A PPENDIX A.
B.
C.
D.
GENERAL
Purpose . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Scope . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Description. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Operationalconcept . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Procurement status. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Personnel and training . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Logistics assistance. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Warranty.. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Page
1-1
1-2
1-3
1-4
1-5
1-6
1-7
1-8
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
5
MAINTENANCE
Maintenance concept. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Maintenance allocation chart (MAC)
Maintenance expenditure limits (MEL)
Reliability and maintainability (RAM). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Modifications. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Equipment improvement recommendations (EIR)
Equipment serviceability . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Shipment and storage . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Destruction to deny enemy use. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Basic issue items list (BIIL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Special tools and equipment . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Maintenance and operating supplies . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Maintenance forms and records . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Maintenance of new vehicle. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Preventive maintenance checks and services (PMCS). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
2-1
7
2-2
2-3
2-4
2-5
2-6
2-7
2-8
2-9
2-10
2-11
2-12
2-13
7
7
7
7
7
7
7
8
8
8
8
8
REPAIR PARTS SUPPLY
General . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Prescribed load list (PLL) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Authorized stockage list (ASL). . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Requisitioning repair parts. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Submitting requisitions . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
3-1
3-2
3-3
3-4
3-5
9
9
9
9
9
SPECIAL NOTES AND CORRECTIONS. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . A-1
WARRANTY GUIDELINES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . B-1
MAC . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . C-1
MELCHART . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . D-1
1
TM 10-3930-647-148 P
E.
F.
G.
H.
I.
J.
K.
2
MAINTENANCE AND OPERATING SUPPLY LIST . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE CHECKS AND SERVICES. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
ASL/PLL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
DISTRIBUTION CODES . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
FLOW OF REQUISITIONS & MATERIAL PARTS, NSN . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
FLOW OF REQUISITIONS & MATERIAL PARTS, NON-NSN. . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . ..
SAMPLE REQUISITIONING FORMATS . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Paragraph
Page
E-1
F-1
G-1
H-1
I-1
J-1
K-1
TM 10-3930-647-14&P
THIS PAGE INTENTIONALLY LEFT BLANK
3
4
TM 10-3930-647-14&P
TM 10-3930-647-148 P
S E C T I O N
I
G E N E R A L
1-1. Purpose.
1-5 Procurement Status.
To provide the user and support personnel supplemental maintenance and repair parts instructions (SOMARPI) applicable to the 4,000 lb.
Clark model C500Y45 forklift truck.
The procurement contract number is
DAAE07-79-C-5856.
1-2 Scope.
This SOMARPI applies to Department of the Army
units, organizations and activities that use and/or
support the truck, lift, fork, 4,000 lb., pneumatic
tire, 144-inch lift height, NSN 3390-01-085-3767.
1-3 Description.
The 4,000 lb., gasoline engine driven, pneumatic tire
forklift truck is manufactured by Clark Equipment
Company, Battle Creek, Michigan. The truck is a
front drive, rear steer vehicle with a lift height of
144 inches. It has a Hydratork power shift transmission, two speeds in both forward and reverse.
The truck is equipped with hydraulic brakes on both
drive wheels and a parking brake is mounted on the
differential. It has a roller-type lift assembly with
two independent lift chains. The control valve to
operate the hydraulic lift and tilt cylinder is console
mounted in front of the operator. A side shift
capability is also present on the vehicle. The instrument panel includes: a gas gauge, oil pressure
gauge, ammeter, water temperature gauge and a
direct reading engine hourmeter. The vehicle has a
12-volt electrical system consisting of a heavy duty
alternator, voltage regulator and starting motor.
The truck is equipped with power steering. The
truck has a four-cylinder Waukesha engine.
1-4. Operational Concept.
The 4,000 lb. Clark model C500Y45 is intended to be
used for stacking, unstacking and moving cargo in
and around warehouses, loading platforms and
docks within the military supply system; also, for
moving cargo in and out of highway trailers and
railroad cars. Trucks are intended for operation over
paved, semiprepared and other hard surfaces for
short distances.
1-6 Personnel and Training.
a MOS Requirements. Qualitative and quaninformation
requirements
titative
personnel
(QQPRI) will be disseminated IAW AR 611-1. The
following MOS's can operate and maintain the end
item.
(1) Operator. 62F, 76V
(2) Organizational maintenance. 63B & 63G
(3) Direct a n d g e n e r a l s u p p o r t m a i n tenance. 63B, 63G & 63H
b. Training.
(1) New equipment training team (NETT). New
equipment training teams are available to major
field commands. Request for NETT's should be forwarded to Commander, US Army Tank-Automotive
Command, ATTN: DRSTA-MLT, Warren, MI
48090. Training teams should be requested only
when trained personnel are not available in the command to operate and/or maintain the truck.
teams
introductory
materiel
(2) New
(NMIT): Major field commands requiring briefings
to command staff and users should forward their
U S A r m y
Commander,
requests to
Tank-Automotive Command, ATTN: DRSTA-MLT, Warren, MI 48090. Receiving commands are responsible for the itinerary of NMIT’s.
1.7 Logistics Assistance (AR 700-4).
US Army Tank-Automotive Command’s field maintenance technicians stationed at CONUS and
OCONUS installations are available to furnish onsite training and/or technical assistance. Assistance
can be obtained by contacting the appropriate
logistics assistance office (LAO) listed in appendix
B. AR 700-4.
1-8 Warranty.
See appendix B for warranty guidelines.
5
TM 10-3930-647-14&P
SECTION II
MAINTENANCE
2-1. Maintenance Concept.
2.2 Reliability and Maintainability.
a Maintenance operations. The 4,000-Lb. Clark
model C500Y45 will not require special or new maintenance considerations. Maintenance operations can
be accomplished within the current maintenance
support concept for material handling equipment.
b. Nature and Extent of Maintenance.
(1) Maintenance allocation chart (MAC). Maintenance will be performed as necessary by the
category indicated in the MAC (app. C) to retain
and/or restore serviceability. Units may exceed their
authorized scope and function in the MAC when approved by the appropriate commander.
(2) Operator maintenance. Operator maintenance is limited to daily preventive maintenance
checks and routine servicing (app. F).
(3) Organizational maintenance. Organizational
maintenance consists of scheduled preventive maintenance services, limited removal, minor repair and
adjustments (app F).
(4) Direct support maintenance. Direct support
maintenance consists of repairs on-site and for
return to the user of the end item/assemblies which
can be maintained efficiently with a minimum of
tools and test equipment.
(5) General support maintenance. General sup
port will overhaul and repair for return to stock
items designated by the area support commander.
(6) Depot maintenance. There is no scheduled
depot maintenance on the 4,000-lb. Clark model
C500Y45.
c. Maintenance Expenditure Limit. The Maintenance expenditure limit is based on a life expectancy of 11 years. Limits on repair are based
upon 50% replacement cost through the life expectancy of the end item (app. D).
Reliability and maintainability (RAM) will be
assessed through the field evaluation of current
users. Specific numerical RAM requirements or objectives are not established.
2.3 Modifications.
Modifications will be accomplished by the end item
manufacturer after MERADCOM acceptance and
TACOM approval.
2.4 Equipment Improvement Recommendations
(EIR).
Equipment improvement recommendations will be
submitted IAW DA Pam 738-750.
2.5 Equipment Serviceability.
For Equipment serviceability criteria, see appendix
F.
2.6 Shipment and Storage.
a. Shipment and Storage. Refer to TB 740-97-2
for procedures covering preservation of equipment
for shipment. General procedures for shipment are
found in FM 55-15, with more specific information
in TM 55-2200-001-12 for rail and TM 55-450
series for air transport.
b. Administrative Storage. Refer to TM
740-90-1 for instructions covering administrative
storage of equipment.
c. Weight
Classification.
weight
The
classification of the end item is 8668 pounds.
2.7 Destruction To Deny Enemy Use.
Refer to TM 750-244-6 for instructions governing
destruction of equipment to prevent enemy use.
2.8 Basic Issue Items List (BIIL).
Basic Issue Items are as listed:
7530-01-065-0166
Change 1
7
TM 10-3930-647-14&P
2.9 Special Tools and Equipment.
Special tools and equipment are not required for the
4,000-lb. Clark model C500Y45.
2.10 Maintenance and Operating Supply List.
See appendix E for a list of maintenance and
operating supplies required for initial operation.
your technical manual.
NOTE
INSPECTION UPON DELIVERY
For your protection, make a thorough inspection of the vehicle immediately upon
delivery. Notify the transit agent and
have delivering carrier make a notation
on the freight bill of lading AT ONCE
2.11 Maintenance Forms and Records.
Operational, maintenance and historical forms/
records will be IAW DA Pam 738-750.
2.12 Maintenance of New Vehicle.
See Section II. Preparation For Use, page 2-1, in
8
Change 1
2.13 Preventive Maintenance Checks and Services.
See appendix F for preventive maintenance checks
and services.
TM 10-3930-647-14&P
SECTION
R E P A I R
P A R T S
3.1 General.
a. The basic policies and procedures in AR 710-2
and AR 725-50 are generally applicable to repair
parts management for material handling equipment
(MHE) items.
b. Manufacturer’s parts manuals are furnished
with MHE items instead of Department of the Army repair parts and special tool list (RPSTL).
c. National stock numbers (NSNs) are initially
assigned only to PLL/ASL parts, major assemblies
and suggested repair parts. Additional NSNs are
assigned by the supply support activities as de
mands warrant.
d. Automated processing (AUTODIN) of Federal
supply code manufacturer (FSCM) part number
requistions, without edit for matching NSNs, is
authorized.
e. W e a p o n s y s t e m d e s i g n a t o r c o d e s o n p a r t
requisitions are not required.
f. Repair parts are available from commercial
sources for units and may be purchased locally 1AW
AR 710-2 and AR 735-110.
g. Initial prescribed l o a d l i s t ( P L L ) a n d
authorized stockage list (ASL) will be distributed by
the Tank-Automotive Command (TACOM), ATTN:
DRSTA-MVM, Warren, MI 48090.
3.2 Prescribed Load List (PLL).
The PLL, distributed by TACOM, is an estimated
15 days’ supply recommended for inital stockage at
organizational maintenance. Management of PLL
items will be governed by the provisions of AR
710-2 and local command procedures. A prepared
list of PLL parts will be provided to OCONUS units
before shipment of the end item. Selection of PLL
parts for shipment to OCONUS units is based upon
the receiving command’s recommendations after
their review of the TACOM prepared list.
Organizations and activities in CONUS will
establish PLL stocks through normal requisitioning
process (app. G).
NOTE
Local purchase of repair is authorized
1AW AR 710-2 and AR 735-110.
3.3 Authorized Stockage List (ASL).
The ASL, distributed by TACOM, is an estimated
45 days’ supply of repair parts for support units and
activities. An initial list of ASL parts will be
III
S U P P L Y
provided to designated support units (OCONUS)
before shipment of the end items. The parts shipped
will be selected according the recommendations of
the receiving commands. Receiving commands will
make their recommendations after review of the
initial list distributed by TACOM. Support units
and activities in CONUS will establish ASL stocks
through the normal requisitioning process (app. G).
NOTE
L o c a l p u r c h a s e of
repair
parts
is
authorized IAW AR 710-2 and AR
735-110.
3.4 Requisitioning Repair Parts (MILSTRIP).
All MILSTRIP requisitions (DD Form 1348 series)
prepared for repair parts support of MHE items will
include the use of certain distribution and project
codes.
a. Distribution Codes (App. H). The distribution
code consists of a twopart field. The first part (card
column 54) designates the control activity that
should receive supply and shipping status of all
requisitions. The second part (card columns 55-56)
identifies the end item by the use of a weapons
system designator code.
(1) CONUS customers will use code “F” in card
column 54. OCONUS customers will use the ap
propriate code from appendix P, paragraph P-3, AR
725-50. (See appendix H for distribution codes.)
(2) The weapons system designator code for the
4,000-lb. Clark model C500Y45 is not applicable.
Card columns 55 and 56 will be left blank on all
requisitions for parts to support the designated end
item.
b. Project Codes. Direct support system (DSS)
project codes (FM 38-725) are no longer mandatory
and are being phased out. However, CONUS and
OCONUS customers, submitting non-NSN part
number requisitions to the Defense Construction
Supply Center (DCSC-routing identifier
c o d e - “S9C”), will use MHE project codes “JZM”
(OCONUS) and “BGX” (CONUS) in card columns
57-59.
3.5 Submitting Requisitions.
Requisitions for NSN parts will be forwarded
through the Defense Automated Addressing
System (DAAS) to the Managing Supply Support
Activity (app. I). Requisitions for non-NSN parts
9
TM 10-3930-647-14&P
will be forwarded through DAAS to the Defense
Construction Supply Center (DCSC) (app. J). Sample formats for requisitioning are found in app. K.
NOTE
When the manufacturer’s part number
and Federal supply code for manufacturer
(FSCM) exceed the space in card columns
8 through 22 of A02/AOB requisitions,
prepare an A05/AOE requisition (DD
Form 1348-6) and mail it to: Commander,
Defense Construction Supply Center, ATTN: DCSC-OSR, Columbus, Ohio 43215.
TM 10-3930-647-14&P
A P P E N D I X
S P E C I A L
The package
tainers, inclosed
terfere with the
guard should be
N O T E S
A N D
A
C O R R E C T I O N
guard (backrest) should be removed prior to the loading or unloading of mil-van conhighway trailers or rail cars, when it is determined that the package guard may inroof of the container, trailer or rail car when engaging 2nd tier pallets. The package
reinstalled upon completion of these container operations.
A-1/A-2 blank)
TM 10-3930-647-14&P
APPENDIX B
WARRANTY GUIDELINES
1. The warranty period is 15 months from date of
acceptance or 1500 hours of operation, whichever occurs first. Further, if the Government, prior to
placing vehicles in service, elects to place quantities
of such newly delivered vehicles in Government
depot storage, the warranty period on these
vehicles, which are stored, will not begin to run until
each vehicle is withdrawn from Government storage
or until six months from date of acceptance,
whichever occurs first. The warranty applies to all
supplies furnished under the contract.
NOTE
Date of acceptance is on vehicle data
plate.
2. The manufacturer’s warranty is described in the
operator’s manual and on a decal located behind the
driver’s seat. “Any defects in material or workmanship, under normal use and service for a period
of 15 months from date of acceptance or 1500
vehicle operating hours, whichever may occur first,
should be reported to the local dealer and/or the
Government Contract Administration Section.”
3. If a Clark service agency is not available,
CONUS units should notify the National Maintenance Point (NMP) by telephone, AUTOVON
273-33631338913395. OCONUS units should follow
warranty reporting procedures in DA Pam 738-750.
4. All Warranty Claims, whether they are settled
locally with a manufacturer’s representative or
processed through normal Army maintenance sup
port channels, must be reported to: US Army TankAutomotive Command, ATTN: AMSTA-MVM,
Warren, MI 48397-5000.
5. Listed below is the current authorized Clark
dealers for OCONUS units:
NOTE
This list is provided as a guide.
GROSSAUHEIM
KAISERSLAUTERN
FRANKFURT MAIN
KORNWESTHEIM
GIESSEN
BAUMHOLDER
KAEFERTAL
BAD KREUZNACH
FREUDENHEIM
DEALER: CLARK VERKAUF UND SERVICE GMBH
OTTO-HAHN.STR.9
6070 LANGEN/HESSEN
FUERTH
VILSECK
WUERZBURG
DEALER: CLARK VERKAUF UND SERVICE GMBH
VIRNSBERGERSTRASSE 18
8500 NUERNBERG
AUGSBURG
DEALER: CLARK VERKAUF UND SERVICE GMBH
LUDWIGSFELDER STRASSE 272
8000 MUENCHEN 50
BERLIN
DEALER: FIRMA DIPL. INC. M. WEYER
SCHOTTMUELLERSTRASSE 90
1000 BERLIN 37
BREMERHAVEN
DEALER: GERHARD WIESE
BAUMSTRASSE 68
2000 BREMEN
STUTTGART
DEALER: HANS J. GRUNEWALD
LAGER-UND FOERDERTECHNIK
POSTFACH 4147
INDUSTRIEGELAENDE BONLANDEN
7024 FILDERSTADT 4 (STUTTGART)
Change 1
B-1/(B-2 blank)
TM 10-3930-647-14&P
A P P E N D I X
M A I N T E N A N C E
C
A L L O C A T I O N
C H A R T
F O R
TRUCK,
FORKLIFT,
C A P A C I T Y ,
GED,
C L A R K
Section
I.
SRT,
M O D E L
4,000-LB.
C 5 0 0 Y 4 5
INTRODUCTION
1. General.
This maintenance allocation chart (MAC)
designates responsibility for performance of maintenance functions to specific maintenance
categories.
2. Maintenance Functions.
Maintenance functions are as follows:
a. Inspect. To determine the serviceability of an
item by comparing its physical, mechanical and/or
electrical characteristics with established standards
through examination.
b. Test. To verify serviceability and detect incipient failures by measuring the mechanical or electrical characteristics of an item and comparing
those characteristics with prescribed standards.
c. Service. Operations required periodically to
keep an item in proper operating condition; i.e., to
clean (decontaminate), to preserve, to drain, to paint
or to replenish fuel, lubricants, hydraulic fluids or
compressed air supplies.
d. Adjust. To maintain, within prescribed limits,
by bringing into proper or exact position or by setting the operating characteristic to specified
parameters.
e. Align To adjust specified variable elements of
an item to bring about optimum or desired performance.’
f. Calibrate. To determine and cause corrections
to be made or to be adjusted on instruments or test
measuring and diagnostic equipment used in
precision measurement. Consists of comparisons of
two instruments, one of which is a certified standard
of known accuracy, t o d e t e c t a n d a d j u s t a n y
discrepancy in the accuracy of the instrument being
compared.
g. Install. The act of emplacing, seating or fixing
into position an item, part or module (component or
assembly) in a manner to allow the proper functioning of an equipment or system.
h. Replace. The act of substituting a serviceable
like type part, subassembly or module (component
or assembly) for an unserviceable counterpart.
i. Repair. The application of maintenance services
or other maintenance actions to restore serviceability to an item by correcting specific damage,
fault, malfunction or failure in a part, subassembly,
module (component or assembly), end item or
system.
j. Overhaul.
That maintenance effort (service/action) necessary to restore an item to a completely
serviceable/operational
condition as
prescribed by maintenance standards (i.e., DMWR)
in appropriate technical publications. Overhaul is
normally the highest degree of maintenance performed by the Army. Overhaul does not normally
return an item to like new condition.
k. Rebuild. Consists of those services/actions
necessary for the restoration of unserviceable equipment to a like new condition in accordance with
original maunfacturing standards. Rebuild is the
highest degree of materiel maintenance applied to
Army-equipment. The rebuild operation includes the
act of returning to zero those age measurements
(hours/miles, etc.) considered in classifying Army
equipment/components.
3. Column Entries.
Columns used in the MAC are explained below:
a. Column l-Group Number. Column One (1)
lists group numbers from TB 750-93-1, the purpose
of which is to identify components, assemblies,
subassemblies and modules with their next higher
assemblies.
b. Column 2-Component/Assembly. Column
Two (2) contains the noun names of components,
assemblies, subassemblies and modules for which
maintenance is authorized.
c. Column 3-Maintenance Functions. Column
Three (3) lists the functions to be performed on the
C-1
TM 10-3930-647-14&P
item listed in column 2.
d. Column 4-Maintenance Category. Column
Four (4) specifies, by the listing of a “work time”
figure in the appropriate sub column(s), the lowest
level of maintenance authorized to perform the function listed in column 3. This numeric figure
represents the active time required to perform that
maintenance function at the indicated category of
maintenance. The number of man hours specified by
the “work time” figure represents the average time
required to restore an item (assembly, subassembly,
component, module, end item or system) to a ser-
C-2
viceable condition umder typical field operating conditions. This time includes preparation time,
troubleshooting time and quality assurance/quality
control time in addition to the time required to perform the specific tasks identified for the maintenance functions authorized in the MAC.
e. Column 5-TOO L S and Equipment. Column Five
(5) specifies by code, those common tools sets (not
individual tools) and special tools, test and support
equipment required to perform the designated function.
TM 10-3930-647-14&P
Section II. MAINTENANCE ALLOCATION CHART
(1)
Group
number
01
0100
0101
(2)
Component
assembly
Engine
Engine Assembly
Block, Short Assembly
Cylinder Head
0102
Crankshaft
0105
Gear, Crankshaft
Flywheel Assembly
Gear, Ring
Piston, Connecting Rods,
Sleeves
Valves (Exhaust & Intake)
0106
Camshaft
Oil Pump
0103
0104
03
0301
Oil Filter
Oil Pan
Manifold Intake
Exhaust
Fuel System
Carburetor
0302
Fuel Pump
0304
Lines, Fittings & Hoses
Air Cleaner & Indicator
0306
Fuel Tank
0108
05
0501
Fuel Lines & Fittings
Filter Fuel
Accelerator, Throttle Controls
Exhaust System
Muffler
Exhaust Pipe
Cooling System
Radiator
0503
Thermostat
0504
Hoses. Upper & Lower
Water Pump Assembly
0309
0312
04
0401
0505
06
Fan, Assembly
Fan Belt
Electrical System
Alternator
Regulator
(3)
Maintenance
function
Service
Replace
Repair
Overhaul
Replace
Repair
Replace
Repair
Replace
Repair
Replace
Replace
Replace
Replace
C
0.1
3.0
13.0
13.0
13.0
1.5
0.5
1.0
1.0
0.3
1.0
0.1
0.2
Test
Replace
Repair
Replace
0.3
1.0
0.7
0.2
1.0
0.5
0.8
1.5
Replace
Replace
Service
Replace
Repair
Test
Replace
Replace
Replace
Overhaul
Replace
Replace
6.0
12.0
Adjust
Replace
Replace
Replace
Repair
Replace
Replace
Replace
Replace
Adjust
Replace
Repair
Test
Replace
Replace
Service
Replace
Service
Repair
Replace
Replace
Replace
(4)
Maintenance level
O
F
H
0.2
6.0
12.0
4.5
4.0
2.0
4.0
D
(5)
Tools and
equipment
12.0
28.0
20.0
4.5
13.0
15.0
9.5
6.0
1--11
1-11
1-11
1-11
1-11
1-11
1-11
1-4
1-11
1-11
1-11
1-11
1-4
1-11
1-4
1-4
1-4
1-11
1-4
1-4
1-4
1-4
1-4
1-11
1-4
1-4
1-4
1-4
1-4
0.3
1.4
3.0
1.5
1.6
1.5
1.5
1-4
1-4
1-11
1-4
1-4
1-4
1-4
1-11
1-4
1-4
0.2
1.5
2.5
1.5
1.0
Remarks
1-11
1.0
1.0
1.2
0.7
(6)
1-4
1-4
1-11
1-11
C-3
TM 10-3930-647-14&P
(1)
Group
number
(2)
Component
assembly
0603
Starter Motor
0605
Switch, Starter Ignition
Distributor Assembly
0607
Ignition Coil
wiring
Spark Plugs
Instrument Panel
0610
0611
Hourmeter
Ammeter
Gauge, Oil Pressure
Gauge, Water Temp.
Gauge, Fuel
Switch, Light
Box, Fuse
Lights, Headlights &
Taillights
Sending Unit (Fuel, Oil & Temp)
Horn, Relay & Wiring
0612
Battery
07
Transmission
Transmission Shafts & Gears
Torque Converter & Drive Plate
Transmission Assembly
0608
0609
0708
0710
0713
0714
0714
Transmission Clutch Forward &
Reverse
Transmission Control Valve
0721
10
1000
Transmission Shift Levers &
Linkage
Oil Filter. Transmission
Front Axle (Drive)
Front Axle Assembly
11
1100
Spindle, Axle
Axle Shaft
Bearings & Seals Axle Shaft
Axle Adapter
Differential Assembly
Ring Gear & Pinion
Pinion Seal & Bearings
Rear Axle (Steering)
Rear Axle Assembly
Spindle, Right or Left
Axle King Pin & Needle Bearings
C-4
(3)
Maintenance
function
C
0.3
1.0
Test
Replace
Repair
Replace
Adjust
Replace
Replace
Replace
Replace
Replace
Repair
Replace
Replace
Replace
Replace
Replace
Replace
Replace
Replace
Replace
Test
Replace
Service
Test
Replace
DX
Replace
Replace
Service
Test
Replace
Repair
Overhaul
Replace
Overhaul
Replace
Repair
Adjust
Replace
Replace
(4)
Maintenance level
O
H
F
0.4
0.5
1.5
0.4
0.4
0.5
1.8
0.6
0.6
1.0
0.6
0.6
0.5
0.6
0.4
0.2
D
(5)
Tools and
equipment
1-4
1-4
1-11
1-4
1-4
1-4
1-4
1-4
1-4
1-4
1-11
1-4
1-4
1-4
1-4
1-4
1-4
1-4
1-4
1.8
1.6
1.0
0.2
1.0
1-4
1-4
1-4
0.3
0.7
1-4
1-4
1-11
0.7
0.5
0.4
Service
Replace
Repair
Replace
RepIace
Replace
Replace
Repair
Replace
Replace
0.3
Service
Replace
Repair
Adjust
Service
Replace
Service
Replace
0.5
1.0
9.0
1.0
8.0
20.0
8.0
0.3
12.0
16.0
12.0
14.0
3.0
5.5
1.0
1.0
1.5
0.8
0.3
12.0
4.0
5.5
2.0
2.0
4.0
8.0
3.5
6.0
8.5
1-11
1-11
1-4
1-11
1-11
1-11
1-11
1-11
1-11
1-11
1-11
1-4
1-4
1-4
1-4
1-11
1-11
1-11
1-11
1-11
1-11
1-11
1-11
1-11
1-4
1-11
1-11
1-4
1-11
1-4
1-11
(6)
Remarks
TM 10-3930-647-14&P
(1)
Group
number
(2)
Component
assembly
Pivot Arm & Bearings
Axle Mounting, Trunnion
Bearings & Housing
Tie Rods, Right & Left
12
1201
Brakes
Hand Brakes, Lever & Linkage
1204
1206
13
1311
1313
14
1407
0.5
1-4
1-11
1-4
1-11
2.5
0.4
1.5
0.3
Brake Pedal & Linkage
Linkage
Wheels
Wheel Assembly
Bearings & Seals
Tires, Pneumatic W/Tube
Replace
Repair
1.0
0.8
1-4
1-4
Replace
Replace
Inspect
Service
Replace
DX
2.0
2.5
1-4
1-4
1412
Hydraulic Filter Assembly
Hydraulic Filter Element
Hydraulic Cylinder
1414
18
1801
Steering Control Valve
Body, Cab, Hood & Hull
Overhead Guard
Body Panel & Hoods
Seat Cushions
24
2401
Hydraulic Lift Compartment
Hydraulic Pump
2402
Hydraulic Control Valve
2403
Hydraulic Control Levers &
Linkage
Hydraulic Tilt Cylinder
Replace
Replace
Service
Replace
Repair
Replace
Repair
Replace
Replace
Replace
Repair
Replace
Replace
Repair
Replace
Repair
Adjust
Replace
Repair
Test
Replace
Repair
Replace
Repair
Replace
Repair
Replace
Repair
Remarks
1-4
Replace
Steering
Steering Wheel
Steering Column & Shaft
Steering Cylinder
(6)
2.0
Wheel Cylinder
Hoses. Lines & Fittings
2404
0.3
Hydraulic Brake System
Master Cylinder
Service Brake
1411
1806
Service
Replace
Service
Replace
Adjust
Replace
Service
(5)
Tools and
equipment
Adjust
Service
Replace
Replace
Repair
Service
Replace
Repair
Service
Replace
Parking Brake
1202
(4)
Maintenance level
(3)
Maintenance
function
0.6
0.4
1-4
1-4
1-11
1-11
1-11
1-4
1-11
1-11
1-4
1-4
1.5
1.5
2.5
2.0
4.0
5.0
0.3
1.5
2.0
1-11
0.1
0.2
0.5
1.0
0.5
1-4
1-11
1-4
1-11
1-11
1-11
1-11
1-4
1-4
1-4
1-11
1-11
2.5
0.5
3.0
4.5
1.0
1.7
0.3
0.3
3.0
4.5
3.5
1.5
1.5
1-4
1-12
1-4
1-12
0.7
1-4
1-11
1.5
0.5
0.5
0.2
1.5
3.0
2.0
3.0
1.0
2.0
1.5
3.0
1-11
1-11
1-11
1-11
1-11
1-4
1-11
1-11
1-11
Change 1
C-5
TM 10-3930-647-14&P
(1)
Group
number
2405
(2)
Component
assembly
Lift Cylinder
Mast&Carriage Assembly
2406
2407
Hydraulic Lines & Fittings
Side Shift Cylinder
2408
Oil Reservoir
C-6
(3)
Maintenance
function
Replace
Repair
Service
Adjust
Replace
Repair
Replace
Replace
Repair
Service
Replace
C
(4)
Maintenance level
H
F
O
3.5
5.5
0.3
0.4
3.0
4.5
2.0
1.0
2.0
0.1
0.3
2.5
D
(5)
Tools and
equipment
1-11
1-11
1-4
1-4
1-12
1-12
1-11
1-11
1-11
1-4
1-11
(6)
Remarks
TM 10-3930-647-14&P
Section III. TOOL AND TEST EQUIPMENT
REQUIREMENTS
Tool or test
equipment
reference
code
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8.
9.
10.
Maintenance
category
Nomenclature
National/NATO
stock number
UNLESS OTHERWIDE NOTED. ALL MAINTENANCE FUNCTIONS CAN BE ACCOMPLISHED
WITH THE THE TOOLS CONTAINED IN THE FOLLOWING COMMON TOOL SETS
Tool
Auto;
5180-00-177-7033
Kit,
General Mechanic
0,F,H
SC-5180-90-CL-N26
Shop Equipment, Auto Maint At Repair: Org 4910-00-754-0654
0,F,H
Maint Common No. 1-Less Power; SC
4910-95-CL-A74
Shop Equipment, Auto Maint & Repair: Org 4910-00-754-0653
O,F,H
Maid Supplemental No. 1--Less Power; SC
4910-00-95-CL-A73
Shop Equipment, Auto Maint & Repair Org 4910-00-754-0650
O,F,H
Common No.
2--Less
Power; SC
4910-95-CL-A72
4910-00-754-0714
Shop Set, Fuel & Electrical Systems, FM
F,H
Basic-Less Power; SC 4910-95-CL-A01
4910-00-754-0705
Shop Set, Auto Maint & Repair, FM
F,H
Basic-Less Power; SC 4910-95-CL-A31
Shop Equipment, Auto Maint & Repair: FM 4910-00-754-0706
F,H
Supplemental No. 1-Less Power; SC
4910-95-CL-A62
Shop Equipment, Welding: FM; SC 3470-00-357-7268
F,H
3470-90-CL-A08
Tool Kit,
Master
Mechanics; SC 5180-00-699-5273
F,H
5180-90-CL-N04
Too1 Kit, Welders; SC 5180-90-CL-N39
5180-00-754-0661
F,H
Line
item
number
W33094
W32593
W32867
W32730
T30414
T24660
T24519
T16714
W45080
W58075
C-7
TM 10-3930-647-14& P
Section
Reference
codes
NONE
IV.
REMARKS
Remarks
NONE
C-9
A P P E N D I X
M A I N T E N A N C E
D
E X P E N D I T U R E
L I M I T S
Repair limitations
NSN
3830-01-085-3767
Item identification
Truck, Lift, Fork, Gasoline Engine Driven, 4,000-lb. Capacity, 144” Lift. MHE 243
1980
11
50%
30%
1987
1991
tm10-3930-647-14&p
D-1/(D-2 blank)
A P P E N D I X
M A I N T E N A N C E
A N D
O P E R A T I N G
Nomenclature:
Make:
Truck. Lift, Fork, 4K. GED, PT 144” Lift
MFR part No.:
Component
Application
Engine
Fuel Tank
Radiator
Hydraulic
Brake
Differential
Transmission
Hydraulic
System
Lubrication
Fittings
Electrolyte
NSN:
3930-01-085-3767
MFR part no.
or
Nat’l Stock No.
E
Description
S U P P L Y
L I S T
Model:
Clark
C500Y45
Serial No. Range:
Y355-1 thru 196-4560
Qty Req
F/Initial
OPN
F/8 HRS
OPN
5 qts
9150-00-186-6668
9150-00-189-6728
9150-00-188-9858
9150-00-188-9859
9130-00-264-6218
6850-00-243-1992
9150-00-252-6375
OE/HDO-10 (5 gal)
OE/HDO-10 (55 gal)
OE/HDO-30 (5 gal)
OE/HDO-30 (55 gal,
Bulk, Regular Grade
Water Antifreeze (1 gal)
HBA
5 gal
None
None
9150-01-035-5395
9150-01-035-5395
9150-01-035-5391
*See Engine
*See Engine
MIL-L-2105C 80W190 (5 gal)
MIL-L-2105C 85W/140 (5 gal)
MIL-L-2105C 75W (5 gal)
OE/HDO-10
OE/HDO-10
None
None
None
None
None
9150-00-190-0907
GAA (35 lb. can)
None
6810-00-249-9354
Sulfuric Acid, Electrolyte
None
Notes
SEE
ATTACHED SHEET
8 gal
As Req
TM 10-3930-647-14&P
E-1
E-2
TM 10-3930-647-14&P
NOTES:
1. For Operation of Equipment in Protected Cold
Temperatures Below -10F. Remove lubricants
prescribed in the key for temperatures above - 10F.
Relubricate with lubricants specified in the key for
temperatures below .- 10F (- 18 C).
2 Oil Can Points. Every 50 hours lubricate the accelerator and parking brake linkage, mast interlock,
control valve linkage. pins and clevises and all exposed adjusting threads with OE/HDO.
3. Wheel Bearing and Bull Gears. Every 500
hours remove wheels, clean and inspect all parts,
replace damaged or worn parts, repack bearings,
and then reassemble. Fill bull gear spaces to three
fourths height of teeth with grease GAA.
4. Engine Crankcase. Capacity 5 qts (4.7L) when oil
filter in replaced.
5. Transmission/Axle Adapter. Capacity 12 qts
(11.4L) when filter is replaced.
6. Lubricants. The following is a list of lubricants
with the Military Symbols and applicable.
Specification Numbers: OE/HDOMIL-L-2104C,
GO MIL-L-2105C. HBA MIL-H-5606, GAA
MIL-G-10924.
TM 10-3930-647-14&P
A P P E N D I X
P R E V E N T I V E
M A I N T E N A N C E
Section
I.
C H E C K S
OPERATOR/CREW
1. Do your before (B) PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE just before you operate the vehicle. Pay
attention to the CAUTIONS AND WARNINGS.
2. Do your (D) PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE
during operation. ( D u r i n g o p e r a t i o n m e a n s t o
monitor the forklift and its related component
systems while they are actually being operated).
3. Do your after (A) PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE right after operating the vehicle. Pay
attention to the CAUTIONS and WARNINGS.
4. Do your weekly (W) PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE weekly.
5. Do your monthly (M) PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE once a month.
6. If something doesn’t work, troubleshoot it with
the instructions in your commercial manual or
notify your supervisor.
7. Always do your
PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE in the same order so it gets to be a
habit. Once you’ve had some practice, you’ll spot
anything wrong in a hurry.
8. If anything looks wrong and you can’t fix it,
write it on your DA Form 2404. If you find
s o m e t h i n g seriously
wrong,
r e p o r t it
to
organizational maintenance RIGHT NOW.
9. When you do your PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE, take along the tools you will need to
make all the checks. Take along a rag, you’ll always
need at least one.
WARNING
Dry cleaning solvent, used
is potentially dangerous to
property. Do not use near
excessive heat. Flash point
is 138°F.
F
to clean parts
personnel and
open flame or
of this solvent
A-Keep it clean: Dirt, grease, oil, and debris only
get in the way and may cover up a serious problem.
Clean as you work and as needed. Use dry cleaning
solvent (SD-2) on all metal surfaces. Use soap and
water when you clean rubber or plastic material.
B--Bolts, nuts and screws: Check them all for ob
vious looseness, missing, bent or broken condition.
You can’t try them all with a tool, of course, but
look for chipped paint, bare metal, or rust around
bolt heads. If you find one you think it loose, tighten
it, or report it to organizational maintenance if you
A N D
S E R V I C E S
PMCS
cannot tighten it.
C-Welds: Look for loose or chipped paint, rust or
gaps where parts are welded together. If you find a
bad weld, report it to organizational maintenance.
D-Electric wires and connectors: Look for cracked
or broken insulation, bare wires, and loose or broken
connectors. Tighten loose connectors and make sure
the wires are in good shape.
E-Hoses and fluid lines: Look for wear, damage
and leaks and make sure clamps and fittings are
tight. Wet spots show leaks, of course. But a stain
around a fitting or connector can mean a leak. If a
leak comes from a loose fitting or connector, tighten
it. If something is broken or worn out, report it to
organizational maintenance.
10. It is necessary for you to know how fluid
leakage affects the status of your vehicle. The
following are definitions of the types/classes of
leakage you need to know to be able to determine
the status of your vehicle. Learn, then be familiar
with them and REMEMBER-WHEN IN DOUBT,
NOTIFY YOUR SUPERVISOR!
Leakage definitions for crew/operator PMCS
Class I
Class II
Class III
Seepage of fluid (as indicated by wetness or discoloration) not great
enough to form drops.
Leakage of fluid great enough to form
drops but not enough to cause drops
to drip from item being checked/inspected.
Leakage of fluid great enough to form
drops that fall from the item being
checked/inspected.
CAUTION
Equipment operation is allowable with
minor leakages (class I OR II). of course,
consideration must be given to the fluid
capacity in the item/system being
checked/inspected. When in doubt, notify
your supervisor.
When operating with class I OR II leaks,
continue to check fluid levels as required
in your PMCS.
Class I I I leaks should be reported to your
supervisor.
F-1
TM 10-3930-647-14&P
Operator Crew Preventive Maintenance Checks and Services
M-Monthly
A-After
W-Weekly
B-Before
D-During
Item
No.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
Interval
B
D
A
W
D
Item to be Inspected
Procedure: Check for and have repaired, filled or
adjusted as needed
IMPORTANT: Perform Weekly as well as before
operations PMCS if:
1. You are the assigned operator and have not
operated the item since the last weekly.
2. You are operating the item for the first time.
EXTERIOR OF VEHICLE
a. Check for leaks or appearance of leaks.
b. Visually check overhead guard for obvious cracks
in web.
HYDRAULIC RESERVOIR
Check reservoir oil level, add oil if necessary to bring
level up to full mark on dipstick, when mast is lowered
and all cylinders retracted.
TIRES
Check tires for wear and correct pressure (100 psi).
RADIATOR
Check radiator and fill if necessary to marker tab (add
50/50 mixture of water and antifreeze) (reference TB
750-651).
ENGINE OIL LEVEL
Check oil dipstick, add oil, if needed, to raise level to full
mark.
AIR CLEANER
Check element to insure it is clean, if not, have
organizational replace it.
HORN
Check horn by pressing button.
BRAKES
Check that brakes stop truck.
9
STEERING
Check that truck steers free and easy.
10
ACCELERATOR
Check that the accelerator goes smoothly.
LIFT LEVER
Check that lifting and lowering is smooth.
11
12
13
14
15
TILT LEVER
Check that forward and backward tilt is smooth and immediate.
SIDE SHIFT LEVER
Check that shift operates.
LIGHTS
Check that lights are working.
INSTRUMENT PANEL READINGS
a. Oil pressure gauge-20 to 60 psi at normal
operating speeds.
b. Ammeter-registers slight (+) charge at above idle
speed.
c. Water temperature-170°-210° after 10 minutes of
operation.
Equipment is not ready/
available if:
Class I I I leaks or any fuel leaks.
Obvious cracks in welds.
Tire is flat, unserviceable.
Element is missing or damaged.
Service brake will not stop
truck.
Steering sticks or truck is hard
to steer.
Pedal sticks.
Lifting or lowering jerky or uncontrollable.
Tilt does not operate.
Gauge registers less than 5 psi.
Continuous high rate of charge
or discharge or erratic.
Registers in red portion of
gauge.
F-3
TM 10-3930-647-14&P
Operator/Crew Preventive Maintenance Checks and Services-Continued
D-During
A-After
W-Weekly
M-Monthly
B-Before
Item
No.
16
17
F-4
Interval
B
D
A
W
M
Item to be inspected
Procedure: Check for and have repaired, fiied or
Adjusted as needed
BATTERY
Inspect for electrolyte level, add distilled water if
required (reference TM 9-6140-200-14).
RADIATOR ENGINE COMPARTMENT
Inspect/clean air passages.
Equipment is not ready/
available if:
Battery cracked or discharged.
TM 10-3930-647-14&P
Section II. ORGANIZATIONAL PMCS
1. Do your (Q) PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE
once each 3 months.
2. Do your (S) PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE
once each 6 months.
3. Do your (A) PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE
once each year.
4. Do your (B) PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE
once each two years.
5. Do your (H) PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE
at the hour interval listed.
6. Do your (MI) PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE
when the mileage of the vehicle reaches the amount
listed.
7. If something doesn’t work, troubleshoot it with
the instructions in your commercial manual or
notify your supervisor.
8. Always do your
PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE in the same order so it gets to be a
habit. Once you’ve had some practice, you’ll spot
anything wrong in a hurry.
9. If anything looks wrong and you can’t fix it,
write it on your DA Form 2404. If you find
something seriously wrong, report it to direct support maintenance RIGHT NOW.
10. When you do your PREVENTIVE MAINTENANCE, take along the tools you will need to
make all the checks. Take along a rag, you’ll always
need at least one.
WARNING
Dry cleaning solvent, used
is potentially dangerous to
property. Do not use near
excessive heat. Flash point
is 138°F.
to clean parts
personnel and
open flame or
of this solvent
A-Keep it clean: Dirt, grease, oil, and debris only
get in the way and may cover up a serious problem.
Clean as you work and as needed. Use dry cleaning
solvent (SD-2) on all metal surfaces. Use soap and
water when you clean rubber or plastic material.
B-Bolts, nuts, and screws: Check them all for oh
vious looseness, missing, bent or broken condition.
You can’t try them all with a tool, of course, but
look for chipped paint, bare metal, or rust around
bold heads. If you find one you think is loose,
tighten it, or report it to direct support maintenance
if you can not tighten it.
C-Welds: Look for loose or chipped paint, rust or
gaps where parts are welded together. If you find a
bad weld, report it to direct support maintenance.
D-Electric wires and connectors: Look for cracked
or broken insulation, bare wire, and loose or broken
connectors. Tighten loose connectors and make sure
the wires are in good shape.
E-Hoses and fluid lines: Look for wear, damage
and leaks and make sure clamps and fittings are
tight. Wet spots show leaks, of course, but a stain
around a fitting or connector can mean a leak. If a
leak comes from a loose fitting or connector, tighten
it. If something is broken or worn out, report it to
direct support maintenance.
11. It is necessary for you to know how fluid
leakage affects the status of your vehicle. The
following are definitions of the types/classes of
leakage you need to know to be able to determine
the status of your vehicle. Learn, then be familiar
with them and REMEMBER-WHEN IN DOUBT,
NOTIFY YOUR SUPERVISOR!
Leakage definitions for organizational PMCS
Class I
class II
Class III
Seepage of fluid (as indicated by wetness or discoloration) not great
enough to form drops.
Leakage of fluid great enough to form
drops but not enough to cause drops
to drip from item being checked/inspected.
Leakage of fluid great to form drops
that
fall
from
the
item
being
checked/inspected.
CAUTION
Equipment operation is allowable with
minor leakages (class I or II). Of course,
consideration must be given to the fluid
in the item/system being
capacity
checked/inspected. When in doubt, notify
your supervisor.
When operating with class I or II leaks,
continue to check fluid levels as required
in your PMCS.
Class III leaks should be reported you
your supervisor or direct support.
F-S
TM 10-3930-647-14&P)
Organizational Preventive Maintenance Checks and Services
Q-Quarterly
S-Semiannually
A-Annually
H-Hours
M-Miles
Item to be Inspected
Interval
Item No.
Procedure:
1
100
2
100
3
100
4
100
5
100
6
200
7
200
8
200
9
200
10
400
11
400
12
500
13
500
14
15
500
16
500
17
500
F-6
B-Biennially
Check for and have repaired, filled, or adjusted as needed
NOTE
Perform operator/crew PMCS prior to or in conjunction with organizational PMCS
if:
a. There is a delay between the daily operation of the equipment and the
organizational PMCS.
b. Regular operator is not assisting/participating.
MAST ASSEMBLY
a. Lubricate sliding and roller contact surfaces.
b. Clean and inspect lift chains for bent or cracked links. Check adjustment and
lubricate.
BATTERY
Inspect/service electrolyte level and charge as required (specific gravity above
1.250 with electrolyte at 80°F). Check that cables are secure and clean (reference
TM 9-6140-200-14).
ENGINE
a. Drain engine oil, replace oil filter and refii with five quarts (app. E).
b. Check fan belt tension-1/2” to 3/4” deflection at point halfway between fan
and alternator pulleys with about 10 lbs. applied force.
TRANSMISSION
Check fluid level in transmission on dipstick located under the floor plate. Engine
must be running at idle with transmission in neutral. Add transmission fluid to
bring level up to full mark on dipstick. Do not overfill.
DRIVE AXLE
Check and clean breather located on housing.
TRANSMISSION OIL FILTER
Replace. Check for leaks.
HYDRAULIC OIL RESERVOIR
Clean sump filler cap, replace if damaged.
BRAKE MASTER CYLINDER
Check fluid level and add if necessary to bring level within 3/8” of top edge.
MAST ASSEMBLY
a. Check for side play of fork carriage and check chain adjustment if it is not
level.
b. Remove lift chains, clean and inspect for wear and broken or cracked links.
Repair, install. adjust, and lubricate.
FUEL FILTER
Replace filter.
ENGINE
a. Replace distributor points (set contact point gap at 0.021”).
b. RepIace spark plugs (set plug gap at 0.025”).
c. Remove and clean/replace PCV valve.
d. Engine compression at each tuneup should not vary by more than 15 psi
amongst the cylinders (approximately 140 psi).
HOSES, TUBES AND FITTINGS
Inspect, replace or have replaced, if necessary, correct any leaks that are evident.
WHEELS
a. Clean and lubricate steer wheel bearings (repack when brake shoes are
replaced).
b. Inspect and replace as necessary the brake shoes, turn cylinder if required
(not to exceed 0.100).
ELECTRICAL SYSTEM
Check tightness of terminals, wires, cables, and electrical components.
BRAKE PEDAL
Adjust, pedal should not reach floorboard when depressed.
TRANSMISSION
Drain fluid and refill.
CONTROL VALVE
Check linkage.
T M 10-3930-647-14&P
Organizational Preventive Maintenance Checks and Services-Continued
S-Semiannually
Q-Quarterly
Interval
Item No.
Q
S
A
B
A- Annually
B-Biennially
H-Hours
M-Miles
Item to be Inspected
H
18
500
19
1000
20
1000
21
1000
MI
Procedure: Check for and have repaired, filled, or adjusted as needed
PARKING BRAKE
Check and adjust as necessary.
HYDRAULIC OIL FILTER
Replace. Check for leaks.
HYDRAULIC OIL RESERVOIR
Drain hydraulic oil. flush and refill.
COOLING SYSTEM
Drain fluid, flush and refill.
F-7
A P P E N D I X
P R E S C R I B E D
L O A D
G
L I S T / A U T H O R I Z E D
S T O C K A G E
L I S T
Item: Truck, Forklift, 4,000 Lb., GED, PT
Contract No.: DAAE07-79-C-5856
Contractor: Clark Equipment Company, Battle Creek. MI
Quantity: 196 each
Previous Procurements:
Quantity
77
626
99
136
437
40
180
Contractor
Baker
Towmotor
Towmotor
Baker
Baker
Towmotor
Allis Chalmers
MGR
G-1
NSN
GO
6240-00-836-2079
S9G
6240-00-155-7900
S9C
2920-00-018-5500
S9C
S9C
S9C
2520-00-217-5492
3030-01-997-6709
2940-00-852-3743
S9C
S9C
2920-01-097-0423
2920-01-049-9513
S9C
2940-00-892-6214
S9C
2940-00-986-0276
S9C
5920-00-280-4007
Year
FY64
FY64
FY65
TY70
FY71
FY72
FY76
Part number
54-0328-00
877752
1176
880690
UD-16
18-Z8
890273
1810437
1317741
150933
CA70PL
668788
1811063
lBK-1009A
998602
235114
PB50
990936
PH3381
PHBA
990937
307014
661556
NOTE
The above NSNs are all SMR coded “PAOZZ”.
FSCM
78422
12603
24446
12603
11583
19728
12603
12603
12603
73370
73370
12603
12603
19728
12603
73370
73370
12603
73370
73370
12603
75915
12603
Part description
U/M
PLL
1-5
ASL
1-5
Light, Sealed Beam
Ea
1
Bulb, Stop Light
Ea
1
2
.26
Spark Plug
Ea
4
16
.82
Cartridge, Filter Hyd
Belt, Fan
Element, Air
Cleaner
Ea
Ea
Ea
1
1
1
1
2
5
3.75
7.20
3.46
Kit, Eng Tune Up
Cap, Distributor
Ea
Ea
2
0
5
2
6.45
12.64
Filter, Eng Oil
Ea
3
6
1.43
Filter, Transmission
Ea
2
6
.95
Fuse
Ea
8
24
.04
2
unit
Price
1.51
TM 10-3930-647-14&
TM 10-3930-647-14&P
APPENDIX H
DISTRIBUTION CODES
1. Card Columns 55 and 56
Leave blank.
Code
M ........
2. Card Column
CONUS customers will use “F” in column 54.
OCONUS customers will use the appropriate code
below (extracted from app. P, para P-3, AR 725-50,
29 Aug 75, including all changes).
Code
Activity
B . . . . . . . . . . . . US Army Security Assistance Center
New Cumberland Army Depot
New Cumberland, PA 17070
(For transceiver and mail)
D . . . . . . . . . . . . US Army Electronics Materiel Readiness
Activity
Vint Hill Farms Station
Warrenton. VA 22186
E . . . . . . . . . . . . US Army Troop Support and Aviation Materiel
Readiness Command
4300 Goodfellow Blvd
St. Louis, MO 63120
F . . . . . . . . . . . . US Army Logistics Control Activity
Presidio of San Francisco, CA 94129
H . . . . . . . . . . . US Army Support Command, Hawaii
(USASCH)
For Shafter, HI 96858
I . . . . . . . . . . . . US Army Troop Support and Aviation Materiel
Readiness Command
4396 Goodfellow Blvd
St. Louis, MO 63120
J . . . . . . . . . . . . US Army Garrison-Honshu
DIO, Installation Supply Activity
Sagami, Japan
APO San Francisco 96343
K . . . . . . . . . . . . US Army Inventory Management Center
Camp Henry, Taegu, Korea
APO San Francisco 96212
L . . . . . . . . . . . . US Army Missile Materiel Readiness Command
ATTN: DRSMI-SSP
Huntsville, AL 35898
P.........
Q. . . . . . . . .
S .........
T.........
U. . . . . . . . .
V.........
W........
X.........
Y.........
Z .........
Activity
US Army Troop Support Agency
European Field Office
Zweibruecken. Germany
APO New York 09502
US Army Communications and Electronics
Materiel Readiness Command
ATTN: Dir of Materiel Management
For Monmouth, NJ 07703
Theater Army Materiel Management
Center (200th)
ATTN: AEAGD-MMC-IS
Zweibruecken, Germany
APO New York 09052
US Army Armament Materiel Readiness Command
Rock Island, IL 61202
2d Support Center (MMC)
Fort Bragg, NC 28307
US Army Medical Materiel Agency
Frederick, MD 21701
9th Logistics Center (MM)SUPCOM
Bldg. 3004, Panzer Kaserne
D-6750 Kaiser slautern, Germany
APO New York 09325
US Army Materiel Management Center
19th Service Co.
3d Support Command
Frankfurt, Germany
APO New York 09757
US Army 800th Material Management Center
2d Support Command (Corps)
Nellingen, Germany
APO New York 09160
US Army Tank-Automotive Materiel
Reediness Command
Warren, MI 48090
Director for Inventory Control
US Army Medical Materiel Center, Europe
Pirmasens, Germany
APO New York 09133
H-l
TM 10-3930-647-14&P
APPENDIX I
FLOW OF REQUISITIONS AND MATERIEL
CHE PARTS (NSN)
TA 126332
I-1/(1-2
blank)
TM 10-3930-647-14&P
APPENDIX J
FLOW OF REQUISITIONS AND MATERIEL
CHE PARTS (NON-NSN)
TA 126333
J-1/(J-2 blank)
TM 10-3930-647-14&P
APPENDIX K
SAMPLE FORMAT - MILSTRIP REQUISITION FOR CHE (NSN)
CARD
DESCRIPTION
COLUMN
OF DATA
1-3
Document Identifier Code
4-6
7
8-22
23-24
25-29
30-43
44
45-50
51
52-53
54-56
Routing Identifier Code
Media/Status Code
NSN
Unit of Issue
Quantity
Document Number
Demand Code
Supplementary Address
Signal Code
Fund Code
Distribution Code CC-54
57-59
60-61
62-64
65-66
CC-55-56
Project Code
Priority Code
Required Delivery Date
Advice Code
MANDATORY ENTRY
FOR CCE
A0A - CONUS
A01 - O v e r s e a s
“F” for CONUS;
see AR 725-50
for OCONUS
Weapon System Code
(DSS) Code
TA 126334
K-l
TM 10-3930-647-14&P
Card
Column
Description
of Data
67-69
Blank
70
Identification
Code
Applicable to Entry
in cc 71-80
Mandatory
Entry , CHE/MHE
A - Technical Order
or Technical
Manual
B - End Item
Identification
C - Noun Description
D - Drawing or
Specification No.
71-80
K-2
Reference Identification
Identification of
Reference Specified
in cc 70
TM 10-3930-647-14&P
SAMPLE FORMAT - MILSTRIP REQUISITION FOR CHE (NON-NSN)
CARD
DESCRIPTION
COLUMN
OF DATA
1-3
Document Identifier Code
4-6
7
8-22
23-24
25-29
30-43
44
45-50
51
52-53
54-56
Routing Identifier Code
Media/Status Code
FSCM and Part Number
Unit of Issue
Quantity
Document Number
Demand Code
Supplementary Address
Signal Code
Fund Code
Distribution Code CC-54
57-59
60-61
62-64
65-66
CC-55-56
Project Code
Priority Code
Required Delivery Date
Advice Code
MANDATORYENTRY
FOR CCE
A0B - CONUS
A02 - Overseas
Always S9C
"F" for CONUS;
see AR 725-50
for OCONUS
Weapon System Code
CCE (DSS) Code
TA 1126335
K-3
TM 10-3930-647-14&P
Card
Column
Description
of Data
67-69
Blank
70
Identification Code
Applicable to Entry
in cc 71-80
Mandatory
Entry, CHE/MHE
A - Technical Order
or Technical
Manual
B - End Item
Identification
C - Noun Description
D - Drawing or
Specification No.
71-80
K-4
Reference
Identification
Identification of
Reference Specified
in cc 70
TM 10-3930-647-14&P
SAMPLE FORMAT - MILSTRIP REQUISITION
FOR
MHE/CCE (NON-NSN) (MANUAL)
TA 126336
K-5
TM 10-3930-647-14&P
INSTRUCTIONS
This form will only be used in those cases where the manufacturer's code
and part number exceed the spaces allocated in card columns 8 - 22 of
the requisition.
CARD
COLUMN
DESCRIPTION OF DATA
MANDATORY ENTRY
FOR CHE/MHE
1-3
Document
Code
A0E - CONUS
A05 - OVERSEAS
4-6
Routing Identifier Code
7
8-22
Identifier
Media Status Code
FSCM and Part Number
23-24
Unit of Issue
25-29
Quantity
30-43
Document Number
44
45-50
51
Always S9C
Leave Blank
Enter in Block 1
Under
Identification
Data
Demand Code
Supplementary
Address
Siqnal Code
52-53
Fund Code
54-56
Distribution Code
cc 54
"F" for CONUS. (See
AR 725-50 for OVERSEAS.
CC-55-56- Leave Blank
57-59
Project Code
60-61
Priority Code
62-64
Required Delivery
Date
65-66
Advice Code
67-80
CONUS - BGX
OCONUS - JZM
Blank
IDENTIFICATION DATA - Lower half of DD Form 1348-6, complete blocks
1 thru 9.
K-6
TM 10-3930-647-14&P
By Order of the Secretary of the Army:
Official :
E. C. MEYER
General, United States Army
Chief of Staff
ROBERT M. JOYCE
Brigadier General, United States Army
The Adjutant General
Distribution:
To be distributed in accordance with DA Form 12-25A, direct support and
general support maintenance requirements for truck, forklift.
* U.S. GOVERNMENT PRINTING OFFICE: 1981-750-002/1201
PIN:
049900-002
This fine document...
Was brought to you by me:
Liberated Manuals -- free army and government manuals
Why do I do it? I am tired of sleazy CD-ROM sellers, who take publicly
available information, slap “watermarks” and other junk on it, and sell it.
Those masters of search engine manipulation make sure that their sites that
sell free information, come up first in search engines. They did not create it...
They did not even scan it... Why should they get your money? Why are not
letting you give those free manuals to your friends?
I am setting this document FREE. This document was made by the US
Government and is NOT protected by Copyright. Feel free to share,
republish, sell and so on.
I am not asking you for donations, fees or handouts. If you can, please
provide a link to liberatedmanuals.com, so that free manuals come up first in
search engines:
<A HREF=http://www.liberatedmanuals.com/>Free Military and Government Manuals</A>
– Sincerely
Igor Chudov
http://igor.chudov.com/